Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutIFB 8916 Robson Ranch Road Project Manual - SPECSPROJECT MANUAL FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF Robson Ranch Road IFB 8916 Gerard Hudspeth Sara Hensley Mayor City Manager Seth Garcia Director, Capital Projects Prepared for The City of Denton February 2026 Effective January 2021 City of Denton Table of Contents 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 SECTION 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 00 - General Conditions 00 05 15 Addenda 00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Affidavit 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 42 43 Unit Price Bid Form 00 43 13 Bid Bond 00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Nonresident Bidder 00 45 13 Bidders Minimum Qualification Statement 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers’ Compensation Law 00 45 43 Corporate Resolution of Authorizing Signatories 00 52 43 Agreement 00 61 13 Performance Bond 00 61 14 Payment Bond 00 61 19 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 73 Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 29 76 Stored Materials and Equipment (Materials On Hand) 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 33 00 Submittals 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 74 23 Cleaning 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Amendments to TXDOT Standard Specifications ITEM 11 Project Specific Amendments TXDOT Standard Specifications ITEM 1 Abbreviations and Definitions ITEM 100 Preparing Right of Way ITEM 104 Removing Concrete ITEM 105 Removing Treated and Untreated Base and Asphalt Pavement ITEM 110 Excavation ITEM 132 Embankment ITEM 161 Compost ITEM 162 Sodding for Erosion Control ITEM 168 Vegetative Watering ITEM 204 Sprinkling ITEM 210 Rolling ITEM 260 Lime Treatment (Road-Mixed) ITEM 275 Cement Treatment (Road-Mixed) ITEM 360 Concrete Pavement ITEM 400 Excavation and Backfill for Structures ITEM 421 Hydraulic Cement Concrete ITEM 432 Riprap ITEM 438 Cleaning and Sealing Joints ITEM 440 Reinforcement for Concrete ITEM 441 Steel Structures ITEM 442 Metal for Structures ITEM 445 Galvanizing ITEM 460 Corrugated Metal Pipe ITEM 462 Concrete Box Culverts and Drains ITEM 464 Reinforced Concrete Pipe ITEM 467 Safety End Treatment ITEM 474 Linear Drains ITEM 481 Pipe for Drains ITEM 496 Removing Structures ITEM 500 Mobilization ITEM 502 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling ITEM 503 Portable Changeable Message Sign ITEM 506 Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation, and Environmental Controls ITEM 529 Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Combined Curb and Gutter ITEM 530 Intersections, Driveways, and Turnouts ITEM 531 Sidewalks ITEM 540 Metal Beam Guard Fence ITEM 542 Removing Metal Beam Guard Fence ITEM 544 Guardrail End Treatments ITEM 636 Signs ITEM 644 Small Roadside Sign Assemblies ITEM 656 Foundations for Traffic Control Devices ITEM 658 Delineator and Object Marker Assemblies ITEM 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 ITEM 672 Raised Pavement Markers ITEM 677 Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers ITEM 678 Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings Division 31 Earthwork 31 25 14 Erosion and Sediment Control Appendix GC-5.01 Availability of Lands END OF SECTION 00 05 15 ADDENDA Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 05 15 2 ADDENDA 3 4 5 6 [Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with any addenda 7 issued during bidding.] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 00 11 13 INVITATION TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 11 13 2 INVITATION TO BIDDERS 3 4 RECEIPT OF BIDS 5 Sealed bids for the construction of Robson Ranch Road will be received by the City of Denton 6 Purchasing Office as outlined at http://dentontx.ionwave.net/CurrentSourcingEvents.aspx. 7 8 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK 9 The major work will consist of the (approximate) following: One lane road widening of Robson 10 Ranch Road, approximately 14,500 SY of 9 thick concrete pavement. 11 12 DOCUMENT EXAMINATION AND PROCUREMENTS 13 The Bidding and Contract Documents may be examined or obtained on-line by visiting the City 14 of Dentons Purchasing Division website at http://dentontx.ionwave.net. The Contract Documents 15 may be downloaded, viewed, and printed by interested contractors and/or suppliers. The 16 contractor is required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and the 17 form must be submitted to the Project Manager before the contract will be presented to the 18 City Council. The form can be obtained at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm . 19 20 PREBID CONFERENCE 21 A prebid conference will be held as described in Section 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO 22 BIDDERS at the following location, date, and time outlined in the Citys solicitation website. To 23 view pre-bid invitation log-in to your account at http://dentontx.ionwave.net, and click the 24 Activities tab of this solicitation. 25 26 PREBID WALKTHROUGH 27 After the prebid conference, interested parties may reconvene at the parking lot of the strip mall 28 at 1633 Robson Ranch Road, immediately thereafter for a walkthrough of the project site. 29 30 CITY’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT BIDS 31 City reserves the right to waive irregularities and to accept or reject bids. 32 33 INQUIRIES 34 All inquiries relative to this procurement should be addressed in the Citys solicitations website. 35 To submit and view questions log-in to your account at http://dentontx.ionwave.net, and click the 36 Questions tab of this solicitation. 37 38 END OF SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 2 SECTION 00 21 13 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4 5 1. Defined Terms 6 7 1.1.Terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, which are defined in Section 00 72 8 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. 9 10 1.2.Certain additional terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS have the 11 meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 12 13 1.2.1. Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or corporation acting 14 directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a bid for performing 15 the work contemplated under the Contract Documents. 16 17 1.2.2. Nonresident Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or 18 corporation acting directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a 19 bid for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents whose 20 principal place of business is not in the State of Texas. 21 22 1.2.3. Successful Bidder: The lowest responsible and responsive Bidder to whom City 23 (on the basis of City’s evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 24 25 1.2.4. Purchasing Agent: City designated representative to assist in solicitation of bids 26 from vendors for City contracts. 27 28 2. Copies of Bidding Documents 29 30 2.1.Neither City nor Engineer shall assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations 31 resulting from the Bidders use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 32 33 2.2.City and Engineer in making Bidding Documents available do so only for the purpose of 34 obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license or grant for any 35 other use. 36 37 3. Minimum Qualifications 38 39 3.1.The following minimum requirements must be demonstrated in order for the submission 40 to be considered responsive. The form can be found in Section 00 45 13 Bidders 41 Minimum Qualification Statement. 42 43 3.1.1. Bidder shall provide documentation demonstrating three (3) years minimum 44 experience providing services similar to those indicated in Section 00 11 13 45 Invitation to Bidders. 46 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 3.1.2.Bidder shall provide documentation of three (3) references from governmental 2 entities for which Bidder has performed similar services to those indicated in 3 Section 00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders. 4 5 3.1.3.Bidder shall fill out provided safety record questionnaire. 6 7 4.Additional Prequalification of Bidders (Prime Contractors and Subcontractors) 8 NONE 9 10 4.1.Special qualifications required for this project include the following: 11 12 4.1.1. NONE 13 14 5. Examination of Bidding and Contract Documents, Other Related Data, and Site 15 16 5.1.Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall: 17 18 5.1.1. Examine and carefully study the Contract Documents and other related data 19 identified in the Bidding Documents (including "technical data" referred to in 20 Paragraph 5.2 below). No information given by City or any representative of the 21 City other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially 22 promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the City. 23 24 5.1.2. Visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local and 25 site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the 26 Work. 27 28 5.1.3. Consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, 29 progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 30 31 5.1.4. Study all: (i) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or 32 contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing 33 surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) that 34 have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing reliable "technical 35 data" and (ii) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, 36 at the Site that have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing 37 reliable "technical data." 38 39 5.1.5. Be advised that the Contract Documents on file with the City shall constitute all of 40 the information which the City will furnish. All additional information and data 41 which the City will supply after promulgation of the formal Contract Documents 42 shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract 43 Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original 44 Contract Documents. No information given by the City other than that contained in 45 the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be 46 binding upon the City. 47 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 5.1.6. Perform independent research, investigations, tests, borings, and such other means 2 as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be 3 encountered during the construction of the project. On request, City may provide 4 each Bidder access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations, 5 explorations, tests and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a 6 Bid. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former 7 conditions upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies. 8 9 5.1.7. Determine the difficulties of the Work and all attending circumstances affecting the 10 cost of doing the Work, time required for its completion, and obtain all information 11 required to make a proposal. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their 12 own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are 13 necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based. 14 It is understood that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the 15 Bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims 16 for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually 17 encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be 18 allowed. 19 20 5.1.8. Promptly notify City of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies in or 21 between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. The Contractor 22 shall not take advantage of any gross error or omission in the Contract Documents, 23 and the City shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may 24 be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. 25 26 5.2. Reference is made to Section 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 27 28 5.2.1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to 29 the site which have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents. 30 The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only. 31 Neither the City nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of 32 conditions which actually exist. 33 34 5.2.2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and 35 subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to 36 the site that have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents. 37 38 5.2.3. copies of such reports and drawings will be made available by City to any Bidder 39 on request. Those reports and drawings may not be part of the Contract 40 Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled 41 to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03. of the General Conditions has been identified 42 and established in Paragraph SC 5.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is 43 responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or 44 any other data, interpretations, opinions or information. 45 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 5.3.The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder (i) 2 that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Paragraph 5, (ii) that without 3 exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the 4 Contract Documents and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or 5 procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required 6 by the Contract Documents, (iii) that Bidder has given City written notice of all 7 conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies in the Contract Documents and the 8 written resolutions thereof by City are acceptable to Bidder, and when said conflicts, 9 etc., have not been resolved through the interpretations by City as described in 10 Paragraph 7, and (iv) that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate 11 and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the 12 Work. 13 14 5.4.The provisions of this Paragraph 5, inclusive, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated 15 biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material covered by 16 Paragraph 5.06. of the General Conditions, unless specifically identified in the Contract 17 Documents. 18 19 5.5.The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics 20 Ordinance No. 23-1165. 21 22 6. Availability of Lands for Work, Etc. 23 24 6.1.The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for 25 access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work 26 are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto 27 required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of 28 materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for 29 by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing 30 facilities are to be obtained and paid for by City unless otherwise provided in the 31 Contract Documents. 32 33 6.2.Outstanding right-of-way, easements, and/or permits to be acquired by the City are listed 34 in Paragraph SC 5.01 of the Supplementary Conditions. In the event the necessary right- 35 of-way, easements, and/or permits are not obtained, the City reserves the right to cancel 36 the award of contract at any time before the Bidder begins any construction work on the 37 project. 38 39 6.3. The Bidder shall be prepared to commence construction without all executed right-of- 40 way, easements, and/or permits, and shall submit a schedule to the City of how 41 construction will proceed in the other areas of the project that do not require permits 42 and/or easements. 43 44 7. Interpretations and Addenda 45 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 7.1.All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to 2 the City in Ionwave on or before the deadline advertised on this solicitations page at 3 http://dentontx.ionwave.net. Questions received after this day WILL NOT be 4 responded to. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by City in response 5 to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded by City as 6 having received the Bidding Documents or by responding to individual questions via this 7 solicitations page at http://dentontx.ionwave.net. Only questions answered by formal 8 written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be 9 without legal effect. 10 11 Address questions for this solicitations IONWAVE page to the Questions tab 12 (dentontx.ionwave.net). 13 14 7.2.Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by 15 City. 16 17 7.3.Addenda or clarifications may be posted via the Citys online hosting site, which can be 18 located by visiting and logging-in to the City of Dentons Purchasing solicitation website 19 at http://dentontx.ionwave.net and clicking on this solicitations link. 20 21 7.4.A pre-bid conference may be held at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or 22 INVITATION TO BIDDERS. Representatives of City will be present to discuss the 23 Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. City will 24 transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as City considers necessary 25 in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied 26 upon and will not be binding or legally effective. 27 28 8. Bid Security 29 30 8.1.Each Bid for projects over $100,000, must be accompanied by Bid Bond made payable to 31 City in an amount of five (5) percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price on form attached, 32 issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 of the General 33 Conditions. 34 35 8.2.The Bid Bond of all Bidders will be retained until the conditions of the Notice of Award 36 have been satisfied. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the complete 37 Agreement within 10 days after the Notice of Award, City may consider Bidder to be in 38 default, rescind the Notice of Award, and the Bid Bond of that Bidder will be forfeited. 39 Such forfeiture shall be City’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid Bond of all 40 other Bidders whom City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award 41 will be retained by City until final contract execution. 42 43 9.Contract Times 44 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, Milestones are to be achieved in 45 accordance with the General Requirements and the Work is to be completed and ready for 46 Final Acceptance is set forth in the Agreement or incorporated therein by reference to the 47 attached Bid Form. 48 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 10. Liquidated Damages 2 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 3 4 11. Substitute and "Or-Equal" Items 5 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the 6 Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. 7 Whenever it is indicated or specified in the Bidding Documents that a "substitute" or "or- 8 equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to 9 City, application for such acceptance will not be considered by City until after the Effective 10 Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor 11 and consideration by City is set forth in Paragraphs 7.06 and 7.07 of the General Conditions 12 and is supplemented in Section 01 25 00 of the General Requirements. 13 14 12. Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others 15 16 12.1. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person 17 or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. 18 19 13. Bid Form 20 21 13.1. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be 22 obtained from the City. 23 24 13.2. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form signed. Erasures or 25 alterations shall be initialed by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be 26 indicated for each Bid item, alternative, and unit price item listed therein. In the case 27 of optional alternatives, the words "No Bid," "No Change," or "Not Applicable" may 28 be entered. Bidder shall state the prices, in both words and numerals, for which the 29 Bidder proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish materials required. If 30 handwritten, all prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price 31 in written/typed words and the price in written/typed numerals, the price in 32 written/typed words shall govern. 33 34 13.3. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a 35 vice-president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to 36 sign, as provided herein, Section 00 45 43 Corporate Resolution of Authorized 37 Signatories. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below 38 the signature. 39 40 13.4. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a 41 partner, whose title must appear under the signature accompanied by evidence of 42 authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the 43 signature. 44 45 13.5. Bids by limited liability companies shall be executed in the name of the firm by a 46 member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of 47 the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown. 48 49 13.6. Bids by individuals shall show the Bidder’s name and official address. 50 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 13.7. Bids by joint ventures shall be executed by each joint venture in the manner indicated 2 on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown. 3 4 13.8. All names shall be typed below the signature. 5 6 13.9. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of 7 which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 8 9 13.10. Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the 10 Bid shall be shown. 11 12 13.11. Evidence of authority to conduct business as a Nonresident Bidder in the state of 13 Texas shall be provided in accordance with Section 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance 14 to State Law Non Resident Bidder. 15 16 14. Submission of Bids 17 18 14.1. Bids may be submitted electronically or by hard copy. Electronic submittals must be 19 submitted using this solicitations page in http://dentontx.ionwave.net. Electronic 20 submittals will not be accepted via email. 21 22 14.2. Hard copies of bid bonds shall be submitted for both electronic and hard copy 23 submissions. Bonds must be submitted in a sealed envelope before the due date and 24 time as indicated in Section 00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders. 25 26 14.3. Bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form, provided with the Bidding 27 Documents, at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or INVITATION 28 TO BIDDERS. 29 30 14.4. Hard copy submittals shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with 31 the Bid Number, Project Title, the name and address of Bidder, and accompanied by 32 the Bid security and other required documents, as indicated in Section 00 41 00 Bid 33 Form. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed 34 envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID 35 ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 36 37 14.5. Hard copy submissions shall also include a flash drive, containing a complete copy of 38 the response 39 40 14.6. Address Hard copy submissions as follows: 41 42 City of Denton 43 901-B Texas Street 44 Denton, TX 76209 45 Attn: Purchasing Division, IFB 8916 - Robson Ranch Road 46 47 15. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 48 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 15.1. Bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent and filed with the Purchasing Division may 2 be withdrawn prior to the time set for bid opening. A request for withdrawal must be 3 made in writing by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid 4 must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any 5 time prior to the opening of Bids. After all Bids not requested for withdrawal are 6 opened and publicly read aloud, the Bids for which a withdrawal request has been 7 properly filed may, at the option of the City, be returned unopened. 8 9 15.2. Bidders may modify their Bid by electronic communication at any time prior to the 10 time set for the closing of Bid receipt. 11 12 16. Opening of Bids 13 14 16.1. Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly at the place where Bids are to be 15 submitted. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) 16 will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 17 18 17. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance 19 20 17.1. All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the time period specified for Notice of 21 Award and execution and delivery of a complete Agreement by Successful Bidder. 22 City may, at City’s sole discretion, release any Bid and nullify the Bid security prior 23 to that date. 24 25 18. Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract 26 27 18.1. City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the rights 28 to reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids 29 and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if City believes that it would not be in the best 30 interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is 31 not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to 32 meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by City. City also reserves 33 the right to waive informalities not involving price, contract time or changes in the 34 Work with the Successful Bidder. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units 35 of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies 36 between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will 37 be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures 38 will be resolved in favor of the words. 39 40 18.1.1. The Bid is not signed by a person empowered to bind the Offeror. 41 18.1.2. The Bid is not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Bond, with Power of Attorney 42 attached. 43 18.1.3. The Bid is submitted by an Offeror that has submitted more than one Bid. 44 18.1.4. There is evidence of collusion between the Offeror submitting the Proposal and 45 one or more other Offerors. 46 18.1.5. The Bidder did not attend or have an authorized agent attend a mandatory Pre- 47 Proposal Conference, if applicable. 48 18.1.6. The Bidder is under debarment or suspension by the Owner. 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 18.1.7. The Bidder or a principal of the Bidder is currently debarred or suspended by a 2 Federal, State or local governmental agency. (Applicable for Proposal amounts 3 equal to or in excess of $25,000.00) 4 18.1.8. The Bidder is an interested party to any litigation against City, or City or Offeror 5 may have a claim against the other or be engaged in litigation, or Offeror is in 6 arrears on any existing contract or has defaulted on a previous contract. 7 18.1.9. The Bidder has performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner. 8 18.1.10.The Bidder has uncompleted work which in the judgement of the City will 9 prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. 10 18.1.11.Incompleteness or an omission, alteration of form, or addition, or the inclusion of 11 a qualification or condition not called for or authorized in the Bid Documents. 12 18.1.12.Ambiguity or lack of clarity in a Bid, in which case the City reserves the right to 13 interpret the Bid in the most advantageous manner for the City, or to reject the 14 Bid. 15 18.1.13.Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda. 16 18.1.14.Failure to identify a dollar amount for one or more unit prices required to be 17 provided in the Unit Price Proposal Form. 18 18.1.15.Failure to submit post-bid information within the allotted time(s). 19 18.1.16.Failure to timely execute and deliver the Contract to the City after award. 20 21 18.2. City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and 22 other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which 23 the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must 24 be submitted as provided in the Contract Documents or upon the request of the City. 25 City also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance 26 data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for 27 incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the 28 Notice of Award. 29 30 18.3. City may conduct such investigations as City deems necessary to assist in the 31 evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial 32 ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and 33 organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract 34 Documents to City’s satisfaction within the prescribed time. 35 36 18.4. Contractor shall perform with his own organization, work of a minimum value as 37 outlined in Section 00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form, unless otherwise 38 approved by the City. Contractor shall complete and submit Section 00 43 36 39 Proposed Subcontractors Form. 40 41 18.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to lowest responsible and 42 responsive Bidder whose evaluation by City indicates that the award will be in the 43 best interests of the City. 44 45 18.6. Additional approvals could be required if outside funding is used. 46 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 18.7. Pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2252.001, the City will not award 2 contract to a Nonresident Bidder unless the Nonresident Bidders bid is lower than 3 the lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas Bidder by the same amount that a 4 Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a Nonresident Bidder to obtain a 5 comparable contract in the state in which the nonresidents principal place of 6 business is located. 7 8 18.8. A contract is not awarded until formal City Council authorization. If the Contract is 9 to be awarded, City will award the Contract within 120 days after the day of the Bid 10 opening unless extended in writing. No other act of City or others will constitute 11 acceptance of a Bid. Upon the contractor award a Notice of Award will be issued by 12 the City. 13 14 18.9. Failure or refusal to comply with the requirements may result in rejection of Bid. 15 16 18.10. Contractor is required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and 17 the form must be submitted to the City Project Manager before the contract will be 18 presented to the City Council. The form can be obtained at 19 https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm. 20 21 19. Signing of Agreement 22 23 19.1. When City issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied 24 by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement. Within 14 days 25 thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the 26 Agreement to City with the required Bonds, Certificates of Insurance, and all other 27 required documentation. City shall thereafter deliver one fully signed counterpart to 28 Contractor. 29 30 END OF SECTION 00 35 13 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 35 13 2 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT 3 END OF SECTION CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE - FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code, by a vendor who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local government entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1), Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a misdemeanor. 1 Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) 3 Name of local government officer about whom the information in this section is being disclosed. Name of Officer This section, (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D), must be completed for each officer with whom the vendor has an employment or other business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor? Yes No B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at the direction of the local government officer named in this section AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of one percent or more? Yes No D. Describe each employment or business and family relationship with the local government officer named in this section. 4 I have no Conflict of Interest to disclose. 5 Signature of vendor doing business with the governmental entity Date 00 41 00 BID FORM Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 SECTION 00 41 00 2 BID FORM 3 TO: City of Denton 4 c/o: Purchasing Division 5 901-B Texas Street 6 Denton, Texas 76209 7 8 FOR: IFB 8916 Robson Ranch Road 9 10 1 Enter Into Agreement 11 12 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement 13 with City in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform and furnish all Work as 14 specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the Contract Time 15 indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract 16 Documents. 17 18 2 BIDDER Acknowledgements and Certification 19 20 2.1 In submitting this Bid, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the INVITATION 21 TO BIDDERS and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, including without limitation those 22 dealing with the disposition of Bid Bond. 23 2.2 Bidder is aware of all costs to provide the required insurance, will do so pending contract 24 award, and will provide a valid insurance certificate meeting all requirements within 14 25 days of notification of award. 26 2.3 Bidder certifies that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any 27 undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive 28 agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation. 29 2.4 Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false 30 or sham Bid. 31 2.5 Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding. 32 2.6 Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing 33 for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph: 34 a. "corrupt practice" means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything 35 of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process. 36 37 b. "fraudulent practice" means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to 38 influence the bidding process to the detriment of City (b) to establish Bid prices 39 at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive City of the benefits of free 40 and open competition. 41 42 c. "collusive practice" means a scheme or arrangement between two or more 43 Bidders, with or without the knowledge of City, a purpose of which is to 44 establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 45 46 d. "coercive practice" means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, 47 persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or 48 affect the execution of the Contract. 49 00 41 00 BID FORM Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 2.7 The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics 2 Ordinance No. 23-1165. 3 4 3 Time of Completion 5 6 3.1 The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 180 Days after the date when the 7 Contract Time commences to run, which is the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed, plus 8 any extension thereof allowed in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions. 9 3.2 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to Liquidated Damages in the event of 10 failure to obtain Milestones (if applicable) and Final Acceptance within the times specified 11 in the Agreement. 12 13 4 Attached to this Bid 14 15 The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Bid: 16 a. Section 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Affidavit 17 b. Section 00 41 00 This Bid Form 18 c. Section 00 42 43 Unit Price Proposal Form Electronic Copy (either included 19 in the Bid, or submitted via Ionwave) 20 d. Section 00 42 13 Required Bid Bond, issued by a surety meeting the requirements 21 of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions 22 e. Section 00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form 23 f. Section 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder 24 g. Section 00 45 13 Bidders Minimum Qualification Statement 25 h. Section 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers Compensation Law 26 i. Section 00 45 43 Corporate Resolution of Authorized Signatories 27 j. Any additional documents that may be required by Section 00 21 13 Instructions to 28 Bidders 29 00 41 00 BID FORM Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised January 31, 2024 Effective January 31, 2024 1 5 Total Bid Amount 2 3 5.1 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the 4 following bid amount. In the space provided below, please enter the total bid amount for 5 this project. Only this figure will be read publicly by the City at the bid opening. 6 5.2 It is understood and agreed by the Bidder in signing this proposal that the total bid amount 7 entered below is subject to verification and/or modification by multiplying the unit bid 8 prices for each pay item by the respective estimated quantities shown in this proposal and 9 then totaling all of the extended amounts. 10 11 Total Bid Amount: $____________________________ 12 13 6 Bid Submittal 14 15 This Bid is submitted on _____________________________, 20_____ by the entity named 16 below. 17 18 19 Respectfully submitted, 20 21 By: ______________________________ 22 (Signature) 23 24 _________________________________ 25 (Printed Name) 26 27 Title: _____________________________ 28 29 Company: _________________________ 30 31 Address: __________________________ 32 ___________________________ 33 State of Incorporation: _______________ 34 Email: ____________________________ 35 Phone: ____________________________ 36 37 END OF SECTION Receipt is acknowledged of the following Addenda: Initial Addenda No. 1: Addenda No. 2: Addenda No. 3: Addenda No. 4: Addenda No. 5: To:From:IFB:8916ENG PMO:250009-1Item No.Spec. Section No.DescriptionUOM BID QTY Unit Price Extended Price 101 57 13SWPPPLS12 31 25 14SWPPP Device InstallationLS1331 25 14SWPPP Device RemovalLS14100Preparing Right of WaySTA49 5 104Remove Concrete PavementSY1,3266 104Remove Concrete FlumeCY57104Remove Concrete Sidewalk SY108 105 Remove Base and Asphalt Pavement (0"-12")SY609 110 ExcavationCY 16,696 10 132EmbankmentCY 8,510 11 161 Compost Manufactured Topsoil (4")SY20,094 12 162 Block SodSY 20,094 13 168Vegetative WateringTGL 723 14 260Lime (Slurry)TON299 15 260 Lime Treatment (6")SY15,355 16 360 Concrete Pavement (CRCP - 9")SY14,340 17 360 Concrete Pavement (CRCP - 9" HES)SY203 18 432 Riprap (4")CY27 19 462 Concrete Box Culvert (4' x 2')LF680 20 464 RCP Class III (24")LF100 21 467 Safety End Treatment Type 1 (S=4', Hw=3')EA18 22 467 Safety End Treatment Type 2 (24")EA223 474 Slotted Drain (12")LF80 24 481 PVC Pipe (6")LF160 25 496 Remove Existing Slotted Pipe SystemEA1 26 496Remove Driveway CulvertEA227 496Remove Safety End TreatmentEA228 496 Remove BollardEA3 29 500MobilizationLS1 30 502 Barricades, Signs and Traffic HandlingMO9 31 503Portable Changeable Message SignEA232 529Concrete Curb (Type II)LF310 33 530 Concrete Driveway (6")SY1,497 34 531 Curb Ramps (Type 7)EA235 540 Metal W-Beam Guard FenceLF 425 36 540Downstream Anchor TerminalEA137 542 Remove Metal Beam Guard FenceLF 140 38 544 Guardrail End Treatment (Install)EA139 544 Guardrail End Treatment (Remove)EA240 644 Install Small Sign Assemblies 10BWG(1) SA(P)EA16 41 644 Install Small Sign Assemblies 10BWG(1) SA(T)EA142 644Remove Small Sign AssembliesEA343 658 Install Delineator Assemblies (D-SW)SZ 1(BRF)GF1(BI)EA6PROJ.:901-B Texas StreetBIDDERS APPLICATION - UNIT PRICE BID STREET ADDRESS CITY, STATE CONTACTPHONEEMAILSECTION 00 42 43 - UNIT PRICE BID FORM Denton, TX 76209 Purchasing Dept.Robson Ranch RoadCity of Denton - Capital ProjectsCOMPANY NAME Item No.Spec. Section No. Description UOM BID QTY Unit Price Extended Price 44658Install Delineator Assemblies (D-SY)SZ 1(YFLX)SRF(BI)EA6245658Install Object Marker Assembly OM-2Z(WFLX)GND(BI)EA2046666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (6" Broken White)LF1,77047666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (6" Solid White)LF7,41048666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (6" Solid Yellow)LF18,21549666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (8" Dotted White)LF45250 666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (8" Solid White)LF4,43551 666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (24" Solid White)LF52052666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (24" Solid Yellow)LF74053666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (Arrow White)EA3054666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (Dbl Arrow White)EA155 666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 1 (Word White)EA3056 666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 2 (Curb White)LF2057 666Reflective Pavement Markings TY 2 (Curb Yellow)LF2058 666Pavement Sealer (6")LF27,39559 666Pavement Sealer (8")LF4,88760 666Pavement Sealer (24")LF1,26061 666Pavement Sealer (Arrow)EA3062 666Pavement Sealer (Word)EA3063 666Pavement Sealer (Dbl Arrow)EA164 672Reflective Pavement Marker TY I-CEA26965 672Reflective Pavement Marker TY II-A-AEA89266 677Remove Existing Pavement Markings/Markers (4")LF17,99267 677Remove Existing Pavement Markings/Markers (8")LF2,17568 677Remove Existing Pavement Markings/Markers (24")LF15569 677Remove Existing Pavement Markings/Markers (Arrow)EA770 677Remove Existing Pavement Markings/Markers (Word)EA771 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (6")LF27,39572 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (8")LF4,88773 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (24")LF1,26074 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (Arrow)EA3075 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (Word)EA3076678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (Dbl Arrow)EA177 678Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings (RPM)EA1,161-$ Robson Ranch RoadTOTAL PROJECT BID AMOUNT:COMPANY NAME 00 43 13 BID BOND Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 43 13 2 BID BOND 3 4 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 5 That we, (Bidder Name)___________________________________________________, 6 known as Principal herein, and (Surety Name)_____________________________________, a 7 corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as Surety herein, 8 are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a Texas home-rule municipal corporation 9 created pursuant to the laws of Texas, known as City herein, in the penal sum of five percent 10 (5%) of Bidders maximum bid price, in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, 11 Denton County, Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind 12 ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, 13 firmly by these presents. 14 WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a proposal to perform work for the following 15 project designated as 16 IFB 8916 Robson Ranch Road 17 18 NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the City shall 19 award the Contract for the foregoing project to the Principal, and the Principal shall satisfy all 20 requirements and conditions required for the execution of the Contract and shall enter into the 21 Contract in writing with the City in accordance with the terms of such same, then this obligation 22 shall be and become null and void. If, however, the Principal fails to execute such Contract in 23 accordance with the terms of same or fails to satisfy all requirements and conditions required for 24 the execution of the Contract, this bond shall become the property of the City, without recourse of 25 the Principal and/or Surety, not to exceed the penalty hereof, and shall be used to compensate 26 City for the difference between Principals total bid amount and the next selected bidders total 27 bid amount. 28 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 29 the state district court of Denton County, Texas. 00 43 13 BID BOND Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED 2 this instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the _______ day of 3 ____________________, 20___. 4 5 6 By: ___________________________________________________________________________ 7 (Principal Name) 8 9 ______________________________________________________________________________ 10 (Signature and Title of Principal) 11 12 *By: __________________________________________________________________________ 13 (Surety Name) 14 15 ______________________________________________________________________________ 16 (Signature of Attorney-in-Fact) 17 18 *Attach Power of Attorney (Surety) for Attorney-in-Fact 19 END OF SECTION Impressed Surety Seal Only 00 43 36 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 43 36 2 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM 3 4 Each Bidder for a City procurement is required to complete the information below by identifying 5 the proposed subcontractors whom they intend to utilize and the approximate percentage of the 6 overall contract that will be allocated to each entity. Bidder is reminded that a minimum of 35% 7 of the Contract must be performed by Bidders company. 8 Company Name Type of Work to be Performed Overall Contract Percentage (%) General Contractor: Subcontractors: 9 10 11 The undersigned hereby certifies that the subcontractors described in the table above will 12 be utilized for this project at the approximate percentage levels indicated above. 13 14 BIDDER: 15 16 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 17 Company (Please Print) 18 19 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 20 Address 21 22 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 23 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 24 25 Date: __________________________________ 26 27 END OF SECTION 00 43 37 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 43 37 2 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW NON- RESIDENT BIDDER 3 4 Texas Government Code Chapter 2252 was adopted for the award of contracts to nonresident 5 bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, nonresident 6 bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside 7 the State of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at 8 an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident 9 bidder would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder in order to obtain a comparable 10 contract in the State which the nonresidents principal place of business is located. 11 The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for your 12 bid to meet specifications. The failure of nonresident bidders to do so will automatically 13 disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B. 14 A. Nonresident bidders in the State of ______________________, our principal place of 15 business, are required to be ________________ percent lower than resident bidders by State 16 Law. A copy of the statute is attached. 17 Nonresident bidders in the State of _____________________, our principal place of business, 18 are not required to underbid resident bidders. 19 B. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is 20 in the State of Texas. 21 22 BIDDER: 23 24 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 25 Company (Please Print) 26 27 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 28 Address 29 30 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 31 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 32 33 Date: __________________________________ 34 35 END OF SECTION 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 1 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 45 13 2 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 3 4 List three (3) Government references, other than the City of Denton, who can verify the quality of service your 5 company provides. The City prefers customers of similar size and scope of work to this solicitation. 6 REFERENCE ONE 7 8 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 9 LOCATION: 10 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 11 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 12 SCOPE OF WORK: 13 CONTRACT PERIOD: 14 REFERENCE TWO 15 16 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 17 LOCATION: 18 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 19 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 20 SCOPE OF WORK: 21 CONTRACT PERIOD: 22 REFERENCE THREE 23 24 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 25 LOCATION: 26 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 27 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 28 SCOPE OF WORK: 29 CONTRACT PERIOD: 30 31 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 2 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 3 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 2 3 Detail three (3) of the most recent projects Bidders firm has completed providing services 4 similar to this project: 5 6 Project #1 7 Name of Project: 8 9 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 10 11 Original Contract Amount: 12 13 Final Contract Amount: 14 15 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 16 17 Start Date for Project: 18 19 Final Completion Date for Project: 20 21 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 22 23 24 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, successes, or 25 potential problems and solutions encountered. 26 27 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 28 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 29 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 30 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 31 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 32 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 33 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 34 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 35 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 36 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 37 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 38 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 4 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 2 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 3 4 5 Project #2 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, successes, or 24 potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 27 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 28 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 29 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 30 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 31 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 32 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 33 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 34 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 35 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 36 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 37 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 38 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 5 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 2 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 3 4 5 Project #3 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, successes, or 24 potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 27 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 28 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 29 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 30 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 31 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 32 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 33 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 34 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 35 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 36 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 37 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 38 ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 6 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 2 3 The City of Denton desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government 4 Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to award of City contracts. Pursuant to 5 Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, the City of Denton has adopted the following written 6 definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a respondent prior to awarding City 7 contracts. 8 9 The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a respondent for this consideration shall 10 be: 11 12 The City of Denton shall consider the safety record of the respondent in determining the 13 responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the 14 citizens of the City of Denton, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, 15 supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: 16 A. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review 17 Commission (OSHRC), against the respondent for violations of OSHA regulations within the 18 past three (3) years. 19 B. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for 20 violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are 21 not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and 22 Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas 23 Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation 24 Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of Health (TDH), 25 the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), 26 agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker 27 safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United 28 States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations 29 of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, 30 indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final 31 judgments. 32 C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm 33 or death. 34 D. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the 35 responsibility of the respondent and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required 36 by the solicitation documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees 37 of respondent and the citizens of the City of Denton. 38 39 In order to obtain proper information from respondents so that City of Denton may consider the safety 40 records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Denton requires that 41 respondents answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their submissions: 42 43 44 45 46 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 7 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 QUESTION ONE 2 3 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the respondent, or 4 anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of 5 OSHA within the past three (3) years? 6 7 YES NO 8 9 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number one above, the respondent must provide to City 10 of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: 11 12 Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if 13 any, and penalty assessed. 14 15 QUESTION TWO 16 17 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the respondent, or 18 anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of 19 environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations 20 include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or 21 registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative 22 orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. 23 24 YES NO 25 26 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number two above, the respondent must provide to City 27 of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: 28 29 Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of 30 offense, if any, and penalty assessed. 31 32 QUESTION THREE 33 34 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by respondent, or 35 anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past 36 ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? 37 38 YES NO 39 40 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number three above, the respondent must provide to City 41 of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: 42 Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and 43 penalty assessed. 44 45 Bidder must provide records, with its submission, supporting the Safety Record Rates for the past 5 years 46 listed below: 47 00 45 13 BIDDER’S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 8 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) 2 2025: _____________ 3 2024: _____________ 4 2023: _____________ 5 2022: _____________ 6 2021: _____________ 7 Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) 8 2025: _____________ 9 2024: _____________ 10 2023: _____________ 11 2022: _____________ 12 2021: _____________ 13 14 15 END OF SECTION 00 45 26 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER’S COMPENSATION LAW Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 45 26 2 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER’S COMPENSATION LAW 3 4 Pursuant to Texas Labor Code Section 406.096(a), as amended, Contractor certifies that it 5 provides workers compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on Robson 6 Ranch Road project. Contractor further certifies that, pursuant to Texas Labor Code, Section 7 406.096(b), as amended, it will provide to City its subcontractors certificates of compliance with 8 workers compensation coverage. 9 10 CONTRACTOR: 11 12 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 13 Company (Please Print) 14 15 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 16 Address 17 18 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 19 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 20 21 22 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 23 24 COUNTY OF DENTON § 25 26 BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared 27 ___________________________________, known to me to be the person whose name is 28 subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same as 29 the act and deed of ____________________________________ for the purposes and 30 consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. 31 32 GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this ____________day of 33 _______________________, 20__. 34 35 36 __________________________________ 37 Notary Public in and for the State of Texas 38 39 END OF SECTION 40 00 45 43 CORPORATE RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING SIGNATORIES Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 45 43 2 CORPORATE RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING SIGNATORIES 3 4 5 6 [Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with Bidders 7 corporate resolution authorizing signatories.] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 1 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 SECTION 00 52 43 AGREEMENT UNIT PRICE BID THIS AGREEMENT, authorized on ______________is made by and between the City of Denton, a Texas home-rule municipal corporation, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager, (City), and ______________________________________________________________, authorized to do business in Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized representative, (Contractor). City and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Project identified herein. Article 2. PROJECT The project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: Robson Ranch Road IFB 8916 / 250009-1 Article 3. CONTRACT PRICE City agrees to pay Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount, in current funds, of __________________________________Dollars ($___________________). At the sole option of the City, five (5) percent contingency in the amount of __________________________________Dollars ($___________________) may be used for a total not-to-exceed amount of __________________________________Dollars ($___________________). Article 4. CONTRACT TIME 26 4.1 Time is of the essence. 27 All time limits for Milestones, if any, and Final Acceptance as stated in the Contract 28 Documents are of the essence to this Contract. 29 4.2 Final Acceptance. 30 31 32 The Work will be completed for Final Acceptance within 180 Days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run, which is the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed, plus any extension thereof allowed in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions.33 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 2 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 4.4 Liquidated Damages: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A.Contractor recognizes that time is of the essence to achieve Milestones and Final Acceptance of the Work, and City will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed within the times specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor also recognizes the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by the City if the Work related to the Milestones or Final Acceptance is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Contractor agrees that liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1.Final Acceptance: If Contractor neglects, refuse, or fails to complete the Work within the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in Paragraph 4.2, for completion and readiness for Final Payment, Contractor shall pay City Six hundred and twenty-five Dollars ($625.00) for each day that expires after such time, until the date determined by City as stated in the City-issued Letter of Final Acceptance. 16 Article 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 17 5.1 CONTENTS: 18 A.The Contract comprises the entire agreement between City and Contractor concerning the 19 Work and consists of this Agreement and the items set forth below. The Contract 20 Documents consist of all items below other than this Agreement. 21 1. Attachments to this Agreement: 22 a. Proposal Form 23 1) Bid Form 24 2) Unit Price Proposal Form 25 3) Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Offeror 26 4) State and Federal documents (project specific) 27 b. Current Prevailing Wage Rate Table 28 c. Workers Compensation Affidavit 29 d. General Conditions. 30 e. Supplementary Conditions. 31 2. The following located in File 8916 at: 32 https://lfpubweb.cityofdenton.com/MaterialsManagement/Browse.aspx?id=19& 33 dbid=0&repo=MaterialsManagement&cr=1 34 a. Specifications described in the Table of Contents of the Projects Contrac t 35 Documents. 36 b.Drawings. 37 c. Addenda. 38 d. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. 39 3. The following which shall be issued after the Effective Date and delivered to the City 40 within ten (10) days of the Effective Date and before beginning Work: 41 a. Payment Bond 42 b. Performance Bond 43 c. Maintenance Bond 44 d. Power of Attorney for the Bonds 45 e. Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties (email to purchasing) 46 f. Insurance Certificate 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 3 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 4. Specifications specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or, 2 if not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents 3 of the Projects Contract Docume nts. 4 5. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the 5 Agreement and, if issued, become an incorporated part of the Contract Documents: 6 a. Notice to Proceed. 7 b. Field Orders. 8 c. Change Orders. 9 d. Letter of Final Acceptance. 10 Article 6. INDEMNIFICATION 11 6.1 CONTRACTOR COVENANTS AND AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, HOLD 12 HARMLESS AND DEFEND, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, THE CITY, ITS OFFICERS, 13 ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, AND EMPLOYEES, FROM AND 14 AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, 15 ARISING OUT OF, OR ALLEGED TO ARISE OUT OF, RELATED TO OR IN 16 CONNECTION WITH THE WORK AND SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE 17 CONTRACTOR, ITS OFFICERS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, 18 LICENSEES OR INVITEES UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THIS 19 INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE 20 AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR 21 SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN 22 PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. THIS 23 INDEMNITY PROVISION IS INTENDED TO INCLUDE, WITHOUT 24 LIMITATION, INDEMNITY FOR ANY AND ALL COSTS, EXPENSES AND 25 LEGAL FEES INCURRED BY THE CITY IN DEFENDING AGAINST SUCH 26 CLAIMS AND CAUSES OF ACTIONS. 27 28 6.2 CONTRACTOR COVENANTS AND AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, HOLD 29 HARMLESS AND DEFEND, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, THE CITY, ITS OFFICERS, 30 ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, AND EMPLOYEES, FROM AND 31 AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR, LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, OR 32 DESTRUCTION OF, PROPERTY OF THE CITY OR OF A THIRD PARTY, 33 ARISING OUT OF, OR ALLEGED TO ARISE OUT OF, RELATED TO OR IN 34 CONNECTION WITH THE WORK AND SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE 35 CONTRACTOR, ITS OFFICERS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, 36 LICENSEES OR INVITEES UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THIS 37 INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE 38 AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR 39 SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN 40 PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. THIS 41 INDEMNITY PROVISION IS INTENDED TO INCLUDE, WITHOUT 42 LIMITATION, INDEMNITY FOR ANY AND ALL COSTS, EXPENSES AND 43 LEGAL FEES INCURRED BY THE CITY IN DEFENDING AGAINST SUCH 44 CLAIMS AND CAUSES OF ACTIONS. 45 Article 7. MISCELLANEOUS 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 4 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 7.1 Capitalized Terms. 2 Unless otherwise provided herein, capitalized terms used in this Agreement which are 3 defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General 4 Conditions. 5 7.2 Assignment of Contract. 6 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents may not be assigned by the 7 Contractor without the advance express written consent of the City. 8 7.3 Successors and Assigns. 9 City and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal 10 representatives to the other party hereto, in respect to all covenants, agreements and 11 obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 12 7.4 Severability. 13 Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be unconstitutional, void or 14 unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction shall be deemed stricken, and all 15 remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon City and Contractor. 16 7.5 Venue and Waiver of Sovereign Immunity. 17 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents is performable in the State of 18 Texas. Venue shall be in the state district courts of Denton County, Texas. The Citys 19 sovereign immunity is waived only to the extent set forth and in accordance with the 20 provisions of Subchapter I, Chapter 271 of the Texas Local Government Code or as otherwise 21 specifically waived by law. The City does not waive its sovereign immunity to suit in federal 22 court. 23 7.6 Authority to Sign. 24 Contractor hereby certifies that the person signing the Agreement on its behalf is the duly 25 authorized signatory of the Contractor. 26 7.7 Prohibition on Contracts with Companies Boycotting Israel. 27 Contractor acknowledges that in accordance with Chapter 2270 of the Texas Government 28 Code, the City is prohibited from entering into a contract with a company for goods or 29 services unless the contract contains a written verification from the company that it: (1) does 30 not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. The terms 31 boycott Israel and company shall have the meanings ascribed to those terms in Section 32 808.001 of the Texas Government Code. By signing this contract, Contractor certifies that 33 Contractors signature provides written verification to the City that Contractor: (1) does not 34 boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. 35 7.8 Prohibition on Contracts with Companies Boycotting Certain Energy Companies 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 5 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 Contractor acknowledges that in accordance with Chapter 2274 of the Texas Government 2 Code, City is prohibited from entering into a contract with a company for goods or services 3 unless the contract contains written verification from the company that it (1) does not boycott 4 energy companies; and (2) will not boycott energy companies during the term of the contract. 5 The terms boycott energy company and company shall have the meanings ascribed to 6 those terms in Section 809.001 of the Texas Government Code. By signing this agreement, 7 Contractor certifies that Contractors signature provides written verification to the City that 8 Contractor: (1) does not boycott energy companies; and (2) will not boycott energy 9 companies during the term of the agreement. Failure to meet or maintain the requirements 10 under this provision will be considered a material breach. 11 7.9 Prohibition on Contracts with Companies Boycotting Certain Firearm Entities and Firearm 12 Trade Associations. 13 Contractor acknowledges that in accordance with Chapter 2274 of the Texas Government 14 Code, City is prohibited from entering into a contract with a company for goods or services 15 unless the contract contains written verification from the company that it (1) does not have a 16 practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm 17 trade association; and (2) will not discriminate during the term of the contract against a 18 firearm entity or firearm trade association. The terms discriminate against a firearm entity 19 or firearm trade association, firearm entity and firearm trade association shall have the 20 meanings ascribed to those terms in Chapter 2274 of the Texas Government Code. By 21 signing this agreement, Contractor certifies that Contractors signature provides written 22 verification to the City that Contractor: (1) does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or 23 directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; and (2) 24 will not discriminate during the term of the contract against a firearm entity or firearm 25 trade association. Failure to meet or maintain the requirements under this provision will be 26 considered a material breach. 27 7.10 Prohibition on Contracts with Companies Doing Business with Iran, Sudan, or a Foreign 28 Terrorist Organization 29 Sections 2252 and 2270 of the Texas Government Code restricts CITY from contracting with 30 companies that do business with Iran, Sudan, or a foreign terrorist organization. By signing 31 this agreement, Contractor certifies that Contractors signature provides written 32 verification to the City that Contractor, pursuant to Chapters 2252 and 2270, is not 33 ineligible to enter into this agreement and will not become ineligible to receive payments 34 under this agreement by doing business with Iran, Sudan, or a foreign terrorist 35 organization. Failure to meet or maintain the requirements under this provision will be 36 considered a material breach. 37 7.11 Termination Right for Contracts with Companies Doing Business with Certain Foreign- 38 Owned Companies 39 The City of Denton may terminate this Contract immediately without any further liability if 40 the City of Denton determines, in its sole judgment, that this Contract meets the requirements 41 under Chapter 2274, and Contractor is, or will be in the future, (i) owned by or the majority 42 of stock or other ownership interest of the company is held or controlled by individuals who 43 are citizens of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or other designated country (ii) directly 44 controlled by the Government of China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or other designated 45 country, or (iii) is headquartered in China, Iran, North Korea, Russia, or other designated 46 country. 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 6 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 7.12 Immigration Nationality Act. 2 Contractor shall verify the identity and employment eligibility of its employees who perform 3 work under this Agreement, including completing the Employment Eligibility Verification 4 Form (I-9). Upon request by City, Contractor shall provide City with copies of all I-9 forms 5 and supporting eligibility documentation for each employee who performs work under this 6 Agreement. Contractor shall adhere to all Federal and State laws as well as establish 7 appropriate procedures and controls so that no services will be performed by any Contractor 8 employee who is not legally eligible to perform such services. CONTRACTOR SHALL 9 INDEMNIFY CITY AND HOLD CITY HARMLESS FROM ANY PENALTIES, 10 LIABILITIES, OR LOSSES DUE TO VIOLATIONS OF THIS PARAGRAPH BY 11 CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, 12 AGENTS, OR LICENSEES. City, upon written notice to Contractor, shall have the right 13 to immediately terminate this Agreement for violations of this provision by Contractor. 14 7.13 No Third-Party Beneficiaries. 15 This Agreement gives no rights or benefits to anyone other than the City and the Contractor 16 and there are no third-party beneficiaries. 17 7.14 No Cause of Action Against Engineer. 18 Contractor, its subcontractors and equipment and materials suppliers on the Project or their 19 sureties, shall maintain no direct action against the Engineer, its officers, employees, and 20 subcontractors, for any claim arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the engineering 21 services performed. Only the City will be the beneficiary of any undertaking by the Engineer. 22 The presence or duties of the Engineer’s personnel at a construction site, whether as on-site 23 representatives or otherwise, do not make the Engineer or its personnel in any way 24 responsible to Contractor or any other entity for those duties that belong to the City, and do 25 not relieve Contractor or any other entity of its obligations, duties, and responsibilities, 26 including, but not limited to, all construction methods, means, techniques, sequences, and 27 procedures necessary for performing, coordinating and completing all portions of the Work 28 in accordance with the Contract Documents and any health or safety precautions required by 29 such Work. The Engineer and its personnel have no authority to exercise any control over 30 any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work 31 or any health or safety precautions. 32 33 SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW 34 00 52 43 AGREEMENT Page 7 of 7 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 21, 2021 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, City and Contractor have each executed this Agreement to be effective 2 as of the date subscribed by the Citys City Manager or his designee (Effective Date). 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ATTEST: 40 LAUREN THODEN, CITY SECRETARY 41 42 43 _______________________________________ 44 45 46 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: 47 MACK REINWAND, CITY ATTORNEY 48 49 50 _______________________________________ CITY OF DENTON BY: ___________________________________ TITLE: _________________________________ DATE: _________________________________ CONTRACTOR [CONTRACTORS CORPORATE NAME HERE] BY: ___________________________________ AUTHORIZED AGENT _______________________________________ NAME _______________________________________ TITLE _______________________________________ PHONE NUMBER _______________________________________ EMAIL ADDRESS 51 _______________________________________ 52 TEXAS ETHICS COMMISSION 53 1295 CERTIFICATE NUMBER THIS AGREEMENT HAS BEEN BOTH REVIEWED AND APPROVED as to financial and operational obligations and business terms. _______________ ________________ SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME __________________________________ TITLE __________________________________ DEPARTMENT 00 61 13 - 1 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 SECTION 00 61 13 2 PERFORMANCE BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF DENTON § 7 That we, _______________________________________________, known as Principal 8 herein and ____________________________________________, a corporate surety(sureties, if 9 more than one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as Surety herein 10 (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a municipal 11 corporation created pursuant to the laws of Texas, known as City herein, in the penal sum of, 12 ___________________________________________ Dollars ($_______________________), 13 lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton County, Texas for the payment 14 of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, 15 successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 16 WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City 17 awarded the _____ day of ________________, 20____, which Contract is hereby referred to and 18 made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all materials, equipment 19 labor and other accessories defined by law, in the prosecution of the Work, including any Change 20 Orders, as provided for in said Contract designated as Robson Ranch Road. 21 NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal 22 shall faithfully perform it obligations under the Contract and shall in all respects duly and 23 faithfully perform the Work, including Change Orders, under the Contract, according to the plans, 24 specifications, and contract documents therein referred to, and as well during any period of 25 extension of the Contract that may be granted on the part of the City, then this obligation shall be 26 and become null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 27 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 28 Denton County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, 29 Sherman Division. 30 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the 31 Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 32 accordance with the provisions of said statue. 00 61 13 - 2 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED 2 this instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the ______day of ____________, 3 20 . 4 PRINCIPAL: 5 ____________________________________ 6 ____________________________________ 7 8 BY: ________________________________ 9 Signature 10 ATTEST: 11 12 ______________________________ ____________________________________ 13 (Principal) Secretary Name and Title 14 15 Address: ____________________________ 16 ____________________________ 17 ____________________________ 18 _____________________________ 19 Witness as to Principal 20 SURETY: 21 ____________________________________ 22 ____________________________________ 23 24 BY: ________________________________ 25 Signature 26 27 ____________________________________ 28 Name and Title 29 30 Address: ____________________________ 31 ____________________________ 32 ____________________________ 33 _____________________________ 34 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: ___________________ 35 36 37 38 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract 39 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 40 Suretys physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 41 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 42 00 61 14 - 1 PAYMENT BOND Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 SECTION 00 61 14 2 PAYMENT BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF DENTON § 7 That we, _____________________________________________________, known as 8 Principal herein, and _________________________________________________________, a 9 corporate surety (sureties), duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as 10 Surety herein (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a 11 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as City herein, 12 in the penal sum of___________________________________________ Dollars 13 ($_______________________), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton 14 County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our 15 heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these 16 presents: 17 WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with City, awarded the 18 _____ day of ______________________, 20_____, which Contract is hereby referred to and 19 made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all materials, equipment, 20 labor and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the Work as provided for in 21 said Contract and designated as Robson Ranch Road. 22 NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if 23 Principal shall pay all monies owing to any (and all) payment bond beneficiary (as defined in 24 Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended) in the prosecution of the Work under 25 the Contract, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in full 26 force and effect. 27 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the 28 Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 29 accordance with the provisions of said statute. 00 61 14 - 2 PAYMENT BOND Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED 2 this instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the ______ day of 3 ___________________, 20_____. 4 PRINCIPAL: _________________________________ _________________________________ ATTEST:BY: _____________________________ Signature ___________________________________ _____________________________ (Principal) Secretary Name and Title Address: _________________________ _________________________ ___________________________________ _________________________ Witness as to Principal SURETY: _________________________________ _________________________________ ATTEST:BY: _____________________________ Signature __________________________________ _____________________________ (Surety) Secretary Name and Title Address: _________________________ _________________________ __________________________________ _________________________ Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: ________________ 5 6 Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety, there must be on file a certified extract from the 7 bylaws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If Suretys physical 8 address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 9 10 THE DATE OF THE BOND SHALL NOT BE PRIOR 11 TO THE DATE THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED. 12 END OF SECTION 13 00 61 19 - 1 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 SECTION 00 61 19 2 MAINTENANCE BOND 3 4 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 5 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 6 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 7 8 That we_____________________________________________________, known as 9 Principal herein and ____________________________________________, a corporate surety 10 (sureties, if more than one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as 11 Surety herein (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a 12 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as City herein, 13 in the sum of_________________________________________ Dollars 14 ($_______________________), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton 15 County, Texas, for payment of which sum well and truly be made unto the City and its 16 successors, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly 17 and severally, firmly by these presents. 18 19 WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City awarded 20 the_____ day of , 20 , which Contract is hereby 21 referred to and a made part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all 22 materials, equipment labor and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the 23 Work, including any Work resulting from a duly authorized Change Order (collectively herein, 24 the Work) as provided for in said contract and designated as Robson Ranch Road; and 25 26 WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the Work in 27 accordance with the plans, specifications and Contract Documents that the Work is and will 28 remain free from defects in materials or workmanship for and during the period of two (2) years 29 after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City (Maintenance Period); and 30 31 WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part 32 upon receiving notice from the City of the need therefor at any time within the Maintenance 33 Period. 34 00 61 19 - 2 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if Principal shall 2 remedy any defective Work, for which timely notice was provided by City, to a completion 3 satisfactory to the City, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise to remain in 4 full force and effect. 5 6 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, if Principal shall fail so to repair or reconstruct any timely 7 noticed defective Work, it is agreed that the City may cause any and all such defective Work to 8 be repaired and/or reconstructed with all associated costs thereof being borne by the Principal and 9 the Surety under this Maintenance bond; and 10 11 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 12 Denton County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, 13 Sherman Division; and 14 15 PROVIDED FURTHER, that this obligation shall be continuous in nature and 16 successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches. 17 18 00 61 19 - 3 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED this 2 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the ____ day of __________________, 3 20 _____. 4 5 PRINCIPAL: 6 ____________________________________ 7 ____________________________________ 8 9 BY: ________________________________ 10 Signature 11 ATTEST: 12 13 ______________________________ ____________________________________ 14 (Principal) Secretary Name and Title 15 16 Address: ____________________________ 17 ____________________________ 18 ____________________________ 19 _____________________________ 20 Witness as to Principal 21 SURETY: 22 ____________________________________ 23 ____________________________________ 24 25 BY: ________________________________ 26 Signature 27 28 ____________________________________ 29 ATTEST: Name and Title 30 31 _____________________________ Address: ____________________________ 32 (Surety) Secretary ____________________________ 33 ____________________________ 34 _____________________________ 35 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: ___________________ 36 37 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract 38 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 39 Suretys physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 40 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 41 00 61 25 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 61 25 2 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 3 4 5 6 [Assembler: For Contract Document execution, remove this page and replace with standard 7 ACORD Certificate of Insurance form.] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page i of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page ii of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................. 1 1.01 Defined Terms .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS ................................................................................................ 7 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ........................................ 7 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7 2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.04 Preconstruction ConferenceMeeting ............................................................................................. 8 2.05 Public Meeting .............................................................................................................................. 8 2.06 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .................................................................................................... 8 2.07 Electronic Submittals and Transmittals ........................................................................................ 8 ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE ............................... 8 3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 8 3.02 Reference Standards ...................................................................................................................... 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ....................................................................................... 9 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents .................................................................................. 10 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10 ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK................................................ 11 4.01 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed ............................................................... 11 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11 4.03 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 11 ARTICLE 5 – SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS......................................................................................................... 12 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................. 12 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 13 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ........................................................................................... 14 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions .............................................................................. 15 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 16 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 17 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page iii of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE .............................................................................................. 18 6.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................................................................................... 18 6.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds ........................................................................ 18 6.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 19 6.04 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 21 6.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ............................................................ 22 ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................... 22 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction ..................................................................... 22 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence ............................................................................................... 22 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 23 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................................................................ 23 7.05 Project Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 24 7.06 “Or Equals” ................................................................................................................................. 24 7.07 Substitutions ................................................................................................................................ 25 7.08 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 27 7.09 Wage Rates ................................................................................................................................. 28 7.10 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 29 7.11 Permits and Utilities .................................................................................................................... 29 7.12 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 30 7.13 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 30 7.14 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 31 7.15 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 31 7.16 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 32 7.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification ............................................................................................... 32 7.18 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 33 7.19 Continuing the Work ................................................................................................................... 34 7.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ........................................................................... 34 7.21 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 35 7.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services ............................................................................... 36 7.23 Right to Audit ............................................................................................................................. 36 7.24 Nondiscrimination ....................................................................................................................... 37 ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE .......................................................................................... 37 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 37 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 38 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page iv of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 8.03 Legal Relationships ..................................................................................................................... 38 ARTICLE 9 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................ 39 9.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................... 39 9.02 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 39 9.03 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................ 39 9.04 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 39 9.05 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 39 9.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 39 9.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................ 39 9.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ..................................................................... 39 9.09 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 39 ARTICLE 10 – CITY’S OBSERVATION DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................ 40 10.01 City’s Project Manager or Duly Authorized Representative .................................................. 40 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................ 40 10.03 Determinations for Work Performed ...................................................................................... 40 10.04 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 40 ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS; EXTRA WORK ............................................... 41 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract ........................................................................... 41 11.02 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................... 41 11.03 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................ 41 11.04 Authorized Changes in the Work – Extra Work ..................................................................... 41 11.05 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 41 11.06 Dispute of Extra Work ............................................................................................................ 42 11.07 Contract Claims Process ......................................................................................................... 42 11.08 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 43 11.09 Change of Contract Time ........................................................................................................ 44 11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 44 ARTICLE 12 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK; PLANS QUANTITY MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 45 12.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 45 12.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 48 12.03 Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................................... 48 12.04 Plans Quantity Measurement for Unclassified Excavation or Embankment .......................... 49 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page v of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................................................................................................. 50 13.01 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................... 50 13.02 Tests, Inspections .................................................................................................................... 50 13.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 51 13.04 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................... 51 13.05 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................... 52 13.06 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 52 13.07 City May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................... 52 13.08 City May Correct Defective Work .......................................................................................... 53 ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD ............ 53 14.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 53 14.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 56 14.03 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................... 56 14.04 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 57 14.05 Final Acceptance ..................................................................................................................... 57 14.06 Final Payment ......................................................................................................................... 57 14.07 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release ...................................................... 58 14.08 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................... 58 14.09 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 58 ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................... 59 15.01 City May Suspend Work ......................................................................................................... 59 15.02 City May Terminate for Cause ................................................................................................ 60 15.03 City May Terminate for Convenience..................................................................................... 61 ARTICLE 16 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES ........................................................................... 63 16.01 Methods and Procedures ......................................................................................................... 63 ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................... 64 17.01 Giving Notice .......................................................................................................................... 64 17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................ 64 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 64 17.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 64 17.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 65 17.06 Survival of Obligations ........................................................................................................... 65 17.07 Assignment of Contract .......................................................................................................... 65 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page vi of vi CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised June 5, 2025 17.08 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 65 17.09 Headings ................................................................................................................................. 65 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract or in other Contract Documents, the terms listed below have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof, and words denoting gender shall include the masculine, feminine and neuter. When used in a context consistent with the definition of a listed-defined term, the term shall have a meaning as defined below whether capitalized or italicized or otherwise. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument titled “Agreement”, “Agreement – CSP”, or “Agreement – Unit Price Bid” executed by the City and Contractor for the Work, setting forth the name of the Project, Contract Price, Contract Time and the items included in the Contract. 3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to City which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract. 4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Award—Authorization by the City Council for the City to enter into an Agreement. 6. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. The term “Bid” shall be defined to include the term “Proposal” in those instances where the City utilizes a Request for Proposal rather than an Invitation for Bid. 7. Bidder—The individual or entity that submits a Bid directly to City. The term “Bidder” shall be defined to include the terms “Proposer” or “Offeror” in those instances where the City utilizes a Request for Proposal rather than an Invitation for Bid. 8. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). The term “Bidding Documents” shall be defined to include the terms “Proposal Documents” in those instances where the City utilizes a Request for Proposal rather than an Invitation for Bid. 9. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. The term “Bidding Requirements” shall be defined to include the terms “Proposal Requirements” in those instances where the City utilizes a Request for Proposal rather than an Invitation for Bid and will include the Request for Proposal or Invitation to Offerors, Instructions to Offerors, Offerors Bond or other Proposal security, if any, the Proposal Form, and the Proposal with any attachments. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 2 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 10. Business Day—A day that the City conducts normal business, generally Monday through Friday, except for federal or state holidays observed by the City. 11. Calendar Day—A day consisting of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. 12. Change Order—A document which is prepared by the Contractor or City, approved by the City, and signed by Contractor and City, authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 13. City—The City of Denton is, a Texas home-rule municipal corporation acting by its City Council through its City Manager or his or her designee. 14. City Attorney—The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Denton or his or her designee. 15. City Council—The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Denton. 16. City Manager—The officially appointed authorized City Manager of the City of Denton. 17. Contract—The entire and integrated set of written instruments between the City and Contractor concerning the Work comprised of the Agreement and all Contract Documents, which written instruments supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral, concerning the Work. 18. Contract Claim—A demand or assertion by City or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Contract Claim. 19. Contract Documents—Those items so designated as “Contract Documents.” in the Agreement at Paragraph 5.1.A. Approved Submittals, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 20. Contract Price—The moneys payable by City to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 12.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). The Contract Price does not include any “Incentive”, if applicable. 21. Contract Time—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (a) achieve Milestones, if any and (bb) complete the Work so that it is ready for Final Acceptance. 22. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom City has entered into the Agreement. 23. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 12.01 of these General Conditions for definition. 24. Damage Claims—A demand for money or services arising from the Project or Site from a third party, City or Contractor exclusive of a Contract Claim. 25. Day or day—A day, unless otherwise defined, shall mean a Calendar Day. 26. Drawings—The part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by an Engineer that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Submittals, as defined, are not considered Drawings as so defined here. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 3 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 27. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which it becomes effective,, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the City. 28. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format. 29. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted by the Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents. 30. Engineer—The licensed professional engineer or engineering firm registered in the State of Texas performing professional services for the City. 31. Extra Work—Additional work made necessary by City-approved changes or alterations to the Contract Documents. Extra Work shall be part of the Work. 32. Field Order—A written directive issued by City that requires changes in the Work but does not involve a change to the Contract Price, Contract Time, or Drawings, Plan, or Shop Drawings. 33. Final Acceptance—The written notice given by the City to the Contractor that the Work specified in the Contract Documents has been completed to the satisfaction of the City. 34. Final Inspection—The inspection performed by the City to determine whether the Contractor has completed each and every part or appurtenance of the Work fully, entirely, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 35. General Requirements—Sections of The information set forth in “Division 101 – General Requirements” of the Standard Construction Specification Documents. 36. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs , Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, or any other substance, product, waste or materials, in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 37. Hazardous Waste—Any solid waste listed as hazardous or which possesses one or more hazardous characteristics as defined in applicable Laws and Regulations. 38. Incidental or incidental—Work items that the Contractor is not paid for directly, but costs for which are included under the various bid items of the Project. 39. Laws and Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 4 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Site or any portion or part of the Work to be performed. 40. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 41. Major Item—An item of work included in the Contract Documents that has a total cost equal to or greater than 5% of the original Contract Price. 42. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to the performance of an identified portion of the Work by an intermediate Contract Time prior to Final Acceptance of the Work. 43. Notice of Award—The written notice by City to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed in such notice, City will sign and deliver the Agreement. 44. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work specified in Contract Documents. 45. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls. 46. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), and including but not limited to oil, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, diesel fuel, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 47. Plans—This term will have the same definition of as “Drawings”. 48. Project —The Work to be performed under the Contract. 49. Project Manager—The authorized representative of the City who will be assigned to the Project. 50. Project Manual—The documentary information prepared for bidding or proposing and furnishing the Work. 51. Project Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, in accordance with the General Requirements, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to achieve each Milestone and accomplish the Work within the Contract Time. 52. Public Meeting—An announced meeting conducted by the City to facilitate public participation and to assist the public in gaining an informed view of the Project. 53. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 54. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements toto support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 5 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 55. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 56. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 57. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by City upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way, permits, and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by City which are designated for the use of Contractor. 58. Specifications or Technical Specifications —The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. Specifications may be specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or, if not attached, may be incorporated by reference as indicated in the Table of Contents (Section 00 00 00) of the Project. 59. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 60. Submittal—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to the City to illustrate some portion of the Work. 61. Subsidiary or subsidiary—These terms will have the same definition as “Incidental. or incidental”. 62. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to whom City issues a Notice of Award. The term “Bidder” shall be defined to include the terms “Proposer” or “Offeror” in those instances where the City utilizes a Request for Proposal rather than an Invitation for Bid and is the Proposer or Offeror submitting the proposal or offer that provides the best value to the City and to whom the City issues a Notice of Award. 63. Superintendent—The representative of the Contractor who is available at all times and able to receive instructions from the City and to act for the Contractor. 64. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract set forth at Division 00 73 00 that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 65. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 66. Underground Facilities—All underground lines, pipelines, conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 6 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 67. Unit Price Work—Work for which the Contract Price is determined by multiplying the unit price for the item by the estimated quantity of the item. 68. Weekend Working Hours—Those hours between 8:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m. on Saturday, and between 1:00 p.m. and 8:30 p.m. on Sunday or on a federal or state holiday observed by the City, as approved in advance by the City for performing Work. 69. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction including any Change Order or Field Order,, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 70. Working Day—Defined as a Business Day but excluding any days that weather or other conditions beyond the reasonable control of the Contractor prevents the performance of the principal unit of work underway for a continuous period of not less than 7 hours between 7:00 a.m. and 8:00 p.m. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract includes the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of judgment by CityCity. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of City as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of judgment, action, or determination will be to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). C. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: 1. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or 2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or 3. has been damaged prior to City’s written notice of Final Acceptance. D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 7 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to execute, carry out, furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to City, Contractor shall also deliver to City the performance bond , payment bond and maintenance bond that comply with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Work will not be allowed to begin until the performance and payment bonds have been provided by the Contractor to the City. B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to City, Contractor shall also deliver to City, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6. Work will not be allowed to begin until the evidence of insurance has been provided by the Contractor to the City. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. City shall furnish to Contractor one (1) original executed copy and one (1) electronic copy of the Contract, and three (3) additional copies of the Drawings. Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Before Starting Construction Baseline starting Work, Contractor shall submit for review by City the following in accordance with the Contract Documents: A. Baseline Schedules in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16. B. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals. C. Preliminary Schedule of Values: For lump sum contracts, a Schedule of Values for all of the Work that includes quantities and prices of items that when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 8 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 2.04 Preconstruction Meeting A. Before any Work at the Site is started, the Contractor shall attend a Preconstruction Meeting as specified in Section 01 31 19. 2.05 Public Meeting A. Contractor may not mobilize any equipment, materials, or resources to the Site prior to Contractor attending the Public Meeting as scheduled by the City. 2.06 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable Project Schedules are submitted to City in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.07 Electronic Submittals and Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the City and Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then City and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long- term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract to describe a functionally complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to City. C. City will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. D. The Specifications may vary in form, forma and style. Some Specification sections may be written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style, and some sections may be relatively narrative by comparison. Omission of such words and phrases as “the Contractor shall,” “in conformity with,” “as shown,” or “as specified” are intentional in streamlined sections. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a section or articles within a part depending on the format of the section. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in making Contract Claims or Damage Claims. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 9 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 E. The cross-referencing of Specification sections under the subparagraph heading “Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:” and elsewhere within each Specification section is provided as an aid and convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not rely on the cross-referencing provided and shall be responsible to coordinate the entire Work under the Contract Documents and provide a complete Project whether or not cross-referencing is provided in each section or whether the cross-referencing is complete or accurate. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of CityCity, Contractor, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to City or any of its officers, elected or appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements, and conditions. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to City any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from City before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to City in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.1717) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by City, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to City for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 10 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier; or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 2. In case of discrepancies, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, Drawings shall govern over Specifications, and Supplementary Conditions shall govern over General Conditions and Specifications. 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor shall submit to the City in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. City will be the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work. B. City will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. City’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless Contractor appeals by filing a Contract Claim. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of CityCity and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or 2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without City’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 11 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences to run. 4.03 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Contractor is delayed, City shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. The City shall be liable only to the extent allowed by the provisions of the Contract and as allowed by Subchapter I, Chapter 271 of the Texas Local Government Code. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material, if any, that the Contract specifies is to be furnished by the City. D. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of City, Contractor, and those for whom they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this Paragraph 4.03. D. The Contractor is responsible for the prompt submission of a request for an adjustment to the Contract Time under this Paragraph to the City. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Time under this Paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Abnormal weather conditions; 3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with City, as contemplated in Article 8); and 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 12 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 4. Acts of war or terrorism. E. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Time or Contract Price is limited as follows: 1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Time to which Contractor is otherwise entitled. 3. Adjustments of Contract Time or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Article 11. F. Each Contractor request or Change Order seeking an increase in Contract Time or Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: 1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; 2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the progress of the Work; 3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the progress of the Work; 4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and 5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.08. 6. Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as City may require including, where appropriate, a revised Project Schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work. G. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.03.F and 4.03.G. ARTICLE 5 – SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. City shall furnish the Site. City shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 13 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Contractor must comply in performing the Work. City will be responsible for obtaining any necessary easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. 1. The City has obtained or anticipates acquisition of and/or access to right-of-way, and/or easements. Any outstanding right-of-way and/or easements are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding right-of-way, and/or easements. 2. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the City has or anticipates moving and/or relocating utilities, and obstructions to the Site. Any outstanding movement or relocation of utilities or obstructions is anticipated in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding utilities or obstructions to be moved and/or relocated by others. B. Upon reasonable written request of Contractor, City shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed. C. Contractor shall provide for any additional lands and access thereto not included in the Site that may be required for construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. The cost of such shall be part of the Contract Price. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, worker car parking and the operations of workers to the Site, to adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and to other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with worker car parking, construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries, including death, and damage to or losses of property sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage, losses, injuries or deaths arose out of or result from the performance of the Work or arose out of or resulted from any other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for whom Contractor is responsible. 2. At any time when, in the judgment of the City, the Contractor has obstructed, closed, or is carrying on operations in a portion of a street, right-of-way, or easement greater than is necessary for proper execution of the Work, the City may require the Contractor to reduce the area impacted to only that necessary for proper execution of the Work and/or to finish the section on which operations are in progress before work is commenced on any additional area of the Site. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 14 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 3. Construction equipment, spoil materials, supplies, forms, buildings, labs, or equipment and supply storage buildings, or any other item that may be transported by flood flows, shall not be stored within existing federal floodways during the course of the Work. 4. Should any Damage Claim be made by any such owner or occupant adversely impacted because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly attempt to resolve the Damage Claim. 5. PURSUANT TO PARAGRAPH 7.21, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CITY AND ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, AND EMPLOYEES, FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY CLAIM OR ACTION, LEGAL OR EQUITABLE, BROUGHT BY ANY SUCH ADVERSELY IMPACTED OWNER OR OCCUPANT AGAINST CITY. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Site Maintenance Cleaning: If 24 hours after written notice is given to the Contractor that the clean-up at the Site is insufficient or occurring in a manner unsatisfactory to the City, the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory condition and/or procedures, the City may take such direct action as the City deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice, and the costs of such direct corrective action, plus 25 % of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor under the Contract. D. Final Site Cleaning: Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by City and any adjacent property owners, if applicable. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, surplus materials, waste materials, rubbish and other debris and shall restore to original condition or better all areas impacted or disturbed by the Work. E. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to City of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. Those drawings known to City of existing physical conditions at or contiguous to the Site, including those drawings known to City depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities.). B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 15 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as technical data. C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor is provided certain technical data identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings for its use, but the City does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy of the information, and such information including reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Contractor may not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of theirits officers, elected or appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness or accuracy of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or City’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.17), notify City in writing about such condition. B. Possible Price and Time Adjustments 1. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a final commitment to City with respect to Contract Price and Contract Time by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under the Contract; or 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 16 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of the examination of the Contract Documents or the Site; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A. C. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to City or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including City, or by others, unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:: 1. City and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all information and data; b. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such Underground Facilities during the course of construction; c. coordination and adjustment of the Work with the owners (including City) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings or otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated on the Drawings or in the Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.17), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give notice to that owner and to City. Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such discovered Underground Facility. 2. If City concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Change Order may be issued to reflect and document such consequences, subject to the provisions of Article 11. 3. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies a minimum of 48 hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if necessary. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 17 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to City relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site; or 2. drawings known to City relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor is provided certain technical data identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings for its use, but the City does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy of the information, and such information including reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Contractor may not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of its officers, elected or appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness or accuracy of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or City’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site if such Hazardous Environmental Condition was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified if the removal or remediation of such Hazardous Environmental Condition was not identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the actions of or with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible and the costs associated with the same. D. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.17); and (3) notify City (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). City may consider the necessity to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 18 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.D or in any affected area until after City has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed. F. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then City may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work and the Contract Price. City may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by City’s own forces or others. G. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CITY, AND ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM, FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) FOR PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR PROPERTY DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. NOTHING IN THIS PARAGRAPH 5.06.CityG OBLIGATES CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY FROM AND AGAINST THE CONSEQUENCES OF THAT INDIVIDUAL’S OR ENTITY’S OWN NEGLIGENCE. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 6.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, in accordance with the provisions of the Texas Government Code Chapter 2253 or successor statute and as required by the City, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. The performance and payment bonds must be provided by the Contractor to the City prior to the Contractor beginning any Work. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 19 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 B. Contractor shall furnish maintenance bonds in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security to protect the City against any defects in any portion of the Work described in the Contract Documents. Maintenance bonds shall remain in effect for two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance by the City. The maintenance bond(s) shall be provided as directed by the City as part of the close-out of the Contract and shall be provided prior to the final payment being made. C. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents, except as provided otherwise by Laws and Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, or its right to do business is terminated in the State of Texas, then Contractor shall promptly notify City in writing and shall, within 30 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and surety requirements above. E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, City may refuse to allow the Contractor to begin Work, exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise City’s termination rights under Article 15. F. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. 6.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to City, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance and endorsements (and other evidence of insurance requested by City or any other additional insured) establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by these General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions prior to beginning any Work. 1. The certificate of insurance shall document the City, and all identified entities named in the Supplementary Conditions as “additional insureds” on all liability policies. 2. The Contractor’s general liability insurance shall include a “per project” or “per location” endorsement, that shall be identified in the certificate of insurance provided to the City. 3. The certificate shall be signed by an agent authorized to bind coverage on behalf of the insured, be complete in its entirety, and show complete insurance carrier names as listed in the current A.M. Best Property & Casualty Guide. 4. The insurers for all policies must be licensed and/or approved to do business in the State of Texas. Except for workers’ compensation, all insurers must have a minimum rating of A-: VII in the current A. M. Best Key Rating Guide or have reasonably equivalent 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 20 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 financial strength and solvency to the satisfaction City. If the rating is below that required, written approval of City is required. 5. All applicable policies shall include a Waiver of Subrogation (Rights of Recovery) in favor of the City. In addition, the Contractor agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the Engineer (if applicable), and each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions 6. Failure of the City to demand such certificates or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure of the City to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such lines of insurance coverage or to provide such certificates or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements. 7. If insurance policies are not written for specified coverage limits, an Umbrella or Excess Liability insurance for any differences is required. Excess Liability shall follow form of the primary coverage. 8. Unless otherwise stated, all required insurance shall be written on the “occurrence basis”. If If City agrees in writing that coverage is underwrittenmay be written on a claims-made basis, the retroactive date shall be coincident with or prior to the date of the effective date of the Agreement and the certificate of insurance shall state that the coverage is claims- made and the retroactive date. The insurance coverage shall be maintained for the duration of the Contract and for three (3) years following Final Acceptance or for the warranty period provided for under the Contract Documents or for the warranty period, whichever is longer. An annual certificate of insurance submitted to the City shall evidence such insurance coverage. 9. Policies shall have no exclusions by endorsements that either nullify or amend the required lines of coverage, nor or decrease the limits of said coverage unless such endorsements are approved in writing by the City. In the event a Notice of an Award has been issued or the Agreement executed, and the policy exclusions are determined to be unacceptable or the City desires that the Contractor obtain additional insurance coverage the contract price shall be adjusted by the cost of the premium for such additional coverage plus 10%. 10. For any proposed self-insured retention (SIR),) in excess of $25,000.00, affecting insurance coverage, Contractor must obtain the written approval of the City in regard to asset value and stockholders' equity. In lieu of traditional insurance, proposed alternative coverage maintained through insurance pools or, risk retention groups, or self-funding will also require the written approval of the City. 11. Any deductible in excess of $5,000.00, for any policy that does not provide coverage on a first-dollar basis must be acceptable to and approved in writing by the City. 12. City, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to review the insurance requirements and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverages and limits when deemed necessary and prudent by the City based upon the scope of the Work, changes in statutory law, court decision or the claims history of the industry as well as of the contracting party to the City. The City will provide prior notice of 90 days and the insurance adjustments shall be incorporated into the Work by Change Order. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 21 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 13. City shall be entitled, upon written request to Contractor and without expense to City, to receive copies of policies and endorsements thereto and. City may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modifications of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions necessary to conform the policy and endorsements to the requirements of the Contract. Deletions, revisions, or modifications shall not be required where policy provisions are established by law or regulations binding upon either party or the underwriter on any such policies. 14. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for Contractor’s insurance. 6.04 Contractor’s Insurance A. Workers Compensation and Employers’ Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance coverage with limits consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers’ Compensation Act (Texas Labor Code, Ch. 406, as amended), and minimum limits for Employers’ Liability as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of employees. B. Commercial General Liability. Coverage shall include but not be limited to covering liability (bodily injury, including death, or property damage) arising from: premises/operations, independent contractors, products/completed operations, personal injury including death, liability under an insured contract, and explosion/collapse/underground (where those exposures exist). Insurance shall be provided on an occurrence basis, and as comprehensive as the current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy. This insurance shall apply as primary insurance with respect to any other insurance or self-insurance programs afforded to the City. The Commercial General Liability policy shall have no exclusions by endorsements that would alter or nullify premises/operations, products/completed operations, contractual, personal injury, or advertising injury, that are normally contained with the policy, unless the City approves such exclusions in writing. For construction projects that present a substantial completed operation exposure, the City may require the Contractor to maintain completed operations coverage for a minimum of no less than three (3) years following the completion of the project (if identified in the Supplementary Conditions)). C. Automobile Liability. A commercial business auto policy shall provide coverage on “any auto”, defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned and provide indemnity for claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person and/or property damage arising out of or related to the work, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle by the Contractor, any 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 22 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. D. Railroad Protective Liability. If any of the Work or any warranty work is within the limits of railroad right-of-way, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements identified in the Supplementary Conditions. E. Notification of Policy Cancellation: Contractor shall immediately notify City upon cancellation or other loss of insurance coverage. Contractor shall stop Work until replacement insurance has been procured. There shall be no time credit for delays or days not worked pursuant to this section. 6.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If City has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Article 6 or the Supplementary Conditions on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the City shall so notify the Contractor in writing within 10 Business Days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested). Contractor shall provide to the City such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the City may reasonably request. If Contractor does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents, the City shall notify the Contractor in writing of such failure prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Such failure to provide bonds or insurance as required by the Contract Documents is a breach of the terms of the Contract and the City may terminate the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not City-delegated professional design services under this Contract, and neither City nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services. 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall identify and assign a competent superintendent, who is proficient in English, and who shall not be replaced without written 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 23 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 notice to City of the name of the replacement superintendent. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, replace the superintendent with another satisfactory to City. C. Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours prior to moving areas during the sequence of construction. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to City for all acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours on Business Days. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work outside of regular working hours on Business Days without City’s prior written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld)). Contractor’s written request (by letter or electronic communication) for City’s written consent must be made as follows: 1. for Work beyond regular working hours on Business Days, request must be made by noon at least two (2) Business Days prior; 2. for Work during Weekend Working Hours, request must be made by noon of the preceding Wednesday; and 3. for Work on state or federal holidays observed by the City, request must be made sufficiently in advance of the holiday, to satisfy requirements for City Council approval. 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, Contractor required testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of sufficient quality to complete the Work, and must be new and of good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of City. If required by City, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 24 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. D. All items of standard equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be the latest model at the time of bid, unless otherwise specified. 7.05 Project Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Project Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.06 and the General Requirements as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to the City for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.06 and the General Requirements) proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Time. Such adjustments must comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Contractor shall submit to City a monthly Project Schedule with a monthly progress payment request for the duration of the Contract in accordance with the Construction Progress Schedule, General Requirements 01 32 16. 3. Proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will change the Contract Time shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. Adjustments in Contract Time may only be made by a Change Order. 7.06 “Or Equals” A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that City permit the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances described below. 1. If City in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by City as an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this Paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. the City determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) it is not objectionable to City. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 25 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the City or increase in Contract Time; and 2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. City’s Evaluation and Determination: City will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. City may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. City will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until City’s review is complete and City determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal.” City.” City will advise Contractor in writing of its determination. D. Effect of City’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will result in any change in Contract Price. The City’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If City determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that City consider the item a proposed substitution pursuant to Paragraph 7.07. 7.07 Substitutions A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that City permit the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement of related Work at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow City to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitution therefor. City will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by City will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.07.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as City may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. 3. Contractor shall make written application to City for review of a proposed substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application shall comply with Section 01 25 00 and: a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; 2) be substantially similar in substance to the item specified; and 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 26 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 3) be well-suited to the same use as the item specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will adversely impact Contractor’s achievement of Final Acceptance on or before the Contract Time; 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and Damage Claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. City’s Evaluation and Determination: City will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitution request. City may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. City will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until City’s review is complete and City determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitution. City’s approval determination will be evidenced by a Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Time. City will advise Contractor in writing of any denial determination. C. Special Guarantee: City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitution. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City and its officers, elected and appointed officials, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors and anyone directly or indirectly employed by them from and against any and all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorney’s fees) arising out of or relateds to the use of substituted materials or equipment. D. Reimbursement of City’s Cost: City will record City’s costs in evaluating a substitution proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not City approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse City for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse City for the charges for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 27 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 F. City Substitution Reimbursement: Cost savings attributable to acceptance of a substitution shall be paid to City by Contractor by an appropriate Change Order decreasing the Contract Price. G. Effect of City’s Determination: If City approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The City’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.07.D, by timely submittal of a Change Order. 7.08 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Contractor shall perform with its own organization, and with the assistance of workmen under its immediate superintendence, work of a value not less than 35% of the Contract Price, unless otherwise approved by the City. B. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, against whom City may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection, except as provided in Paragraph 7.08.C. The Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to City to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. C. The City may require the use of specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work , and will provide such requirements in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall provide to City as part of the Bid, the identity of all proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers. Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to City unless City raises a substantive, reasonable objection prior to execution of the Agreement. E. Contractor shall be fully responsible to City for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between City and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor 2. shall create any obligation on the part of City to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. F. No acceptance by City of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of City to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contract Price and Contract Time. G. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the tasks of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 28 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 H. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of City. Contractor must comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, statutes, ordinances or regulations, including but not limited to immigration laws, workers compensation laws and wage laws, in the hiring of any Subcontractor or Supplier and shall ensure that each Subcontractor or Supplier has the same obligations. I. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with City, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract. 7.09 Wage Rates A. Duty to pay Prevailing Wage Rates: The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code (as amended), including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Denton to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258. The then current prevailing wage rates at the time of execution of the Agreement are included in these Contract Documents. B. Penalty for Violation: A Contractor or any Subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall, upon demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code Section 2258.023. C. Complaints of Violations and City Determination of Good Cause: On receipt of information, including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, by a Contractor or Subcontractor, the City shall make an initial determination, before the 31st day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the City’s determination that there is good cause to believe the Contractor or Subcontractor has violated Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such amounts being retained from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the violation. D. Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved: An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker, shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act (Article 224 et seq., Revised Statutes) if the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker does not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to Paragraph 7.09.C. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 29 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 E. Records to be Maintained: The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3) years following the date of Final Acceptance, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided for in this Contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be available in Denton County, Texas at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of Paragraph 7.23, Right to Audit, shall pertain to this inspection. F. Progress Payments: With each progress payment request or payroll period, whichever is less, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. G. Posting of Wage Rates: The Contractor shall post prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at the Site at all times. H. Subcontractor Compliance: The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require all of its Subcontractors to comply with Paragraphs 7.09.A through 7.09.G. 7.10 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all patent or license fees and royalties and pay all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of City, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any patent or license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents. Failure of the City to disclose such information does not relieve the Contractor from its obligations to pay said fees or, royalties or costs to others. B. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CITY, AND ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM, FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS INCIDENT TO THE USE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK OR RESULTING FROM THE INCORPORATION IN THE WORK OF ANY INVENTION, DESIGN, PROCESS, PRODUCT, OR DEVICE. 7.11 Permits and Utilities A. Contractor obtained permits and licenses. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. City shall provide reasonable assistance to Contractor, if necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work applicable at the time the Notice of Award is issued, except for permits provided by the City as specified in Paragraph 7.11.B. City shall pay the charges of utility service providers for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 30 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 B. City obtained permits and licenses. City will obtain and pay for those permits and licenses identified as City’s responsibility in the Supplementary Conditions or Contract Documents. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with and carry out the provisions of the permit. If the Contractor initiates changes to the Contract and the City approves the changes, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clearances and coordinating with the appropriate regulatory agency. relating to the changes. The City will not reimburse the Contractor for any cost associated with the requirements of any City acquired permit. The following are permits the City will obtain if required: 1. Texas Department of Transportation Permits 2. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Permits 3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Permits 4. Railroad Company Permits 5. Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) Permits C. Outstanding permits and licenses. Any outstanding permits and licenses are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding permits and licenses. 7.12 Taxes A. On issuance of a Notice of Award by the City, an organization which qualifying for exemption pursuant to Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H (as amended), the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to hisits Supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller’s Rulings applicable to Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with all applicable rulings pertaining to the Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H. B. Texas tax permits and information may be obtained from: 1. Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin, TX 78711; or 2. http://www.window.state.tx.us/taxinfo/taxforms/93-forms.html 7.13 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, City shall not be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws and Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall be liable for all resulting claims, costs losses, and damages, and shall indemnify and hold harmless City, and its officers, elected 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 31 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 and appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. C. Changes in Laws and Regulations not known at the time of the City’s issuance of a Notice of Award having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time. 7.14 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. Contractor shall include accurate locations for buried and imbedded items. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to City for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to City prior to Final Inspection. 7.15 Safety and Protection A. As between City and Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of persons and property in the performance of the Work, for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work and for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs. Contractor shall inform the City in writing of Contractor’s designated safety representative at the Site. C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.1515.C.2 or 7.1515.C.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be the responsibility of and remedied by Contractor at its expense. E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 32 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 and shall implement, erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. F. Contractor shall notify City; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of City’s safety programs, if any. H. Contractor shall inform City in advance in writing of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which City’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the Work is completed and City has issued a Letter of Final Acceptance. J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.16 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 7.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification A. In the event of threatened or actual emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to immediately act to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give City prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an emergency or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If City determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Change Order may be issued. B. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the City to rectify any discrepancies, omissions, or correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the City shall give the Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct attention to the discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the condition. In the event the Contractor does not take proper action within 24 hours to fulfill this written request or fails to show just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action with City resources or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire cost for such remedial action, plus 25% from any funds due or to become due the Contractor on the Project. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 33 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 7.18 Submittals A. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit required Submittals to City for review and acceptance in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.03). 1. Contractor shall submit the Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of the General Requirements. 2. Data shown on the Submittals must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to demonstrate to City the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable City to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.18.C. 3. Submittals reviewed and accepted by City for conformance with the design concept shall be executed in conformity with the Contract Documents unless otherwise required by City. 4. When Submittals are submitted for the purpose of showing the installation in greater detail, their review shall not excuse Contractor from requirements shown on the Drawings and Specifications. 5. For-Information-Only submittals upon which the City is not expected to conduct a review or take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 6. Contractor shall submit the required number of Samples specified in the Specifications. 7. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which it is intended and other data as City may require to enable City to review the Submittal for the limited purposes set forth in Paragraph 7.18.C. B. Where a Submittal is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to City’s review and acceptance of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole risk, expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. City’s Review 1. City will provide timely review of Submittals in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. City’s review and acceptance will be to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. City’s review and acceptance will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents), or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. City’s review and acceptance of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 4. City’s review and acceptance of a Submittal will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of the General 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 34 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Requirements, and City has given written acceptance of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Submittal. 5. City’s review and acceptance of a Submittal will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. City’s review and acceptance of a Submittal, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Time or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7. Neither City’s receipt, review, or acceptance of a Submittal will result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in accepted Submittals, subject to the provisions of Section 01 33 00 of the General Requirements. 7.19 Continuing the Work A. Except as otherwise provided, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Project Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with City. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as City and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 7.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to City that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. City and its officers, elected and appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee under this Paragraph 7.20: 1. Observations by Engineer or City; 2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by City of any progress or final payment; 3. The issuance of a letter or certificate of Final Acceptance by City or any payment related thereto by City; 4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by City; 5. Any review and acceptance of a Submittal by City; 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 35 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 6. Any inspection, test, or acceptance by others; or 7. Any correction of defective Work by City. D. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the Work and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified. Contractor shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond, complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02.B. The City will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 7.21 Indemnification A. CONTRACTOR COVENANTS AND AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, HOLD HARMLESS, AND DEFEND, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, THE CITY, ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS AND ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY THEM , FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR PERSONAL OR BODILY INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO, OR ALLEGED TO ARISE OUT OF OR BE RELATED TO, THE WORK AND SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR, ITS OFFICERS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, LICENSEES OR INVITEES UNDER THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. OR ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED OR APPOINTED OFFICIALS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY THEM. THIS INDEMNITY PROVISION IS INTENDED TO INCLUDE, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDEMNITY FOR COSTS, EXPENSES AND LEGAL FEES INCURRED IN DEFENDING AGAINST SUCH CLAIMS AND CAUSES OF ACTIONS. B. CONTRACTOR COVENANTS AND AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, THE CITY, ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS AND ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY THEM FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL LOSS, DAMAGE OR DESTRUCTION OF PROPERTY OF THE CITY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO, OR ALLEGED TO ARISE OUT OF OR BE RELATED TO, THE WORK AND SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR, ITS OFFICERS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, LICENSEES OR INVITEES UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY OR ITS OFFICERS, ELECTED OR APPOINTED OFFICIALS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY THEM. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 36 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 7.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, City will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations. C. If a Submittal related to the requirements indicated in Paragraph 7.22.B is prepared by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to City, then such Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by Contractor to City. D. City shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under the conditions indicated in Paragraph 7.22.B, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.22, City’s review, acceptance, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to the conditions indicated in Paragraph 7.22.B, will be only for the following limited purposes: 1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.22; 2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and 3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 7.23 Right to Audit A. The City shall have the right to audit and make copies of the books, records and computations pertaining to the Contract. The Contractor shall retain such books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining to the Contract during the term of the Contract and for five years thereafter, except if an audit is in progress or audit findings are yet unresolved, in which case records shall be kept until all audit tasks are completed and resolved. These books, records, documents and other evidence shall be made available, in Denton County, Texas within ten (10) Business Days of City’s written request. Further, the Contractor shall also require all Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other payees to retain all books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining to the Contract, and to allow the City similar access to those documents. All books and records will be made available within Denton County, Texas. Except as otherwise provided herein, the cost of the audit will be borne by the City 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 37 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 unless the audit reveals an overpayment of 1% or greater. If the City is undertaking an audit or inspection pursuant to Paragraph 7.09 or if an overpayment of 1% or greater occurs, the City’s reasonable cost of the audit, including any travel costs, must be paid by the Contractor within five (5) Business Days of receipt of City’s invoice for such costs. B. Failure to comply with the provisions of this section shall be a material breach of the Contract and shall constitute, in the City’s sole discretion, grounds for termination thereof. Each of the terms “books”, “records”, “documents” and “other evidence”, as used above, shall be construed to include drafts and electronic files, even if such drafts or electronic files are subsequently used to generate or prepare a final printed document. 7.24 Nondiscrimination A. The City is responsible for operating Public Transportation Programs and implementing transit-related projects, funded in part with Federal financial assistance awarded by the U.S. Department of Transportation and the Federal Transit Administration (FTA), without discriminating against any person in the United States on the basis of race, color, or national origin. B. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Title VI, Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as may be further defined in the Supplementary Conditions, for any project receiving Federal assistance. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the City may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by City’s employees, or through contracts between the City and third parties. City may also arrange to have third- party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If City performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with City’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then City shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work, if such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and City, if City is performing other work with City’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of City and the others whose work will be affected. E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to City in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 38 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work that could not have been discovered through a proper inspection. F. The provisions of this Article 8 are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with City, or that is performed without having been arranged by City. If such work occurs, then any related delay, disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of Paragraph 4.03.D.3. 8.02 Coordination A. If City intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with City’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall have authority for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of City, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 1. When City is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with City’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to City for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by City as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to City’s other work. B. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any Damage Claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, City, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify, defend and hold harmless City and Engineer, and the officers, elected and appointed officials, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 39 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 9 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall issue all communications to Contractor. 9.02 Furnish Data A. City shall promptly furnish the data required of City under the Contract Documents. 9.03 Pay When Due A. City shall make payments to Contractor when they are due in accordance with and subject to the provisions of Article 14. 9.04 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. City’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Article 5 refers to City’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by City in preparing the Contract Documents. 9.05 Change Orders A. City’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. City’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.02.DD. 9.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities A. The City shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. City will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. City’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.09 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, City’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which City has been informed in advance in writing pursuant to Paragraph 7.15. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 40 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 10 – CITY’S OBSERVATION DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 City’s Project Manager or Duly Authorized Representative A. City will provide a Project Manager or duly authorized representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of City’s Project Manager or duly appointed representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. B. City’s Project Manager for these Contract Documents is as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. City will establish a duly authorized representative at the Preconstruction Meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19 of the General Requirements. 10.02 Visits to Site A. City will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as City deems necessary in order to observe the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, City will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. City will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. City’s efforts will be directed toward providing City a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. B. City’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on City’s responsibility set forth in Paragraph 99.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of City’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, City will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Determinations for Work Performed A. As applicable, Contractor will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Work performed.. City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative will review with Contractor the preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written recommendation. City’s written decision will be final (except as modified to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data). 10.04 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. City will be the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge the acceptability of the Work thereunder. B. City will render a written decision on any issue referred. C. City’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on the Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.07. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 41 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES ININ THE WORK; CLAIMS; EXTRA WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract A. The Contract may be amended toto provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof, including in the Contract Price or Contract Time, but such amendment will be made by Change Order only. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work not involving a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, may be authorized, by one of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; or 2. City’s review of a Submittal (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.18.C); or 3. City’s written interpretation or clarification. 11.02 Execution of Change Orders A. City and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed.. 2. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by City pursuant to Paragraph 11.04, (b) required because of City’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.05 or City’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08, or (c) as otherwise agreed to by the parties. 11.03 Field Orders A. City may authorize minor variations and deviations in changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on both the City and Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. 11.04 Authorized Changes in the Work – Extra Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, City may, at any time or from time to time, order Extra Work. Upon notice of such Extra Work, Contractor shall proceed with the Work involved only upon receiving written notice from City. Extra Work will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). Extra Work shall be memorialized by a Change Order which may or may not precede an order of Extra Work. B. For minor changes of Work not requiring changes to Contract Time or Contract Price, a Field Order may be issued by City. 11.05 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 42 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented as allowed herein, except in certain cases of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.17.A. 11.06 Dispute of Extra Work A. Should a difference arise as to what does or does not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment for such Extra Work, and the City requires its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the Extra Work after making written request for a Change Order and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost thereof. Contract Claims regarding Extra Work shall be made pursuant to Paragraph 11.07. B. The Contractor shall furnish the City such records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the City to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of plans showing the actual work performed. C. The compensation agreed upon for Extra Work whether or not initiated by a Change Order shall be the full, complete and final payment for all charges, fees and costs Contractor incurs as a result of or relating to the Extra Work, whether said charges, fees or costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without limitation, any charges, fees or costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or unchanged work as a result of the Extra Work. 11.07 Contract Claims Process A. City’s Decision Required: All Contract Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.08, shall be referred to the City for decision. A decision by City shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Contractor of any rights or remedies he may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Contract Claims. B. Notice: 1. Written notice stating the general nature of each Contract Claim shall be delivered by the Contractor to City no later than 15 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Contract Claim shall rest with the party making the Contract Claim. 2. Notice of the amount or extent of the Contract Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the City no later than 45 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto (unless the City notifies Contractor in writing that City will allow additional time for Contractor to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Contract Claim). 3. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.08. 4. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. 5. Each Contract Claim shall be accompanied by Contractor’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 43 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 6. The City shall submit any response to the Contractor within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s last submittal (unless in connection with the Contract Claim (unless Contractor allows the City additional time to submit a response). C. City’s Action: City will review each Contract Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the Contractor unless action by City’s Council is required, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Contract Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Contract Claim; or 3. notify the Contractor that the City is unable to resolve the Contract Claim if, in the City’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the City to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Contract Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. City’s written action under this Paragraph 11.07 will be final and binding, unless City or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. E. No Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 11.07. F. If the City fails to take any action pursuant to this Paragraph 11.07, the Contract Claim is considered to have been denied by the City. 11.08 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. B. TheThe value of any Work covered by a Change Order will be determined as follows: 1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 12.03); 2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum or unit price (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.08.C.2), and shall include the cost of any secondary impacts that are foreseeable at the time of pricing the cost of Extra Work; or 3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum or unit price, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.08.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be determined as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 44 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 12.01.B.1, 12.01.B.2, and 12.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 15 percent except for: 1) rental fees for Contractor’s own equipment; and 2) bonds and insurance; b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 12.01.B.4, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent; 1) Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.08.C.2.a and 11.08.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 12.01.B.1, 12.01.B.2, and 12.01.B.3 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, in no case shall the cumulative total of fees paid be in excess of 25% of the Cost of the Work; c. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 12.01.B.5, 12.01.B.6, and 12.01.C; d. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to City for any change which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and 11.09 Change of Contract Time A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. B. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed under a Change Order for Extra Work or for claimed delay unless the Extra Work contemplated or claimed delay is shown to be on the critical path of the Project Schedule or Contractor can show by critical path method analysis how the Extra Work or claimed delay adversely affects the critical path. C. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Time, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.03. 11.10 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted by the Contractor to reflect the effect of any such change. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 45 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 ARTICLE 12 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK; PLANS QUANTITY MEASUREMENT 12.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term “Cost of the Work” means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 12.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: The term, “Cost of the Work” means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 12.01.C, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work is covered by a Change Order, the costs reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work. Such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those calculated based on the prevailing wage rates contained in the Contract Documents, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 12.01.C, and may include as applicable, but not be limited to the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by City and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours on Business Days, during Weekend Working Hours, or on a state or federal holiday observed by the City, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by City. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. 3. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved in writing by City, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. and the Contract Documents. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 46 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 4. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by City, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to City . Contractor shall deliver such bids to City, which will then determine, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 12.01 and Paragraph 11.08.C. 5. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services specifically related to the Work and specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 12.01.B.1 or otherwise specifically included in the Contract. 6. Supplemental costs consisting of the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, and temporary office or facilities at the Site, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations, excluding those taxes for which an exemption is available as described in Paragraph 7.12. d. Deposits lost for causes other than the negligence or willful misconduct of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. e. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work, provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence or willful misconduct of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made with the written consent and approval of CityCity. No such losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. f. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. g. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. h. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items: 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 47 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 12.01.B.1 or otherwise specifically covered in the Contract. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the acts, omissions, negligence or willful misconduct of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind. D. Contractor’s Fee 1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then: a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective Date of the Agreement will be determined as set forth in the Contract. b. for any Work covered by a Change Order for an adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.08.C. 2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change Order for an adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.08.C.2. E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 12, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices, and submit in a form acceptable to City an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. Subject to prior written notice, City will be afforded reasonable access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by City. Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to City, and preserve such documents, to the same extent as is required of Contractor. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 48 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 12.02 Allowances A. Specified Allowance: It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to City. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances, have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of City. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted. 12.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work multiplied by the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by City subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.03. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Work described in the Contract Documents, or reasonably inferred as required for a functionally complete installation, but not identified in the listing of unit price items shall be considered incidental to Unit Price Work listed and the cost of incidental work included as part of the unit price. D. Adjustments in Contract Price 1. City may make an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 11.08 if: a. the quantity of the item of Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work. 2. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 49 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 E. Increased or Decreased Quantities: The City reserves the right to order Extra Work in accordance with Paragraph 11.04. 1. If the changes in quantities or the alterations do not significantly change the character of the Work under the Contract Documents, the altered Work will be paid for at the Contract unit price. 2. If the changes in quantities or alterations materially and significantly change the character of the Work, the Contract will be amended by a Change Order. 3. If no unit prices exist, thisany increase or decrease in quantities will be considered Extra Work and the Contract will be amended by a Change Order in accordance with Article 11. 4. A significant change in the character of Work occurs when: a. the character of work for any Item as altered differs materially or significantly in kind or nature from that in the Contract; or b. a Major Item of work varies by more than 25% from the original Contract quantity. 5. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is more than 125% of the original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to the unit price on the portion of the work that is above 125%. 6. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is less than 75% of the original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to the unit price. 12.04 Plans Quantity Measurement for Unclassified Excavation or Embankment A. Plans quantities may or may not represent the exact quantity of Work performed or material moved, handled, or placed during the term of the Contract. The estimated bid quantities are designated as final payment quantities, unless revised in accordance with the Contract. B. If the total actual quantity measured for an individual item varies by more than 25% (or as stipulated under “Price and Payment Procedures” for specific Items) from the total estimated quantity for an individual Item originally shown in the Contract Documents, an adjustment may be made to the quantity of authorized Work done for payment purposes. The party to the Contract requesting the adjustment will provide field measurements and calculations showing the final quantity for which payment will be made. Payment for revised quantity will be made at the unit price bid for that Item, except as provided for in Article 11. C. When quantities are revised by a change in design approved by the City, by Change Order, or to correct an error, or to correct an error on the plans, the plans quantity will be increased or decreased by the amount identified in the approved change, and the 25% variance provisions of Paragraph 12.04.B will apply to the new plans quantity. D. If the total Contract quantity multiplied by the unit price bid for an individual Item is less than $250 and the Item is not originally a plans quantity Item, then the Item may be paid as a plans quantity Item if the City and Contractor agree in writing to fix the final quantity as a plans quantity. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 50 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 E. For callout work or non-site specific Contracts, the plans quantity measurement requirements are not applicable. ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Access to Work A. City and its Engineer, consultants, representatives, employees, and independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction shall have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs as applicable. 13.02 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give City timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. If the Contract Documents or any Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish City the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval, except that those fees specifically identified in the Supplementary Conditions or any Texas Department of Licensure and Regulation (TDLR) inspections, which shall will be paid as described in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections, tests, re-tests, and approvals required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to City; 2. to attain City’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to City. D. City may arrange for the services of an independent testing laboratory (“Testing Lab”) to perform any inspections or tests (“Testing”) for any part of the Work, as determined solely by City. 1. City will coordinate such Testing to the extent possible, with Contractor; 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 51 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 2. Should any Testing under this Section 13.03.D result in a “fail”, “did not pass” or other similar negative result, the Contractor shall be responsible for paying for any and all retests. Contractor’s cancellation without cause of City initiated Testing shall be deemed a negative result and require a retest. 3. Any amounts owed for any retest under this Section 13.02.D shall be paid directly to the Testing Lab by Contractor. City will forward all invoices for retests to Contractor. 4. If Contractor fails to pay the Testing Lab, City will not issue Final Payment until the Testing Lab is paid. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by City or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for seeking and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without the written approval of City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering and the recovering of such Work will be at Contractor’s expense. 13.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. City’s Authority: City has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Written notice of all defective Work of which City has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if City has rejected the defective Work, shall remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Failure to require the removal of any defective Work shall not constitute acceptance of such Work. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair City’s warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Contractor or City by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair, replacement or reconstruction of work of others resulting from defective Work. 13.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. City will have authority to reject Work which City believes to be defective or will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. City will have authority to conduct special inspection or testing 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 52 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 of the Work as provided in this Article 13, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 13.05 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City prefers to accept it, City may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to City’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work, and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Final Acceptance, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of the Work so accepted. 13.06 Uncovering Work A. City has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the Contract Documents or specific instructions of City and if requested by City, Contractor shall uncover such Work for City’s observation, inspection or testing and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If City considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by City or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at City’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as City may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). City shall be entitled to accept defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.05 and in such case Contractor shall still be responsible for all costs associated with exposing, observing, and testing defective Work. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an extension of the Contract Time to the extent directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. 13.07 City May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or Contractor fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then City may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been corrected or eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or any employee or agent of, any of them. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 53 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 13.08 City May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from City to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by City, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then City may, after providing 7 days’ advance written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, City may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow CityCity, City’s representatives, agents and employees, and City’s other contractors access to the Site to enable City to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.08. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court, or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by City in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.08 will be the responsibility of and will be charged against Contractor. A Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include, but not be limited to, all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by City of City’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.08. ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 14.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.03 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to City. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 12.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Applications for Payments 1. Contractor is responsible for providing all information as required to become a vendor of the City. 2. At least 20 days before the date established in the General Requirements for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to City for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 54 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 3. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) bill of sale, invoice, or purchase order payments, copies of cancelled checks or other documentation establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at City’s request, documentation warranting that City has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, or other arrangements to protect City’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to City. 4. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work by Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 5. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Contract Documents. C. Review of Applications 1. City will, after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing it will proceed to process the Application for Payment or return the Application to Contractor indicating reasons for refusing payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. City’s processing of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will be based on City’s observations of the executed Work, and on City’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that based City’s actual knowledge: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; and b. the quality and/or quantity of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to any subsequent evaluations of the Work, an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Final Acceptance, the results of any subsequent tests or inspections called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraphs 10.05 and 12.03, and any other qualifications stated). 3. Processing any such payment will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or b. there are no other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by City or entitle City to withhold payment to Contractor; or c. Contractor hashas complied with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work. 4. City may refuse to process or pay the whole or any part of any payment because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, and 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 55 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 may revise or revoke any such payment previously made, to such extent as may be necessary to protect City from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or the completed Work has been damaged by the Contractor or his subcontractors, requiring correction or replacement; b. there are discrepancies in quantities contained in previous applications for payment; c. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; d. City has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 1313.08, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 13.05; e. City has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or f. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Retainage: 1. For all contracts, retainage shall be five percent (5%). E. Liquidated Damages: For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, the sum per day specified in the Agreement will be paid by the Contractor to the City, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages suffered by the City. If feasible, the parties may agree to have the liquidated damages deducted from any amounts owned to Contractor by City instead of being paid directly to City by Contractor. F. Payment: Contractor will be paid pursuant to the requirements of this Article 14 and payment will become due in accordance with the Contract Documents. G. Reduction in Payment 1. City may refuse to make payment of the of the amount requested because: a. Claims have been made against City based on Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work, or City has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. City has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. City has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 56 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 g. City has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.08, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 13.05; h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause; j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones or Final Acceptance of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to City to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; l. Other items entitle City to a set-off against the payment amount requested; or m. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02. 2. If City refuses to make payment of the amount requested, City will give Contractor written notice stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. City shall pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by City and Contractor, within a reasonable time after Contractor remedies the reasons for such action to the satisfaction of City and City has confirmed such action. 14.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to City no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.03 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Final Acceptance of all the Work, City may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which City determines constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by City for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work. City at any time may notify Contractor in writing to of any such part of the Work which City determines to be ready for its intended use. In addition, City may request in writing that Contractor permit City to use or occupy any such part of the Work that City believes to be substantially complete, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time, Contractor may notify City that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use. 2. Within a reasonable time after notification as enumerated in Paragraph 14.03, City and Contractor shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If City does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, City will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. 3. Partial Utilization by City will not constitute Final Acceptance by City. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 57 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 14.04 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. City will promptly schedule a Final Inspection with Contractor. 2. City will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. B. City reserves the right to deny request for Final Inspection if City determines that the entire Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant a Final Inspection. 14.05 Final Acceptance A. Upon completion by Contractor to City’s satisfaction, of any and all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including any corrections or additional Work identified in the Final Inspection and delivery of all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurances, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents and other required documents in accordance with the Contract Documents, City will issue to Contractor a letter of Final Acceptance. 14.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. Upon receipt of a letter of Final Acceptance from City, Contractor may make application for Final Payment following the procedures for requesting payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 6.03; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to City free and clear of any Liens or other title defects or will so pass upon final payment; d. a list of all Contract Claims or Damage Claims against City that Contractor believes are unsettled; e. affidavits of payments and complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to City) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work; and f. a completed subcontractor form identifying the subcontractor/supplier(s) and the description of Work and/or materials provided, if any. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 58 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 B. Payment Becomes Due: The final payment requested by Contractor, less previous payments made and less any sum to which City is entitled, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and payable: 1. After City’s acceptance of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation; and 2. After all Damage Claims have been resolved: a. directly by the Contractor; or b. Contractor provides evidence that the Damage Claim has been reported to Contractor’s insurance provider for resolution. The making of the final payment by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or other requirements of the Contract that continue thereafter. 14.07 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release A. If final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if City so confirms, City may, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by City for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in Paragraph 14.01.D, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 6.02, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to City with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Contract Claims. B. Partial Retainage Release. If the Contract provides for separate establishment and maintenance periods and/or test and performance periods following the completion of all other construction in the Contract Documents for all Work locations, the City may release a portion of the amount retained provided that all other work is completed as determined by the City. Before the release, all submittals and final quantities must be completed and accepted for all other work. An amount sufficient to ensure Contract compliance will be retained. 14.08 Waiver of Claims A. The acceptance of final payment will constitute a waiver and release by Contractor of all claims, rights, causes of action, or liabilities, including Contract Claims, against City arising out of, related to or under the Contract or for any act, omission or neglect of City. 14.09 Correction Period A. If within two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the Contract Documents) any Work has been found to be defective, or Contractor’s repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas, or areas made available for Contractor’s use by City has been found to be defective, then after receipt of City’s written notice of defect, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to City and in accordance with City’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas, or areas made available for Contractor’s use by City; 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 59 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 2. correct such defective Work; 3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by City, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of City’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Acceptance of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, repaired or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 14.09, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work may be extended for an additional period of one year after the end of the initial correction period. E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 14.09 are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 City May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, City may suspend the Work or any portion thereof by written notice to Contractor. City may fix the date on which Work will be resumed in such notice, and Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. During a temporary suspension of the Work covered by these Contract Documents, for any reason, the City will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. B. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the Project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and should it be determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and City that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable period of time, Contractor may request an extension in Contract Time, directly attributable to any such suspension. C. If it should become necessary to suspend the Work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such a manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way; Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; and Contractor shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where necessary. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 60 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 D. Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving its equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the City that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit or overhead will be allowed. Reimbursement may not be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City. 15.02 City May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events by way of example, but not of limitation, may justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Project Schedule established under Paragraph 2.06 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 7.05); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract; or 3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or 4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of City; or 5. Contractor’s failure to promptly make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or defects of any nature, the correction of which has been directed in writing by the City; or 6. Substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the Contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose; or 7. Substantial indication that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt, or otherwise financially unable to perform the Work satisfactorily; or 8. Contractor commences legal action in a court of competent jurisdiction against the City. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occurs, City will provide written notice to Contractor and Surety to arrange a conference with Contractor and Surety to address Contractor’s failure to perform the Work. The conference shall be held not later than 15 days after receipt of notice. by both Contractor and surety. 1. If the City, the Contractor, and the Surety do not agree to allow the Contractor to proceed to perform the Contract, the City may, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, declare a Contractor default and formally terminate the Contractor's right to complete the Contract. Contractor default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after the Contractor and Surety have received notice of the conference to address Contractor's failure to perform the Work. 2. If Contractor's services are terminated, Surety shall be obligated to take over and perform the Work. If Surety does not commence performance thereof within 15 consecutive calendar days after date of an additional written notice demanding Surety’s performance of its obligations, then City, without process or action at law, may take over any portion of the Work and complete it as described below. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 61 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 a. If City completes the Work, City may exclude Contractor and Surety from the Site and take possession of the Work, and all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor, but which are stored elsewhere, and the Work as City may deem expedient. 3. Whether City or Surety completes the Work, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by City, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to City. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by City will be incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph 15.02, City shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. 4. Neither City, nor any of its respective consultants, agents, officers, elected or appointed officials, directors or employees shall be in any way liable or accountable to Contractor or Surety for the method by which the completion of the said Work, or any portion thereof, may be accomplished or for the price paid therefor. 5. City, notwithstanding the method used in completing the Contract, shall not forfeit the right to recover damages from Contractor or Surety for Contractor's failure to timely complete the entire Contract. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim, counterclaim or offset on account of the method used by City in completing the Contract. 6. Maintenance of the Work shall continue to be Contractor's and Surety's responsibilities as provided for in the bond requirements of the Contract Documents or any special guarantees provided for under the Contract Documents or any other obligations otherwise under the Contract or prescribed by law. C. Notwithstanding Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. D. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by City, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of City against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of City against Contractor or Surety. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by City will not release Contractor from liability. E. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.02, the termination procedures of that bond shall not supersede the provisions of this Article 15. 15.03 City May Terminate for Convenience A. City may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of City, terminate the Contract, in whole or in part. Any termination shall be affected by giving notice of the termination to the Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Notice shall be deemed validly given if given in accordance with Paragraph 17.01.A. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 62 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 B. After a notice of termination, has been given, and except as otherwise directed by the City, the Contractor shall: 1. stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination; 2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated; 3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the Work terminated by notice of termination; 4. transfer title to the City and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the City: a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, Work in progress, completed Work, supplies and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the Work terminated by the notice of the termination; and b. the completed, or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the City. 5. complete performance of such Work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination; and 6. take such action as may be necessary, or as the City may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract that is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the City has or may acquire the rest. C. At a time not later than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the Contractor may submit to the City a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of in accordance with the Contract, exclusive of items the disposition of which has been directed or authorized by City. D. Not later than 15 days after Contractor’s submission of the certified list to City pursuant to Paragraph 15.03.C, the City shall accept title to such items, subject to verification of the list by the City upon removal of the items or,. If the items are stored, then City shall have 45 days after submission of the list, to verify the list submitted and accept title to such items. Any necessary adjustments to correct the list as submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement. E. Not later than 60 days after the notice of termination has been given, the Contractor shall submit hisits termination claim to the City in the form and with the certification prescribed by the City. Unless an extension request is made in writing within such 60-day period by the Contractor, and granted by the City, any and all such claims of Contractor that are not submitted to City within such 60-day period shall be conclusively deemed waived. F. Should a termination claim be timely submitted to the City, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 63 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 and profit on such Work calculated and determined in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses calculated and determined in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. reasonable expenses directly attributable to reasonable and necessary wind-down and termination activities, without any overhead or profit. G. In the event of the failure of the Contractor and City to agree upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the Work, the City shall determine, on the basis of information submitted and available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and City shall pay to the Contractor the amounts so determined. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of, related to or resulting from such termination. ARTICLE 16 – RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either City or Contractor may request mediation of any Contract Claim submitted for a decision under Paragraph 11.07 before such decision becomes final and binding. The request for mediation shall be submitted to the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 11.07.E. B. City and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be commenced within 60 calendar days of filing of the request. C. The parties shall agree on a mediator; however, if they cannot agree within 14 calendar days then the Denton County Alternative Dispute Resolution Program (“DCAP”) shall appoint a mediator. The mediation session shall be held within 45 days of the retention of the mediator, and last for at least one full mediation day, before any party has the option to withdraw from the process. The parties may agree to continue the mediation process beyond one day, until there is a settlement agreement, or one party, or the mediator, states that there is no reason to continue because of an impasse that cannot be overcome and sends a “notice of termination of mediation.” All reasonable efforts will be made to complete the mediation within 30 days of the first mediation session. All costs of mediation shall be borne equally by the parties. D. All communications, both written and oral, during Phases A and B are confidential and shall be treated as settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence; however, documents generated in the ordinary course of business prior to the Dispute, that would otherwise be discoverable, do not become confidential simply because they are used in the Negotiation and/or Mediation process. E. The process shall be confidential based on terms acceptable to the mediator and/or mediation service provider. 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 64 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 F. If the Contract Claim is not resolved by mediation, City’s action under Paragraph 11.07.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 11.07.C.3 or 11.07.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, City or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any other dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Contract Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Contract Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction as set forth within the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered: 1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, if to City, to the duly authorized representative of City identified in the Contract Documents or to City’s Project Manager or, if to Contractor, to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or 3. by e-mail to the recipient. 17.02 Computation of Time A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day that is a state or federal holiday observed by the City, the next Business Day shall become the last day of the period. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws and Regulations, in equity, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.03 will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither City, nor any of its officers, directors, elected or appointed officials, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. Further, the Contractor may only claim and the City may only be liable for those damages that are set forth in Subchapter I, Chapter 271 of the Texas 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 65 of 65 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised November 20, 2020 Local Government Code and the City shall not be liable for any consequential damages, exemplary damages or damages for unabsorbed home office overhead. 17.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. B. The City has not waived its sovereign immunity except as expressly set forth in Subchapter I, Chapter 271 of the Texas Local Government Code or as expressly waived by other statute. 17.06 Survival of Obligations All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and Final Acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor. 17.07 Assignment of Contract A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract. 17.08 Successors and Assigns A. City and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 17.09 Governing Law A. The Contract shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas without regard to conflicts of law principles. 17.10 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 1 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 SECTION 00 73 00 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3 TO 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS 5 6 Supplementary Conditions 7 8 These Supplementary Conditions modify and supplement Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions, and other 9 provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions of the General Conditions that are 10 modified or supplemented remain in full force and effect as so modified or supplemented. All provisions 11 of the General Conditions which are not so modified or supplemented remain in full force and effect. 12 13 Defined Terms 14 15 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions have the 16 meaning assigned to them in the General Conditions, unless specifically noted herein. 17 18 Modifications and Supplements 19 20 The following are instructions that modify or supplement specific paragraphs in the General Conditions and 21 other Contract Documents. 22 23 SC-5.01A 24 25 Easement limits shown on the Drawing are approximate and were provided to establish a basis for bidding. 26 Upon receiving the final easements descriptions, Contractor shall compare them to the lines shown on the 27 Contract Drawings. 28 29 SC-5.01A.1., Availability of Lands 30 31 The following is a list of known outstanding right-of-way, and/or easements to be acquired, if any as of 32 2/16/26: 33 34 Outstanding Right-Of-Way, and/or Easements to Be Acquired PARCEL NUMBER OWNER TARGET DATE OF POSSESSION 537526 & 675524 Right of Entry Robson Denton Dev LP 4/16/2026 75362 & 114264 Right of Entry DF Denton Fund 28 LTD P/S 4/16/2026 35 36 The Contractor understands and agrees that the dates listed above are estimates only, are not guaranteed, 37 and do not bind the City. 38 39 If Contractor considers the final easements provided to differ materially from the representations on the 40 Contract Drawings, Contractor shall within five (5) Business Days and before proceeding with the Work, 41 notify City in writing associated with the differing easement line locations. 42 43 SC-5.01A.2, Availability of Lands 44 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 2 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 Utilities or obstructions to be removed, adjusted, and/or relocated 2 3 The following is list of utilities and/or obstructions that have not been removed, adjusted, and/or relocated 4 as of 2/16/26 5 EXPECTED OWNER UTILITY AND LOCATION TARGET DATE OF ADJUSTMENT NONE 6 The Contractor understands and agrees that the dates listed above are estimates only, are not guaranteed, 7 and do not bind the City. 8 9 SC-5.03A., Subsurface and Physical Conditions 10 11 The following are reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: 12 NONE 13 14 The following are drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface 15 structures (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site of the Work: 16 NONE 17 18 SC-5.05 A., Underground Faci lities 19 20 The following are additional resources for identification of Underground Facilities which are at or 21 contiguous to the site of the Work, and which are not necessarily shown in the Drawings: 22 NONE 23 24 SC-5.06A., Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site 25 26 The following are reports and drawings of existing hazardous environmental conditions known to the City: 27 NONE 28 29 SC-6.02, Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds 30 31 The Contract Price for Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds will be the same as indicated 32 in Article 3 as listed in the Agreement. 33 34 SC-6.03A., Certificates of Insurance 35 36 The entities listed below are "additional insureds as their interest may appear" including their respective 37 officers, directors, agents and employees. 38 39 (1) City 40 (2) Consultant: NONE 41 (3) Other: NONE 42 43 SC-6.04A., Contractors Insu rance 44 45 The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph GC-6.04 shall provide the following 46 coverages for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 47 48 6.04A. Workers’ Compensation, under Paragraph GC-6.04A. 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 3 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 2 Statutory limits 3 Employer’s liability 4 $100,000 each accident/occurrence 5 $100,000 Disease - each employee 6 $500,000 Disease - policy limit 7 8 SC-6.04B., Contractors Insu rance 9 10 6.04B. Commercial General Liability, under Paragraph GC-6.04B. Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11 under Paragraph GC-6.04B., which shall be on a per project basis covering the Contractor with 12 minimum limits of: 13 14 $1,000,000 each occurrence 15 $2,000,000 aggregate limit 16 17 The policy must have an endorsement (Amendment Aggregate Limits of Insurance) making the 18 General Aggregate Limits apply separately to each job site. 19 20 The Commercial General Liability Insurance policies shall provide X, C, and U coverages. 21 Verification of such coverage must be shown in the Remarks Article of the Certificate of Insurance. 22 23 SC 6.04C., Contractors Insurance 24 6.04C. Automobile Liability, under Paragraph GC-6.04C. Contractors Liability Insurance under 25 Paragraph GC-6.04C., which shall be in an amount not less than the following amounts: 26 27 (1)Automobile Liability - a commercial business policy shall provide coverage on "Any Auto", 28 defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned. 29 30 $1,000,000 each accident on a combined single limit basis. 31 32 SC-6.04D., Contractors Insu rance 33 34 The Contractors construction activities will require its employees, agents, subcontractors, equipment, and 35 material deliveries to cross railroad properties and tracks, or perform work within 25 feet of the center line 36 of tracks NONE. 37 38 The Contractor shall conduct its operations on railroad properties in such a manner as not to interfere with, 39 hinder, or obstruct the railroad company in any manner whatsoever in the use or operation of its/their trains 40 or other property. Such operations on railroad properties may require that Contractor to execute a Right of 41 Entry Agreement with the particular railroad company or companies involved, and to this end the 42 Contractor should satisfy itself as to the requirements of each railroad company and be prepared to execute 43 the right-of-entry (if any) required by a railroad company. The requirements specified herein likewise relate 44 to the Contractors use of private and/or construction access roads crossing said railroad companys 45 properties. 46 47 The Contractual Liability coverage required by Paragraph 5.04D of the General Conditions shall provide 48 coverage for not less than the following amounts, issued by companies satisfactory to the City and to the 49 Railroad Company for a term that continues for so long as the Contractors operations and work cross, 50 occupy, or touch railroad property: 51 52 (1) General Aggregate:$Confirm Limits with Railroad 53 54 (2) Each Occurrence:$Confirm Limits with Railroad 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 4 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 2 Required for this Contract X Not required for this Contract 3 4 With respect to the above outlined insurance requirements, the following shall govern: 5 6 1. Where a single railroad company is involved, the Contractor shall provide one insurance policy in 7 the name of the railroad company. However, if more than one grade separation or at-grade 8 crossing is affected by the Project at entirely separate locations on the line or lines of the same 9 railroad company, separate coverage may be required, each in the amount stated above. 10 11 2. Where more than one railroad company is operating on the same right-of-way or where several 12 railroad companies are involved and operated on their own separate rights-of-way, the Contractor 13 may be required to provide separate insurance policies in the name of each railroad company. 14 15 3. If, in addition to a grade separation or an at-grade crossing, other work or activity is proposed on a 16 railroad companys right-of-way at a location entirely separate from the grade separation or at- 17 grade crossing, insurance coverage for this work must be included in the policy covering the grade 18 separation. 19 20 4. If no grade separation is involved but other work is proposed on a railroad companys right-of- 21 way, all such other work may be covered in a single policy for that railroad, even though the work 22 may be at two or more separate locations. 23 24 No work or activities on a railroad companys property to be performed by the Contractor shall be 25 commenced until the Contractor has furnished the City with an original policy or policies of the insurance 26 for each railroad company named, as required above. All such insurance must be approved by the City and 27 each affected Railroad Company prior to the Contractors beginning work. 28 29 The insurance specified above must be carried until all Work to be performed on the railroad right-of-way 30 has been completed and the grade crossing, if any, is no longer used by the Contractor. In addition, 31 insurance must be carried during all maintenance and/or repair work performed in the railroad right-of-way. 32 Such insurance must name the railroad company as the insured, together with any tenant or lessee of the 33 railroad company operating over tracks involved in the Project. 34 35 SC 6.04F., Contractors Insurance 36 Add Paragraph 6.04F. Environmental Impairment/Pollution 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Environmental Impairment/Pollution Insurance to include coverage for the handling, receiving, dispensing, removal, storage, testing, transportation, disposal, discharge, dispersal release or escape of any hazardous material into or upon land, or any structure on land, the atmosphere or any watercourse or body of water, including ground water, with a minimum combined bodily injury (including death) and property damage limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence to be obtained upon substantial completion and acceptance of facility by the City. SC-7.08C., Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers The following subcontractors shall be required to be utilized by the Contractor for specific portions of the Work as indicated below: Required Subcontractors SUBCONTRACTOR COMPANY NAME DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED NONE 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 5 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 2 SC-7.11., Permits and Utilities 3 4 SC-7.11A., Contractor obtained permits and licenses 5 The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the Contractor: 6 NONE 7 8 SC-7.11B. City obtained permits and li censes 9 The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the City: 10 NONE 11 12 SC-7.11C. Outstanding permi ts and licenses 13 14 The following is a list of known outstanding permits and/or licenses to be acquired, if any as of 12/8/25: 15 16 Outstanding Permits and/or Licenses to Be Acquired OWNER PERMIT OR LICENSE AND LOCATION TARGET DATE OF POSSESSION NONE 17 18 SC-8.02., Coordination 19 20 The individuals or entities listed below have contracts with the City for the performance of other work at 21 the Site: 22 Vendor Scope of Work Coordination Authority NONE 23 24 SC-9.01, Communications to Contractor 25 26 There are no special communications requirements for this project. 27 28 SC-10.01B., Citys Pro ject Manager 29 30 The Citys Project Manager for this Contract is Megan Davidson, or his/her successor pursuant to written 31 notification from the City Engineer. 32 33 SC-13.02B., Tests and Inspections 34 35 NONE 36 37 SC-14.01G, Reduction in Payme nt 38 39 Add Paragraph 14.01G.3: 40 41 3. City may reduce payments to the Contractor, if the number of Days that have passed after the date 42 listed on the Notice to Proceed exceeds the Contract Time for Substantial Completion. 43 44 SC-16.01C.1, Methods and Procedures 45 46 NONE 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 6 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised February 27, 2023 Effective February 27, 2023 1 2 SC 17.01, Documents 3 4 Any documents submitted to the City in electronic format shall be considered equivalent to an original of 5 such document. 6 7 8 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 00 73 73 FORM 1295 - CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective January 15, 2021 1 SECTION 00 73 73 2 FORM 1295 - CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES 3 4 5 6 [Contractor: Replace this page with Form 1295 for this Contract, which can be obtained at 7 www.ethics.state.tx.us] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 11 00 2 SUMMARY OF WORK 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Summary of Work to be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents 7 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 8 1. None. 9 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 11 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 12 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 13 A. Measurement and Payment 14 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 15 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 16 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 17 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 18 A. Work Covered by Contract Documents 19 1. Work is to include furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment, and performing 20 all Work necessary for this construction project as detailed in the Drawings and 21 Specifications. 22 B. Incidental Work 23 1. Any and all Work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the 24 project, such as conditions imposed by the Contract Documents in which no 25 specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal, then the item shall be 26 considered as an incidental item of Work, the cost of which shall be included in the 27 price bid in the Proposal for various bid items. 28 C. Use of Premises 29 1. Coordinate uses of premises under direction of the City. 30 2. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and 31 equipment stored on the Site. 32 3. Use and occupy only portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places 33 or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the 34 Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the City. 35 a. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction 36 purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid 37 delay in the construction operations. 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 b. Excavated and waste materials shall be stored in such a way as not to interfere 2 with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed 3 and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property. 4 c. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks, the Work shall be carried on in such 5 manner as not to interfere with the operation of the railroad. 6 1) All Work shall be in accordance with railroad requirements set forth in 7 Division 0 as well as the railroad permit. 8 D. Work within Easements 9 1. Do not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously 10 obtained permission from the owner of such property. 11 2. Do not store equipment or material on private property unless and until the 12 specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the 13 Contractor and a copy furnished to the City. 14 3. Unless specifically provided otherwise, clear all rights-of-way or easements of 15 obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the 16 Work as a part of the project construction operations. 17 4. Preserve and use every precaution to prevent damage to, all trees, shrubbery, plants, 18 lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, 19 to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or 20 appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all 21 other public or private property adjacent to the Work. 22 5. Notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private 23 lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the Work. 24 a. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the 25 Work. 26 b. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies and any 27 corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, 28 whose land or interest in land might be affected by the Work. 29 c. Be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting 30 from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or 31 execution of the Work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or 32 equipment. 33 6. Fence 34 a. Restore all fences encountered and removed during construction of the Work to 35 the original or a better than original condition. 36 b. Erect temporary fencing in place of the fencing removed whenever the Work is 37 not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to 38 provide site security. 39 c. The cost for all fence work within easements, including removal, temporary 40 closures and replacement, shall be incidental to the various items bid in the 41 project proposal, unless a bid item is specifically provided in the proposal. 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 5 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 6 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 7 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 8 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 11 END OF SECTION 12 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 13 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 25 00 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. The procedure for requesting the approval of substitution of a product that is not 7 equivalent to a product which is specified by descriptive or performance criteria or 8 defined by reference to 1 or more of the following: 9 a. Name of manufacturer 10 b. Name of vendor 11 c. Trade name 12 d. Catalog number 13 2. Substitutions are not "or-equals". 14 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 15 1. None. 16 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 17 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 18 2. Division 1 General Requirements 19 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 20 A. Measurement and Payment 21 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 22 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 23 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 24 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 25 A. Request for Substitution - General 26 1. Within 30 days after award of Contract (unless noted otherwise), the City will 27 consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of 28 those specified. 29 2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in Specifications by 30 means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or 31 catalog numbers. 32 a. When this method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from 33 consideration other products bearing other manufacturer’s or vendor’s names, 34 trade names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are "or-equals," as 35 determined by City. 36 3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable substitutions 37 under the following conditions: 38 a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products 39 meeting specified requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor; 40 or, 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 b. Contractor proposes a cost and/or time reduction incentive to the City. 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS 3 A. See Request for Substitution Form (attached) 4 B. Procedure for Requesting Substitution 5 1. Substitution shall be considered only: 6 a. After award of Contract 7 b. Under the conditions stated herein 8 2. Submit one PDF copy via email to the Project Manager and their duly appointed 9 representative, including: 10 a. Documentation 11 1) Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 12 Contract Documents 13 2) Data relating to changes in construction schedule, when a reduction is 14 proposed 15 3) Data relating to changes in cost 16 b. For products 17 1) Product identification 18 a) Manufacturer’s name 19 b) Telephone number and representative contact name 20 c) Specification Section or Drawing reference of originally specified 21 product, including discrete name or tag number assigned to original 22 product in the Contract Documents 23 2) Manufacturer’s literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed 24 product with Contract Documents 25 3) Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product 26 characteristics including, but not necessarily limited to: 27 a) Size 28 b) Composition or materials of construction 29 c) Weight 30 d) Electrical or mechanical requirements 31 4) Product experience 32 a) Location of past projects utilizing product 33 b) Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced 34 projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product 35 c) Available field data and reports associated with proposed product 36 5) Samples 37 a) Provide at request of City. 38 b) Samples become the property of the City. 39 c. For construction methods: 40 1) Detailed description of proposed method 41 2) Illustration drawings 42 C. Approval or Rejection 43 1. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the City 44 2. City reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern 45 of specified product if necessary to secure design intent. 46 3. In the event the substitution is approved, the resulting cost and/or time reduction 47 will be documented by Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions. 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4. No additional contract time will be given for substitution. 2 5. Substitution will be rejected if: 3 a. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval 4 b. Request is not made in accordance with this Specification Section 5 c. In the Citys opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the original 6 design 7 d. In the Citys opinion, substitution will not perform adequately the function 8 consistent with the design intent 9 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 10 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 11 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 12 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 13 A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, the Contractor 14 represents that the Contractor: 15 1. Has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is adequate or 16 superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which 17 it is intended 18 2. Will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified 19 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building 20 modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be 21 complete in all respects 22 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently 23 arise 24 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 25 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 26 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 28 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 29 END OF SECTION 30 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 EXHIBIT A 2 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM: 3 4 TO: 5 PROJECT: DATE: 6 We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for 7 the above project: 8 SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED 9 ITEM 10 11 12 Proposed Substitution: 13 Reason for Substitution: 14 Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed 15 substitution will require for its proper installation. 16 17 Fill in Blanks Below: 18 A. Will the undersigned contractor pay for changes to the building design, including engineering 19 and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? 20 21 22 B. What effect does substitution have on other trades? 23 24 25 C. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? 26 27 28 D. Differences in product cost or product delivery time? 29 30 31 E. Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: 32 33 Equal Better (explain on attachment) 34 The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the 35 specified item. 36 Submitted By: For Use by City 37 38 Signature Recommended Recommended 39 as noted 40 41 Firm Not recommended Received late 42 Address By 43 Date 44 Date Remarks 45 Telephone 46 47 For Use by City: 48 49 Approved Rejected 50 City Date 01 31 19 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 31 19 2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Provisions for the preconstruction meeting to be held prior to the start of Work to 7 clarify construction contract administration procedures 8 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 9 1. None. 10 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 11 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 12 2. Division 1 General Requirements 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 16 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 17 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 18 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 19 A. Coordination 20 1. Attend preconstruction meeting. 21 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings 22 shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 23 3. Meeting administered by City may be tape recorded. 24 a. If recorded, tapes will be used to prepare minutes and retained by City for 25 future reference. 26 4. Project Manager will establish their duly authorized representative(s) authorized to 27 make decisions as identified in the Contract Documents. 28 B. Preconstruction Meeting 29 1. A preconstruction meeting will be held within 14 days after the execution of the 30 Agreement and before Work is started. 31 a. The meeting will be scheduled and administered by the City. 32 2. The Project Manager will preside at the meeting, prepare the notes of the meeting 33 and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully completing 34 the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of the meeting. 35 3. Attendance shall include: 36 a. Project Manager 37 b. Project Managers duly authorized representative (if any) 38 c. Contractor’s project manager 01 31 19 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 d. Contractor’s superintendent 2 e. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire 3 to invite or the City may request 4 f. Other City representatives 5 g. Others as appropriate 6 4. Construction Schedule 7 a. Prepare baseline construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16 and 8 provide at Preconstruction Meeting. 9 b. City will notify Contractor of any schedule changes upon Notice of 10 Preconstruction Meeting. 11 5. Preliminary Agenda may include: 12 a. Introduction of Project Personnel 13 b. General Description of Project 14 c. Status of right-of-way, utility clearances, easements or other pertinent permits 15 d. Contractors work plan and schedule 16 e. Contract Time 17 f. Notice to Proceed 18 g. Construction Staking 19 h. Progress Payments 20 i. Extra Work and Change Order Procedures 21 j. Field Orders 22 k. Disposal Site Letter for Waste Material 23 l. Insurance Renewals 24 m. Payroll Certification 25 n. Material Certifications and Quality Control Testing 26 o. Public Safety and Convenience 27 p. Documentation of Pre-Construction Conditions 28 q. Weekend Work Notification 29 r. Legal Holidays 30 s. Trench Safety Plans 31 t. Confined Space Entry Standards 32 u. Coordination with the Citys representative for operations of existing water 33 systems 34 v. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 35 w. Coordination with other Contractors 36 x. Early Warning System 37 y. Contractor Evaluation 38 z. Special Conditions applicable to the project 39 aa. Damages Claims 40 bb. Submittal Procedures 41 cc. Substitution Procedures 42 dd. Correspondence Routing 43 ee. Record Drawings 44 ff. Temporary construction facilities 45 gg. Final Acceptance 46 hh. Final Payment 47 ii. Communications Plan 48 jj. Questions or Comments 01 31 19 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 5 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 6 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 7 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 8 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 11 END OF SECTION 12 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 13 01 31 20 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 31 20 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Provisions for project meetings throughout the construction period to enable orderly 7 review of the progress of the Work and to provide for systematic discussion of 8 potential problems 9 B. Deviations this City of Denton Standard Specification 10 1. None. 11 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 12 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 13 2. Division 1 General Requirements 14 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 15 A. Measurement and Payment 16 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 17 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 18 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 19 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 20 A. Coordination 21 1. Schedule, attend and administer as specified, periodic progress meetings, and 22 specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work. 23 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings 24 shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 25 3. Meetings administered by City may be recorded. 26 4. Meetings, in addition to those specified in this Section, may be held when requested 27 by the City, Engineer or Contractor. 28 B. Progress Meetings 29 1. Formal project coordination meetings will be held monthly. Meetings will be 30 scheduled and administered by Project Manager. 31 a. Additional meetings may be held at the request of the : 32 1) City 33 2) Engineer 34 3) Contractor 35 2. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be conducted on an as- 36 needed basis. Such additional meetings shall include, but not be limited to: 37 a. Coordinating shutdowns 38 b. Installation of piping and equipment 01 31 20 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 c. Coordination between other construction projects 2 d. Resolution of construction issues 3 e. Equipment approval 4 3. The Project Manager will preside at progress meetings, prepare the notes of the 5 meeting and distribute copies of the same to all participants who so request by fully 6 completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each meeting. 7 4. Attendance shall include: 8 a. Contractor’s project manager 9 b. Contractor’s superintendent 10 c. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire 11 to invite or the City may request 12 d. Engineer’s representatives 13 e. Citys representatives 14 f. Others, as requested by the Project Manager 15 5. Preliminary Agenda may include: 16 a. Review of Work progress since previous meeting 17 b. Field observations, problems, conflicts 18 c. Items which impede construction schedule 19 d. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 20 e. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other 21 construction contracts 22 f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 23 g. Revisions to construction schedule 24 h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding Work period 25 i. Coordination of schedules 26 j. Review submittal schedules 27 k. Maintenance of quality standards 28 l. Pending changes and substitutions 29 m. Review proposed changes for: 30 1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date 31 2) Effect on other contracts of the Project 32 n. Review Record Documents 33 o. Review monthly pay request 34 p. Review status of Requests for Information 35 6. Meeting Location 36 a. The City will establish a meeting location. 37 1) To the extent practicable, meetings will be held at the Site. 01 31 20 PROJECT MEETINGS Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 5 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 6 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 7 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 8 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 11 END OF SECTION 12 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 13 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 32 16 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. General requirements for the preparation, submittal, updating, status reporting and 7 management of the Construction Progress Schedule 8 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 9 1. None. 10 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 11 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 12 2. Division 1 General Requirements 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 16 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 17 1.3 REFERENCES 18 A. Definitions 19 1.Baseline Schedule - Initial schedule submitted before work begins that will serve 20 as the baseline for measuring progress and departures from the schedule. 21 2.Progress Schedule - Monthly submittal of a progress schedule documenting 22 progress on the project and any changes anticipated. 23 3.Schedule Narrative - Concise narrative of the schedule including schedule 24 changes, expected delays, key schedule issues, critical path items, etc 25 B. Reference Standards 26 1. None 27 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 28 A. Baseline Schedule 29 1. General 30 a. Prepare a baseline Schedule using approved software and the Critical Path 31 Method (CPM). 32 b. Review the draft baseline Schedule with the City to demonstrate understanding 33 of the work to be performed and known issues and constraints related to the 34 schedule. 35 c. Designate an authorized representative (Project Scheduler) responsible for 36 developing and updating the schedule and preparing reports. 37 B. Progress Schedule 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 2 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1. Update the progress Schedule monthly. 2 2. Prepare the Schedule Narrative to accompany the monthly progress Schedule. 3 3. Change Orders 4 a. Incorporate approved change orders, resulting in a change of contract time, in 5 the baseline Schedule. 6 C. Responsibility for Schedule Compliance 7 1. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current progress Schedule and CPM Status 8 Report that delays to the critical path have resulted and the Contract completion 9 date will not be met, or when so directed by the City, make some or all of the 10 following actions at no additional cost to the City 11 a. Submit a Recovery Plan to the City for approval revised baseline Schedule 12 outlining: 13 1) A written statement of the steps intended to take to remove or arrest the 14 delay to the critical path in the approved schedule 15 2) Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will 16 substantially eliminate the backlog of work and return current Schedule to 17 meet projected baseline completion dates 18 3) Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working 19 days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination 20 of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work 21 4) Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of 22 accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule 23 2. If no written statement of the steps intended to take is submitted when so requested 24 by the City, the City may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in 25 manpower (trades), equipment and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday 26 work, etc.) to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay 27 to the critical path in the approved schedule. 28 a. No additional cost for such work will be considered. 29 D. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this 30 Contract. 31 a. Requests for an extension of any Contract completion date must be 32 supplemented with the following: 33 1) Furnish justification and supporting evidence as the City may deem 34 necessary to determine whether the requested extension of time is entitled 35 under the provisions of this Contract. 36 a) The City will, after receipt of such justification and supporting 37 evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor, in 38 writing thereof. 39 2) If the City finds that the requested extension of time is entitled, the City’s 40 determination as to the total number of days allowed for the extensions 41 shall be based upon the approved total baseline schedule and on all data 42 relevant to the extension. 43 a) Such data shall be included in the next updating of the Progress 44 schedule. 45 b) Actual delays in activities which, according to the Baseline schedule, 46 do not affect any Contract completion date shown by the critical path in 47 the network will not be the basis for a change therein. 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 3 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. Submit each request for change in Contract completion date to the City within 30 2 days after the beginning of the delay for which a time extension is requested but 3 before the date of final payment under this Contract. 4 a. No time extension will be granted for requests which are not submitted within 5 the foregoing time limit. 6 b. From time to time, it may be necessary for the Contract schedule or completion 7 time to be adjusted by the City to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, 8 technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City or its 9 representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate 10 schedule adjustments or completion time extensions. 11 1) Under such conditions, the City will direct the Contractor to reschedule the 12 work or Contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the 13 Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly. 14 a) No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such 15 schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time 16 extensions beyond the actual completion of unaffected work, in which 17 case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time 18 extension and any additional cost to the City. 19 b) Available float time in the Baseline schedule may be used by the City 20 as well as by the Contractor. 21 3. Float or slack time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date 22 and the latest start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date 23 of a chain of activities on the Baseline Schedule. 24 a. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the 25 Contractor or the City. 26 b. Proceed with work according to early start dates, and the City shall have the 27 right to reserve and apportion float time according to the needs of the project. 28 c. Acknowledge and agree that actual delays, affecting paths of activities 29 containing float time, will not have any effect upon contract completion times, 30 providing that the actual delay does not exceed the float time associated with 31 those activities. 32 E. Coordinating Schedule with Other Contract Schedules 33 1. Where work is to be performed under this Contract concurrently with or contingent 34 upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the 35 Baseline Schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. 36 a. Obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the City for the 37 preparation and updating of Baseline schedule and make the required changes 38 in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules. 39 2. In case of interference between the operations of different contractors, the City will 40 determine the work priority of each contractor and the sequence of work necessary 41 to expedite the completion of the entire Project. 42 a. In such cases, the decision of the City shall be accepted as final. 43 b. The temporary delay of any work due to such circumstances shall not be 44 considered as justification for claims for additional compensation. 45 1.5 SUBMITTALS 46 A. Baseline Schedule 47 1. Submit Schedule in native file format and pdf format. 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 4 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 a. Native file format shall be: 2 1) Microsoft Project 3 2. Submit draft baseline Schedule to City prior to the pre-construction meeting and 4 bring in hard copy to the meeting for review and discussion. 5 B. Progress Schedule 6 1. Submit progress Schedule in native file format and pdf format. 7 2. Submit progress Schedule monthly no later than the 25th day of the month. 8 C. Schedule Narrative 9 1. Submit the schedule narrative in pdf format. 10 2. Submit schedule narrative monthly no later than the 25th day of the month. 11 D. Submittal Process 12 1. Contractor shall submit one (1) hard copy of documents to the Project Managers 13 duly appointed representative. 14 2. Contractor shall submit documents via email to the Project Manager and their duly 15 appointed representative. 16 3. Once the project has been completed and Final Acceptance has been issued by the 17 City, no further progress schedules are required. 18 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 19 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 20 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 21 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 A. The person preparing and revising the construction Progress Schedule shall be 23 experienced in the preparation of schedules of similar complexity. 24 B. Schedule and supporting documents addressed in this Specification shall be prepared, 25 updated and revised to accurately reflect the performance of the construction. 26 C. Contractor is responsible for the quality of all submittals in this section meeting the 27 standard of care for the construction industry for similar projects. 28 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 29 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 30 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 33 34 END OF SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 5 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 1 01 32 33 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 32 33 2 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for: 7 a. Preconstruction Videos 8 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 9 1. None. 10 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 11 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 12 2. Division 1 General Requirements 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. 16 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 17 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 18 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 19 A. Preconstruction Video 20 1. Produce a preconstruction video of the site/alignment, including all areas in the 21 vicinity of and to be affected by construction. 22 a. Provide digital copy of video upon request by the City. 23 2. Retain a copy of the preconstruction video until the end of the maintenance surety 24 period. 25 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 27 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 28 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 29 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 30 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 31 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 32 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 01 32 33 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 2 END OF SECTION 3 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 4 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 33 00 2 SUBMITTALS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. General methods and requirements of submissions applicable to the following Work- 7 related submittals: 8 a. Shop Drawings 9 b. Product Data (including Project Material Submittal Checklist submittals) 10 c. Samples 11 d. Mock Ups 12 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 13 1. None. 14 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 15 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 16 2. Division 1 General Requirements 17 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 18 A. Measurement and Payment 19 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No 20 separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 21 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 22 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 23 A. Coordination 24 1. Notify the City in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the 25 submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 26 2. Coordination of Submittal Times 27 a. Prepare, prioritize and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of 28 performing the related Work or other applicable activities, or within the time 29 specified in the individual Work Sections, of the Specifications. 30 b. Contractor is responsible such that the installation will not be delayed by 31 processing times including, but not limited to: 32 a) Disapproval and resubmittal (if required) 33 b) Coordination with other submittals 34 c) Testing 35 d) Purchasing 36 e) Fabrication 37 f) Delivery 38 g) Similar sequenced activities 39 c. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor’s failure to 40 transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 d. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such 2 sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other 3 contractor. 4 B. Submittal Numbering 5 1. When submitting shop drawings or samples, utilize a submittal cross-reference 6 identification numbering system in the following manner: 7 a. Use the applicable Specification Section Number. 8 b. For the next 2 digits number use numbers 01-99 to sequentially number each 9 initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section number. 10 c. Last use a letter, A-Z, indicating the resubmission of the same drawing (i.e. 11 A=2nd submission, B=3rd submission, C=4th submission, etc.). A typical 12 submittal number would be as follows: 13 14 303-02-B 15 16 1) 303 is the Specification Section for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 17 2) 02 is the second initial submittal under this Specification Section 18 3) B is the third submission (second resubmission) of that particular shop 19 drawing 20 C. Contractor Certification 21 1. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by subcontractors, 22 prior to submission to determine and verify the following: 23 a. Field measurements 24 b. Field construction criteria 25 c. Catalog numbers and similar data 26 d. Conformance with the Contract Documents 27 2. Provide each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor 28 with a Certification Statement affixed including: 29 a. The Contractor’s Company name 30 b. Signature of submittal reviewer 31 c. Certification Statement 32 1) By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified 33 field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, 34 catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each 35 item with other applicable approved shop drawings." 36 D. Submittal Format 37 1. Fold shop drawings larger than 8 ‰ inches x 11 inches to 8 ‰ inches x 11inches. 38 2. Bind shop drawings and product data sheets together. 39 3. Order 40 a. Cover Sheet 41 1) Description of Packet 42 2) Contractor Certification 43 b. List of items / Table of Contents 44 c. Product Data /Shop Drawings/Samples /Calculations 45 E. Submittal Content 46 1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 3 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. The Project title and number 2 3. Contractor identification 3 4. The names of: 4 a. Contractor 5 b. Supplier 6 c. Manufacturer 7 5. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number, page and 8 paragraph(s) 9 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 10 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials 11 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers 12 9. Identification by highlighting of deviations from Contract Documents 13 10. Identification by highlighting of revisions on resubmittals 14 11. An 8-inch x 3-inch blank space for Contractor and City stamps 15 F. Shop Drawings 16 1. As specified in individual Work Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 17 a. Custom-prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) 18 drawings 19 b. Scheduled information 20 c. Setting diagrams 21 d. Actual shopwork manufacturing instructions 22 e. Custom templates 23 f. Special wiring diagrams 24 g. Coordination drawings 25 h. Individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including: 26 1) Performance curves and certifications 27 i. As applicable to the Work 28 2. Details 29 a. Relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure 30 b. Where correct fabrication of the Work depends upon field measurements 31 1) Provide such measurements and note on the drawings prior to submitting for 32 approval. 33 G. Product Data 34 1. For submittals of product data for products included on the Citys Product Material 35 Submittal Checklist, highlight each item selected for use on the Project. 36 2. For submittals of product data for products not included on the Citys Product 37 Material Submittal Checklist, submittal data may include, but is not necessarily 38 limited to: 39 a. Standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as 40 catalog data) 41 1) Such as the manufacturer’s product specification and installation instructions 42 2) Availability of colors and patterns 43 3) Manufacturer’s printed statements of compliances and applicability 44 4) Roughing-in diagrams and templates 45 5) Catalog cuts 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 4 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 6) Product photographs 2 7) Standard wiring diagrams 3 8) Printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams 4 9) Production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications 5 10) Mill reports 6 11) Product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended 7 spare-parts listing and printed product warranties 8 12) As applicable to the Work 9 3. Submittals of product data for products not included on the Citys Product Material 10 Submittal Checklist may be considered a Substitution in accordance with Section 01 11 25 00. 12 4. All deviations from Citys Product Material Submittal Checklist shall require 13 approval by the Engineer of Record for the Project. 14 H. Samples 15 1. As specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to: 16 a. Physical examples of the Work such as: 17 1) Sections of manufactured or fabricated Work 18 2) Small cuts or containers of materials 19 3) Complete units of repetitively used products color/texture/pattern swatches 20 and range sets 21 4) Specimens for coordination of visual effect 22 5) Graphic symbols and units of Work to be used by the City for independent 23 inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work 24 I. Do not start Work requiring a shop drawing, sample or product data nor any material to 25 be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item. 26 1. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction accomplished 27 which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data is at the Contractor’s 28 risk. 29 2. The City will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies 30 required to accomplish conformity. 31 3. Complete project Work, materials, fabrication, and installations in conformance with 32 approved shop drawings, applicable samples, and product data. 33 J. Submittal Distribution 34 1. Electronic Distribution 35 a. Provide all submittals in electronic form via email to Project Manager and their 36 duly appointed representative. 37 b. Shop Drawings 38 1) Email submittal to Project Manager and their duly appointed representative. 39 2) Hard Copies 40 a) Not required 41 c. Product Data 42 1) Email submittal to Project Manager and their duly appointed representative. 43 2) Hard Copies 44 a) Not required 45 d. Samples 46 1) Distributed to the Project Manager 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 5 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 K. Submittal Review 2 1. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance 3 with the design concept and Contract Documents. This is not to be construed as: 4 a. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements 5 b. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, 6 dimensions, and materials 7 c. Approving departures from details furnished by the City, except as otherwise 8 provided herein 9 2. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the City does 10 not relieve the Contractor from his/her responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of 11 the terms of the Contract. 12 a. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor, and the City will 13 have no responsibility therefore. 14 3. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the 15 Work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, 16 for techniques of assembly and for performing Work in a safe manner. 17 4. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a 18 departure from the Contract requirements which City finds to be in the interest of the 19 City and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for 20 performance, the City may return the reviewed drawings without noting an 21 exception. 22 5. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under 1 of the following codes: 23 a. Code 1 24 1) "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or 25 comments on the submittal. 26 a) When returned under this code the Contractor may release the 27 equipment and/or material for manufacture. 28 b. Code 2 29 1) "EXCEPTIONS NOTED". This code is assigned when a confirmation of 30 the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. 31 a) The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; 32 however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final 33 product. 34 c. Code 3 35 1) "EXCEPTIONS NOTED/RESUBMIT". This combination of codes is 36 assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a 37 resubmittal of the package. 38 a) This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and 39 non-conforming items that were noted. 40 b) Resubmittal is to be received by the City within 15 Calendar Days of the 41 date of the City’s transmittal requiring the resubmittal. 42 d. Code 4 43 1) "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent 44 of the Contract Documents. 45 a) The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the 46 submittal into conformance. 47 b) It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor 48 to meet the Contract Documents. 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 6 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 6. Resubmittals 2 a. Handled in the same manner as first submittals 3 1) Corrections other than requested by the City 4 2) Marked with revision triangle or other similar method 5 a) At Contractors risk if not marked 6 b. Submittals for each item will be reviewed no more than twice at the Citys 7 expense. 8 1) All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the City 9 and at the Contractor’s expense, based on the City’s or City Representatives 10 then prevailing rates. 11 2) Provide Contractor reimbursement to the City within 30 Calendar Days for 12 all such fees invoiced by the City. 13 c. The need for more than 1 resubmission or any other delay in obtaining City’s 14 review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract 15 Time. 16 7. Partial Submittals 17 a. City reserves the right to not review submittals deemed partial, at the Citys 18 discretion. 19 b. Submittals deemed by the City to be not complete will be returned to the 20 Contractor, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. 21 c. The City may at its option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the 22 Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 23 8. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to 24 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, then written notice must be provided 25 thereof to the City at least 7 Calendar Days prior to release for manufacture. 26 9. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the City, the 27 Contractor may carry out the construction in accordance therewith and no further 28 changes therein except upon written instructions from the City. 29 10. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 30 Calendar Days 30 following receipt of submittal by the City. 31 L. Mock ups 32 1. Mock Up units as specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily 33 limited to, complete units of the standard of acceptance for that type of Work to be 34 used on the Project. Remove at the completion of the Work or when directed. 35 M. Qualifications 36 1. If specifically required in other Sections of these Specifications, submit a P.E. 37 Certification for each item required. 38 N. Request for Information (RFI) 39 1. Contractor Request for additional information 40 a. Clarification or interpretation of the contract documents 41 b. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between Contract Documents 42 c. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the Drawings and 43 Specifications 44 1) Identify the conflict and request clarification 45 d. When the Contractor encounters an unknown condition in the field 46 2. Use the Request for Information (RFI) form provided by the City (attached). 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 7 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3. Numbering of RFI 2 a. Prefix with RFI followed by series number, -xxx, beginning with 01 and 3 increasing sequentially with each additional transmittal. 4 4. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further 5 information. 6 5. The City will log each request and will review the request. 7 a. If review of the project information request indicates that a change to the 8 Contract Documents is required, the City will issue a Field Order or Change 9 Order, as appropriate. 10 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 11 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 12 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 13 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 14 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 15 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 16 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 17 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 19 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 20 END OF SECTION 21 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 22 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS Page 8 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 2 Project: RFI #: Engineering Project No.: Date Sent: Sender: Receiver: Copies To: 3 Subject: Request: Senders Proposed Answer/Solution : 4 5 THE PROPOSED ANSWER/SOLUTION IS, IS NOT, INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT. 6 Receivers Response : 7 Response By: Company: Date: 8 DISTRIBUTION: 9 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 ITEM 11 2 PROJECT SPECIFIC AMENDMENTS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. This project utilizes City of Denton Specification Documents for General Provisions 6 and General Requirements and Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT) Standard 7 Specifications for Technical Specifications. Wherever the TXDOT Standard 8 Specifications refer to TXDOT General Requirements (Items or Articles 2-10) the 9 Contractor shall instead refer to the appropriate City of Denton General Provision or 10 General Requirement specification. 11 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 12 1. None. 13 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 14 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 15 2. Division 1 General Requirements 16 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 17 A. Measurement and Payment 18 1. Coordination within Railroad permit areas 19 a. Measurement 20 1) Measurement for this Item will be by lump sum. 21 b. Payment 22 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 23 will be paid for at the lump sum price bid for Railroad Coordination. 24 c. The price bid shall include: 25 1) Mobilization 26 2) Inspection 27 3) Safety training 28 4) Additional Insurance 29 5) Insurance Certificates 30 6) Other requirements associated with general coordination with Railroad, 31 including additional employees required to protect the right-of-way and 32 property of the Railroad from damage arising out of and/or from the 33 construction of the Project. 34 2. Railroad Flagmen 35 a. Measurement 36 1) Measurement for this Item will be per working day. 37 b. Payment 38 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 39 will be paid for each working day that Railroad Flagmen are present at the 40 Site. 41 c. The price bid shall include: 42 1) Coordination for scheduling flagmen 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2) Flagmen 2 3) Other requirements associated with Railroad 3 3. All other items 4 a. Work associated with these Items is considered incidental to the various Items 5 bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 6 1.3 REFERENCES 7 A. Reference Standards 8 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 9 standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 10 Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 11 2. Health and Safety Code, Title 9. Safety, Subtitle A. Public Safety, Chapter 752. 12 High Voltage Overhead Lines. 13 3. North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) Clean Construction 14 Specification 15 4. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA) Standards 29 CFR Part 16 1910.146 Permit-Required Confined Spaces 17 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 18 A. Coordination with the Texas Department of Transportation 19 1. When work in the right-of-way which is under the jurisdiction of the Texas 20 Department of Transportation (TxDOT): 21 a. Notify the Texas Department of Transportation prior to commencing any work 22 therein in accordance with the provisions of the permit 23 b. All work performed in the TxDOT right-of-way shall be performed in 24 compliance with and subject to approval from the Texas Department of 25 Transportation 26 B. Work near High Voltage Lines 27 1. Regulatory Requirements 28 a. All Work near High Voltage Lines (more than 600 volts measured between 29 conductors or between a conductor and the ground) shall be in accordance with 30 Health and Safety Code, Title 9, Subtitle A, Chapter 752. 31 2. Warning sign 32 a. Provide sign of sufficient size meeting all OSHA requirements. 33 3. Equipment operating within 10 feet of high voltage lines will require the following 34 safety features 35 a. Insulating cage-type of guard about the boom or arm 36 b. Insulator links on the lift hook connections for back hoes or dippers 37 c. Equipment must meet the safety requirements as set forth by OSHA and the 38 safety requirements of the owner of the high voltage lines 39 4. Work within 6 feet of high voltage electric lines 40 a. Notification shall be given to: 41 1) The power company (example: Denton Municipal Electric) 42 a) Maintain an accurate log of all such calls to power company and record 43 action taken in each case. 44 b. Coordination with power company 45 1) After notification coordinate with the power company to: 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 a) Erect temporary mechanical barriers, de-energize the lines, or raise or 2 lower the lines 3 c. No personnel may work within 6 feet of a high voltage line before the above 4 requirements have been met. 5 C. Confined Space Entry Program 6 1. Provide and follow approved Confined Space Entry Program in accordance with 7 OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910.146 requirements. 8 2. Confined Spaces include: 9 a. Manholes 10 b. All other confined spaces in accordance with OSHAs Permit Required for 11 Confined Spaces 12 D. Air Pollution Watch Days 13 1. General 14 a. Observe the following guidelines relating to working on City construction sites 15 on days designated as AIR POLLUTION WATCH DAYS. 16 b. Typical Ozone Season 17 1) May 1 through October 31. 18 c. Critical Emission Time 19 1) 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. 20 2. Watch Days 21 a. The Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), in coordination 22 with the National Weather Service, will issue the Air Pollution Watch by 3:00 23 p.m. on the afternoon prior to the WATCH day. 24 b. Requirements 25 1) Begin work after 10:00 a.m. whenever construction phasing requires the 26 use of motorized equipment for periods in excess of 1 hour. 27 2) However, the Contractor may begin work prior to 10:00 a.m. if: 28 a) Use of motorized equipment is less than 1 hour, or 29 b) If equipment is new and certified by EPA as Low Emitting, or 30 equipment burns Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), diesel emulsions, or 31 alternative fuels such as CNG. 32 E. TCEQ Air Permit 33 1. Obtain TCEQ Air Permit for construction activities per requirements of TCEQ. 34 F. Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. 35 1. When Contract Documents permit on the project the following will apply: 36 a. Public Notification 37 1) Submit notice to City and proof of adequate insurance coverage, 24 hours 38 prior to commencing. 39 2) Minimum 24-hour public notification in accordance with paragraph 1.4.H 40 of this Section. 41 G. Water Utilities Coordination 42 1. During the construction of this project, it may be necessary to deactivate, for a 43 period of time, existing lines. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate with 44 Water Utilities to determine the best times for deactivating and activating those 45 lines. 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. Coordinate any event that will require connecting to or the operation of an existing 2 City water line system with the Citys representative. 3 a. If needed, obtain a hydrant water meter from Water Utilities for use during the 4 life of named project. 5 b. In the event that a water valve on an existing live system is required to be 6 turned off or on to accommodate the construction of the project is required, 7 coordinate this activity through the appropriate City representative. 8 1) Do not operate water line valves of existing water system. 9 a) Failure to comply will render the Contractor in violation of Texas Penal 10 Code Title 7, Chapter 28.03 (Criminal Mischief) and the Contractor 11 will be prosecuted to the full extent of the law. 12 b) In addition, the Contractor will assume all liabilities and 13 responsibilities as a result of these actions. 14 H. Public Notification Prior to Beginning Construction 15 1. Prior to beginning construction on any block in the project, on a block-by-block 16 basis, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of the pending construction to the front 17 door of each residence or business that will be impacted by construction. The notice 18 shall be prepared as follows: 19 a. Post notice or flyer 7 days prior to beginning any construction activity on each 20 block in the project area. 21 1) Prepare flyer on the Contractors letterhead and include the following 22 information: 23 a) Name of Project 24 b) Engineering Project Number (EPN) 25 c) Scope of Project (i.e. type of construction activity) 26 d) Actual construction duration within the block 27 e) Name of the contractors foreman and phone number 28 f) Name of the Citys inspector and phone number 29 g) Citys after-hours phone number 30 2) A sample of the pre-construction notification flyer is attached as Exhibit 31 A. 32 3) Submit schedule showing the construction start and finish time for each 33 block of the project to the inspector. 34 4) Deliver flyer to the City Inspector for review prior to distribution. 35 b. No construction will be allowed to begin on any block until the flyer is 36 delivered to all residents of the block. 37 I. Public Notification of Temporary Water Service Interruption during Construction 38 1. In the event it becomes necessary to temporarily shut down water service to 39 residents or businesses during construction, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of 40 the pending interruption to the front door of each affected resident. 41 2. Prepared notice as follows: 42 a. The notification or flyer shall be posted 24 hours prior to the temporary 43 interruption. 44 b. Prepare flyer on the contractors letterhead and include the following 45 information: 46 1) Name of the project 47 2) Date of the interruption of service 48 3) Period the interruption will take place 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 5 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4) Name of the contractors foreman and phone number 2 5) Name of the Citys inspector and phone number 3 c. A sample of the temporary water service interruption notification is attached as 4 Exhibit B. 5 d. Deliver a copy of the temporary interruption notification to the City inspector 6 for review prior to being distributed. 7 e. No interruption of water service can occur until the flyer has been delivered to 8 all affected residents and businesses. 9 f. Electronic versions of the sample flyers can be obtained from the Project 10 Construction Inspector. 11 J. Coordination with United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) 12 1. At locations in the Project where construction activities occur in areas where 13 USACE permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated 14 permit. 15 K. Coordination within Railroad Permit Areas 16 1. At locations in the project where construction activities occur in areas where 17 railroad permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated 18 railroad permit. This includes, but is not limited to, provisions for: 19 a. Flagmen 20 b. Inspectors 21 c. Safety training 22 d. Additional insurance 23 e. Insurance certificates 24 f. Other employees required to protect the right-of-way and property of the 25 Railroad Company from damage arising out of and/or from the construction of 26 the project. Proper utility clearance procedures shall be used in accordance 27 with the permit guidelines. 28 2. Obtain any supplemental information needed to comply with the railroads 29 requirements. 30 3. Railroad Flagmen 31 a. Submit receipts to City for verification of working days that railroad flagmen 32 were present on Site. 33 L. Dust Control 34 1. Use acceptable measures to control dust at the Site. 35 a. If water is used to control dust, capture and properly dispose of waste water. 36 b. If wet saw cutting is performed, capture and properly dispose of slurry. 37 M. Employee Parking 38 1. Provide parking for employees at locations approved by the City. 39 N. Coordination with North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) Clean 40 Construction Specification 41 1. Equipment Requirements 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 6 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 a. All construction equipment being used to perform work on the Contract shall 2 meet EPA emissions standards of Tier 3 or equivalent, or cleaner. Model Form 3 A.14. Schedule for Phase-In of Tier 1-Tier 4 Non-Road Engines is included in 4 Appendix A. Compliance may be achieved through the use of equipment 5 powered by an EPA-certified engine, through engine repowers, or through the 6 use of retrofits which have been verified by the EPA and/or California Air 7 Resources Board. A list of available retrofits is available online at EPAs 8 website Verified Technologies List for Clean Diesel. 9 b. Equipment that meets one or more of the following conditions may be exempt 10 from these requirements: 11 1) Equipment powered by an engine that is less than or equal to ten (10) years 12 old. 13 2) Equipment that must be used to fulfill use or reporting requirements for a 14 grant program or other clean air initiative. Documentation of such 15 obligations must be submitted to City for verification. 16 3) Equipment that is designated as low-use equipment, which is defined as 17 any piece of construction equipment which is used for less than ten (10) 18 hours per week on a single public works contract. A Low-Use Exemption 19 Weekly Reporting Form will be required for all equipment for which this 20 exemption is claimed. 21 4) Equipment that is being used to address a critical or emergency public 22 works need, including, but not limited to, broken water mains or sanitary 23 sewer lines. This exemption is limited to work performed in a situation in 24 which the procurement of construction services is performed on an 25 emergency basis, as provided for by State law. 26 2. Operational Requirements 27 a. All diesel fuel used to perform work on the public works contract shall be 28 Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel which also complies with Texas Low 29 Emission Diesel (TxLED) program requirements. This may include TxLED- 30 compliant Biodiesel blends. 31 b. The Contractor shall limit idling of equipment to no more than five (5) 32 minutes, unless the idling is applicable to one or more of the following 33 exceptions: 34 1) is being used for emergency response purposes; 35 2) is idling as a necessary component of mechanical operation, maintenance, 36 or diagnostic purposes; or 37 3) is idling for the health or safety of the equipment operator. 38 c. To the greatest extent possible, Contractor shall stage equipment away from, 39 and minimize operation near, sensitive receptors including, but not limited to, 40 fresh air intakes, hospitals, schools, licensed day care facilities, and residences. 41 3. Reporting Requirements 42 a. On or before the day construction activity commences, the Contractor shall 43 submit to the City an inventory report containing identifying data for each piece 44 of equipment to be used on the worksite. A form for submitting such 45 information will be provided by the City. This inventory may be used by the 46 City to conduct site inspections and/or verify compliance with specification 47 elements. 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 7 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 b. If additional equipment is brought on-site after construction begins, the 2 Contractor shall provide this same inventory information to the City for the new 3 equipment on or before the day it begins work on-site. 4 c. Reports shall be provided for all equipment used on-site. 5 4. Enforcement Requirements 6 a. All construction equipment used at the Site is subject to inspection by the City 7 at random. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all subcontractors meet 8 the requirements of this specification. 9 O. Tree Protection 10 1. Install tree protection in accordance with the Drawings, if applicable. 11 2. Coordinate with City Building Inspections prior to commencing and earthwork 12 activities to perform an initial tree protection inspection. 13 1.5 SUBMITTALS 14 A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 15 B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 16 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 17 A. Construction Notice Flyer 18 B. Notice of Temporary Water Service Interruption 19 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 20 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 21 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 22 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 23 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 24 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 25 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 26 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 8 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 END OF SECTION 2 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 9 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 EXHIBIT A 2 (To be printed on Contractors Letterhead) 3 4 5 6 Date: 7 8 EPN No.: 9 Project Name: 10 Limits of Construction: 11 12 13 14 15 16 THIS IS TO INFORM YOU THAT UNDER A CONTRACT WITH THE CITY OF 17 DENTON, OUR COMPANY WILL WORK ON UTILITY LINES ON OR AROUND YOUR 18 PROPERTY. 19 20 CONSTRUCTION WILL BEGIN APPROXIMATELY SEVEN DAYS FROM THE DATE 21 OF THIS NOTICE. 22 23 IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT ACCESS, SECURITY, SAFETY OR ANY OTHER 24 ISSUE, PLEASE CALL: 25 26 27 <CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENT > AT <TELEPHONE NO.> 28 29 OR 30 31 <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> 32 33 34 PLEASE KEEP THIS FLYER HANDY WHEN YOU CALL 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 10 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 EXHIBIT B 2 3 Date: 4 5 EPN No.: 6 7 Project Name:_____________________ 8 9 10 NOTICE OF 11 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE 12 INTERRUPTION 13 14 15 Due to utility improvements in your neighborhood, your water service will be 16 interrupted on ___________________________________________________ 17 between the hours of __________________ and _______________________. 18 19 20 IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS DISRUPTION, PLEASE CALL: 21 22 23 <CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENT > AT <TELEPHONE NO.> 24 25 OR 26 27 <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> 28 29 THIS SERVICE INTERRUPTION WILL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE 30 31 Thank you, 32 _________________________, Contractor 01 45 23 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 45 23 2 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Testing and inspection services procedures and coordination 7 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 8 1. None 9 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 11 2. Division 1 General Requirements 12 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 13 A. Measurement and Payment 14 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. 15 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 16 a. In accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions, Contractor is 17 responsible for performing, coordinating, and payment of all inspections, tests, 18 re-tests, or approvals. 19 b. In accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions, City is responsible for 20 performing and payment for first set additional independent testing chosen by 21 the City to be performed. 22 1) If the first independent test performed by the City fails, the Contractor is 23 responsible for payment of subsequent testing until a passing test occurs. 24 a) Final acceptance will not be issued by City until all required payments 25 for testing by Contractor have been paid in full. 26 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 27 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 28 A. Testing 29 1. Complete testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. 30 2. Coordination 31 a. When testing is required to be performed by the City, notify City, sufficiently 32 in advance, when testing is needed. 33 b. When testing is required to be completed by the Contractor, notify City, 34 sufficiently in advance, that testing will be performed. 35 3. Distribution of Testing Reports 36 a. Electronic Distribution 37 1) Provide all reports to Project Manager and their duly appointed 38 representative electronically via email. 01 45 23 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4. Provide Project Managers duly appointed representative with trip tickets for each 2 delivered load of Concrete or Lime material including the following information: 3 a. Name of pit 4 b. Date of delivery 5 c. Material delivered 6 B. Inspection 7 1. Inspection or lack of inspection does not relieve the Contractor from obligation to 8 perform work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 1.5 SUBMITTALS 10 A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 11 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 12 A. Materials Testing Reports sealed by a Professional Engineer or Professional 13 Geoscientist licensed in the State of Texas. 14 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 15 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 16 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 17 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 18 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 19 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 22 END OF SECTION 23 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 24 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 50 00 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not 7 necessarily limited to: 8 a. Temporary utilities 9 b. Sanitary facilities 10 c. Storage Sheds and Buildings 11 d. Dust control 12 e. Temporary fencing of the construction site 13 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 14 1. None. 15 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 16 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 17 2. Division 1 General Requirements 18 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 19 A. Measurement and Payment 20 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. 21 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 22 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 23 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 24 A. Temporary Utilities 25 1. Obtaining Temporary Service 26 a. Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services. 27 b. Abide by rules and regulations of utility service companies or authorities 28 having jurisdiction. 29 c. Be responsible for utility service costs until Work is approved for Final 30 Acceptance. 31 1) Included are fuel, power, light, heat and other utility services necessary for 32 execution, completion, testing and initial operation of Work. 33 2. Construction Water 34 a. Contractor to provide water required for and in connection with Work to be 35 performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices or other use as 36 required for the completion of the Work. 37 b. Provide and maintain adequate supply of potable water for domestic 38 consumption by Contractor, if required. 39 c. Coordination 40 1) Contact City 1 week before water for construction is desired 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 d. Metering and Payment for Construction Water 2 1) For water system improvements: 3 a) Obtain construction water meter from City to track water usage. Water 4 will be provided at no cost to Contractor. 5 2) For all other projects: 6 a) Obtain construction water meter from City for payment as billed by 7 Citys established rates. 8 3. Electricity and Lighting 9 a. Provide and pay for electric powered service as required for Work, including 10 testing of Work. 11 1) Provide power for lighting, operation of equipment, or other use. 12 b. Electric power service includes temporary power service or generator to 13 maintain operations during scheduled shutdown. 14 4. Telephone 15 a. Provide emergency telephone service at Site for use by Contractor personnel 16 and others performing work or furnishing services at Site. 17 5. Temporary Heat and Ventilation 18 a. Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of Work. 19 b. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions. 20 B. Sanitary Facilities 21 1. Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on Site. 22 a. Comply with regulations of State and local departments of health. 23 2. Enforce use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at job site. 24 a. Enclose and anchor sanitary facilities. 25 b. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. 26 c. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause nuisance or health 27 problem. 28 d. Haul sewage and waste off-site at no less than weekly intervals and properly 29 dispose in accordance with applicable regulation. 30 3. Locate facilities near Work Site and keep clean and maintained throughout Project. 31 4. Remove facilities at completion of Project 32 C. Storage Sheds and Buildings 33 1. Provide adequately ventilated, watertight, weatherproof storage facilities with floor 34 above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. 35 2. Storage of materials not susceptible to weather damage may be on blocks off 36 ground. 37 3. Store materials in a neat and orderly manner. 38 a. Place materials and equipment to permit easy access for identification, 39 inspection and inventory. 40 4. Equip building with lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for 41 equipment space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage 42 environments acceptable to specified manufacturers. 43 5. Fill and grade site for temporary structures to provide drainage away from 44 temporary and existing buildings. 45 6. Remove building from site prior to Final Acceptance. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 D. Temporary Fencing 2 1. Provide and maintain for the duration or construction when required in contract 3 documents 4 E. Dust Control 5 1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining dust control through the duration of the 6 project. 7 a. Contractor remains on-call at all times 8 b. Must respond in a timely manner 9 F. Temporary Protection of Construction 10 1. Contractor or subcontractors are responsible for protecting Work from damage due 11 to weather. 12 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 13 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 14 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 15 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 16 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 17 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 18 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 19 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 22 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 23 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 24 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 25 3.4 INSTALLATION 26 A. Temporary Facilities 27 1. Maintain all temporary facilities for duration of construction activities as needed. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3.5 [REPAIR] / [RESTORATION] 2 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION 3 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 4 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 5 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 6 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 7 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES 8 A. Temporary Facilities 9 1. Remove all temporary facilities and restore area after completion of the Work, to a 10 condition equal to or better than prior to start of Work. 11 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 12 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 13 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 14 END OF SECTION 15 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 16 01 57 13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 57 13 2 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Procedures for Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans 7 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 8 1. None. 9 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the 11 Contract 12 2. Division 1 General Requirements 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Construction Activities resulting in less than 1 acre of disturbance 16 a. Work associated with this Item is considered subsidiary to the various Items 17 bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 18 2. Construction Activities resulting in greater than 1 acre of disturbance 19 a. Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum. 20 b. Payment 21 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 22 item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for Stormwater Pollution 23 Prevention Plan, and made in partial payments as follows: 24 a) When 1% of the Contract amount is earned, 15% of the SWPPP lump 25 sum bid will be paid. 26 b) When 10% of the Contract amount is earned, 25% of the SWPPP lump 27 sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under the item will be 28 deducted from this amount. 29 c) When 25% of the Contract amount is earned, 30% of the SWPPP lump 30 sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under the item will be 31 deducted from this amount. 32 d) When 50% of the Contract is earned, 50% of the SWPPP lump sum bid 33 will be paid. Previous payments under the item will be deducted from 34 this amount. 35 e) When 75% of the Contract is earned, 75% of the SWPPP lump sum bid 36 will be paid. Previous payments under the item will be deducted from 37 this amount. 38 f) When 100% of the Contract is earned and final stabilization has been 39 achieved, 100% of the SWPPP lump sum bid will be paid. Previous 40 payments under the item will be deducted from this amount. 41 c. The price bid shall include: 42 1) Preparation of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 01 57 13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2) Implementation 2 3) Permitting fees 3 4) Final Stabilization 4 1.3 REFERENCES 5 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 6 1. Notice of Intent: NOI 7 2. Notice of Termination: NOT 8 3. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: SWPPP 9 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality: TCEQ 10 5. Notice of Change: NOC 11 A. Reference Standards 12 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference 13 standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this 14 Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 15 2. Integrated Stormwater Management (iSWM) Technical Manual for Construction 16 Controls 17 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 18 A. General 19 1. Contractor is responsible for resolution and payment of any fines issued associated 20 with compliance to Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. 21 2. As a condition of approval, applicants conducting land disturbing activities will 22 complete the online construction site survey. This survey can be found at 23 https://www.surveymonkey.com/r/dentonconstruction. 24 3. Refer to TCEQ website for further information about stormwater permits at 25 https://www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/construction/TXR15_AIR.html. 26 B. Construction Activities resulting in: 27 1. Less than 1 acre of disturbance 28 a. Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 31 25 14. 29 2. 1 to less than 5 acres of disturbance 30 a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction 31 Permit is required 32 b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements 33 1) Indicate City is a Secondary Operator 34 2) TCEQ Small Construction Site Notice Required under general permit 35 TXR150000 36 a) Post at job site 37 b) Prior to Preconstruction Meeting, send 1 copy to City Watershed 38 Protection Division, Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 39 3) Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 31 25 14. 40 4) Project Site Operator must contact Watershed Protection Division for initial 41 inspection prior to commencing land disturbing activities to ensure 42 compliance with stormwater regulations and proper installation of 43 appropriate BMPs, Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 01 57 13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 5) Once the project has been completed and all the closeout requirements of 2 TCEQ have been met, send copy of signed Small Construction Site Notice 3 to Watershed Protection division, Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 4 3. 5 acres or more of Disturbance 5 a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction 6 Permit is required 7 b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements 8 1) Prepare a TCEQ NOI form and submit to TCEQ along with required fee 9 a) Send copy to City Watershed Protection Division, 10 Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 11 2) TCEQ Notice of Change required if making changes or updates to NOI 12 3) Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 31 25 14. 13 4) Project Site Operator must contact Watershed Protection Division for initial 14 inspection prior to commencing land disturbing activities to ensure 15 compliance with stormwater regulations and proper installation of 16 appropriate BMPs, Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 17 5) Once the project has been completed and all the closeout requirements of 18 TCEQ have been met a TCEQ Notice of Termination can be submitted. 19 a) Send copy to City Watershed Protection Division, 20 Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 21 C. Sites adjacent to or encroaching into Environmentally Sensitive Areas (ESAs): 22 1. Provide tree protective fencing at the boundary of any identified onsite ESAs and 23 approved construction activities that would result in land disturbances. 24 2. Provide signs identifying the area as an ESA and prohibiting construction activity. 25 1.5 SUBMITTALS 26 A. SWPPP 27 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, except as stated herein. 28 a. Prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, submit a draft copy of SWPPP to the City 29 as follows: 30 1) 1 copy to the Project Manager 31 a) Project Manager will forward to the City Watershed Protection 32 Department, Watershed@cityofdenton.com. 33 B. Modified SWPPP 34 1. If the SWPPP is revised during construction, resubmit modified SWPPP to the City 35 in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 01 57 13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 5 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 6 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 7 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 10 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 6/14/2024 Removed specific City of Denton personnel names from contact information under Section 1.4 11 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 25, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 58 13 2 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Temporary Project Signage Requirements 7 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 8 1. None. 9 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 11 2. Division 1 General Requirements 12 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 13 A. Measurement and Payment 14 1. Temporary Project Sign 15 a. Measurement 16 1) Measurement for this Item will be per each project sign installed. 17 b. Payment 18 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item 19 and measured as provided under Measurement shall be paid for at the 20 unit price bid per each Temporary Project Sign. 21 c. The price bid shall include: 22 1) Installation of Temporary Project Sign 23 2) Excavation 24 3) Hauling 25 4) Disposal of excess Materials 26 5) Maintenance and Repair of Signs During Construction 27 6) Removal and Disposal of Temporary Project Sign 28 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 29 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 30 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 31 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 32 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 33 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 34 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 35 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 36 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 25, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 4 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS 5 A. Design Criteria 6 1. Provide free standing Project Designation Sign as indicated below: 7 8 The flag shall resemble the Texas Flag. The background of the stars and the City of 9 Denton lettering shall be blue. The lower bar of the flag shall be red, and the upper bar 10 shall be white. The dimensions, from the farthest ends, shall 11 be 12-inches vertically and 23.5-inches horizontally. The 12 flag shall appear in the dimensions shown. The contractor 13 may request a digital copy in either .jpg or .tif format. 14 15 2. The Project Designation Sign shall be placed 16 at strategic points with lettering as needed to 17 adequately describe the work. 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 25, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3. Signs shall be painted white with blue letters and symbols. Letter size shall conform 2 to dimensions shown on sign drawing. Exceptions or variations from the sign 3 shown above shall not be allowed. 4 B. Materials 5 1. Sign 6 a. Constructed of -inch fir plywood, grade A-C (exterior) or better 7 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 8 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 10 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 11 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 12 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 13 3.4 INSTALLATION 14 A. General 15 1. Provide vertical installation at extents of project. 16 2. Signs shall be placed prior to beginning the Work and maintained until the end of 17 the project. 18 3. Relocate sign as needed, upon request of the City. 19 B. Mounting options 20 a. Skids 21 b. Posts 22 c. Barricade 23 3.5 -- 3.12 [NOT USED] 24 3.6 MAINTENANCE 25 A. General 26 1. Maintenance will include painting and repairs as needed or directed by the City. 27 3.7 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 28 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 29 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 66 00 2 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Scheduling of product delivery 7 2. Packaging of products for delivery 8 3. Protection of products against damage from: 9 a. Handling 10 b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments 11 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 12 1. None. 13 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 14 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 15 2. Division 1 General Requirements 16 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 17 A. Measurement and Payment 18 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. 19 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 20 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 21 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 22 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 23 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 24 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 27 1.10 DELIVERY AND HANDLING 28 A. Delivery Requirements 29 1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation 30 and to avoid prolonged storage. 31 2. Provide appropriate personnel and equipment to receive deliveries. 32 3. Delivery trucks will not be permitted to wait extended periods of time on the Site 33 for personnel or equipment to receive the delivery. 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer’s original unbroken cartons or other 2 containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or 3 environmental damage. 4 5. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item and installation 5 location. 6 6. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for storage and handling. 7 B. Handling Requirements 8 1. Handle products or equipment in accordance with these Contract Documents and 9 manufacturers recommendations and instructions. 10 C. Storage Requirements 11 1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and 12 requirements of these Specifications. 13 2. Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. 14 a. Place loose soil materials and materials to be incorporated into Work in a 15 manner that prevents damage to any part of Work or existing facilities and that 16 maintains free access at all times to all parts of Work and to utility service 17 company installations in vicinity of Work. 18 3. Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will 19 cause minimum inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, 20 tenants and occupants. 21 a. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection. 22 4. Restrict storage to areas available on construction site for storage of material and 23 equipment as shown on Drawings, or approved by Project Manager or their duly 24 authorized representative. 25 5. Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. 26 a. Provide addresses of and access to off-site storage locations for inspection by 27 Project Manager or their duly authorized representative. 28 6. Do not use lawns, grass plots or other private property for storage purposes without 29 written permission of owner or other person in possession or control of premises. 30 7. Store in manufacturers unopened containers. 31 8. Neatly, safely and compactly stack materials delivered and stored along line of 32 Work to avoid inconvenience and damage to property owners and general public 33 and maintain at least 3 feet from fire hydrant. 34 9. Keep public and private driveways and street crossings open. 35 10. Repair or replace damaged lawns, sidewalks, streets or other improvements to 36 satisfaction of Project Manager or their duly authorized representative. 37 a. Total length which materials may be distributed along route of construction at 38 one time is 1,000 linear feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by Project 39 Manager. 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 2 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 3.1 [NOT USED] 6 3.2 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL 7 A. Tests and Inspections 8 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. 9 B. Non-Conforming Work 10 1. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used or in any other way 11 unsatisfactory for use on the project. 12 3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 13 3.4 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 14 3.5 CLEANING [NOT USED] 15 3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 16 3.7 PROTECTION 17 A. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written directions. 18 B. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in 19 storage. 20 C. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry if required by 21 the manufacturer. 22 3.8 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 23 3.9 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 24 END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 25 01 70 00 MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 70 00 2 MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Mobilization and Demobilization 7 a. Mobilization 8 1) Transportation of Contractors personnel, equipment, and operating supplies 9 to the Site 10 2) Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractors operation 11 at the Site 12 3) Premiums paid for performance and payment bonds 13 4) Transportation of Contractors personnel, equipment, and operating supplies 14 to another location within the designated Site 15 5) Relocation of necessary general facilities for the Contractors operation 16 from 1 location to another location on the Site. 17 b. Demobilization 18 1) Transportation of Contractors personnel, equipment, and operating supplies 19 away from the Site including disassembly 20 2) Site Clean-up 21 3) Removal of all buildings and/or other facilities assembled at the Site for this 22 Contract 23 c. Mobilization and Demobilization do not include activities for specific items of 24 work that are for which payment is provided elsewhere in the contract. 25 2. Remobilization 26 a. Remobilization for Suspension of Work specifically required in the Contract 27 Documents or as required by City includes: 28 1) Demobilization 29 a) Transportation of Contractors personnel, equipment, and operating 30 supplies from the Site including disassembly or temporarily securing 31 equipment, supplies, and other facilities as designated by the Contract 32 Documents necessary to suspend the Work. 33 b) Site Clean-up as designated in the Contract Documents 34 2) Remobilization 35 a) Transportation of Contractors personnel, equipment, and operating 36 supplies to the Site necessary to resume the Work. 37 b) Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractors 38 operation at the Site necessary to resume the Work. 39 3) No Payments will be made for: 40 a) Mobilization and Demobilization from one location to another on the 41 Site in the normal progress of performing the Work. 42 b) Stand-by or idle time 43 c) Lost profits 01 70 00 MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 2 1. None. 3 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 4 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 5 2. Division 1 General Requirements 6 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 7 A. Measurement and Payment 8 1. Mobilization and Demobilization 9 a. Measurement 10 1) This Item will be measured by the lump sum as the work progresses. 11 b. Payment 12 1) For this Item, the adjusted Contract amount will be calculated as the total 13 Contract amount less the lump sum for mobilization. Mobilization shall be 14 made in partial payments as follows: 15 a) When 1% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is 16 earned, 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. 17 b) When 25% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is 18 earned, 50% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous 19 payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount. 20 c) When 50% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is 21 earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous 22 payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount. 23 d) When 75% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is 24 earned, 100% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous 25 payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount. 26 e) A bid containing a total for Mobilization in excess of 10% of 27 total contract shall be considered unbalanced and a cause for 28 consideration of rejection. 29 c. The price bid shall include: 30 1) Mobilization of equipment to Site 31 2) Performance Bond 32 3) Payment Bond 33 4) Maintenance Bond 34 5) Remobilization as identified in the Contract Documents 35 6) Demobilization 36 d. No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated this 37 Item. 38 2. Remobilization for suspension of Work not identified in the Contract Documents, 39 as required by City 40 a. Measurement and Payment 41 1) This shall be submitted as a Contract Claim in accordance with Article 11 42 of Section 00 72 00. 43 2) No payments will be made for standby, idle time, or lost profits associated 44 with this Item. 45 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 01 70 00 MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised October 13, 2022 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 3 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 5 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 6 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 7 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 8 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 9 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 12 END OF SECTION 13 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 14 15 01 71 23 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 71 23 2 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Requirements for construction staking to be provided by the Contractor. 7 2. Requirements for coordination with City to allow performance of as-built survey at 8 the Site. 9 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 10 1. None 11 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 12 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 13 2. Division 1 General Requirements 14 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 15 A. Measurement and Payment 16 1. Construction Staking 17 a. Measurement and Payment 18 1) Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items 19 bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 20 2. As-Built Survey 21 a. Measurement and Payment 22 1) Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items 23 bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 24 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 25 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 26 1.5 SUBMITTALS 27 A. Submittals, if required, shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 28 B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 29 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 30 A. Certificates 31 1. Provide certificate certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in 32 conformance or non-conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 33 a. Certificate must be sealed by a registered professional land surveyor in the 34 State of Texas. 35 B. Field Quality Control Submittals 36 1. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work. 37 C. As-built Survey Submittal: 01 71 23 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1. AutoCAD (.dwg) 2 2. ESRI Shapefile (.shp) 3 3. CSV file (.csv), formatted with X and Y coordinates in separate columns 4 4. Include vertical and horizontal data tied to original project control and benchmarks, 5 and feature descriptions 6 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 7 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 8 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9 A. Construction Staking 10 1. Construction staking will be performed by the Contractor. 11 2. Coordination 12 a. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate staking such that construction 13 activities are not delayed or negatively impacted. 14 3. General 15 a. Contractor is responsible for preserving and maintaining staking. 16 b. If in the opinion of the City, a sufficient number of stakes or markings have 17 been lost, destroyed or disturbed, by Contractors neglect, such that the 18 contracted Work cannot take place, then the Contractor will be required to re- 19 stake the deficient areas. 20 B. As-built Survey 21 1. As-built Survey will be performed by the Contractor. 22 2. Coordination 23 a. Contractor to verify that control data established in the design survey and 24 required for construction remains intact. 25 b. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate As-built Survey such that 26 construction activities are not delayed or negatively impacted. 27 c. Contractor shall restore or replace all necessary control data damaged during 28 construction operations. 29 d. For sewer mains and water lines 12-inch and smaller in diameter, if permitted 30 by City in writing, Contractor may physically measure depth and mark the 31 location during the progress of construction and perform As-built Survey after 32 the facility has been buried. The Contractor is responsible for the quality 33 control required to ensure accuracy if this approach is permitted. 34 3. General 35 a. As-built survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and accurate 36 logs of control and survey work as it progresses for Project Records. 37 b. The Contractor perform as-built survey to obtain construction features 38 including, but not limited to, the following: 39 1) All Utility Lines 40 a) Rim and flowline elevations and coordinates for each manhole or 41 junction structure 42 2) Water Lines 43 a) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for water lines at the following 44 locations: 45 (1) Every 250 linear feet 01 71 23 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 (2) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. (All 2 Fittings) 3 (3) Cathodic protection test stations 4 (4) Sampling stations 5 (5) Meter boxes/vaults (All sizes) 6 (6) Fire lines 7 (7) Fire hydrants and valves 8 (8) Gate valves and Butterfly Valves 9 (9) Plugs, stubouts, dead-end lines 10 (10) Air Release valves (Manhole rim and vent pipe) 11 (11) Blow off valves (Manhole rim and valve lid) 12 (12) Pressure plane valves 13 (13) Cleaning wyes 14 (14) Casing pipe (each end) 15 b) Storm Sewer 16 (1) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates at the following locations: 17 (a) Every 250 linear feet 18 (b) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. 19 c) Sanitary Sewer 20 (1) Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for sanitary sewer lines at 21 the following locations: 22 (a) Every 250 linear feet 23 (b) Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. 24 (c) Cleanouts 25 c. As-built survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and accurate 26 logs of control and survey work associated with meeting or exceeding the line 27 and grade required by these Specifications. 28 1) The Contractor remains fully responsible for the accuracy of the work and 29 the correction of it, as required. 30 2) Monitor line and grade continuously during construction. 31 3) Record deviation with respect to design line and grade once at each pipe 32 joint and submit daily records to City. 33 4) If the installation does not meet the specified tolerances, immediately notify 34 the City and correct the installation in accordance with the Contract 35 Documents. 36 d. Submit to the City copies of field notes, if requested, used to establish all lines 37 and grades and allow the City to check guidance system setup prior to 38 beginning each tunneling drive. 39 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 40 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 41 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 43 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 01 71 23 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 2 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3 3.4 APPLICATION 4 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 5 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 6 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL 7 A. It is the Contractors responsibility to maintain all stakes and control data in accordance 8 with this Specification. 9 B. Do not change or relocate stakes or control data without approval from the City. 10 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 11 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 12 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 13 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 14 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 15 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 16 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 17 END OF SECTION 18 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 19 01 74 23 CLEANING Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 74 23 2 CLEANING 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Intermediate and final cleaning for Work not including special cleaning of closed systems 7 specified elsewhere 8 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 9 1. None. 10 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 11 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 12 2. Division 1 General Requirements 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No 16 separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 17 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 18 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 19 A. Scheduling 20 1. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning 21 process will not fall on newly painted surfaces. 22 2. Schedule final cleaning upon completion of Work and immediately prior to final 23 inspection. 24 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 27 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 28 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 29 1.10 STORAGE, AND HANDLING 30 A. Storage and Handling Requirements 31 1. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those 32 materials. 01 74 23 CLEANING Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 2 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 5 2.2 MATERIALS 6 A. Cleaning Agents 7 1. Compatible with surface being cleaned 8 2. New and uncontaminated 9 3. For manufactured surfaces 10 a. Material recommended by manufacturer 11 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 12 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 13 PART 3 - EXECUTION 14 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 15 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 16 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 17 3.4 APPLICATION [NOT USED] 18 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 19 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 20 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 21 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 22 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 23 3.10 CLEANING 24 A. General 25 1. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 26 2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of 27 governing authorities. 28 3. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or 29 sanitary drains or sewers. 30 4. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site. 31 5. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate 32 manner approved by City and regulatory agencies. 01 74 23 CLEANING Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 6. Transport and deposit vegetative material removed as a result of work operations off-site at 2 a legal site in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 3 a. Removed vegetation will not be allowed to remain in piles or mounds on the easement 4 or surrounding property. 5 7. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. 6 8. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash and polish all Work and equipment associated with this 7 project. 8 9. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of 9 required permanent Work. 10 10. If project is not cleaned to the satisfaction of the City, the City reserves the right to have 11 the cleaning completed at the expense of the Contractor. 12 11. Do not burn on-site. 13 B. Intermediate Cleaning during Construction 14 1. Keep Work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel in 15 existing facility operations. 16 2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish. 17 3. Confine construction debris daily in strategically located container(s): 18 a. Cover to prevent blowing by wind 19 b. Store debris away from construction or operational activities 20 c. Haul from site at a minimum of once per week 21 4. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting. 22 a. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until Final Acceptance. 23 5. Prior to storm events, thoroughly clean site of all loose or unsecured items, which may 24 become airborne or transported by flowing water during the storm. 25 C. Interior Final Cleaning 26 1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign 27 materials from sight-exposed surfaces. 28 2. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean. 29 3. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. 30 4. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. 31 5. Ventilating systems 32 a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during 33 construction. 34 b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during 35 construction. 36 6. Replace all burned out lamps. 37 7. Broom clean process area floors. 38 8. Mop office and control room floors. 39 D. Exterior (Site or Right of Way) Final Cleaning 40 1. Remove trash and debris containers from site. 41 a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers. 42 2. Sweep roadway to remove all rocks, pieces of asphalt, concrete or any other object that 43 may hinder or disrupt the flow of traffic along the roadway. 01 74 23 CLEANING Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised September 20, 2018 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3. Clean any interior areas including, but not limited to, vaults, manholes, structures, junction 2 boxes and inlets. 3 4. If no longer required for maintenance of erosion facilities, and upon approval by City, 4 remove erosion control from site. 5 5. Clean signs, lights, signals, etc. 6 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 7 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 8 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 9 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 10 END OF SECTION 11 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 77 19 2 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. The procedure for closing out a contract 7 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 8 1. None. 9 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 10 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 11 2. Division 1 General Requirements 12 3. Section 33 01 30 Post Construction Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 13 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14 A. Measurement and Payment 15 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No 16 separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 17 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 18 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 19 A. Guarantees, Bonds and Affidavits 20 1. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds, 21 certificates, licenses and affidavits required for Work or equipment as specified are 22 satisfactorily filed with the City. 23 B. Release of Liens or Claims 24 1. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of 25 release of liens has been submitted to the City. 26 1.5 SUBMITTALS 27 A. Submit all required documentation to Project Manager. 28 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 29 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 2 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 4 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 5 3.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE 6 A. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, submit: 7 1. Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 78 39 8 2. Operation and Maintenance Data, if required, in accordance with Section 01 78 23 9 B. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 10 74 23. 11 C. Final Inspection 12 1. After final cleaning, provide notice to the Project Manager and their duly appointed 13 representative that the Work is completed. 14 a. City reserves the right to deny request for Final Inspection if City determines that 15 the entire Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant a Final Inspection 16 b. The City will make an initial Final Inspection with the Contractor present. 17 c. Upon completion of this inspection, the City will notify the Contractor, in writing 18 within 10 business days, of any particulars in which this inspection reveals that 19 the Work is defective or incomplete. 20 2. Upon receiving written notice from the City, immediately undertake the Work 21 required to remedy deficiencies and complete the Work to the satisfaction of the City. 22 3. Upon completion of Work associated with the items listed in the City’s written notice, 23 inform the City, that the required Work has been completed. Upon receipt of this 24 notice, the City, in the presence of the Contractor, will make a subsequent Final 25 Inspection of the project. 26 4. Provide all special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full 27 operation. These special accessory items include, but are not limited to: 28 a. Specified spare parts 29 b. Adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment 30 c. Initial fill up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks 31 d. Light bulbs 32 e. Fuses 33 f. Vault keys 34 g. Handwheels 35 h. Other expendable items as required for initial start-up and operation of all 36 equipment 37 D. Supporting Documentation 38 1. Coordinate with the City Project Representative to complete the following additional 39 forms: 40 a. Final Payment Request 41 b. Statement of Contract Time 42 c. Affidavit of Payment and Release of Liens 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 d. Consent of Surety to Final Payment 2 E. Letter of Final Acceptance 3 1. When City has deemed the Work has been completed, and upon receiving all 4 Supporting Documentation, in accordance with General Conditions, City will issue 5 Letter of Final Acceptance and release the final payment request for payment. 6 F. Warranty Inspection for Wastewater Mains 7 1. A second television inspection conforming to the standards laid out in Section 33 01 8 30 shall be started by the Contractor no sooner than 630 calendar days and finished 9 no later than 690 calendar days after the date of issuance of the Letter of Final 10 Acceptance for the project by the City of Denton. 11 2. The second inspection shall include a complete televised inspection of each manhole 12 interior constructed or installed on the project (including cored manholes). 13 a. Should the second inspection indicate repairs that need to be made, these will be 14 performed by the Contractor at no cost to the City. 15 3. Failure of the Contractor to perform the second inspection or to make repairs 16 indicated by the second inspection shall be sufficient grounds for the City to take 17 action through the terms of the Maintenance Bond for the project to perform the 18 second inspection and make any repairs indicated. 19 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 20 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 21 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 22 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 23 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 24 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 25 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 26 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 27 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 28 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 29 END OF SECTION 30 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 31 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 1 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 78 23 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Product data and related information appropriate for City’s maintenance and 7 operation of products furnished under Contract 8 2. Such products may include, but are not limited to: 9 a. Traffic Controllers 10 b. Irrigation Controllers (to be operated by the City) 11 c. Butterfly Valves 12 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 13 1. None. 14 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 15 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 16 2. Division 1 General Requirements 17 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 18 A. Measurement and Payment 19 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. 20 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 21 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 22 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 23 A. Schedule 24 1. Submit manuals in final form to the City within 30 calendar days of product 25 shipment to the project site. 26 1.5 SUBMITTALS 27 A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. All submittals shall be 28 approved by the City prior to delivery. 29 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 30 A. Submittal Form 31 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by City personnel. 32 2. Format 33 a. Size: 8 ‰ inches x 11 inches 34 b. Paper 35 1) 40 pound minimum, white, for typed pages 36 2) Holes reinforced with plastic, cloth or metal 37 c. Text: Manufacturers printed data, or neatly typewritten 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 2 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 d. Drawings 2 1) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text 3 2) Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages. 4 e. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating 5 equipment. 6 1) Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of 7 equipment. 8 2) Provide indexed tabs. 9 f. Cover 10 1) Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND 11 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". 12 2) List: 13 a) Title of Project 14 b) Identity of separate structure as applicable 15 c) Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual 16 3. Binders 17 a. Commercial quality 3-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers 18 b. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent 19 groupings. 20 4. Provide an electronic form of the O&M Manual. 21 B. Manual Content 22 1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order 23 a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number 24 b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume 25 c. List, with each product: 26 1) The name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor or installer 27 2) A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the 28 volume 29 3) Identify area of responsibility of each 30 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement 31 d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set 32 forth in Contract Documents. 33 2. Product Data 34 a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 35 b. Annotate each sheet to: 36 1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed 37 2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation 38 3) Delete references to inapplicable information 39 3. Drawings 40 a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: 41 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems 42 2) Control and flow diagrams 43 b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure 44 correct illustration of completed installation. 45 c. Do not use Project Record Drawings as maintenance drawings. 46 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 47 a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 48 b. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 3 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued 2 a. Provide information sheet for City personnel giving: 3 1) Proper procedures in event of failure 4 2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds 5 C. Manual for Materials and Finishes 6 1. Submit 5 hard copies and 1 digital copy of complete manual in final form. 7 2. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 8 a. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products 9 1) Catalog number, size, composition 10 2) Color and texture designations 11 3) Information required for reordering special manufactured products 12 b. Instructions for care and maintenance 13 1) Manufacturer’s recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods 14 2) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to 15 product 16 3) Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance 17 3. Content, for moisture protection and weather exposure products: 18 a. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products 19 1) Applicable standards 20 2) Chemical composition 21 3) Details of installation 22 b. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair 23 D. Manual for Equipment and Systems 24 1. Submit 5 hard copies and 1 digital copy of complete manual in final form. 25 2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 26 a. Description of unit and component parts 27 1) Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions 28 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests 29 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 30 b. Operating procedures 31 1) Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions 32 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions 33 3) Summer and winter operating instructions 34 4) Special operating instructions 35 c. Maintenance procedures 36 1) Routine operations 37 2) Guide to "trouble shooting" 38 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly 39 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking 40 d. Servicing and lubrication schedule 41 1) List of lubricants required 42 e. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions 43 f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer 44 1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear 45 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts 46 g. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer 47 h. Each contractor’s coordination drawings 48 1) As installed color coded piping diagrams 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 4 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 i. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve 2 j. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and 3 recommended quantities to be maintained in storage 4 k. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications 5 3. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 6 a. Description of system and component parts 7 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 8 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests 9 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 10 b. Circuit directories of panelboards 11 1) Electrical service 12 2) Controls 13 3) Communications 14 c. As installed color coded wiring diagrams 15 d. Operating procedures 16 1) Routine and normal operating instructions 17 2) Sequences required 18 3) Special operating instructions 19 e. Maintenance procedures 20 1) Routine operations 21 2) Guide to "trouble shooting" 22 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly 23 4) Adjustment and checking 24 f. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions 25 g. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and 26 recommended quantities to be maintained in storage 27 h. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications 28 4. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent 29 during instruction of City’s personnel. 30 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 31 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 32 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 A. Provide operation and maintenance data by personnel with the following criteria: 34 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products 35 2. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data 36 3. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 5 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 2 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 3 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 6 END OF SECTION 7 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 8 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 01 78 39 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Work associated with the documenting the project and recording changes to project 7 documents, including: 8 a. Record Drawings 9 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 10 1. None. 11 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 12 1. Division 0 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 13 2. Division 1 General Requirements 14 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 15 A. Measurement and Payment 16 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. 17 No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 18 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 19 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 20 1.5 SUBMITTALS 21 A. Prior to submitting a request for Final Inspection, deliver Project Record Documents to 22 Project Manager. 23 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 24 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 27 A. Accuracy of Records 28 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate 29 and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and 30 other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 31 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract 32 Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project 33 Record Documents. 34 3. To facilitate accuracy of records, make entries within 24 hours after receipt of 35 information that the change has occurred. 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4. Provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and 2 visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and 3 expensive site measurement, investigation and examination. 4 1.10 STORAGE AND HANDLING 5 A. Storage and Handling Requirements 6 1. Maintain the job set of Record Documents, which shall include the Drawings and 7 the Project Manual, completely protected from deterioration and from loss and 8 damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final 9 Project Record Documents. 10 2. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data 11 to the City’s approval. 12 a. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the 13 Contract Documents. 14 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 15 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 17 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 18 2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS 19 A. Job set 20 1. Promptly following receipt of the Notice to Proceed, secure from the City, at no 21 charge to the Contractor, 1 complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract. 22 B. Final Record Documents 23 1. At a time nearing the completion of the Work and prior to Final Inspection, provide 24 the City 1 complete set of all Final Record Drawings in the Contract. 25 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 26 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 28 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 29 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 30 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 31 3.4 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS 32 A. Maintenance of Job Set 33 1. Immediately upon receipt of the job set, identify each of the Documents with the 34 title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET". The Job set shall include the 35 Drawings and the Project Manual. 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. Preservation 2 a. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions 3 upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, 4 and the conditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a 5 suitable method for protecting the job set. 6 b. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review 7 by the City, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents. 8 c. Maintain the job set at the site of work. 9 3. Coordination with Construction Survey 10 a. At a minimum, in accordance with the intervals set forth in Section 01 71 23, 11 clearly mark any deviations from Contract Documents associated with 12 installation of the infrastructure. 13 4. Making entries on Drawings and Specifications 14 a. Record any deviations from Contract Documents on Drawings and in the 15 Specifications if applicable. 16 b. Use an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the 17 change by graphic line and note as required. 18 c. Date all entries. 19 d. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 20 e. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping 21 changes. 22 5. Conversion of schematic layouts 23 a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, 24 ducts, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to 25 portray precise physical layout. 26 1) Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the 27 City’s approval. 28 2) However, design of future modifications of the facility may require 29 accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are 30 shown only schematically on the Drawings. 31 b. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within 1 32 inch, the centerline of each run of items. 33 1) Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the 34 City’s approval. 35 2) Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the Item ("under slab", "in 36 ceiling plenum", "exposed", and the like). 37 3) Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related 38 reliably to the Specifications. 39 c. The City may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts 40 where, in the City’s judgment, conversion serves no useful purpose. However, 41 do not rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing 42 by the City. 43 B. Final Project Record Documents 44 1. Transfer of data to Drawings and Specifications 45 a. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings and 46 Project Manual if applicable, to the corresponding final documents, 47 coordinating the changes as required. 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 b. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description of 2 changes made during construction, and the actual location of items. 3 c. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area or areas 4 affected. 5 d. Make changes neatly, consistently and with the proper media to assure 6 longevity and clear reproduction. 7 e. Provide GPS coordinates for all underground utility appurtenances, bends, 8 fittings, valves, manholes, junction boxes or other structures. This requirement 9 shall encompass all water, sanitary sewer, or drainage improvements. 10 f. Record Drawing documents shall be submitted in an electronic format (.pdf). 11 12 2. Transfer of data to other Documents 13 a. If the Documents, other than Drawings, have been kept clean during progress of 14 the Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the City, 15 the job set of those Documents, other than Drawings, will be accepted as final 16 Record Documents. 17 b. If any such Document is not so approved by the City, secure a new copy of that 18 Document from the City at the City’s usual charge for reproduction and 19 handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval 20 of the City. 21 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 22 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 23 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 24 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 25 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 26 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 27 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 28 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 29 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 30 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 31 END OF SECTION 32 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 6/14/2024 Added GPS and electronic format requirements to Record Drawings under 3.4.B. 33 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 ITEM 11 2 PROJECT SPECIFIC AMENDMENTS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. This project utilizes City of Denton Specification Documents for General Provisions 6 and General Requirements and Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT) Standard 7 Specifications for Technical Specifications. Wherever the TXDOT Standard 8 Specifications refer to TXDOT General Requirements (Items or Articles 2-10) the 9 Contractor shall instead refer to the appropriate City of Denton General Provision or 10 General Requirement specification. 11 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 12 A. Measurement and Payment 13 a. Installation, maintenance and removal of erosion control measures shall be 14 governed by TXDOT Item 506 Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation, and 15 Environmental Controls in all matters except for payment. Payment for erosion 16 control installation, maintenance and removal shall be by lump sum payment 17 under the SWPPP Device Installation and SWPPP Device Removal bid items 18 as explained in City of Denton Specification 31 25 14 Erosion and Sediment 19 Control. 20 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 21 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 22 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 23 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 24 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 25 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 26 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 27 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 28 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 29 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 31 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 END OF SECTION 2 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 EXHIBIT A 2 (To be printed on Contractors Letterhead) 3 4 5 6 Date: 7 8 EPN No.: 9 Project Name: 10 Limits of Construction: 11 12 13 14 15 16 THIS IS TO INFORM YOU THAT UNDER A CONTRACT WITH THE CITY OF 17 DENTON, OUR COMPANY WILL WORK ON UTILITY LINES ON OR AROUND YOUR 18 PROPERTY. 19 20 CONSTRUCTION WILL BEGIN APPROXIMATELY SEVEN DAYS FROM THE DATE 21 OF THIS NOTICE. 22 23 IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT ACCESS, SECURITY, SAFETY OR ANY OTHER 24 ISSUE, PLEASE CALL: 25 26 27 <CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENT > AT <TELEPHONE NO.> 28 29 OR 30 31 <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> 32 33 34 PLEASE KEEP THIS FLYER HANDY WHEN YOU CALL 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised November 23, 2020 Effective July 1, 2024 1 EXHIBIT B 2 3 Date: 4 5 EPN No.: 6 7 Project Name:_____________________ 8 9 10 NOTICE OF 11 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE 12 INTERRUPTION 13 14 15 Due to utility improvements in your neighborhood, your water service will be 16 interrupted on ___________________________________________________ 17 between the hours of __________________ and _______________________. 18 19 20 IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS DISRUPTION, PLEASE CALL: 21 22 23 <CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENT > AT <TELEPHONE NO.> 24 25 OR 26 27 <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> 28 29 THIS SERVICE INTERRUPTION WILL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE 30 31 Thank you, 32 _________________________, Contractor 2024 Specifications 1 3 Item 1 Abbreviations and Definitions 1. APPLICABILITY Wherever the following terms are used in these specifications or other Contract documents, the intent and meaning will be interpreted as shown below. 2. ABBREVIATIONS AAR Association of American Railroads AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. AMPP Association for Materials Protection and Performance AMRL AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APA The Engineered Wood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association ASBI American Segmental Bridge Institute ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWC American Wood Council AWG American Wire Gage AWPA American Wood Protection Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BMP Best Management Practices CFR Code of Federal Regulations CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe COE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DBE Disadvantaged Business Enterprise DMS Departmental Materials Specification EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency FHWA Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation FSS Federal Specifications and Standards (General Services Administration) GSA General Services Administration HUB Historically Underutilized Business 2024 Specifications 1 4 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IMSA International Municipal Signal Association ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Transportation Engineers ITS Intelligent Transportation System LRFD Load and Resistance Factor Design MASH Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware MPL Material Producer List NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program NCR Nonconformance Report NEC National Electrical Code (Published by NFPA) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEPA National Environmental Policy Act NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NPCA National Precast Concrete Association NRM Nonhazardous Recyclable Material NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSBA National Steel Bridge Alliance OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PPI Plastics Pipe Institute PS&E Plans, Specifications, and Estimates PSL Project Specific Location PTI Post-Tension Institute QA Quality Assurance QC Quality Control RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe RPLS Registered Public Land Surveyor RRC Railroad Commission of Texas SBE Small Business Enterprise SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SI International System of Units SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality TDLR Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation TMUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices UL Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. USC United States Code WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association 3. DEFINITIONS 3.1. Abrasive Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized air combined with abrasive media. 3.2. Actual Cost. Contractor’s actual cost to provide labor, material, equipment, and project overhead necessary for the work. 3.3. Addendum. Change in proposal forms developed between advertising and bid submittal deadline. 2024 Specifications 1 5 3.4. Additive Alternate. A bid item contained in a proposal that is not a regular item or a replacement alternate bid item. The additive alternate item(s) include work that may be added to the base bid at the time of letting. 3.5. Advertisement. The public announcement required by law inviting bids for work to be performed or materials to be furnished. 3.6. Affiliates. Two or more Bidders are affiliated if they share common officers, directors, or stockholders; a family member of an officer, director, or stockholder of one Bidder serves in a similar capacity in another of the Bidders; an individual who has an interest in, or controls a part of, one Bidder either directly or indirectly also has an interest in, or controls a part of, another of the Bidders; the Bidders are so closely connected or associated that one of the Bidders, either directly or indirectly, controls or has the power to control another Bidder; one Bidder controls or has the power to control another Bidder; or the Bidders are closely allied through an established course of dealings, including, but not limited to, the lending of financial assistance. Refer to 43 TAC § 9.12(g), “Affiliated Entities.” 3.7. Air Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized air free of oil and moisture. 3.8. Air Temperature. The temperature measured in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) in the shade, not in the direct rays of the sun, and away from artificial heat. 3.9. Anticipated Profit. Profit for work not performed. 3.10. Apparent Low Bidder. The Bidder determined to have the numerically lowest total bid as a result of the tabulation of bids by the Department. 3.11. Architect of Record. A person registered as an architect or licensed as a landscape architect, in conformance with State law, exercising overall responsibility for the design or a significant portion of the design and performing certain Contract administration responsibilities as described in the Contract; or a firm employed by the State to provide professional architectural services. 3.12. Arterial Highway. A highway used primarily for through traffic and usually on a continuous route. 3.13. Available Bidding Capacity. The Contractor’s approved bidding capacity less uncompleted work on Department Contracts. 3.14. Award. The Commission’s acceptance of a Contractor’s bid for a proposed Contract that authorizes the Department to enter into a Contract. 3.15. Bid. The offer from the Bidder for performing the work described in the proposal. 3.16. Bid Bond. The security executed by the Contractor and the Surety furnished to the Department to guarantee payment of liquidated damages if the Contractor fails to enter into an awarded Contract. 3.17. Bid Error. A mathematical mistake made by a Bidder in the unit price entered into the proposal. 3.18. Bidder. An individual, partnership, limited liability company, corporation, or joint venture submitting a bid for a proposed Contract. 3.19. Bidders Questionnaire. A prequalification form that reflects detailed equipment and experience data but waives audited financial data. 3.20. Bidding Capacity. The maximum dollar value a Contractor may have under Contract with the Department at any given time. 2024 Specifications 1 6 3.21. Blast Cleaning. Using one of the blasting methods including, but not limited to water blasting, low-pressure water blasting, high-pressure water blasting, abrasive blasting, water-abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water -injected abrasive blasting, and brush blasting. 3.22. Bridge. A structure, including supports, erected over a depression or an obstruction (e.g., water, a highway, or a railway) with a roadway or track for carrying traffic or other moving loads, and having an opening measured along the center of the roadway of more than 20 ft. between faces of abutments, spring lines of arches, or extreme ends of the openings for multiple box culverts. 3.23. Brush Blasting. Sweeping lightly with an abrasive blast to remove loose material. 3.24. Building Contract. A Contract entered under Transportation Code, Chapter 223, Subchapter A, “Competitive Bids,” for the construction or maintenance of a Department building or appurtenance facilities. Building Contracts are considered construction Contracts. 3.25. Callout Work. Contracts, or work items in Contracts, that require a Contractor’s response on an as-needed basis (e.g., see Item 351, “Flexible Pavement Structure Repair”). 3.26. Certificate of Insurance. A form approved by the Department covering insurance requirements stated in the Contract. 3.27. Change Order. Written order to the Contractor detailing changes to the specified work, item quantities, or any other modification to the Contract. 3.28. Commission. The Texas Transportation Commission or authorized representative. 3.29. Concrete Construction Joint. A joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set. 3.30. Concrete Repair Manual. Department manual specifying methods and procedures for concrete repair as an extension of the standard specifications. 3.31. ConcreteWorks©. Department-owned software for concrete heat analysis. Software is available on the Department’s website. 3.32. Confidential Questionnaire. A prequalification form that reflects detailed financial and experience data. 3.33. Construction Contract. A Contract entered under Transportation Code § 223.001(b)(1), for the construction, reconstruction, repair, or maintenance of a segment of the State highway system. 3.34. Consultant. The licensed professional engineer or engineering firm, or the architect or architectural firm, registered in the State of Texas and under Contract to the Department to perform professional services. The consultant may be the Engineer or architect of record or may provide services through and be subcontracted to the Engineer or architect of record. 3.35. Contract. The agreement between the Department and the Contractor establishing the obligations of the parties for furnishing of materials and performance of the work prescribed in the Contract documents. 3.36. Contract Documents. Elements of the Contract including, but not limited to, the plans, specifications incorporated by reference, special provisions, special specifications, Contract bonds, change orders, and supplemental agreements. 3.37. Contract Time. The number of working days specified for completion of the work, including authorized additional working days. 2024 Specifications 1 7 3.38. Contractor. The individual, partnership, limited liability company, corporation, or joint venture and all principals and representatives with which the Contract is made by the Department. 3.39. Control of Access. The condition in which the right to access of owners or occupants of abutting land or other persons in connection with a highway is fully or partially controlled by public authority. 3.40. Control Point. An established point shown on the plans to provide vertical and horizontal references for geometric control for construction. 3.41. Controlled Access Highway. Any highway to or from which access is denied or controlled, in whole or in part, from or to abutting land or intersecting streets, roads, highways, alleys, or other public or private ways. 3.42. Cross-Sections. Graphic representations of the original ground and the proposed facility, at right angles to the centerline or base line. 3.43. Culvert. Any buried structure providing an opening under a roadway for drainage or other purposes. Culverts may also be classified as bridges. (See Section 1.3.22., “Bridge.”) 3.44. Cycle. The activity necessary for performing the specified work within the right of way project limits once. 3.45. Daily Road-User Cost. Damages based on the estimated daily cost of inconvenience to the traveling public resulting from the work. 3.46. Debar (Debarment). Disqualification of an entity from bidding on or entering into a Contract with the Department, from participating as a subcontractor under a Contract with the Department, and from participating as a supplier of materials or equipment to be used under a Contract with the Department. Refer to 43 TAC § 10.2, “Definitions.”. 3.47. Department. The Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT). 3.48. Departmental Materials Specifications. Reference specifications for various materials published by the Materials and Tests Division. 3.49. Detour. A temporary traffic route around a closed portion of a road. 3.50. Direct Traffic Culvert. Concrete box culvert whose top slab is used as the final riding surface or is to have an overlay or other riding surface treatment. 3.51. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. A for-profit small business certified through the Texas Unified Certification Program in accordance with 49 CFR Part 26, that is at least 51% owned by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals, or in the case of a publicly owned business, in which at least 51% of the stock is owned by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals, and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more of the individuals who own it. 3.52. Divided Highway. A highway with separate roadways intended to move traffic in opposite directions. 3.53. Easement. A real property right acquired by one party to use land belonging to another party for a specified purpose. 3.54. Electronic Vault. The Department’s bidding system where electronic bids are stored before bid opening. 3.55. Engineer. The Chief Engineer of the Department or the authorized representative of the Chief Engineer. 3.56. Equipment Watch. Publication containing equipment rental rates. 3.57. Escalation Ladder. A process to determine issue resolution during the course of the Contract. 2024 Specifications 1 8 3.58. Expressway. A divided arterial highway for through traffic with full or partial control of access and generally with grade separations at intersections. 3.59. Family Member. A family member of an individual is the individual’s parent, parent’s spouse, stepparent, stepparent’s spouse, sibling, sibling’s spouse, spouse, child, child’s spouse, spouse’s child, spouse’s child’s spouse, grandchild, grandparent, uncle, uncle’s spouse, aunt, aunt’s spouse, first cousin, or first cousin’s spouse. Refer to 43 TAC § 9.12(g), “Affiliated Entities.” 3.60. Force Account. Payment for directed work based on the actual cost of labor, equipment, and materials furnished with markups for project overhead and profit. 3.61. Freeway. An expressway with full control of access. 3.62. Frontage Road. A local street or road auxiliary to and located along an arterial highway for service to abutting property and adjacent areas and for control of access (sometimes known as a service road, access road, or insulator road). 3.63. Hazardous Materials or Waste. Hazardous materials or waste include, but are not limited to, explosives, compressed gas, flammable liquids, flammable solids, combustible liquids, oxidizers, poisons, radioactive materials, corrosives, etiologic agents, and other material classified as hazardous by 40 CFR 261, or applicable state and federal regulations. 3.64. High-Pressure Water Blasting. Water blasting with pressures between 5,000 and 10,000 psi. 3.65. Highway, Street, or Road. General terms denoting a public way for purposes of and related to vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle travel, including the entire area within the right of way including Intersections and Easements; all related structures, improvements, and appurtenances, including but not limited to the roadside and roadside facilities, drainage systems, signal systems, and other traffic in formation and control systems; or other structures or improvements that directly or indirectly serve public travel. Recommended usage in urban areas is highway or street, and in rural areas, highway or road. 3.66. Historically Underutilized Business (HUB). A corporation, sole proprietorship, partnership, or joint venture formed for the purpose of making a profit certified by the Texas Building and Procurement Commission, and 51% owned by one or more persons who are economically disadvantaged because of their identification as members of certain groups, including African Americans, Hispanic Americans, Asian-Pacific Americans, Native Americans, or women, and have a proportionate interest and demonstrate active participation in the control, operation, and management of the business’ affairs. Individuals meeting the HUB definition are required to be residents of the State of Texas. Businesses that do not have their primary headquarters in the State of Texas are not eligible for HUB certification. 3.67. In Writing. Communication memorialized, including written or electronic documentation by email or letter only. 3.68. Incentive and Disincentive Provisions. An adjustment to the Contract price of a predetermined amount for each day the work is completed ahead of or behind the specified milestone, phase, or Contract completion dates. The amount of the incentive and disincentive is determined based on estimated costs for engineering, traffic control, delays to the motorists, and other items involved in the Contract. 3.69. Independent Assurance Tests. Tests used to evaluate the sampling and testing techniques and equipment used in the acceptance program. The tests are performed by the Department and are not used for acceptance purposes. 3.70. Inspector. The person assigned by the Engineer to inspect for compliance with the Contract any or all parts of the work and the materials used. 2024 Specifications 1 9 3.71. Intelligent Transportation System. An integrated system that uses video and other electronic detection devices to monitor traffic flows. 3.72. Intersection. The general area where two or more highways, streets, or roads join or cross, including the roadway and roadside facilities for vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle traffic movements within it. 3.73. Island. An area within a roadway from which vehicular traffic is intended to be excluded, together with any area at the approach occupied by protective deflecting or warning devices. 3.74. Joint Venture. Any combination of individuals, partnerships, limited liability companies, or corporations submitting a single bid proposal. 3.75. Lane Rental. A method to assess the Contractor daily or hourly rental fees for each lane, shoulder, or combination of lanes and shoulders taken out of service. 3.76. Letting. The receipt, opening, tabulation, and determination of the apparent low Bidder. 3.77. Letting Official. The Executive Director or any Department employee empowered by the Executive Director to officially receive bids and close the receipt of bids at a letting. 3.78. Licensed Professional Engineer. A person who has been duly licensed by the Texas Board of Professional Engineers to engage in the practice of engineering in the State of Texas; also referred to as a Professional Engineer. 3.79. Limits of Construction. An area with established boundaries, identified within the highway right of way and easements, where the Contractor is permitted to perform the work. 3.80. Local Street or Road. A street or road primarily for access to residence, business, or other abutting property. 3.81. Low-Pressure Water Blasting. Water blasting with pressures between 3,000 and 5,000 psi. 3.82. Major Item. An item of work included in the Contract that has a total cost equal to or greater than 5% of the original Contract or $100,000 whichever is less. A major item at the time of bid will remain a major item. An item not originally a major item does not become one through the course of the Contract. 3.83. Material Producer List. Department-maintained list of approved products, materials, laboratories, service providers, manufacturers, and producers. 3.84. Materially Unbalanced Bid. A bid that generates a reasonable doubt that award to the Bidder submitting a mathematically unbalanced bid will result in the lowest ultimate cost to the State. 3.85. Materials Contract. A Contract entered under Transportation Code § 223.001(b)(2) and (3) for roadway materials, maintenance materials, traffic control devices, or safety devices. These Contracts are designated as “MMC” and “TMC” for Maintenance Materials Contracts or Traffic Materials Contracts, respectively. 3.86. Materials Supplier’s Questionnaire. A prequalification form that reflects basic information, such as company contact, signature authority, and other requirements, but waives financial, equipment, and experience data. 3.87. Mathematically Unbalanced Bid. A bid containing bid prices that do not reflect reasonable actual costs plus a reasonable proportionate share of the Bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and other indirect costs. 3.88. Median. The portion of a divided highway separating the traffic lanes in opposite directions. 2024 Specifications 1 10 3.89. Milestone Date. The date that a specific portion of the work is to be completed before the completion date for all work under the Contract. 3.90. Monolithic Concrete Placement. The placement of plastic concrete in such manner and sequence to prevent a construction joint. 3.91. National Holidays. January 1, the last Monday in May, July 4, the first Monday in September, the fourth Thursday in November, December 24, and December 25. 3.92. Nonhazardous Recyclable Material. A material recovered or diverted from the nonhazardous waste stream for the purposes of reuse or recycling in the manufacture of products that may otherwise be produced using raw or virgin materials. 3.93. Nonresident Bidder. A Bidder whose principal place of business is not in Texas. This includes a Bidder whose ultimate parent company or majority owner does not have its principal place of business in Texas. 3.94. Nonresponsive Proposal. A proposal that does not meet the criteria for acceptance contained in the proposal form. 3.95. Non-Site-Specific Contracts. Contracts where a geographic region is specified for the work and work orders, with or without plans, detail the limits and work to be performed. 3.96. Notification. Either written or oral instruction to the Contractor. Voice mail is oral notification. 3.97. Pavement. That part of the roadway with a constructed surface for the use of vehicular traffic. 3.98. Pavement Structure. Combination of surface course and base course placed on a subgrade to support the traffic load and distribute it to the roadbed. 3.98.1. Base Course. One or more layers of specified material thickness placed on a subgrade to support a surface course. 3.98.2. Subgrade. The top surface of a roadbed upon which the pavement structure, shoulders, and curbs are constructed. 3.98.3. Subgrade Treatment. Modifying or stabilizing material in the subgrade. 3.98.4. Surface Course. Pavement structure layers designed to accommodate the traffic load. The top layer resists skidding, traffic abrasion, and the disintegrating effects of climate and is sometimes called the wearing course. 3.99. Payment Bond. The security executed by the Contractor and the Surety, furnished to the Department to guarantee payment of all legal debts of the Contractor pertaining to the Contract. 3.100. Performance Bond. The security executed by the Contractor and the Surety, furnished to the Department to guarantee the completion of the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 3.101. Plans. The drawings approved by the Engineer, including true reproductions of the drawings that may show the location, character, dimensions, and details of the work and are a part of the Contract. Documents may include drawings or digital files. 3.102. Power of Attorney for Surety Bonds. An instrument under corporate seal appointing an attorney-in-fact to act on behalf of a Surety in signing bonds. 3.103. Prequalification. The process for determining a Contractor’s eligibility to bid work. 2024 Specifications 1 11 3.104. Prequalification Statement. The forms on which required information is furnished concerning the Contractor’s ability to perform and finance the work. 3.105. Project Specific Location. A material source, plant, waste site, parking area, storage area, field office, staging area, haul road, or other similar location either outside the project limits or within the project limits but not specifically addressed in the Contract. 3.106. Proposal. The offer from the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form, including addenda issued, giving unit bid prices for performing the work described in the plans and specifications. 3.107. Proposal Form. The form printed and sent to the Bidder by the Department or printed by the Bidder from the Department’s bidding system. 3.108. Proposal Guaranty. The security furnished by the Bidder as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a Contract if awarded the work. 3.109. Quality Assurance (QA). Sampling, testing, inspection, and other activities conducted by the Engineer to determine payment and make acceptance decisions. 3.110. Quality Control (QC). Sampling, testing, and other process control activities conducted by the Contractor to monitor production and placement operations. 3.111. Ramp. A section of highway for the primary purpose of making connections with other highways. 3.112. Recurring Maintenance Work Contracts. Contracts or work for which maintenance is needed at the same location on more than one occasion (e.g., mowing Contracts for which mowing cycles are requested on multiple occasions). 3.113. Referee Tests. Tests requested to resolve differences between Contractor and Engineer test results. The referee laboratory is the Materials and Tests Division. 3.114. Regular Item. A bid item contained in a proposal and not designated as an additive alternate or replacement alternate bid item. 3.115. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment. Publication containing equipment rental rates. 3.116. Repair. Performed under Transportation Code §223, Subchapter A for Highway Improvement Contracts and includes restoration of a Highway, Street, or Road by replacing or putting together, in whole or in part, what is torn, broken, or otherwise damaged. Repair denotes the process of restoring all or part of a Highway, Street, or Road that has been subjected to decay, waste, injury, partial destruction, erosion, dilapidation, degradation, etc. Repair includes work in Construction and Routine Maintenance Contracts. 3.117. Replacement Alternate. A bid item identified the proposal form that a Bidder may substitute for a specific regular item of work. 3.118. Responsive Bid. A proposal that meets all requirements of the proposal form for acceptance. 3.119. Right of Way. A general term denoting land or property devoted to transportation purposes. 3.120. Roadbed. The graded portion of a highway prepared as foundation for the pavement structure and shoulders. On divided highways, the depressed median type and the raised median type highways are considered to have two roadbeds. Highways with a flush median are considered to have one roadbed. Frontage roads are considered separate roadbeds. 3.121. Road Master. A railroad maintenance official in charge of a division of railway. 2024 Specifications 1 12 3.122. Roadside. The areas between the outside edges of the shoulders and the right of way boundaries. Unpaved median areas between inside shoulders of divided highways and areas within interchanges are included. 3.123. Roadway. The portion of the highway (including shoulders) used by the traveling public. 3.124. Routine Maintenance Contract. A maintenance Contract entered under Transportation Code Subchapter A for Highway Improvement Contracts let through and executed as a result of the routine maintenance contracting procedure, to preserve and repair roadways, bridges, and rights of way, with all its components to its designed or accepted configuration. 3.125. Sandblasting, Dry. Spraying blasts of pressurized air combined with sand. 3.126. Sandblasting, Wet. Spraying blasts of pressurized water combined with sand. 3.127. Shot Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized air combined with metal shot. 3.128. Shoulder. That portion of the roadway contiguous with the traffic lanes for accommodation of stopped vehicles for emergency use or for lateral support of base and surface courses. 3.129. Sidewalk. Portion of the right of way constructed exclusively for pedestrian use. 3.130. Slurry Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized air combined with a mixture of water and abrasive media. 3.131. Small Business Enterprise. A firm (including affiliates) whose annual gross receipts do not exceed the U.S. Small Business Administration’s size standards for 4 consecutive yr. 3.132. Special Provisions. Additions or revisions to these standard specifications or special specifications. 3.133. Special Specifications. Supplemental specifications applicable to the Contract not covered by these standard specifications. 3.134. Specifications. Directives or requirements issued or made pertaining to the method and manner of performing the work or to quantities and qualities of materials to be furnished under the Contract. References to DMSs, ASTM or AASHTO specifications, or Department bulletins and manuals imply the latest standard or tentative standard in effect on the date of the proposal. The Engineer will consider incorporation of subsequent changes to these documents in accordance with Item 4, “Scope of Work.” 3.135. State. The State of Texas. 3.136. State Holiday. A holiday authorized by the State Legislature excluding optional State holidays and not listed in Section 1.3.91., “National Holidays.” A list of State holidays can be found on the Department’s website. 3.137. Station. A unit of measurement consisting of 100 horizontal ft. 3.138. Subcontract. The agreement between the Contractor and subcontractor establishing the obligations of the parties for furnishing of materials and performance of the work prescribed in the Contract documents. 3.139. Subcontractor. An individual, partnership, limited liability company, corporation, or any combination thereof that the Contractor sublets, or proposes to sublet, any portion of a Contract, excluding a material supplier, a hauling firm hauling only from a commercial source to the project, a truck owner-operator, a wholly owned subsidiary, or specialty-type businesses such as security companies and rental companies. 3.140. Subsidiary. Materials, labor, or other elements that because of their nature or quantity have not been identified as a separate item and are included within the items on which they necessarily depend. 2024 Specifications 1 13 3.141. Substantial Completion of Work. The date (day) when all project work requiring lane or shoulder closures or obstructions is completed, and traffic is following the lane arrangement as shown on the plans for the finished roadway; all pavement construction and surfacing are complete; and traffic control devices and pavement markings are in their final position, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The Engineer may make an exception for permanent pavement markings provided the lack of markings does not cause a disruption to traffic flow or an unsafe condition for the traveling public, and work zone pavement markings are in place. 3.142. Substructure. The part of the structure below the bridge seats but not including bearings, drilled shafts, or piling. Parapets, back walls, wing walls of the abutments, and drainage structures are considered parts of the substructure. 3.143. Superintendent. The representative of the Contractor who is available at all times and able to receive instructions from the Engineer or authorized Department representatives and to act for the Contractor. 3.144. Superstructure. The part of the structure above the bridge seats or above the springing lines of arches and including the bearings. Flatwork construction may be considered superstructure. 3.145. Supplemental Agreement. Written agreement entered into between the Contractor and the State and approved by the Surety, covering alterations and changes in the Contract. A supplemental agreement is used by the Department whenever the modifications include assignment of the Contract from one entity to another or other cases as desired by the Department. 3.146. Surety. The corporate body or bodies authorized to do business in Texas bound with and for the Contractor for the faithful performance of the work covered by the Contract and for the payment for all labor and material supplied in the prosecution of the work. 3.147. Surplus Materials. Any debris or material related to the Contract not incorporated into the work. 3.148. Suspension. Action taken by the Department or federal government pursuant to regulation that prohibits a person or company from entering into a Contract, or from participating as a subcontractor, or supplier of materials or equipment used in a highway improvement Contract as defined in Transportation Code, Chapter 223, Subchapter A. 3.149. Traffic Lane. The strip of roadway intended to accommodate the forward movement of a single line of vehicles. 3.150. Traveled Way. The portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of shoulders and auxiliary lanes. 3.151. Truck Owner-Operator. An individual who owns and operates one truck for hire. 3.152. UT-Bridge. Department-owned software for steel girder erection. Software is available on the Department’s website. 3.153. UT-Lift. Department-owned software for steel girder erection. Software is available on the Department’s website. 3.154. Utility. Privately, publicly, or cooperatively owned lines, facilities, and systems for producing, transmitting, or distributing communications, power, heat, gas, oil, water, waste, or stormwater that are not connected with the highway drainage, signal systems, or other products that directly or indirectly serve the public; the utility company. 3.155. Verification Tests. Tests used to verify accuracy of QC and QA and mixture design testing. 3.156. Water-Abrasive Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized water combined with abrasive media. 2024 Specifications 1 14 3.157. Water Blasting. Spraying blasts of pressurized water of at least 3,000 psi. 3.158. Water-Injected Abrasive Blasting. Abrasive blasting with water injected into the abrasive and air stream at the nozzle. 3.159. Wholly Owned Subsidiary. A legal entity owned entirely by the Contractor or subcontractor. 3.160. Work. The furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for the successful completion of the Contract. 3.161. Work Order. Written notice to the Contractor to begin the work. The work order may include the date when work and time charges will begin, the allowable number of working days, and plan sheets providing details specific to a location or to an item of work for non-site-specific work. A work order is part of the Contract. 3.162. Written Notice. Written notice is considered to have been duly given if delivered in person to the individual or member to whom it is intended or if sent by regular, registered, or certified mail and delivered to the last known business address; sent by facsimile to the last known phone number; or sent by email to the last known address. The date of the letter will serve as the beginning day of notice. Unclaimed mail or failure to provide current contact information will not be considered a failure to provide written notice. 2024 Specifications 100 99 Item 100 Preparing Right of Way 1. DESCRIPTION Prepare the right of way and designated easements for construction operations by removing and disposing of all obstructions when removal of such obstructions is not specifically shown on the plans to be paid by other Items. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in conformance with the plans and Specifications. 3. CONSTRUCTION Protect designated features on the right of way and prune trees and shrubs as directed. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation. Follow all local and state regulations when burning. Pile and burn brush at approved locations as directed. Spread mulched material at approved locations as directed. Handle hazardous materials in accordance with Article 6.10., “Hazardous Materials.” Clear areas shown on the plans of all obstructions, except those landscape features that are to be preserved. Such obstructions include remains of houses and other structures, foundations, floor slabs, concrete, brick, lumber, plaster, septic tank drain fields, basements, abandoned utility pipes or conduits, equipment, fences, retaining walls, and other items as specified on the plans. Remove vegetation and other landscape features not designated for preservation, curb and gutter, driveways, paved parking areas, miscellaneous stone, sidewalks, drainage structures, manholes, inlets, abandoned railroad tracks, scrap iron, and debris, whether above or below ground. Remove culverts, storm sewers, manholes, and inlets in proper sequence to maintain traffic and drainage. Removal of live utility facilities is not included in this Item. Perform tree and brush removal and trimming in accordance with Article 752.4, “Work Methods.” Notify the Engineer in writing when items not shown on the plans and not reasonably detectable (buried with no obvious indication of presence) are encountered and required to be removed. These items will be handled in accordance with Article 4.5., “Differing Site Conditions.” Remove obstructions not designated for preservation to 2 ft. below natural ground in areas receiving embankment. Remove obstructions to 2 ft. below the excavation level in areas to be excavated. Remove obstructions to 1 ft. below natural ground in all other areas. Remove trees and stumps to 6 in. below ground level. Plug the remaining ends of abandoned underground structures over 3 in. in diameter using concrete to form a tight closure. Backfill, compact, and restore areas where obstructions have been removed unless otherwise directed. Use approved material for backfilling. Dispose of wells in accordance with Item 103, “Disposal of Wells.” Accept ownership, unless otherwise directed, and dispose of removed materials and debris at locations off the right of way in conformance with local, state, and federal requirements. 3.1. Tree Protection. Install tree protection for trees designated for preservation. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, install tree protection along the drip line of the trees using 4-ft. tall chain link fencing with line posts no more than 10 ft. apart. Install tree protection before beginning work. 2024 Specifications 100 100 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the acre; by the 100-ft. station, regardless of the width of the right of way; or by each tree removed. Tree removal diameter will be measured in accordance with Article 752.5, “Measurement.” Tree protection will be measured by the acre of trees protected, by the foot of fencing, or by each tree protected. 5. PAYMENT For “acre” and “station” measurement, the work performed in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Preparing Right of Way.” For “each” measurement, the work performed in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Preparing Right of Way (Tree)” of the diameter specified. This price is full compensation for removal and trimming of designated trees and shrubs; removal and disposal of structures and obstructions; backfilling of holes; furnishing and placing concrete for plugs; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Total payment of this Item will not exceed 10% of the original Contract amount until final acceptance. The remainder will be paid on the estimate after final acceptance in accordance with Article 5.12., “Final Acceptance.” 5.1. Tree Protection. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid as follows. 5.1.1. Subsidiary Work. The following will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to “Tree Protection”:  protection for Contractor project-specific locations inside and outside the right of way;  repair to areas to be protected that are damaged by Contractor operations;  removal and re-installation of devices and features needed for the convenience of the Contractor;  finish grading and dressing upon removal of the protection; and  minor adjustments, including, but not limited to, plumbing posts and re-attaching protection. 5.1.2. Installation. Installation will be paid for as “Tree Protection (Install).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment and for labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 5.1.3. Removal. Removal will be paid for as “Tree Protection (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment and for proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 104 103 Item 104 Removing Concrete 1. DESCRIPTION Break, remove, and salvage or dispose of existing hydraulic cement concrete. 2. CONSTRUCTION Remove existing hydraulic cement concrete from locations shown on the plans. Avoid damaging concrete that will remain in place. Saw-cut and remove the existing concrete to neat lines. Replace any concrete damaged by the Contractor at no expense to the Department. Accept ownership and properly dispose of broken concrete in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3. MEASUREMENT Removing concrete pavement, floors, porches, patios, riprap, medians, foundations, sidewalks, driveways, and other appurtenances will be measured by the square yard (regardless of thickness) or by the cubic yard of calculated volume, in its original position. Removing curb, curb and gutter, and concrete traffic barrier will be measured by the foot in its original position. The removal of monolithic concrete curb or dowelled concrete curb will be included in the concrete pavement measurement. Removing retaining walls will be measured by the square yard along the front face from the top of the wall to the top of the footing. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 4. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Removing Concrete” of the type specified. This price is full compensation for breaking the concrete; loading, hauling, and salvaging or disposing of the material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removing retaining wall footings will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item. 2024 Specifications 105 104 Item 105 Removing Treated and Untreated Base and Asphalt Pavement 1. DESCRIPTION Break, remove, and store or dispose of existing asphalt pavement, including surface treatments, and treated or untreated base materials. 2. CONSTRUCTION Break material retained by the Department into pieces not larger than 24 in. unless otherwise shown on the plans. Remove existing asphalt pavement before disturbing stabilized base. Avoid contamination of the asphalt materials and damage to adjacent areas. Repair material damaged by operations outside the designated locations. Stockpile materials designated salvageable at designated sites when shown on the plans or as directed. Prepare stockpile site by removing vegetation and trash and by providing for proper drainage. Material not designated to be salvaged will become the property of the Contractor. When this material is disposed of, do so in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 3. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the 100-ft. station along the baseline of each roadbed, by the square yard of existing treated or untreated base and asphalt pavement in their original position, or by the cubic yard of existing treated or untreated base and asphalt pavement in their original position, as calculated by the average end area method or as shown on the plans. Square yard and cubic yard measurement will be established by the widths and depths shown on the plans and the lengths measured in the field. 4. PAYMENT The work performed in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Removing Treated and Untreated Base and Asphalt Pavement” of the depth specified. This price is full compensation for breaking the material, loading, hauling, unloading, and stockpiling or disposing; repair to areas outside designated locations for removal; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 110 106 Item 110 Excavation 1. DESCRIPTION Excavate areas as shown on the plans or as directed. Remove materials encountered to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the plans and cross-sections. 2. MATERIALS Accept ownership of unsuitable or excess material and dispose of material in conformance with local, state, and federal regulations, at locations outside the right of way. 3. CONSTRUCTION Maintain drainage in the excavated area to avoid damage to the roadway section. Correct any damage to the subgrade caused by weather at no additional cost to the Department. Shape slopes to avoid loosening material below or outside the proposed grades. Remove and dispose of slides or slope failures as directed. Excavate to the grade and sections shown on the plans. Manipulate and compact subgrade in accordance with Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods,” unless excavation is to clean homogenous rock at final grade. Correct unsuitable material encountered at or below subgrade as directed. 3.1. Rock Cuts. Use approved embankment material compacted in accordance with Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods,” to replace undercut material at no additional cost if excavation extends below the grade shown on the plans. 3.2. Earth Cuts. Scarify remaining material to a depth at least 6 in. below the grade shown on the plans in areas where pavement structure will be placed. Compact subgrade in accordance with Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods.” 3.3. Acceptance Criteria. 3.3.1. Grade Tolerances. 3.3.1.1. Staged Construction. Grade to within 1.25 in. in the cross-section and 1.25 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. 3.3.1.2. Turnkey Construction. Grade to within 0.5 in. in the cross-section and 0.5 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the cubic yard in its original position as computed by the method of average end areas or as shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 110 107 This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. Limits of measurement for excavation in retaining wall areas will be as shown on the plans. Shrinkage or swelling factors will not be considered in determining the calculated quantities. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Excavation (Roadway),” “Excavation (Channel),” “Excavation (Special),” or “Excavation (Roadway and Channel).” This price is full compensation for authorized excavation; drying; undercutting subgrade in rock cuts and reworking or replacing the undercut material; hauling; disposal of material not used elsewhere on the project; scarification and compaction; and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. Drying subgrade deeper than 6 in. below grade as shown on the plans will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” Excavation and replacement of unsuitable material below grade as shown on the plans will be performed and paid for in conformance with the applicable bid items. However, if Item 132, “Embankment,” is not included in the Contract, payment for replacement of unsuitable material will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” Removing, reworking, reshaping, or re-laying existing pavement structure will be paid for in conformance with the appropriate Item. When a slide or slope failure not due to the Contractor’s negligence or operation occurs, payment for removal and disposal of the slide material will be in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” Excavation in backfill areas of retaining walls will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 132 110 Item 132 Embankment 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, place, and compact materials for construction of roadways, embankments, levees, dikes, or any designated section of the roadway where additional material is required. 2. MATERIALS Furnish approved material capable of forming a stable embankment from required excavation in the areas shown on the plans or from sources outside the right of way. Provide one or more of the following types as shown on the plans.  Type A. Granular material that is free of vegetation or other objectionable material and meets the requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Testing Requirements Property Test Method Specification Limit Liquid limit Tex-104-E ≤45 Plasticity index (PI) Tex-106-E ≤15 Bar linear shrinkage Tex-107-E ≥2 Perform the linear shrinkage test only as indicated in Tex-104-E.  Type B. Materials such as rock, loam, clay, or other approved materials.  Type C. Material meeting the specification requirements shown on the plans. Type C may be further designated as Type C1, C2, etc.  Type D. Material from required excavation areas shown on the plans. Meet the requirements of the pertinent retaining wall Items for retaining wall backfill material. 3. CONSTRUCTION Meet the requirements of Item 7, “Legal Relations and Responsibilities,” when off right of way sources are used. Notify the Engineer before opening a material source to allow for required testing. Complete preparation of the right of way in accordance with Item 100, “Preparing Right of Way,” for areas to receive embankment. Backfill tree-stump holes or other minor excavations with approved material and tamp. Restore the ground surface, including any material disked loose or washed out, to its original slope. Compact the ground surface by sprinkling in accordance with Item 204, “Sprinkling,” and by rolling using equipment complying with Item 210, “Rolling,” when directed. Scarify and loosen the unpaved surface areas, except rock, to a depth of at least 6 in. unless otherwise shown on the plans. Bench slopes before placing material. Begin placement of material at the toe of slopes. Do not place trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other objectionable material in the embankment. Simultaneously recompact scarified material with the placed embankment material. Do not exceed the layer depth specified in Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods.” Construct embankments to the grade and sections shown on the plans. Construct the embankment in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade for the full width of the individual roadway cross-sections unless 2024 Specifications 132 111 otherwise shown on the plans. Ensure that each section of the embankment conforms to the detailed sections or slopes. Maintain the finished section, density, and grade until the project is accepted. 3.1. Earth Embankments. Earth embankment is mainly composed of material other than rock. Construct embankments in successive layers, evenly distributing materials in lengths suited for sprinkling and rolling. Obtain approval to incorporate rock and broken concrete produced by the construction project in the lower layers of the embankment. Place the rock and concrete outside the limits of the completed roadbed when the size of approved rock or broken concrete exceeds the layer thickness requirements in Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods.” Cut and remove all exposed reinforcing steel from the broken concrete. Move the material dumped in piles or windrows by blading or by similar methods and incorporate it into uniform layers. Featheredge or blend abutting layers of dissimilar material for at least 100 ft. to ensure there are no abrupt changes in the material. Break down clods or lumps of material. Apply water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter to achieve the uniform moisture content specified for compaction. Roll and sprinkle each embankment layer in accordance with Section 132.3.4.1., “Ordinary Compaction,” when ordinary compaction is specified. Compact the layer to the required density in accordance with Section 132.3.4.2., “Density and Moisture Control,” when density control is specified. 3.2. Rock Embankments. Rock embankment is mainly composed of rock. Construct rock embankments in successive layers for the full width of the roadway cross-section with a depth of 18 in. or less. Increase the layer depth for large rock sizes as approved. Do not exceed a depth of 2-1/2 ft. in any case. Fill voids created by the large stone matrix with smaller stones during the placement and filling operations. Ensure the depth of the embankment layer is greater than the maximum dimension of any rock. Do not place rock greater than 2 ft. in its maximum dimension, unless otherwise approved. Construct the final layer with graded material so that the density and uniformity are in accordance with Section 132.3.4., “Compaction Methods.” Break up exposed oversized material as approved. Roll and sprinkle each embankment layer in accordance with Section 132.3.4.1., “Ordinary Compaction,” when ordinary compaction is specified. Compact each layer to the required density in accordance with Section 132.3.4.2., “Density and Moisture Control,” when density control is specified. Proof-roll each rock layer as directed, where density testing is not possible, in accordance with Item 216, “Proof Rolling,” to ensure proper compaction. 3.3. Embankments Adjacent to Culverts and Bridges. Compact embankments adjacent to culverts and bridges in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures.” 3.4. Compaction Methods. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller. Begin rolling at the lower side and progress toward the high side on superelevated curves. Alternate roller trips to attain slightly different lengths. Compact embankments in accordance with Section 132.3.4.1., “Ordinary Compaction,” or Section 132.3.4.2., “Density and Moisture Control,” as shown on the plans. 3.4.1. Ordinary Compaction. Use approved rolling equipment complying with Item 210, “Rolling,” to compact each layer. Use specific equipment when required by the Engineer or as shown on the plans. Do not allow the loose depth of any layer to exceed 8 in., unless otherwise approved. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed before and during rolling operations. Compact each layer until there is no evidence of further consolidation. Maintain a level layer to ensure uniform compaction. Recompact and refinish the subgrade at no additional expense to the Department if the required stability or finish is lost for any reason. 3.4.2. Density and Moisture Control. Compact each layer to the required density using equipment complying with Item 210. Determine the maximum lift thickness based on the ability of the compacting operation and 2024 Specifications 132 112 equipment to meet the required density. Do not exceed layer thickness of 16 in. loose or 12 in. compacted material unless otherwise approved. Maintain a level layer to ensure uniform compaction. The Engineer will use Tex-114-E to determine the maximum dry density (Da) and optimum moisture content (Wopt). Meet the requirements for field density and moisture content shown in Table 2 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Table 2 Field Density Control Requirements Description Density Moisture Content Tex-115-E PI ≤15 ≥98% Da – 15 <PI ≤35 ≥98% Da and ≤102% Da ≥Wopt. PI> 35 ≥ 95%Da and ≤100% Da ≥Wopt. Each layer is subject to testing by the Engineer for density and moisture content. Each layer must be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and placed in a manner to ensure uniform compaction over the entire layer. The density and moisture contents for the descriptions shown in Table 2 are illustrated in the Moisture-Density Curve of Tex-114-E. Provide the Engineer with the beginning and ending station numbers of the area completed for testing. The Engineer will determine roadway density and moisture content of completed sections in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part I. The Engineer will determine random locations for testing in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part IV. When the density is less than the required density shown in Table 2, the Engineer may perform additional testing to determine the extent of the area to correct. Remove small areas of the layer to allow for density tests as required. Replace the removed material and recompact at no additional expense to the Department. Proof-roll in accordance with Item 216, when shown on the plans or as directed. Correct soft spots as directed. 3.5. Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking. Maintain the density and moisture content once all requirements shown in Table 2 are met. Maintain the moisture content no lower than 4% below optimum for soils with a PI greater than 15. Rework the material to obtain the specified compaction when the material loses the required stability, density, moisture, or finish. Alter the compaction methods and procedures on subsequent work to obtain specified density as directed. 3.6. Acceptance Criteria. 3.6.1. Grade Tolerances. 3.6.1.1. Staged Construction. Grade to within 1.25 in. in the cross-section and 1.25 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. 3.6.1.2. Turnkey Construction. Grade to within 0.5 in. in the cross-section and 0.5 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. 3.6.2. Gradation Tolerances. Ensure no more than one of the five most recent gradation tests is outside the specified limits on any individual sieve by more than 5% when gradation requirements are shown on the plans. 3.6.3. Density Tolerances. Ensure no more than one of the five most recent density tests for compaction work is outside the specified density limits and no test is outside the limits by more than 3 pcf. 3.6.4. Plasticity Tolerances. Ensure no more than one of the five most recent PI tests for material is outside the specified limit by more than 2 points. 2024 Specifications 132 113 4. MEASUREMENT Shrinkage or swell factors are the Contractor’s responsibility. When shown on the plans, factors are for informational purposes only. Measurement of retaining wall backfill in embankment areas will be paid for as embankment unless otherwise shown on the plans. Limits of measurement for embankment in retaining wall areas are shown on the plans. Embankment will be measured by the cubic yard. Measurement will be further defined for payment as follows. 4.1. Final. The cubic yard will be measured in its final position using the average end area method or as shown on the plans. The volume is computed between the original ground surface or the surface upon which the embankment is to be constructed and the lines, grades, and slopes of the embankment. In areas of salvaged topsoil, payment for embankment will be made in accordance with Item 160, “Topsoil.” Shrinkage or swell factors will not be considered in determining the calculated quantities. When measured by the cubic yard in its final position, this is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 4.2. Original. The cubic yard will be measured in its original and natural position using the average end area method or as shown on the plans. 4.3. Vehicle. The cubic yard will be measured in vehicles at the point of delivery. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Embankment (Final),” “Embankment (Original),” or “Embankment (Vehicle)” of the compaction method and type specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing embankment; hauling; placing, compacting, finishing, and reworking; disposal of waste material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When proof rolling is directed, it will be paid for in accordance with Item 216. All sprinkling and rolling, except proof rolling, will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item, unless otherwise shown on the plans. In fill sections, excavation and replacement of unsuitable material below existing elevations will be performed and paid for in conformance with the applicable bid items. However, if Item 110, “Excavation,” is not included in the Contract, payment for replacement of unsuitable material will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” Where subgrade is constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will be at the Contractor’s expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” When rework, removal, or scarification is required for existing pavement structure that will remain, it will be measured and paid for as shown on the plans for the appropriate type. 2024 Specifications 161 124 Item 161 Compost 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and place compost as shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS Furnish compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic matter and meets the requirements shown in Table 1. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure or other agricultural residuals, forest residues, bark, and paper. Ensure compost and wood chips do not contain any visible refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance considered harmful to plant growth. Do not use materials that have been treated with chemical preservatives as a compost feedstock or as wood chips. Do not use mixed municipal solid waste compost. Provide compost in accordance with 40 CFR 503 for Class A biosolids and TCEQ health and safety regulations as defined in the TAC, Chapter 332, including the time and temperature standards in Subchapter B, Part 23. Meet the requirements of the United States Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program. Before delivery of the compost, provide quality control documentation that includes the following:  the feedstock by percentage in the final compost product,  a statement that the compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations,  a statement that the composting process has met time and temperature requirements,  a copy of the producer’s STA certification, and  a copy of the lab analysis, performed by an STA-certified lab, verifying that the compost meets the requirements shown in Table 1. Provide a copy of the current TCEQ compliance statement signed by the facility manager when furnishing biosolids compost. Table 1 Physical Requirements for Compost Property Test Method Requirement Particle Size TMECC1 02.02-B, “Sample Sieving for Aggregate Size Classification” 95% passing 5/8” 70% passing 3/8” Heavy Metals Content TMECC 04.06, “Heavy Metals and Hazardous Elements”: 04.06-As, Arsenic 04.06-Cd, Cadmium 04.06-Cu, Copper 04.06-Pb, Lead 04.06-Hg, Mercury 04.06-Mo, Molybdenum 04.06-Ni, Nickel 04.06-Se, Selenium 04.06-Zn, Zinc Pass Salinity TMECC 04.10-A, “1:5 Slurry Method, Mass Basis” 5.0 dS/m Max2 pH TMECC 04.11-A, “1:5 Slurry pH” 5.5–8.5 Maturity TMECC 05.05-A, “% Emergence and Relative Seedling Vigor” >80% Organic Matter Content TMECC 05.07-A, “Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method” 25–65% (dry mass) Stability TMECC 05.08-B, “Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate” ≤8 Fecal Coliform TMECC 07.01-B, “Fecal Coliforms” 1,000 MPN/g Max 1. Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost, published by the United States Department of Agriculture and USCC. 2. A soluble salt content up to 10.0 dS/m for compost used in compost-manufactured topsoil will be acceptable. 2024 Specifications 161 125 Maintain compost in designated stockpiles at the producer’s site. The Department reserves the right to sample compost at the jobsite. Material may be tested to verify compliance with this Specification by an STA-certified laboratory. Make payment to the STA-certified laboratory approved by the Department. Submit laboratory invoices for passing tests to the Department for reimbursement. Maintain a complete record of all test reports for the previous and current calendar years. 2.1. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT). Use CMT consisting of 75% topsoil blended with 25% compost measured by volume. Use topsoil in accordance with Article 160.2., “Materials.” 2.2. Erosion Control Compost (ECC). Use ECC consisting of 50% untreated wood chips blended with 50% compost measured by volume. Use wood chips less than or equal to 5 in. in length with 95% passing a 2-in. screen and less than 30% passing a 1-in. screen. 2.3. General Use Compost (GUC). Use GUC consisting of 100% compost. 3. CONSTRUCTION Prepare the types of compost for use on the project, and stockpile at the jobsite. 3.1. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT). After excavation and embankment work is complete, remove and dispose of objectionable material from the topsoil before blending. Use equipment capable of blending CMT uniformly to the full depth as specified. Roll the CMT using a light corrugated drum. 3.2. Erosion Control Compost (ECC). Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter. Apply a 2-in. uniform layer after excavation and embankment work is complete unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. Use a light roller or other suitable equipment when rolling is specified. 3.3. General Use Compost (GUC). Apply in a uniform layer as a top dressing on established vegetation to the depth shown on the plans. Do not bury existing vegetation. Apply GUC as a backfill ingredient, in a planting soil mixture, for planting bed preparation, or as mulch, when shown on the plans. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the 100-ft. station along the baseline of each roadbed, by the square yard, or by the cubic yard in vehicles at the point of delivery. For ECC cubic yard measurement, the quantity will be the composite material, compost and topsoil or wood chips. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Compost Manufactured Topsoil,” “Erosion Control Compost,” and “General Use Compost” as follows.  For measurement by the station and square yard, payment will be for the depth specified.  For measurement by the cubic yard, payment will be made for material measured in vehicles. This price is full compensation for loading, hauling, stockpiling, blending, placing, rolling, sprinkling, equipment, labor, materials (including topsoil for CMT and wood chips for ECC), tools, and incidentals. Costs associated with passing quality assurance testing will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method,” at invoice price with no markups. 2024 Specifications 162 126 Item 162 Sodding for Erosion Control 1. DESCRIPTION Provide and install grass sod as shown on the plans or as directed. 2. MATERIALS Use live, growing grass sod of the type specified on the plans. Use grass sod with a healthy root system and dense matted roots throughout the soil of the sod for a minimum thickness of 1 in. Do not use sod from areas where the grass is thinned out. Keep sod material moist from the time it is dug until it is planted. Grass sod with dried roots is unacceptable. 2.1. Block Sod. Use block, rolled, or solid sod free of noxious weeds, Johnson grass, other grasses, or any matter deleterious to the growth and subsistence of the sod. 2.2. Mulch Sod. Use mulch sod from an approved source, free of noxious weeds, Johnson grass, other grasses, or any matter deleterious to the growth and subsistence of the sod. 2.3. Fertilizer. Furnish fertilizer in accordance with Article 166.2., “Materials.” 2.4. Water. Furnish water in accordance with Article 168.2., “Materials.” 2.5. Mulch. Use straw mulch consisting of oat, wheat, or rice straw or hay mulch of either Bermudagrass or prairie grasses. Use straw or hay mulch free of Johnson grass and other noxious and foreign materials. Keep the mulch dry and do not use molded or rotted material. 2.6. Tacking Methods. Use a tacking agent applied in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or by a crimping method on all straw or hay mulch operations. Use tacking agents as approved or as specified on the plans. 3. CONSTRUCTION Scarify the area to a depth of 4 in. before placing the sod. Plant the sod specified and mulch, if required, after the area has been completed to lines and grades as shown on the plans. Apply fertilizer uniformly over the entire area in accordance with Article 166.3., “Construction,” and water in accordance with Article 168.3., “Construction.” Plant between the average date of the last freeze in the spring and 6 weeks before the average date for the first freeze in the fall in accordance with the Texas Almanac for the project area. 3.1. Sodding Types. 3.1.1. Spot Sodding. Use only Bermudagrass sod. Create furrows parallel to the roadway, approximately 5 in. deep and on 18-in. centers. Sod a continuous row not less than 3 in. wide in the two furrows adjacent to the roadway. Place 3-in. squares of sod on 15-in. centers in the remaining furrows. Place sod so that the root system will be completely covered by the soil. Firm all sides of the sod with the soil without covering the sod with soil. 3.1.2. Block Sodding. Place sod over the prepared area. Roll or tamp the sodded area to form a thoroughly compacted, solid mat filling all voids in the sodded area with additional sod. Trim and remove all visible netting and backing materials. Keep sod along edges of curbs, driveways, and walkways trimmed until acceptance. 2024 Specifications 162 127 3.1.3. Mulch Sodding. Mow sod source to no shorter than 4 in., and rake and remove cuttings. Disk the sod in two directions, cutting the sod to a minimum of 4 in. Excavate the sod material to a depth of no more than 6 in. Keep excavated material moist, or it will be rejected. Distribute the mulch sod uniformly over the area to a depth of 6 in. loose, unless otherwise shown on the plans, and roll using a light roller or other suitable equipment. Add or reshape the mulch sod to meet the requirements of Section 162.3.2., “Finishing.” 3.2. Finishing. Smooth and shape the area after planting to conform to the desired cross-sections. Spread any excess soil uniformly over adjacent areas or dispose of the excess soil as directed. 3.3. Straw or Hay Mulch. Apply straw or hay mulch for “Spot Sodding” and “Mulch Sodding” uniformly over the area as shown on the plans. Apply straw or hay mulch in accordance with Section 164.3.6., “Straw or Hay Mulching.” Apply tack in accordance with Section 162.2.6., “Tacking Methods.” 4. MEASUREMENT “Spot Sodding,” “Block Sodding,” and “Straw or Hay Mulch” will be measured by the square yard in its final position. “Mulch Sodding” will be measured by the square yard in its final position or by the cubic yard in vehicles as delivered to the planting site. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Spot Sodding,” “Block Sodding,” “Straw or Hay Mulch,” or “Mulch Sodding.” This price is full compensation for securing a source, excavation, loading, hauling, placing, rolling, finishing, furnishing materials, equipment, labor, tools, supplies, and incidentals. Fertilizer will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item. Water for irrigating the sodded area, when specified, will be paid for in accordance with Item 168, “Vegetative Watering.” Water for maintaining and preparing the sod before planting will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item. 2024 Specifications 168 140 Item 168 Vegetative Watering 1. DESCRIPTION Provide and distribute water to promote growth of vegetation as directed. 2. MATERIALS Use water that is clean and free of industrial wastes and other substances harmful to the growth of vegetation. 3. CONSTRUCTION Apply water when directed. Furnish and operate equipment to distribute water at a uniform and controllable rate. Ensure that watering does not erode soil or plantings. Apply water in the required quantity where shown on the plans or as directed. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the 1,000 gal. (TGL) of water as applied. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Vegetative Watering.” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating watering equipment and measuring devices and for furnishing and applying water, including hauling, equipment, labor, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 204 159 Item 204 Sprinkling 1. DESCRIPTION Apply water for dust control, earthwork, or base construction. 2. MATERIALS Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter. 3. EQUIPMENT Use sprinklers and spray bars equipped with positive and rapidly working cut-off valves. 4. CONSTRUCTION Apply water at a uniform rate and in the required quantity, or as directed. 5. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the 1,000 gal. (TGL) of water as applied. 6. PAYMENT Unless sprinkling is specified as a pay item, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. When sprinkling is specified on the plans as a pay item, the work performed and water furnished will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Sprinkling (Base),” “Sprinkling (Earthwork),” or “Sprinkling (Dust Control).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and applying water; furnishing and operating sprinklers and measuring devices; and hauling, equipment, labor, fuel, materials, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 210 160 Item 210 Rolling 1. DESCRIPTION Compact embankment, subgrade, base, surface treatments, broken concrete pavement, or asphalt pavement using rollers. Break up asphalt mats, pit run material, or base materials. 2. EQUIPMENT Use any type of roller to meet the production rates and quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. Use equipment that meets the requirements of this Item when specific types of equipment are required. The Engineer may allow the use of rollers that operate in one direction only when turning does not affect the quality of work or encroach on traffic. Table 1 Roller Requirements1 Roller Type Materials to be Compacted Load (ton) Contact Pressure Roller Speed (mph) Steel wheel Embankment, subgrade, base, asphalt concrete ≥10 ≥325 lb. per inch of wheel width 2–3 Tamping Embankment, subgrade – 125–550 psi per tamping foot 2–3 Heavy tamping Embankment, subgrade – ≥550 psi per tamping foot 2–3 Vibratory Embankment, subgrade, base, asphalt concrete Type A < 6 Type B > 6 Type C as shown on the plans Per equipment specification and as approved As approved Light pneumatic Embankment, subgrade, surface treatment 4.5–9.0 ≥45 psi 2–6 Asphalt concrete 4–12 Medium pneumatic Embankment, subgrade, base, surface treatment 12–25 ≥80 psi, as directed 2–6 Asphalt concrete 4–12 Heavy pneumatic Embankment, subgrade, base, previously broken concrete pavement, other pavements ≥25 ≤150 psi 2–6 Grid Embankment, breaking up existing asphalt mats or base 5–13 – 2–3 1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract. 2.1. Static Steel Wheel Rollers. Furnish single, double, or triple steel wheel, self-propelled power rollers weighing at least 10 ton capable of operating in a forward and backward motion. Ensure all wheels are flat. The Contractor may use vibratory rollers in the static mode when static steel wheel rollers are required. 2024 Specifications 210 161 For single steel wheel rollers, pneumatic rear wheels are allowed for embankment, subgrade, and base. Provide rear wheels for triple steel wheel rollers with a minimum diameter of 48 in., a minimum width of 20 in., and a minimum compression of 325 lb. per inch of wheel width. 2.2. Tamping Rollers. Furnish self-propelled rollers with at least one self-cleaning metal tamping drum capable of operating in a forward or backward motion with a minimum effective rolling width of 5 ft. Mount drums in a frame so that each drum moves independently of the other for rollers with more than one drum. Operate rollers in static or vibratory mode. 2.2.1. Tamping Roller (Minimum Requirement). Provide tamping feet that exert a static load of 125–550 psi and project at least 3 in. from the surface of the drum for all tamping rollers except for heavy tamping rollers. 2.2.2. Heavy Tamping Roller. Provide tamping rollers that have:  two metal tamping drums, rolls, or shells, each with a 60-in. minimum diameter and a 5-ft. minimum width; or  one rear and two forward drums, each with a 60-in. minimum diameter. Arrange drums so that the rear drum compacts the space between the two forward drums and the minimum overall rolling width is 10 ft. Equip drums with tamping feet that:  project at least 7 in. from the drum surface,  have an area of 7–21 sq. in.,  are self-cleaning,  exert a static load of at least 550 psi, and  are spaced at 1 tamping foot per 0.65–0.70 sq. ft. of drum area. 2.3. Vibratory Rollers. Furnish self-propelled rollers with at least one drum equipped to vibrate. Select and maintain amplitude and frequency settings per manufacturer’s specifications to deliver maximum compaction without material displacement or shoving, as approved. Furnish the equipment manufacturer’s specifications concerning settings and controls for amplitude and frequency. Operate rollers at speeds that will produce at least 10 blows per foot unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved. Pneumatic rear wheels are allowed for embankment, subgrade, and base. Equip each vibrating drum with:  separate frequency and amplitude controls,  controls to manually start and stop vibration, and  a mechanism to continuously clean the face of the drum. For asphalt-stabilized base and asphalt concrete pavement, furnish a roller that also can:  automatically reverse the direction of the rotating eccentric weight,  stop vibration before the motion of the roller stops, and  thoroughly moisten the drum with water or approved asphalt release agent. 2.3.1. Drum (Type A). Furnish a roller with a static weight less than 6 ton and a vibratory drum. 2.3.2. Drum (Type B). Furnish a roller with a minimum static weight of 6 ton and a vibratory drum. 2.3.3. Drum (Type C). Furnish a roller as shown on the plans. 2.4. Pneumatic Tire Rollers. Pneumatic tire rollers consist of rubber tire wheels on axles mounted in a frame with either a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. Arrange the rear tires to cover the gaps between adjacent tires of the forward group. Furnish rollers capable of forward and backward motion. Compact asphalt pavements and surface treatments using a roller equipped with smooth-tread tires. Compact without damaging the surface. Moisten the wheels with water or an approved asphalt release agent when necessary. 2024 Specifications 210 162 Select and maintain the operating load and tire air pressure within the range of the manufacturer’s charts or tabulations to attain maximum compaction throughout the lift, as approved. Furnish the manufacturer’s chart or tabulations showing the contact areas and contact pressures for the full range of tire inflation pressures and for the full range of loadings for the tires furnished. Maintain individual tire inflation pressures within 5 psi of each other. Provide uniform compression under all tires. 2.4.1. Light Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit:  with at least nine pneumatic tires,  with an effective rolling width of approximately 5 ft.,  capable of providing a total uniform load of 4.5–9 ton, and  with tires capable of maintaining a minimum ground contact pressure of 45 psi. 2.4.2. Medium Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit:  with at least seven pneumatic tires,  with an effective rolling width of approximately 7 ft.,  capable of providing a total uniform load of 12–25 ton, and  with tires capable of maintaining a minimum ground contact pressure of 80 psi or 90 psi as directed. 2.4.3. Heavy Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit:  with at least four pneumatic-tired wheels mounted on axles carrying no more than two wheels,  with wheels arranged to carry approximately equal loads on uneven surfaces,  with a width between 8 and 10 ft. that can turn 180° in the crown width,  capable of providing a total uniform load of at least 25 ton,  with tires capable of maintaining a maximum ground contact pressure of 150 psi, and  with liquid-filled tires inflated to such a level that liquid will flow from the valve stem when the stem is in the uppermost position. 2.5. Grid Rollers. Furnish rollers that have two cylindrical cages with a minimum diameter of 66 in. and a minimum width of 32 in. Mount cages in a rigid frame with weight boxes. Use a cage surface of cast or welded steel fabric grid with bars 1-1/2 in. wide, spaced on 5-in. centers in each direction, that undulate approximately 1 in. between the high and low points. Furnish rollers capable of providing a total load of 5–13 ton and capable of being operated in a forward or backward motion. 2.6. Alternate Equipment. The Contractor may use alternate compaction equipment that produces results equivalent to the specified equipment as approved. Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified equipment if the desired results are not achieved. 3. CONSTRUCTION Perform this work in conformance with the applicable Items using equipment and roller speeds shown in Table 1. Use only rubber-tired equipment to push or pull compaction equipment on base courses. Use equipment that does not damage material being rolled. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 260 177 Item 260 Lime Treatment (Road-Mixed) 1. DESCRIPTION Mix and compact lime, water, and subgrade or base (with or without asphaltic concrete pavement) in the roadway. 2. MATERIALS Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources. Obtain verification from the Engineer that the specification requirements are met before using the sources. The Engineer may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction. Use material definitions in accordance with Tex-100-E. 2.1. Lime. Furnish lime that meets the requirements of DMS-6350, “Lime and Lime Slurry.” When dry lime is required, provide dry quicklime. When lime slurry is required, provide commercial lime slurry or quicklime slurry. Do not use dry quicklime when sulfates are present in quantities greater than 3,000 parts per million (ppm). When furnishing quicklime, provide it in bulk. 2.2. Subgrade. The Engineer will determine the sulfate content of the subgrade in accordance with Tex-145-E and organic content in accordance with Tex-148-E before lime treatment begins. Suspend operations when material to be treated has a sulfate content greater than 7,000 ppm or an organic content greater than 2.0%, unless otherwise directed. 2.3. Flexible Base. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, furnish base material that meets the requirements of Item 247, “Flexible Base,” for the type and grade shown on the plans, before the addition of lime. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the compressive strength of the flexible base is waived. 2.4. Water. Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable material. 2.5. Asphalt. When asphalt or emulsion is permitted for curing purposes, furnish materials that meet the requirements of Item 300, “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions,” as shown on the plans or as directed. 2.6. Mix Design. The Engineer will determine the target lime content and optimum moisture content in accordance with Tex-121-E or prior experience with the project materials. The Contractor may propose a mix design developed in accordance with Tex-121-E. The Engineer will use Tex-121-E to verify the Contractor’s proposed mix design before acceptance. Reimburse the Department for subsequent mix designs or partial designs necessitated by changes in the material or requests by the Contractor. Limit the amount of recycled asphalt pavement to no more than 50% of the mix, unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. 3. EQUIPMENT Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. Provide rollers in accordance with Item 210, “Rolling.” Provide proof rollers in accordance with Item 216, “Proof Rolling,” when required. 3.1. Storage Facility. Store quicklime in closed, weatherproof containers. 3.2. Slurry Equipment. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices to slurry quicklime on the project or other approved location. The Engineer may approve other slurrying methods. 2024 Specifications 260 178 Provide a pump for agitating the slurry when the distributor truck is not equipped with an agitator. Equip the distributor truck with a sampling device in accordance with Tex-600-J, Part I, when using commercial lime slurry. 3.3. Hydrated Lime Distribution Equipment. Provide equipment to spread lime evenly across the area to be treated. Provide equipment with a rotary vane feeder to spread lime, when shown on the plans. 3.4. Pulverization Equipment. Provide pulverization equipment that:  cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth using cutters that plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut,  provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times, and  uniformly mixes the materials. 4. CONSTRUCTION Construct each layer uniformly, free of loose or segregated areas, and with the required density and moisture content. Provide a smooth surface that conforms to the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the plans or as directed. 4.1. Preparation of Subgrade or Existing Base for Treatment. Before treating, remove existing asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with Item 105, “Removing Treated and Untreated Base and Asphalt Pavement,” when shown on the plans or as directed. Shape existing material in conformance with applicable bid items to conform to typical sections shown on the plans and as directed. Unless otherwise approved, proof roll the roadbed in accordance with Item 216 before pulverizing or scarifying existing material. Correct soft spots as directed. When material is imported from a borrow source, notify the Engineer of the location of the borrow source well in advance to allow time for testing and approval to avoid delay to the project. Stockpile as directed. The Engineer will test the borrow source and determine the sulfate and organic contents. When the borrow source has a sulfate content greater than 3,000 ppm or an organic content greater than 2.0%, proceed as directed. When new base material is required to be mixed with existing base, deliver, place, and spread the new material in the required amount per station. Manipulate and thoroughly mix new base with existing material to provide a uniform mixture to the specified depth before shaping. 4.2. Pulverization. Pulverize or scarify existing material after shaping. If the material cannot be uniformly processed to the required depth in a single pass, excavate and windrow the material to expose a secondary grade to achieve processing to plan depth. 4.3. Application of Lime. Uniformly apply lime using dry or slurry placement as shown on the plans or as directed. Add lime at the percentage determined in accordance with Section 260.2.6., “Mix Design.” Apply lime only on an area where mixing can be completed during the same working day. Start lime application only when the air temperature is at least 35°F and rising or is at least 40°F. The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Suspend application when the Engineer determines that weather conditions are unsuitable. Minimize dust and scattering of lime by wind. Do not apply lime when wind conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, cause blowing lime to become dangerous to traffic or objectionable to adjacent property owners. When pebble grade quicklime is placed dry, mix the material and lime thoroughly at the time of lime application. Use of quicklime can be dangerous. Inform users of the recommended precautions for handling and storage. 2024 Specifications 260 179 4.3.1. Dry Placement. Before applying lime, bring the prepared roadway to approximately two percentage points above optimum moisture content. When necessary, sprinkle in accordance with Item 204, “Sprinkling.” Distribute the required quantity of pebble grade quicklime using approved equipment. 4.3.2. Slurry Placement. Provide slurry free of objectionable materials, at or above the minimum dry solids content, and with a uniform consistency that will allow ease of handling and uniform application. Deliver commercial lime slurry to the jobsite or use quicklime to prepare lime slurry at the jobsite or other approved location, as specified. When dry quicklime is applied as slurry, use 80% of the amount shown on the plans. Distribute slurry uniformly by making successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the specified lime content is reached. Uniformly spread the residue from quicklime slurry over the length of the roadway being processed, unless otherwise directed. 4.4. Mixing. Begin mixing within 6 hr. of application of lime. Lime exposed to the open air for 6 hr. or more between application and mixing, or that experiences excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. Thoroughly mix the material and lime using approved equipment. When treating subgrade, bring the moisture content above the optimum moisture content to ensure adequate chemical reaction of the lime and subgrade materials. Ensure 100% of the material passes a 2-1/2 in. sieve, except rock, before mellowing. Allow the mixture to mellow for 1–4 days, as directed. When pebble grade quicklime is used, allow the mixture to mellow for 2–4 days, as directed. Sprinkle the treated materials during the mixing and mellowing operation, as directed, to achieve adequate hydration and proper moisture content. When the material to be treated has a sulfate content greater than 3,000 ppm but less than or equal to 7,000 ppm, mellow for a minimum of 7 days. Maintain in a continuously moist condition by sprinkling in accordance with Item 204. After mellowing, resume mixing until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained. After mixing, the Engineer may sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in accordance with Tex-101-E, Part III, to determine compliance with the gradation requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Gradation Requirements (Min % Passing) Sieve Size Base Subgrade 1-3/4” 100 100 3/4” 85 85 #4 – 60 4.5. Strength Testing. The Engineer will sample and test the lime-treated mixture for unconfined compressive strength in accordance with Tex-117-E, Part II. The unconfined compressive strength must be greater than 50 psi for lime-treated subgrade and 150 psi for lime-treated flexible base or lime-treated flexible base with existing material, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4.6. Compaction. Compact the mixture using density control, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Multiple lifts are permitted when shown on the plans or approved. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed. Sprinkle the treated material in accordance with Item 204, or aerate the treated material to adjust the moisture content during compaction so that it is no more than 1.0% below optimum and 2.0% above optimum as determined in accordance with Tex-121-E. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the roller unit. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. Offset alternating trips of the roller. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 mph as directed. Before final acceptance, the Engineer will select the locations of tests in each unit and measure the treated depth in accordance with Tex-140-E. Correct areas deficient by more than 1/2 in. in thickness or more than 1/2% in target lime content by adding lime as required, reshaping, recompacting, and refinishing at the Contractor’s expense. 2024 Specifications 260 180 Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. Continue work until specification requirements are met. Rework in accordance with Section 260.4.7., “Reworking a Section.” Perform the work at no additional expense to the Department. 4.6.1. Ordinary Compaction. Roll using approved compaction equipment, as directed. Correct irregularities, depressions, and weak spots immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing treated material as required, reshaping, and recompacting. 4.6.2. Density and Moisture Control. Compact to at least 95% of the maximum density, and moisture content no more than 1.0% below optimum and 2.0% above optimum as determined in accordance with Tex-121-E, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the Engineer with the beginning and ending station numbers of the area completed for testing. The Engineer will determine roadway density and moisture content of completed sections in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part I. The Engineer will determine random locations for testing in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part IV. When the density is less than 95% of the maximum dry density, the Engineer may perform additional testing to determine the extent of the area to correct. The Engineer may accept the section if no more than one of the five most recent density tests is below the specified density and the failing test is no more than 3 pcf below the specified density. 4.7. Reworking a Section. When a section is reworked within 72 hr. after completion of compaction, rework the section to provide the required density. When a section is reworked more than 72 hr. after completion of compaction, add additional lime at 25% of the percentage determined in accordance with Section 260.2.6., “Mix Design.” Reworking includes loosening, adding material or removing unacceptable material if necessary, mixing as directed, compacting, and finishing. When density control is specified, determine a new maximum density of the reworked material in accordance with Tex-121-E, and compact to at least 95% of this density. 4.8. Finishing. Immediately after completing compaction of the final course, clip, skin, or tight-blade the surface of the lime-treated material using a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately 1/4 in. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location. Roll the clipped surface immediately using a pneumatic tire roller until a smooth surface is attained. Add small amounts of water as needed during rolling. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the plans or as directed. Finish grade of constructed subgrade to within 0.1 ft. in the cross-section and 0.1 ft. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. Correct grade deviations of constructed base greater than 1/4 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally or greater than 1/4 in. over the entire width of the cross-section in areas where surfacing is to be placed. Remove excess material, reshape, and roll using a pneumatic-tire roller. Correct as directed if material is more than 1/4 in. low. Do not surface patch. The 72-hr. time limit required for completion of placement, compaction, and finishing does not apply to finishing required just before applying the surface course. 4.9. Miscellaneous and Small Areas. Miscellaneous areas are those that typically involve handwork or discontinuous paving operations, such as temporary detours, driveways, mailbox turnouts, crossovers, gores, spot level-up areas, and other similar areas. Miscellaneous and small areas are not subject to density testing but may be tested as directed. 4.10. Curing. Cure for the minimum number of days shown in Table 2 by sprinkling in accordance with Item 204, or by applying an asphalt material at a rate of 0.05–0.20 gal. per square yard, as shown on the plans or as directed. Maintain moisture during curing. Upon completion of curing, maintain the moisture content in accordance with Section 132.3.5., “Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking,” for subgrade and Section 247.4.5., “Curing,” for bases before placing subsequent courses. Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing except as required for sprinkling, unless otherwise approved. Apply seals or additional courses within 14 calendar days of final compaction. 2024 Specifications 260 181 Table 2 Min Curing Requirements before Placing Subsequent Courses1 Untreated Material Curing (Days) PI ≤35 2 PI >35 5 1. Subject to approval. Proof rolling may be required as an indicator of adequate curing. 5. MEASUREMENT 5.1. Lime. When lime is furnished in trucks, the weight of lime will be determined on certified scales, or the Contractor must provide a set of standard platform truck scales at an approved location approved. Scales must meet the requirements of Item 520, “Weighing and Measuring Equipment.” 5.1.1. Commercial Lime Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) as calculated from the minimum percent dry solids content of the slurry, multiplied by the weight of the slurry in tons delivered. 5.1.2. Quicklime. 5.1.2.1. Dry. Lime will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the quicklime. 5.1.2.2. Slurry. Lime slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the quicklime used to prepare the slurry multiplied by a conversion factor of 1.28 to determine the quantity of equivalent hydrated lime, which will be the basis of payment. 5.2. Lime Treatment. Lime treatment will be measured by the square yard of surface area. The dimensions for determining the surface areas are established by the widths shown on the plans and the lengths measured at placement. 6. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for in accordance with Section 260.6.1., “Lime,” and Section 260.6.2., “Lime Treatment.” Furnishing and delivering new base will be paid for in accordance with Section 247.6.2., “Flexible Base (Roadway Delivery).” Mixing, spreading, blading, shaping, compacting, and finishing new or existing base material will be paid for under Section 260.6.2., “Lime Treatment.” Removal and disposal of existing asphalt concrete pavement will be paid for in conformance with pertinent Items or in accordance with Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Sprinkling and rolling, except proof rolling, will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item, unless otherwise shown on the plans. When proof rolling is shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, it will be paid for in accordance with Item 216. Where subgrade is constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade or existing base will be at the Contractor’s expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade or existing base will be paid for in accordance with pertinent Items or Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Where subgrade to be treated under this Contract has sulfates greater than 7,000 ppm, work will be paid for in accordance with Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Asphalt used solely for curing will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. Asphalt placed for curing and priming will be paid for under Item 310, “Prime Coat.” 2024 Specifications 260 182 6.1. Lime. Lime will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Quicklime (Dry)” or “Commercial or Quicklime (Slurry).” This price is full compensation for materials, delivery, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Lime used for reworking a section in accordance with Section 260.4.7., “Reworking a Section,” will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 6.2. Lime Treatment. Lime treatment will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Lime Treatment (Existing Material),” “Lime Treatment (New Base),” or “Lime Treatment (Mixing Existing Material and New Base),” for the depth specified. No payment will be made for thickness or width exceeding that shown on the plans. This price is full compensation for shaping existing material, loosening, mixing, pulverizing, spreading, applying lime, compacting, finishing, curing, curing materials, blading, shaping and maintaining shape, replacing mixture, disposing of loosened materials, processing, hauling, preparing secondary subgrade, water, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 275 183 Item 275 Cement Treatment (Road-Mixed) 1. DESCRIPTION Mix and compact cement, water, and subgrade or base (with or without asphalt concrete pavement) in the roadway. 2. MATERIALS Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources. Obtain verification from the Engineer that the specification requirements are met before using the sources. The Engineer may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction. Use material definitions in accordance with Tex-100-E. 2.1. Cement. Furnish hydraulic cement that meets the requirements of DMS-4600, “Hydraulic Cement,” and the Department’s Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP). Sources not in the HCQMP will require testing and approval before use. 2.2. Subgrade. The Engineer will determine the sulfate content in accordance with Tex-145-E and organic content in accordance with Tex-148-E before cement treatment begins. Suspend operations when material to be treated has a sulfate content greater than 7,000 ppm or an organic content greater than 2.0% and proceed as directed. 2.3. Flexible Base. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, furnish base material that meets the requirements of Item 247, “Flexible Base,” for the type and grade shown on the plans, before the addition of cement. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the compressive strength of the flexible base is waived. 2.4. Water. Furnish water free of industrial waste and other objectionable material. 2.5. Asphalt. When asphalt or emulsion is permitted for curing purposes, furnish materials that meet the requirements of Item 300, “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions,” as shown on the plans or directed. 2.6. Mix Design. The Engineer will determine the target cement content and optimum moisture content to produce a stabilized mixture that meets the strength requirements shown on the plans. The mix will be designed in accordance with Tex-120-E or will be based on prior experience with the project materials. The Contractor may propose a mix design developed in accordance with Tex-120-E. Meet strength requirements when shown on the plans. The Engineer will use Tex-120-E to verify the Contractor’s proposed mix design before acceptance. Reimburse the Department for subsequent mix designs or partial designs necessitated by changes in the material or requests by the Contractor. Limit the amount of recycled asphalt pavement to no more than 50% of the mix unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. 3. EQUIPMENT Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. Provide rollers in accordance with Item 210, “Rolling.” Provide proof rollers in accordance with Item 216, “Proof Rolling,” when required. 3.1. Cement Storage Facility. Store cement in closed, weatherproof containers. 2024 Specifications 275 184 3.2. Cement Slurry Equipment. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices to slurry cement on the project or other approved location. The Engineer may approve other slurrying methods. Provide a pump for agitating the slurry when the distributor truck is not equipped with an agitator. Equip the distributor truck with an approved sampling device. 3.3. Dry Cement Distribution Equipment. Provide equipment to spread cement evenly across the area to be treated. Provide equipment with a rotary vane feeder to spread cement, when shown on the plans. 3.4. Pulverization Equipment. Provide pulverization equipment that:  cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth using cutters that plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut,  provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times, and  uniformly mixes the materials. 4. CONSTRUCTION Construct each layer uniformly, free of loose or segregated areas, and with the required density and moisture content. Provide a smooth surface that conforms to the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the plans or as directed. 4.1. Preparation of Subgrade or Existing Base for Treatment. Before treating, remove existing asphalt concrete pavement in conformance with pertinent Items and the plans or as directed. Shape existing material in conformance with applicable bid items to conform to the typical sections shown on the plans and as directed. When shown on the plans or directed, proof roll the roadbed in accordance with Item 216 before pulverizing or scarifying existing material. Correct soft spots as directed. When material is imported from a borrow source, notify the Engineer of the location of the borrow source well in advance to allow time for testing and approval to avoid delay to the project. Stockpile as directed. The Engineer will test the borrow source and determine the sulfate and organic contents. When the borrow source has a sulfate content greater than 3,000 ppm or an organic content greater than 2.0%, proceed as directed. When new base material is required to be mixed with existing base, deliver, place, and spread the new material in the required amount per station. Manipulate and thoroughly mix new base with existing material to provide a uniform mixture to the specified depth before shaping. 4.2. Pulverization. Pulverize or scarify existing material after shaping. If the material cannot be uniformly processed to the required depth in a single pass, excavate and windrow the material to expose a secondary grade to achieve processing to plan depth. 4.3. Application of Cement. Uniformly apply cement using dry placement unless otherwise shown on the plans. Add cement at the percentage determined in accordance with Section 275.2.6., “Mix Design.” Apply cement only on an area where mixing, compacting, and finishing can be completed during the same working day. Start cement application only when the air temperature is at least 35°F and rising or is at least 40°F. The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Suspend application when the Engineer determines that weather conditions are unsuitable. 4.3.1. Dry Placement. Before applying cement, bring the prepared roadway to approximately optimum moisture content. When necessary, sprinkle in accordance with Item 204, “Sprinkling.” Distribute the required quantity of dry cement using approved equipment. Minimize dust and scattering of cement by wind. Do not apply 2024 Specifications 275 185 cement when wind conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, cause blowing cement to become dangerous to traffic or objectionable to adjacent property owners. 4.3.2. Slurry Placement. Mix the required quantity of cement with water, as approved. Provide slurry free of objectionable materials and with a uniform consistency that can be easily applied. Agitate the slurry continuously. Apply slurry within 2 hr. of adding water and when the roadway is at a moisture content drier than optimum. Distribute slurry uniformly by making successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the specified cement content is reached. 4.4. Mixing. Thoroughly mix the material and cement using approved equipment. Mix until a homogeneous mixture is obtained. Sprinkle the treated materials during the mixing operation, as directed, to maintain optimum mixing moisture. Spread and shape the completed mixture in a uniform layer. After mixing, the Engineer may sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in accordance with Tex-101-E, Part III, to determine compliance with the gradation requirements shown in Table 1. When strength requirements are shown on the plans, the Engineer may sample the mixture to verify strength in accordance with Tex-120-E and adjust cement content to achieve the target strength for work going forward. Table 1 Gradation Requirements (Min % Passing) Sieve Size Base Subgrade 1-3/4″ 100 100 3/4″ 85 85 #4 – 60 4.5. Strength Testing. The Engineer will sample and test the cement-treated mixture for unconfined compressive strength in accordance with Tex-117-E, Part II. The unconfined compressive strength must be greater than 150 psi, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4.6. Compaction. Compact the mixture in one lift using density control, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Complete compaction within 2 hr. after the application of water to the mixture of material and cement. Sprinkle the treated material in accordance with Item 204, or aerate the treated material to adjust the moisture content during compaction so that it is within 2.0% of optimum as determined in accordance with Tex-120-E. Adjust operations as required. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the roller unit. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. Offset alternating trips of the roller. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 mph, as directed. Before final acceptance, the Engineer will select the locations of tests in each unit and measure the treated depth in accordance with Tex-140-E. Correct areas deficient by more than 1/2 in. in thickness or more than 1/2% in target cement content by adding cement as required, reshaping, recompacting, and refinishing at the Contractor’s expense. Remove or rework areas that lose required stability, compaction, or finish, as directed. When a section is reworked more than 4 hr. after completion of compaction, add additional cement as directed. Perform the work at no additional cost to the Department. 4.6.1. Ordinary Compaction. Roll using approved compaction equipment, as directed. Correct irregularities, depressions, and weak spots immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing treated material as required, reshaping, and recompacting. 4.6.2. Density and Moisture Control. Compact to at least 95% of the maximum density and within ±2.0% of the optimum moisture content as determined in accordance with Tex-120-E. Provide the Engineer with the beginning and ending station numbers of the area completed for testing. The Engineer will determine 2024 Specifications 275 186 roadway density and moisture content in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part I within 4 hr. from the time compaction is completed. The Engineer will determine random locations for testing in accordance with Tex-115-E, Part IV. The Engineer may verify strength in accordance with Tex-120-E and adjust cement content to achieve the target strength for work going forward. Remove material that does not meet density requirements, or rework by adding the target cement content, reshaping, recompacting, and refinishing, at the Contractor’s expense. When the density is less than 95% of the maximum dry density, the Engineer may perform additional testing to determine the extent of the area to correct. The Engineer may accept the section if no more than one of the five most recent density tests is below the specified density and the failing test is no more than 3 pcf below the specified density. 4.7. Miscellaneous and Small Areas. Miscellaneous areas are those that typically involve handwork or discontinuous paving operations, such as temporary detours, driveways, mailbox turnouts, crossovers, gores, spot level-up areas, and other similar areas. Miscellaneous and small areas are not subject to density testing but may be tested as directed. 4.8. Finishing. Immediately after completing compaction of the final course, clip, skin, or tight-blade the surface of the cement treated material using a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately 1/4 in. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location. Roll the clipped surface immediately using a pneumatic tire roller until a smooth surface is attained. Add small amounts of water as needed during rolling. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the plans or as directed. Finish grade of constructed subgrade to within 0.1 ft. in the cross-section and 0.1 ft. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. Correct grade deviations of constructed base greater than 1/4 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally or greater than 1/4 in. over the entire width of the cross-section in areas where surfacing is to be placed. Remove excess material, reshape, and roll using a pneumatic tire roller. Correct as directed if material is more than 1/4 in. low. Do not surface patch. 4.9. Microcracking. When shown on the plans, maintain moisture content of the finished cement-treated base for a period of 24–48 hr. During this time, but no sooner than 24 hr., roll the finished course using a vibratory roller to induce microcracking. The vibratory roller must be in accordance with Item 210, with a static weight equal to or more than 12 ton, and the vibratory drum must be no less than 20 in. wide. The roller must travel at a speed of 2 mph, vibrating at maximum amplitude, and make two–four passes with 100% coverage excluding the outside 1 ft. of the surface crown, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Additional passes may be required to achieve the desired crack pattern as directed. Notify the Engineer 24 hr. before the microcracking begins. 4.10. Curing. Cure for at least 3 days by sprinkling in accordance with Item 204 or by applying an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05–0.20 gal. per square yard, as shown on the plans or as directed. When a section is microcracked, cure section for an additional 2 days after microcracking. Maintain the moisture content during curing at no lower than 2 percentage points below optimum. Continue curing until placing another course. 4.11. Ride Quality. When shown on the plans, measurement of ride quality only applies to the final travel lanes that receive a one- or two-course surface treatment for the final riding surface. Measure the ride quality of the base course either before or after the application of the prime coat, as directed, and before placement of the surface treatment. Use a certified profiler operator on the Department’s MPL. When requested, furnish the Engineer with documentation for the person certified to operate the profiler. Provide all profile data to the Engineer in electronic data files within 3 days of measuring the ride quality using the format specified in Tex-1001-S. The Engineer will use Department software to evaluate longitudinal profiles to determine areas requiring corrective action. Correct 0.1-mi. sections with an average international roughness index (IRI) value greater than 100 in. per mile to an IRI value of 100 in. per mile or less, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Reprofile and correct sections that fail to maintain ride quality before the 2024 Specifications 275 187 placement of the surface treatment, as directed and approved. Unless ride deterioration is due to environmental impact, traffic, or other incidents outside the Contractor’s control, perform this work at no additional expense to the Department, as approved. 5. MEASUREMENT 5.1. Cement. Cement will be measured by the ton (dry weight). When cement is furnished in trucks, the weight of cement will be determined on certified scales, or the Contractor must provide a set of standard platform truck scales at an approved location. Scales must meet the requirements of Item 520, “Weighing and Measuring Equipment.” When cement is furnished in bags, indicate the manufacturer’s certified weight. Bags varying more than 5% from that weight may be rejected. The average weight of bags in any shipment, as determined by weighing 10 bags taken at random, must be at least the manufacturer’s certified weight. 5.1.1. Slurry. Cement slurry will be measured by the ton (dry weight) of the cement used to prepare the slurry at the jobsite or from the minimum percent dry solids content of the slurry, multiplied by the weight of the slurry in tons delivered. 5.2. Cement Treatment. Cement treatment will be measured by the square yard of surface area. The dimensions for determining the surface areas are established by the widths shown on the plans and lengths measured at placement. 6. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for in accordance with Section 275.5.1., “Cement,” and Section 275.5.2., “Cement Treatment.” Furnishing and delivering new base will be paid for in accordance with Section 247.6.2., “Flexible Base (Roadway Delivery).” Mixing, spreading, blading, shaping, compacting, and finishing new or existing base material will be paid for under Section 275.6.2., “Cement Treatment.” Removal and disposal of existing asphalt concrete pavement will be paid for in conformance with pertinent Items or in accordance with Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Sprinkling and rolling, except proof rolling, will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item, unless otherwise shown on the plans. When proof rolling is shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, it will be paid for in accordance with Item 216. Where subgrade is constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade or existing base will be at the Contractor’s expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade or existing base will be in conformance with pertinent Items or in accordance with Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Where subgrade to be treated under this Contract has sulfates greater than 7,000 ppm, work will be paid for in accordance with Article 4.4., “Changes in the Work.” Asphalt used solely for curing will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. Asphalt placed for curing and priming will be paid for under Item 310, “Prime Coat.” 6.1. Cement. Cement will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cement.” This price is full compensation for materials, delivery, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 6.2. Cement Treatment. Cement treatment will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cement Treatment (Existing Material),” “Cement Treatment (New Base),” or “Cement Treatment (Mixing Existing Material and New Base),” for the depth specified. No payment will be made for thickness or width exceeding that shown on the 2024 Specifications 275 188 plans. This price is full compensation for shaping existing material, loosening, mixing, pulverizing, spreading, applying cement, compacting, microcracking, finishing, curing, curing materials, blading, shaping and maintaining shape, replacing mixture, disposing of loosened materials, processing, hauling, preparing secondary subgrade, water, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 360 449 Item 360 Concrete Pavement 1. DESCRIPTION Construct hydraulic cement concrete pavement with or without curbs on the concrete pavement. 2. MATERIALS Use materials from non-listed sources only when tested and approved by the Engineer before use. Allow 30 calendar days for the Engineer to sample, test, and report results for non-listed sources. 2.1. Hydraulic Cement Concrete. Provide hydraulic cement concrete in accordance with Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete.” Use compressive strength testing unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide Class P concrete designed to meet a minimum average compressive strength of 3,200 psi at 7 days or a minimum average compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. Test in accordance with Tex-418-A. Obtain written approval if the concrete mix design exceeds 520 lb. per cubic yard of cementitious material. Use coarse aggregates for continuously reinforced concrete pavements to produce concrete with a rated coefficient of thermal expansion not more than 5.5 × 10-6 in./in./°F as listed in accordance with the Concrete Rated Source Quality Catalog. Provide Class High Early Strength (HES) concrete designed to meet a minimum average compressive strength of 3,200 psi at 24 hr., for early opening of small pavement areas or leave-outs to traffic when shown on the plans or allowed. When opening of small pavement areas or leave-outs to traffic is less than 24 hr., design Class HES concrete to achieve a minimum average compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 8 hr. 2.2. Reinforcing Steel. Provide Grade 60 or above deformed steel for bar reinforcement in accordance with Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete.” Provide positioning and supporting devices (baskets and chairs) capable of securing and holding the reinforcing steel in proper position before and during paving. Provide corrosion protection when shown on the plans. 2.2.1. Dowels. Provide dowel bars for concrete pavements in accordance with DMS-7325, “Dowel Bars for Concrete Pavements” and the MPL for “Dowel Bars for Concrete Pavements.” Provide dowel caps filled with a soft compressible material with enough range of movement to allow complete closure of the expansion joint. 2.2.2. Tie Bars. Provide straight deformed steel tie bars. Provide either multiple-piece tie bars or single-piece tie bars as shown on the plans. Furnish multiple piece tie bar assemblies from the list of approved multiple-piece tie bars that have been prequalified in accordance with DMS-4515, “Multiple Piece Tie Bars for Concrete Pavement,” when used. Multiple-piece tie bars used on individual projects must be sampled in accordance with Tex-711-I, and tested in accordance with Tex-712-I. 2.3. Curing Materials. Provide Type 2 membrane curing compound in accordance with DMS-4650, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants.” Provide asphaltic curing materials in accordance with Item 300, “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions,” for concrete pavement to be overlaid with asphalt concrete, unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved. Provide materials for other methods of curing in accordance with Item 422, “Concrete Superstructures.” When required, provide insulating blankets with a minimum thermal resistance (R) rating of 0.5 degree Fahrenheit square-foot per British Thermal Unit. Use insulating blankets that are free of tears and are in good condition. 2024 Specifications 360 450 2.4. Epoxy. Provide Type III, Class C epoxy in accordance with DMS-6100, “Epoxies and Adhesives,” for installing all drilled-in reinforcing steel. Submit a work plan and request approval for the use of epoxy types other than Type III, Class C. 2.5. Evaporation Retardant. Provide evaporation retardant in accordance with DMS-4650. 2.6. Joint Sealants and Fillers. Provide Class 5 or Class 8 joint sealant materials and fillers unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved, and other sealant materials of the size, shape, and type shown on the plans in accordance with DMS-6310, “Joint Sealants and Fillers.” 2.7. Repair Materials. Provide concrete repair materials in accordance with DMS-4655, “Concrete Repair Materials,” or DMS-6170, “Polymeric Materials for Patching Spalls in Concrete Pavement.” 3. EQUIPMENT Furnish and maintain all equipment in good working condition. Use measuring, mixing, and delivery equipment in accordance with Item 421. Obtain approval for other equipment used. 3.1. Placing, Consolidating, and Finishing Equipment. Provide self-propelled paving equipment that uniformly distributes the concrete with minimal segregation and provides a smooth machine-finished consolidated concrete pavement conforming to plan line and grade. Provide an automatic grade control system on slip-forming equipment. Provide mechanically operated finishing floats capable of producing a uniformly smooth pavement surface. Provide equipment capable of providing a fine, light water fog mist. When using stringless paving equipment, use in accordance with Section 5.9.3., “Method C,” and establish control points at maximum intervals of 500 ft. Use these control points as reference to perform the work. Provide mechanically operated vibratory equipment capable of adequately consolidating the concrete. Provide immersion vibrators on the paving equipment at sufficiently close intervals to provide uniform vibration and consolidation of the concrete over the entire width and depth of the pavement and in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide immersion vibrator units that operate at a frequency in air of at least 8,000 cycles per minute. Provide enough hand-operated immersion vibrators for timely and proper consolidation of the concrete for concrete pavement (formed) placements, and along forms, at all joints, and in areas not covered by other vibratory equipment. Surface vibrators may be used to supplement equipment-mounted immersion vibrators. Provide tachometers to verify the proper operation of all vibrators. For small or irregular areas or when approved, the paving equipment described in this Section is not required. 3.2. Forming Equipment. 3.2.1. Pavement Forms. Provide side forms of sufficient cross-section, strength, and rigidity to support the paving equipment and resist the impact and vibration of the operation without visible springing or settlement. Use forms that are free of detrimental kinks, bends, or warps that could affect ride quality or alignment. Provide bulkhead forms of sufficient cross-section, strength, and rigidity to support reinforcing steel and maintain alignment during concrete placement operations. 3.3. Curb Forms. Provide curb forms for separately placed curbs that are not slipformed that conform to the requirements of Item 529, “Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Combined Curb and Gutter.” 3.4. Single-Piece Tie-Bar Inserting Equipment. Provide inserting equipment that accurately inserts and positions reinforcing steel in the plastic concrete parallel to the profile grade and horizontal alignment as shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 360 451 3.5. Texturing Equipment. 3.5.1. Carpet Drag. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a manual moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length to span the full width of the pavement being placed and adjustable so that a sufficient longitudinal length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. Obtain approval to vary the length and width of the carpet to accommodate specific applications. 3.5.2. Tining Equipment. Provide a self-propelled metal tine device equipped with steel tines with cross-section approximately 1/32 in. thick by 1/12 in. wide. Provide tines for longitudinal tining equipment spaced at approximately 3/4 in., center-to-center, or provide tines for transverse tining equipment spaced at approximately 1 in., center-to-center. Manual methods that produce an equivalent texture may be used when it is impractical to use self-propelled equipment, such as for small areas, narrow width sections, and emergencies due to equipment breakdown. 3.6. Curing Equipment. Provide a self-propelled machine for applying membrane curing compound using mechanically pressurized spraying equipment with atomizing nozzles. Provide equipment and controls that maintain the required uniform rate of application over the entire paving area. Hand-operated pressurized spraying equipment with atomizing nozzles may only be used on small or irregular areas, on narrow width sections, or in emergencies due to equipment breakdown. 3.7. Sawing Equipment. Provide power-driven concrete saws to saw the joints shown on the plans. Provide standby power-driven concrete saws during concrete sawing operations. 3.8. Grinding Equipment. Provide self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture concrete pavement using circular diamond blades when required. Provide equipment with automatic grade control capable of grinding at least a 3-ft. width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the concrete. 3.9. Testing Equipment. Provide testing equipment in accordance with Item 421, unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified. Maintain and calibrate all Contractor-supplied testing equipment in conformance with pertinent test methods. Provide calibration records of strength-testing equipment to the Engineer within 1 week after each calibration. 3.10. Coring Equipment. Provide coring equipment capable of extracting cores in accordance with Tex-424-A when required. 3.11. Miscellaneous Equipment. Furnish 10-ft. and 15-ft. steel or magnesium long-handled, standard straightedges. Furnish enough work bridges, long enough to span the pavement, for finishing and inspection operations. 4. CONSTRUCTION Obtain approval for adjustments to plan grade-line to maintain thickness over minor subgrade or base high spots while maintaining clearances and drainage. Maintain subgrade or base in a smooth, clean, compacted condition in conformance with the required section and established grade until the pavement concrete is placed. Dampen subgrade or base with water before placing pavement concrete. Adequately light the active work areas for all nighttime operations. Provide and maintain tools and materials to perform testing. 4.1. Paving and Quality Control (QC) Plan. Submit a paving and QC plan for approval before beginning pavement construction operations. Include details of all operations in the concrete paving process, including methods to construct transverse joints, methods to consolidate concrete at joints, longitudinal construction joint layout, sequencing, curing, lighting, early opening, leave-outs, sawing, inspection, contractor QC testing, testing for opening to traffic, construction methods, other details, and description of all equipment. List 2024 Specifications 360 452 certified personnel performing contractor QC testing and testing for opening to traffic. Submit revisions to the paving and QC plan for approval. 4.2. Placing Reinforcing Steel for Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavements. Accurately place and secure in position all reinforcing steel as shown on the plans. Provide chairs in sufficient number to adequately support the reinforcing steel at the proper height as show on the plans. Secure reinforcing steel at alternate intersections with tie wires. Reinforcing steel intersections may be secured with locking support chairs instead of tie wires. Anchor pins used to prevent the reinforcing steel from shifting may remain in the final pavement. Stagger the lap locations so that no more than 1/3 of the longitudinal steel is spliced in any given 12-ft. width and 2-ft. length of the pavement. Tie all splices with tie wires. 4.3. Joints. Install formed joints as shown on the plans. Install transverse bulkhead forms to support extending reinforcing steel, shaped accurately to the cross-section of the pavement when placing of concrete is stopped. 4.3.1. Placing Reinforcement at Joints. Install reinforcing steel at transverse construction joints as shown on the plans. Use multiple-piece tie bars, drilled and epoxy-grouted tie bars, or mechanically inserted single-piece tie bars at longitudinal construction joints. Discontinue the use of mechanically inserted single-piece tie bars if this method results in steel misalignment or improper location, poor concrete consolidation, or other inadequacies. Protect the reinforcing steel immediately beyond the construction joint from damage, vibration, and impact. For drilled and epoxy-grouted tie bars, drill holes into the existing concrete at least 10 in. deep unless otherwise directed. Use a drill bit with a diameter that is 1/8 in. greater than that of tie bars. Clean the holes using a wire brush and compressed air to remove all the dust and moisture. Only cartridge or machine applicator epoxies are allowed. Follow the epoxy manufacturer’s instructions to apply the epoxy. Insert the tip of the epoxy cartridge or the tip of the machine applicator to the end of the tie bar hole, and inject Type III, Class C, epoxy to fill the hole with the amount of epoxy recommended by the manufacture for the size of bar and depth of hole. Insert tie bars. 4.3.2. Testing of Tie Bars. Verify that tie bars that are drilled and epoxied or mechanically inserted into concrete at longitudinal construction joints develop a pullout resistance equal to at least 3/4 of the yield strength of the reinforcing steel. Test pullout resistance of mechanically inserted tie bars when the concrete pavement is at least 7 days old. Test pullout resistance of epoxy-grouted bars after the epoxy manufacturer’s recommended final cure time. Test 15 bars in accordance with ASTM E488, except that alternate approved equipment may be used. All 15 tested bars must meet the required pullout strength. Perform corrective measures to provide equivalent pullout resistance if any of the test results do not meet the required minimum pullout strength. Repair damage from testing. 4.3.3. Testing of Epoxy-Grouted Longitudinal Bars in Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavements. When longitudinal reinforcing steel is drilled and epoxy-grouted in existing pavement, test each bar in accordance with ASTM E488, except that alternate approved equipment may be used. All bars must develop a pullout resistance equal to at least 3/4 of the yield strength of the steel. Test pullout resistance after the epoxy manufacturer’s recommended final cure time. Perform corrective measures to provide equivalent pullout resistance if any of the test results do not meet the required minimum pullout strength. Repair damage from testing. 4.3.4. Transverse Construction Joints for Concrete Pavement Contraction Design (CPCD). Install and rigidly secure a complete joint assembly and bulkhead in the planned transverse contraction joint location when the placing of concrete is intentionally stopped. Install a transverse construction joint either at a planned transverse contraction joint location or mid-slab between planned transverse contraction joints when the placing of concrete is unintentionally stopped. Install tie bars of the size and spacing used in the longitudinal joints for mid-slab construction joints. Place dowels at mid-depth of the pavement slab, parallel to the surface. Place dowels for transverse contraction joints parallel to the pavement edge. Tolerances for location and alignment of dowels will be shown on the plans. For dowels used in a contraction joint, coat the entire length of the dowels with a thin 2024 Specifications 360 453 film of grease, wax, silicone, or other approved de-bonding material. For dowels used in an expansion joint, coat half the length with a thin film of grease, wax, silicone, or other approved de-bonding material; provide dowel caps on the coated half of each dowel bar. 4.4. Curb Joints. Construct curb joints in accordance with Item 529. 4.5. Placing and Removing Forms. Use clean and oiled forms. Secure forms on a base or firm subgrade that is accurately graded and that provides stable support without deflection and movement by formriding equipment. Pin every form at least at the middle and near each end. Tightly join and key form sections together to prevent relative displacement. Set side forms far enough in advance of concrete placement to permit inspection. Check conformity of the grade, alignment, and stability of forms immediately before placing concrete, and make all necessary corrections. Use a straightedge or other approved method to test the top of forms to ensure that the ride quality requirements for the completed pavement will be met. Stop paving operations if forms settle or deflect more than 1/8 in. under finishing operations. Reset forms to line and grade, and refinish the concrete surface to correct grade. Avoid damage to the edge of the pavement when removing side forms and bulkhead forms. Repair damage resulting from form removal with an approved repair material within 24 hr. after form removal unless otherwise approved. Chip excessively honeycombed areas to sound concrete, and repair with an approved repair material within 24 hr. after form removal unless otherwise approved. Clean joint face within 24 hr. after a bulkhead for a transverse construction joint has been removed unless otherwise approved. Promptly apply membrane curing compound to the edge of the concrete pavement when forms are removed before 72 hr. after concrete placement. Forms that are not the same depth as the pavement but within 2 in. of that depth are permitted if the subbase is trenched or the full width and length of the form base are supported with a firm material to produce the required pavement thickness. Promptly repair the form trench after use. Use flexible or curved wood or metal forms for curves of 100-ft. radius or less. 4.6. Concrete Delivery. Clean delivery equipment as necessary to prevent accumulation of old concrete before loading fresh concrete. Use agitated delivery equipment for concrete designed to have a slump of more than 5 in. Segregated concrete is subject to rejection. Begin the discharge of concrete delivered in agitated delivery equipment in accordance with Item 421. Place non-agitated concrete within 45 min. after batching. Reduce times as directed when hot weather or other conditions cause quick setting of the concrete. 4.7. Concrete Placement. Do not allow the pavement edge to deviate from the established paving line by more than 1/2 in. at any point. Place the concrete as near as possible to its final location, and minimize segregation and rehandling. Distribute concrete using shovels where hand spreading is necessary. Do not use rakes or vibrators to distribute concrete. 4.7.1. Consolidation. Consolidate all concrete using approved mechanical vibrators operated on the front of the paving equipment. Use immersion-type vibrators that simultaneously consolidate the full width of the placement when machine finishing. Keep vibrators from dislodging reinforcement. Use hand-operated vibrators to consolidate concrete for concrete pavement (formed) placements, and along forms, at all joints, and in areas not accessible to the machine-mounted vibrators. Do not operate machine-mounted vibrators while the paving equipment is stationary. Vibrator operations are subject to review. 4.7.2. Curbs. Curbs will be in accordance with Item 529. 4.7.3. Temperature Restrictions. Place concrete that is between 40°F and 95°F when measured in accordance with Tex-422-A at the time of discharge, except that concrete may be used if it was already in transit when the temperature was found to exceed the allowable maximum. Take immediate corrective action or cease concrete production when the concrete temperature exceeds 95°F. 2024 Specifications 360 454 Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature in the shade is below 40°F and falling, unless approved. Concrete may be placed when the ambient temperature in the shade is above 35°F and rising or above 40°F. Protect the pavement with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period when temperatures warrant protection against freezing. Submit for approval proposed measures to protect the concrete from anticipated freezing weather for the first 72 hr. after placement. Repair or replace all concrete damaged by freezing. 4.8. Spreading and Finishing. Finish all concrete pavement using approved self-propelled equipment. Use power-driven spreaders, power-driven vibrators, power-driven strike-off screed, or approved alternate equipment to strike-off the surface of the concrete to the required section and grade without surface voids. Use float equipment for final finishing. Use concrete with a consistency that allows completion of all finishing operations without addition of water to the surface. Use the minimal amount of water fog mist necessary to maintain a moist surface. Reduce fogging if float or straightedge operations result in excess slurry. 4.8.1. Finished Surface. Perform sufficient checks using a minimum 10-ft. long straightedge on the plastic concrete to ensure the final surface is within the tolerances specified in Surface Test A in accordance with Item 585, “Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces.” Check with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. 4.8.2. Maintenance of Surface Moisture. Prevent surface drying of the pavement before application of the curing system by means that may include water fogging, the use of wind screens, or the use of evaporation retardants. Apply evaporation retardant at the manufacturer’s recommended rate. Reapply the evaporation retardant as needed to maintain the concrete surface in a moist condition until curing system is applied. Do not use evaporation retardant as a finishing aid. Failure to take acceptable precautions to prevent surface drying of the pavement will be cause for shutdown of pavement operations. 4.8.3. Surface Texturing. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Drag the carpet longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. Prevent grout from plugging the carpet. Do not perform carpet dragging operations while there is excessive bleed water. A metal-tine texture finish is required unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide longitudinal tining unless otherwise shown on the plans. Immediately following the carpet drag, apply a single coat of evaporation retardant, if needed, at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods to achieve similar results on ramps, small or irregular areas, and narrow width sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid or that is scheduled for blanket diamond grinding or shot blasting. Target a carpet drag texture of 0.04 in., as measured by Tex-436-A, when carpet drag is the only surface texture required on the plans. Ensure adequate and consistent macro-texture is achieved by applying enough weight to the carpet and by keeping grout from plugging the carpet. Correct any location with a texture less than 0.03 in. by diamond grinding or shot blasting. The Engineer will determine the test locations at points located transversely to the direction of traffic in the outside wheel path. 4.8.4. Small, Irregular Area, or Narrow Width Placements. Use hand equipment and procedures that produce a consolidated and finished pavement section to the line and grade where machine placements and finishing of concrete pavement are not practical. 4.8.5. Emergency Procedures. Use hand-operated equipment for applying texture, evaporation retardant, and cure in the event of equipment breakdown. 4.9. Curing. Keep the concrete pavement surface from drying in accordance with Section 360.4.8.2., “Maintenance of Surface Moisture,” until the curing material has been applied. Maintain and promptly repair damage to curing materials on exposed surfaces of concrete pavement continuously for at least 3 curing days. A curing day is defined as a 24-hr. period when either the temperature taken in the shade away from 2024 Specifications 360 455 artificial heat is above 50°F for at least 19 hr. or the surface temperature of the concrete is maintained above 40°F for 24 hr. Curing begins when the concrete curing system has been applied. Stop concrete paving if curing compound is not being applied promptly and maintained adequately. Other methods of curing in accordance with Item 422 may be used when specified or approved. 4.9.1. Membrane Curing. Spray the concrete surface uniformly with two coats of membrane curing compound at an individual application rate of no more than 180 sq. ft. per gallon. Apply the curing compound before allowing the concrete surface to dry. Manage finishing and texturing operations to ensure placement of curing compound on a moist concrete surface, relatively free of bleed water, to prevent any plastic shrinkage from cracking. Time the application of curing compound to prevent plastic shrinkage from cracking. Maintain curing compounds in a uniformly agitated condition, free of settlement before and during application. Do not thin or dilute the curing compound. Apply additional compound at the same rate of coverage to correct damage where the coating shows discontinuities or other defects or if rain falls on the newly coated surface before the film has dried enough to resist damage. Ensure that the curing compound coats the sides of the tining grooves. 4.9.2. Asphalt Curing. Apply a uniform coating of asphalt curing at a rate of 90 sq. ft.–180 sq. ft. per gallon when an asphaltic concrete overlay is required. Apply curing immediately after texturing and once the free moisture (sheen) has disappeared. Obtain approval to add water to the emulsion to improve spray distribution. Maintain the asphalt application rate when using diluted emulsions. Maintain asphalt emulsions in a mixed condition during application. 4.9.3. Curing Class HES Concrete. Provide membrane curing in accordance with Section 360.4.9.1., “Membrane Curing,” or wet mat curing in accordance with Section 422.4.8., “Final Curing,” for all Class HES concrete. 4.10. Sawing Joints. Saw joints to the depth shown on the plans as soon as sawing can be accomplished without damage to the pavement, regardless of time of day or weather conditions. Some minor raveling of the saw-cut is acceptable. Use a chalk line, string line, sawing template, or other approved method to provide a true joint alignment. Provide enough saws to match the paving production rate to ensure sawing completion at the earliest possible time to avoid uncontrolled cracking. The Engineer will evaluate the cause of the uncontrolled cracking and direct any necessary repairs. Reduce paving production if necessary to ensure timely sawing of joints. Promptly restore membrane cure damaged within the first 72 hr. of curing. The Engineer will check the depth of saw cuts in accordance with Tex-423-A within 24 hrs. after saw-cutting or before joints are sealed, whichever is sooner. Frequency of checks will be as follows:  every 500 ft. or fraction thereof for all longitudinal contraction joints, and  10% of transverse contraction joints in CPCD for each daily placement. Resaw contraction joints that are deficient in depth by more than 1/4 in. from plan depth within 24 hr. of depth checks. 4.11. Cleaning and Sealing Joints. Clean and seal joints in accordance with Item 438, “Cleaning and Sealing Joints.” Repair excessive spalling of the joint saw groove using an approved method before installing the sealant. Seal all joints before opening the pavement to all traffic. Joint sealants are not required on concrete pavement that is to be overlaid with asphaltic materials. 4.12. Protection of Pavement. Erect and maintain barricades and other standard and approved devices that will exclude all vehicles and equipment from the newly placed pavement for the periods specified. Protect the pavement from damage due to crossings using approved methods before opening to traffic. Where a detour is not readily available or economically feasible, an occasional crossing of the roadway with overweight equipment may be permitted for relocating equipment only, but not for hauling material. When an occasional 2024 Specifications 360 456 crossing of overweight equipment is permitted, temporary matting or other approved methods may be required. Maintain an adequate supply of sheeting or other material to cover and protect fresh concrete surface from weather damage. Apply as needed to protect the pavement surface from weather. 4.13. Opening to Traffic. Testing for opening pavement to traffic is the responsibility of the Contractor unless otherwise shown on the plans or as directed. Before opening pavement to traffic:  provide test results to the Engineer for review, if necessary,  clean pavement,  place stable material against pavement edges,  seal joints, and  perform all other traffic-safety related work. 4.13.1. Opening Pavement to All Traffic. Pavements can be open to all traffic:  when the pavement is 7 days old,  when 3-day curing is complete and the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,200 psi,  after 24 hr. and the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,200 psi when Class HES concrete is used, or  after the concrete has been cured for at least 8 hr. and attained a minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi when Class HES concrete is used. 4.13.2. Opening Pavement to Construction Equipment. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, concrete pavement may be opened to concrete paving equipment and related delivery equipment after the concrete is at least 48 hr. old and has attained a compressive strength of 3,200 psi. Keep delivery equipment at least 2 ft. from the edge of the concrete pavement. Keep tracks of the paving equipment at least 1 ft. from the pavement edge. Protect textured surfaces from the paving equipment. Restore damaged membrane curing as soon as possible. Repair pavement damaged by paving or delivery equipment before opening to all traffic. 4.13.3. Maturity Method. Maturity method, in accordance with Tex-426-A, may be used to estimate concrete strength for opening pavement to traffic. Install at least two maturity sensors for each day’s placement in areas where the maturity method will be used for opening. Maturity sensors, when used, will be installed near the day’s final placement for areas being evaluated. The Engineer will test specimens to verify the strength-maturity relationship in accordance with Tex-426-A. The strength-maturity relationship will be verified at least every 10 days of production after the first day. Establish a new strength-maturity relationship when the strength specimens deviate more than 10% from the maturity-estimated strengths. Suspend use of the maturity method for opening pavements to traffic when the strength-maturity relationship deviates by more than 10% until a new strength-maturity relationship is established. The Engineer will determine the frequency of verification when the maturity method is used intermittently or for only specific areas. 4.13.4. Emergency Opening to Traffic. Open the pavement to traffic under emergency conditions, when the pavement is at least 72 hr. old, when directed in writing. 4.14. Sampling and Testing of Concrete. Unless otherwise specified, all fresh and hardened concrete is subject to testing as follows. 4.14.1. Fresh Concrete. Provide safe access and assistance to the Engineer during sampling. Fresh concrete will be sampled in accordance with Tex-407-A. 2024 Specifications 360 457 4.14.2. Testing Concrete. The Engineer will test the fresh and hardened concrete in accordance with the following methods:  Slump. Tex-415-A, only for formed concrete pavement placements;  Air Content. Tex-414-A or Tex-416-A, only when air-entrained concrete is shown on the plans;  Temperature. Tex-422-A;  Making and Curing Strength Specimens. Tex-447-A;  Compressive Strength. Tex-418-A; and  Maturity. Tex-426-A. Maturity specimens will be made only when maturity method is used or shown on the plans. Concrete with slump less than minimum required after all addition of water withheld will be rejected, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Concrete with slump exceeding maximum allowed may be used at the Contractor’s option. If used, Engineer will make, test, and evaluate strength specimens in accordance with Section 360.4.15., “Acceptance of Concrete Pavement.” Acceptance of concrete not meeting air content or temperature requirements will be determined by Engineer. Fresh concrete exhibiting segregation and excessive bleeding will be rejected. 4.14.2.1. Strength Specimen Handling. After strength test specimens are molded, protect and cure in conformance with pertinent test methods. When necessary, deliver Contractor-molded specimens to curing facilities, remove specimens from their molds, and place specimens in curing tanks within 24–48 hr. after molding, in conformance with pertinent test methods. The Engineer will deliver Department-molded specimens to curing facilities, remove specimens from their molds, and place specimens in curing tanks within 24–48 hr. after molding, in conformance with pertinent test methods. 4.15. Acceptance of Concrete Pavement. The Engineer will determine pay adjustments for deficient pavement thickness within 14 days after concrete pavement has been cored. The Engineer will determine structural adequacy of low concrete strengths within 7 days after design strength specimens or cores, if taken, are tested. 4.15.1. Pavement Thickness. The Engineer will check the thickness in accordance with Tex-423-A unless other methods are shown on the plans. The Engineer will perform one thickness test consisting of one reading at approximately the center of the paving equipment every 500 ft. or fraction thereof. Core where directed, in accordance with Tex-424-A, to verify deficiencies. Do not core until pavement is at least 7 days old or has achieved design strength. Fill core holes using an approved concrete mixture and method. 4.15.1.1. Assessing Payment Adjustments. Limits for applying a payment adjustment for deficient pavement thickness are 500 ft. units of pavement in each lane. Lane width will be as shown on typical sections and in conformance with pavement design standards. The limits for retaining deficient pavement without compensation or removing and replacing without additional compensation will be defined by coring or equivalent nondestructive means as determined by the Engineer. The remaining portion of the 500-ft. unit allowed for pay adjustment will be subject to the payment adjustment based on the average core thickness deficiency at each end of the 10-ft. interval investigation as determined by the Engineer. Shoulders will be measured for thickness unless otherwise shown on the plans. Shoulders 6 ft. wide or wider will be considered as lanes. Shoulders less than 6 ft. wide will be considered part of the adjacent lane. Shoulders less than 6 ft. wide and placed separately from the adjacent lane will be considered as a lane. Limits for applying payment adjustment for deficient pavement thickness for ramps, widenings, acceleration and deceleration lanes, and other miscellaneous areas are 500-ft. units. Areas less than 500-ft. units will be individually evaluated for payment adjustment based on the plan area. 2024 Specifications 360 458 4.15.1.2. Verification of Thickness Deficiencies. When any fresh depth test measured in accordance with Tex-423-A is deficient by more than 0.50 in. from the plan thickness, take one 4-in. diameter core at that location to verify the measurement. When determining the average thickness deficiency for assessing a pay adjustment other than retaining pavement without compensation or remove and replace as shown in Table 1, take at least two additional cores from the unit, in accordance with Section 360.4.15.1.1., “Assessing Payment Adjustments,” equidistantly spaced from the first core in each direction if the first core is deficient by more than 0.50 in. from the plan thickness. Measure the length of cores in accordance with Tex-424-A. Determine the average thickness by averaging the lengths of the cores. Subtract the calculated average thickness from the plan thickness to determine the average thickness deficiency. In calculations of the average thickness, measurements exceeding the plan thickness by more than 0.2 in. will be considered as the plan thickness plus 0.2 in. When determining the limits for retaining the deficient pavement without compensation or remove and replace without additional compensation, take additional cores at 10-ft. intervals in each direction parallel to the centerline to determine the boundary of the deficient area if the first core length deficiency is more than 1.00 in. for pavements less than 11 in. thick or more than 1.50 in. for pavements 11 in. or thicker. Continue taking cores at 10-ft. intervals until the core length deficiency is less than 1.00 in. for pavements less than 11 in. thick or less than 1.50 in. for pavements 11 in. or thicker. 4.15.2. Strength of Concrete Pavement. The Engineer will accept concrete pavement meeting a compressive strength of 3,200 psi at 7 days or meeting a compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days for Class P concrete. Concrete strength testing may be correlated to an age other than 7 days in accordance with Tex-427-A when approved. The Engineer will accept concrete pavement using Class HES concrete based on the required strength and time. Investigate the strength test procedures, the quality of materials, the concrete production operations, and other possible problem areas to determine the cause when a concrete strength test value is more than 10% below the required strength or when three consecutive strength values fall below the required strength. Take necessary action to correct the problem, including redesign of the concrete mix if needed. The Engineer may suspend concrete paving if the Contractor is unable to identify, document, and correct the cause of low-strength test values in a timely manner. The Engineer will evaluate the structural adequacy of the pavements if any strength is more than 15% below the required strength. Remove and replace pavements found to be structurally inadequate at no additional cost when directed. 4.15.3. Ride Quality. Measure and correct ride quality in accordance with Item 585, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 5. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured as follows. 5.1. Concrete Pavement. Concrete pavement will be measured by the square yard of surface area in place. The surface area includes the portion of the pavement slab extending beneath the curb. 6. PAYMENT These prices are full compensation for materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 6.1. Concrete Pavement. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Concrete Pavement” of 2024 Specifications 360 459 the type and depth specified as adjusted in accordance with Section 360.6.2., “Deficient Thickness Adjustment.” 6.2. Deficient Thickness Adjustment. Where the average thickness of pavement is deficient in thickness, payment will be made using the adjustment factor in accordance with Table 1 applied to the bid price for the deficient area for each unit in accordance with Section 360.4.15.1.1., “Assessing Payment Adjustments.” When pavement thickness investigation (coring) is conducted for three consecutive placements, remove and replace without additional compensation all pavement placed during these days if the average thickness deficiency from all cores taken from these consecutive placements is greater than 0.25 in. Table 1 Deficient Thickness Price Adjustment Factor Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores (in.) Proportional Part of Contract Price Allowed (Adjustment Factor) for Thickness <11 inches Not deficient 1.00 Over 0.00 through 0.50 1.00 Over 0.50 through 0.75 0.80 Over 0.75 through 1.00 0.60 Over 1.00 through 1.25 Retain pavement without compensation or Remove and Replace Over 1.25 Remove and Replace Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores (in.) Proportional Part of Contract Price Allowed (Adjustment Factor) for Thickness ≥11 inches Not deficient 1.00 Over 0.00 through 0.50 1.00 Over 0.50 through 0.75 0.90 Over 0.75 through 1.00 0.80 Over 1.00 through 1.50 0.60 Over 1.50 through 2.00 Retain pavement without compensation or Remove and replace Over 2.00 Remove and replace 6.3. Curb. All curbs will be paid for under Item 529. 2024 Specifications 400 465 Item 400 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 1. DESCRIPTION Excavate for placement and construction of structures and backfill structures. Cut and restore pavement. 2. MATERIALS Use materials that meet the requirements of the following.  Item 401, “Flowable Backfill”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  DMS-4600, “Hydraulic Cement” 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Excavation. 3.1.1. General. Excavate to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as directed. Provide slopes, benching, sheeting, bracing, pumping, and bailing as necessary to maintain the stability and safety of excavations up to 5 ft. deep. Excavation protection for excavations deeper than 5 ft. is governed by Item 402, “Trench Excavation Protection,” and Item 403, “Temporary Special Shoring.” Use satisfactory excavated material as backfill or as embankment fill in accordance with Item 132, “Embankment.” Dispose of material not incorporated into the final project off the right of way in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. Keep any topsoil that has been removed separate, and replace it, as nearly as feasible, in its original position when excavating for installation of structures across private property or beyond the limits of the embankment. Restore the area to an acceptable condition. Excavate drilled shafts in accordance with Item 416, “Drilled Shaft Foundations.” 3.1.1.1. Obstructions. Remove obstructions to the proposed construction, including trees and other vegetation, debris, and structures, over the width of the excavation to a depth of 1 ft. below the bottom of excavation. Remove as required to clear the new structure and plug in an approved manner if abandoned storm drains, sewers, or other drainage systems are encountered. Restore the bottom of the excavation to grade by backfilling after removing obstructions in accordance with this Item. Dispose of surplus materials in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 3.1.1.2. Excavation in Streets. Cut pavement and base to neat lines when structures are installed in streets, highways, or other paved areas. Restore pavement structure after completion of excavation and backfilling. Maintain and control traffic in accordance with the approved traffic control plan and the TMUTCD. 3.1.1.3. Utilities. Comply with the requirements of Article 7.15., “Responsibility for Damage Claims.” Conduct work with minimum disturbance of existing utilities, and coordinate work in or near utilities with the utility owners. Inform utility owners before work begins, allowing them enough time to identify, locate, reroute, or make other adjustments to utility lines. Avoid cutting or damaging underground utility lines that are to remain in place. Promptly notify the utility company if damage occurs. Provide temporary flumes across the excavation while open if an active sanitary 2024 Specifications 400 466 sewer line is damaged during excavation and restore the lines when backfilling has progressed to the original bedding lines of the cut sewer. 3.1.1.4. De-Watering. Construct or place structures in the presence of water only if approved. Place precast members, pipe, and concrete only on a dry, firm surface. Remove water by bailing, pumping, well point installation, deep wells, underdrains, or other approved method. Remove standing water in a manner that does not allow water movement through or alongside concrete being placed if structures are approved for placement in the presence of water. Pump or bail only from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work while placing structural concrete or for a period of at least 36 hr. thereafter. Pump or bail during placement of seal concrete only to the extent necessary to maintain a static head of water within the cofferdam. Pump or bail to de-water inside a sealed cofferdam only after the seal has aged at least 36 hr. Place a stabilizing material in the bottom of the excavation if the bottom cannot be de-watered to the point the subgrade is free of mud or it is difficult to keep reinforcing steel clean. Use flexible base, cement-stabilized base or backfill, lean concrete, or other approved stabilizing material. Provide concrete with at least 275 lb. of cement per cubic yard, if lean concrete is used, and place to a minimum depth of 3 in. Stabilizing material placed for the convenience of the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s expense. 3.1.2. Bridge Foundations and Retaining Walls. Do not disturb material below the bottom of footing grade. Do not backfill to compensate for excavation that has extended below grade. Fill the area with concrete at the time the footing is placed if excavation occurs below the proposed footing grade. Additional concrete placed will be at the Contractor’s expense. Take core samples to determine the character of the supporting materials if requested. Provide an intact sample adequate to judge the character of the founding material. Take these cores when the excavation is close to completion. Cores should be approximately 5 ft. deeper than the proposed founding grade. Remove loose material if the founding stratum is rock or other hard material, and clean and cut it to a firm surface that is level, stepped, or serrated, as directed. Clean out soft seams, and fill with concrete when the footing is placed. Place the foundation once the Engineer has inspected the excavation and authorized changes have been made to provide a uniform bearing condition if the material at the footing grade of a retaining wall, bridge bent, or pier is a mixture of compressible and incompressible material. 3.1.3. Cofferdams. The term “cofferdam” designates any temporary or removable structure constructed to hold surrounding earth, water, or both out of the excavation whether the structure is formed of soil, timber, steel, concrete, or a combination of these. Use pumping wells or well points for de-watering cofferdams if required. Submit details and design calculations for sheet pile or other types of cofferdams requiring structural members bearing the seal, signature, and date of a licensed professional engineer for review before constructing the cofferdam. The Department reserves the right to reject designs. Design structural systems to comply with the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges or AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Interior dimensions of cofferdams must provide enough clearance for the construction, inspection, and removal of required forms and, if necessary, enough room to allow pumping outside the forms. Extend sheet pile cofferdams well below the bottom of the footings and make concrete seals as well-braced and watertight as practicable. Use Class E concrete for foundation seals unless otherwise specified. Place concrete foundation seals in accordance with Item 420, “Concrete Substructures.” Seals placed for the convenience of the Contractor will be at the Contractor’s expense. Make the excavation deep enough to allow for swelling of the material at the base of the excavation during pile-driving operations when the Engineer judges it to be impractical to de-water inside a cofferdam and a concrete seal is to be placed around piling driven within the cofferdam. Remove swelling material to the 2024 Specifications 400 467 bottom of the seal grade after driving the piling. Remove the foundation material to exact footing grades where it is possible to de-water inside the cofferdam without placing a seal after driving piling. Do not backfill a foundation to compensate for excavation that has been extended below grade; fill such areas below grade with concrete at the time the seals or footings are placed. Remove cofferdams after completing the substructure without disturbing or damaging the structure unless otherwise provided. 3.1.4. Culverts and Storm Drains. When the design requires special bedding conditions for culverts or storm drains, an excavation diagram will be shown on the plans. Do not exceed these limits of excavation. Construct pipe structures in an open cut with vertical sides extending to a point 1 ft. above the pipe unless otherwise shown on the plans. When site conditions or the plans do not prohibit sloping the cut, the excavation may be stepped or laid back to a stable slope beginning 1 ft. above the pipe. Maintain the stability of the excavation throughout the construction period. Construct the embankment for pipe to be installed in fill above natural ground to an elevation at least 1 ft. above the top of the pipe, and then excavate for the pipe. 3.1.4.1. Unstable Material. Remove the material to a depth of no more than 2 ft. below the grade of the structure when unstable soil is encountered at established footing grade, unless the Engineer authorizes additional depth. Replace soil removed with stable material in uniform layers no greater than 8 in. deep (loose measurement). Each layer must have enough moisture to be compacted by rolling or tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. Use special materials such as flexible base, cement-stabilized base, cement-stabilized backfill, or other approved material when it is not feasible to construct a stable foundation as outlined above. 3.1.4.2. Incompressible Material. Remove the incompressible material to 6 in. below the footing grade, backfill with an approved compressible material, and compact in accordance with Section 400.3.3., “Backfill,” if rock, part rock, or other incompressible material is encountered at established footing grade while placing prefabricated elements. 3.2. Shaping and Bedding. 3.2.1. General. Place at least 2 in. of fine granular material for precast box sections on the base of the excavation before placing the box sections. Use bedding as shown in Figure 1 for pipe installations. Use Class C bedding unless otherwise shown on the plans. The Engineer may require the use of a template to secure reasonably accurate shaping of the foundation material. Undercut the excavation at least 4 in. where cement-stabilized backfill is shown on the plans and backfill with stabilized material to support the pipe or box at the required grade. 2024 Specifications 400 468 Figure 1 Bedding Diagrams 3.2.2. Optional Shaping and Bedding for Precast Concrete Pipe. For precast concrete pipe, the beddings in accordance with ASTM C1479 are permissible. 3.3. Backfill. 3.3.1. General. Backfill the excavation after placement of the permanent structure as soon as practical. Use backfill free of stones large enough to interfere with compaction; large or frozen lumps that will not break down readily under compaction; and wood or other extraneous material. Obtain backfill material from excavation or from other sources. Place backfill in layers no greater than 10 in. deep (loose measurement) in areas not supporting a completed roadbed, retaining wall, or embankment. Place backfill in uniform layers no greater than 8 in. deep (loose measurement) in areas supporting a portion of a roadbed, retaining wall, or embankment. Compact each 2024 Specifications 400 469 layer to meet the density requirements of the roadbed, retaining wall, or embankment material, or as shown on the plans. Bring each layer of backfill material to the moisture content needed to obtain the required density. Use mechanical tamps or rammers to compact the backfill. Rollers may be used to compact backfill if feasible. Cohesionless materials may be used for backfilling. Use cohesionless materials that conform to the requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Cohesionless Material Gradation Limits Sieve Size Percent Retained 3″ 0 #10 Note 1 #200 90–100 1. No. 10 sieve requirements are 0–30% retained when used as aggregate for cement-stabilized backfill. Compact cohesionless materials using vibratory equipment, water ponding, or a combination of both. 3.3.2. Bridge Foundations, Retaining Walls, Manholes and Inlets, and Box Culverts. Place backfill against the structure only after the concrete has reached the design strength required in Item 421. Backfill retaining walls with material meeting the requirements of Item 423, “Retaining Walls.” Backfill around bridge foundations, manholes and inlets, and culverts using material with particles no more than 4 in. in greatest dimension and a gradation that permits thorough compaction. Use rock or gravel mixed with soil if the percentage of fines is enough to fill all voids and ensure a uniform and thoroughly compacted mass of proper density. Use mechanical tamps and rammers to avoid damage to the structure where backfill material is being placed too close to the structure to permit compaction with blading and rolling equipment. Avoid wedging action of backfill against structures. Step or serrate slopes bounding the excavation to prevent such action. Place backfill uniformly around bridge foundations. Place backfill equally and in uniform layers along both sides of manholes and inlets and culverts. The Engineer may require backfilling of structures excavated into hard, erosion-resistant material, and subject to erosive forces, with stone or lean concrete. Box culverts may be opened to traffic as soon as enough backfill and embankment have been placed over the top to protect culverts against damage from heavy construction equipment. Repair damage to culvert caused by construction traffic at no additional expense to the Department. 3.3.3. Pipe. Bring backfill material to the proper moisture condition after installing bedding and pipe as required and place it equally along both sides of the pipe in uniform layers no greater than 8 in. deep (loose measurement). Compact each lift mechanically. Thoroughly compact materials placed under the haunches of the pipe to prevent damage or displacement of the pipe. Place backfill in this manner to the top-of-pipe elevation. Place and compact backfill above the top of the pipe in accordance with Section 400.3.3.1., “General.” The Engineer may reject backfill material containing more than 20% by weight of material retained on a 3-in. sieve with large lumps not easily broken down or that cannot be spread in loose layers. Material excavated by trenching machine must generally meet the requirements of this Section as long as large stones are not present. Place and compact additional material where pipe extends beyond the toe of slope of the embankment and the depth of cover provided by backfill to the original ground level is less than the minimum required by the specifications for the type of pipe involved, until the minimum cover has been provided. 2024 Specifications 400 470 3.3.4. Cement-Stabilized Backfill. Backfill the excavation to the elevations shown with cement-stabilized backfill when shown on the plans. Use cement-stabilized backfill that contains aggregate conforming to the gradation limits shown in Table 1, water, and at least 7% hydraulic cement based on the dry weight of the aggregate, in accordance with Tex-120-E. Place cement-stabilized backfill equally along the sides of structures to prevent strain on or displacement of the structure. Fill voids when placing cement-stabilized backfill. Use hand-operated tampers, if necessary, to fill voids. Compact the mixture using density control unless otherwise shown on the plans. Place and compact the backfill within 2 hr. of mixing. 3.3.5. Flowable Backfill. Backfill the excavation with flowable backfill to the elevations indicated when shown on the plans. Prevent the structure from being displaced during the placement of the flowable fill, and prevent flowable fill from entering manholes and inlets, culverts, and drainage structures. 4. MEASUREMENT This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 4.1. Structural Excavation. Unless shown on the plans as a pay item, structural excavation quantities shown are for information purposes only. When structural excavation is specified as a pay item, structural excavation for pipe headwalls, inlets, manholes, culvert or storm drain extensions less than 15 ft. long, bridge abutments, retaining walls, and side road and private entrance pipe culverts will not be measured. No allowance will be made for variance from plans quantity incurred by an alternate bid. When specified as a pay item, structural excavation will be measured by the cubic yard as computed by the average end areas method or as shown on the plans. Excavation diagrams shown on the plans take precedence over the provisions of this Article. 4.1.1. Boundaries of Measurement. 4.1.1.1. Pipe. 4.1.1.1.1. Pipe up to 42 Inches. For pipe up to 42 in. nominal or equivalent diameter, no material outside vertical planes 1 ft. beyond and parallel to the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe will be included. 4.1.1.1.2. Pipe Larger than 42 Inches. For pipes larger than 42 in. nominal or equivalent diameter, no material outside vertical planes located 2 ft. beyond and parallel to the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe will be included. Quantities for excavation in fill above natural ground include 1 ft. above the top of the pipe regardless of the height of completed fill. Excavation for pipe will be measured between the extreme ends of the completed structure, including end appurtenances as shown on the plans and from centerline to centerline of structures such as inlets and manholes. 4.1.1.2. Footings, Walls, Boxes, and Other Excavation. No material outside vertical planes 1 ft. beyond and parallel to the edges of the footings or outside walls will be included, whether a cofferdam or shoring is used. When plans provide the option of cast-in-place or precast boxes, measurement will be based on the cast-in-place option. 2024 Specifications 400 471 Where excavation in addition to that allowed for the footings is required for other portions of the structure, measurement for the additional excavation will be limited laterally by vertical planes 1 ft. beyond the face of the member and parallel to it, and vertically to a depth of 1 ft. below the bottom of the member. 4.1.1.3. Excavation near Roadways and Channels. At structure sites other than culverts and pipe excavations, the measurement of structural excavation will include only material below or outside the limits of the completed road or channel excavation. Roadway and channel excavation will be paid under Item 110, “Excavation.” For culverts except side road and private entrance culverts, excavation within the limits of the structure and below or outside the limits of the completed roadway excavation will be measured as structural excavation. 4.1.2. Falsework. No measurement will be made for excavation necessary for placing forms or falsework that exceed the limits given in Section 400.4.1.1., “Boundaries of Measurement.” 4.1.3. Swelling. Measurement will not include materials removed below footing grades to compensate for anticipated swelling due to pile driving, nor will it include material required to be removed due to swelling beyond the specified limits during pile-driving operations. 4.1.4. Cave-Ins. Measurement will not include additional volume caused by slips, slides, cave-ins, silting, or fill material resulting from the action of the elements or the Contractor’s operation. 4.1.5. Undercut. Where rock or other incompressible or unstable material is undercut to provide a suitable foundation for pipe or box sections, such material below grade directed to be removed will be measured for payment. 4.1.6. Grade Change. Additional measurement will be made of the volume of excavation involved in the lowering or raising of the elevation of a footing, foundation, or structure unit, when such grade change is authorized. 4.2. Cement-Stabilized Backfill. Cement-stabilized backfill will be measured by the cubic yard as shown on the plans. 4.3. Cutting and Restoring Pavement. Cutting and restoring pavement will be measured by the square yard as shown on the plans. Excavation below pavement or base will be measured as structural excavation of the pertinent type. 5. PAYMENT 5.1. Structural Excavation. Unless specified as a pay item, structural excavation and backfill performed, and material furnished in accordance with this Item will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. When structural excavation is specified as a pay item, the excavation and backfill work performed, and materials furnished will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Structural Excavation,” “Structural Excavation (Box),” “Structural Excavation (Pipe),” and “Structural Excavation (Bridge).” This price includes concrete to compensate for excavation that has extended below grade for bridge foundations and retaining walls, and backfilling and compacting areas that were removed as part of structural excavation. Cofferdams or other measures necessary for supporting excavations less than 5 ft. deep will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to the Contract. Foundation seal concrete for cofferdams, when required, will be paid for as provided in the pertinent Items. If no direct method of payment is provided in the Contract, the work will be measured and paid for in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” Seal placed for the convenience of the Contractor will not be paid for. Unless otherwise provided, stone or lean concrete backfill around structures as provided for in Section 400.3.3.2., “Bridge Foundations, Retaining Walls, Manholes and Inlets, and Box Culverts,” will be 2024 Specifications 400 472 measured and paid for as extra work in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” When structural excavation is specified as a pay item, a partial payment of 50% of the bid price will be made for structural excavation completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer but not backfilled. The remaining amount will be paid upon completion of backfilling. When the Contractor elects to excavate beyond plan requirements, no measurement will be made of the additional volume. 5.2. Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable or Incompressible Material. Removal and replacement of material will be paid for if directed. Removal and replacement of material or placement of special material made necessary by the softening of founding material due to the Contractor’s sequence of work or operation will be at the Contractor’s expense. Special material used or additional excavation made for the Contractor’s convenience will not be paid for. 5.2.1. Structural Excavation as a Pay Item. Where special materials are not required or specified, payment for the removal and replacement of unstable or incompressible material will be made at a price equal to 200% of the unit price bid per cubic yard for “Structural Excavation.” When the Contractor elects to remove and replace material deeper than directed, no measurement will be made on that portion below the directed elevation. This price is full compensation for removing the unstable or incompressible material; furnishing, hauling, placing, and compacting suitable replacement material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When shown on the plans or when directed, for the use of special materials such as flexible base, cement-stabilized base, cement-stabilized backfill, or other special material, payment for excavation below footing grades will be made at the unit price bid for “Structural Excavation.” Payment for furnishing, hauling, placing, and compacting the flexible base, cement-stabilized base, cement-stabilized backfill, or other special materials will be made at the unit price bid for these items in the Contract, or, if the required material is not a bid item, in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” 5.2.2. Structural Excavation Not a Pay Item. Where special materials for backfill are not required or specified, payment for the authorized removal and replacement of unstable or incompressible material will be measured and paid for at $18 per cubic yard of material removed. This price is full compensation for removing the unstable or incompressible material; furnishing, hauling, placing, and compacting suitable replacement material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When shown on the plans or when directed, for the use of special materials such as flexible base, cement-stabilized base, cement-stabilized backfill, or other special material, excavation below the footing grades will be paid for at $12 per cubic yard. Payment for furnishing, hauling, placing, and compacting the flexible base, cement-stabilized base, cement-stabilized backfill, or other special materials will be made at the unit price bid for these items, or, if the required material is not a bid item, in accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” 5.3. Lowering of a Structure Foundation. If the Engineer requires a structure foundation to be lowered to an elevation below the grade shown on the plans, overexcavation will be paid for in accordance with Table 2. Table 2 Payment for Required Overexcavation Variance of Revised Footing Grade from Plan Grade Payment Terms Variance of Revised Footing Grade from Plan Grade “Structural Excavation” is a Bid Item “Structural Excavation” is Not a Bid Item Up to and including 5 ft. Unit price equal to 115% of unit price bid for “Structural Excavation” $12 per cubic yard Over 5 ft. up to 10 ft. Unit price equal to 125% of unit price bid for “Structural Excavation” $15 per cubic yard Over 10 ft. In accordance with Article 9.7., “Payment for Extra Work and Force Account Method.” 5.4. Cement-Stabilized Backfill. Cement-stabilized backfill will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cement-Stabilized Backfill.” 2024 Specifications 400 473 5.5. Cutting and Restoring Pavement. Cutting and restoring pavement will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cutting and Restoring Pavement” of the type specified. Work done to repair damage to base or pavement incurred outside the limits shown on the plans, or the limits authorized, will not be measured for payment. The unit prices bid are full compensation for excavation, including removing obstructions and plugging drainage systems; bedding and backfilling, including placing, sprinkling, and compaction of material; soundings; cleaning and filling seams; constructing and removing cofferdams; de-watering, sheeting, or bracing excavations up to and including 5 ft. deep; pumps; drills; explosives; disposition of surplus material; cutting pavement and base to neat lines; and materials, hauling, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Flowable backfill will be paid for in accordance with Item 401. Protection methods for open excavations deeper than 5 ft. will be measured and paid for as required in accordance with Item 402 or Item 403. 2024 Specifications 421 526 Item 421 Hydraulic Cement Concrete 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish hydraulic cement concrete for concrete pavements, concrete structures, and other concrete construction. 2. MATERIALS Use materials from prequalified sources listed on the Department website. Provide aggregates from sources listed in the Department’s Concrete Rated Source Quality Catalog (CRSQC). Use materials from non-listed sources only when tested and approved before use. Allow 30 calendar days for the Engineer to sample, test, and report results for non-listed sources. Do not combine approved material with unapproved material. 2.1. Cement. Furnish cement in accordance with DMS-4600, “Hydraulic Cement.” 2.2. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCMs).  Coal Ash. Furnish sources of fly ash, modified fly ash (MFA), harvested coal ash (HCA), and ground bottom ash (GBA) in accordance with DMS-4610, “Coal Ash.”  Slag Cement. Furnish slag cement in accordance with DMS-4620, “Slag Cement.”  Silica Fume. Furnish silica fume in accordance with DMS-4630, “Silica Fume.”  Natural Pozzolans. Furnish natural pozzolans in accordance with DMS-4635, “Natural Pozzolans.” 2.3. Cementitious Material. Cementitious materials are the cement and SCMs used in concrete. 2.4. Chemical Admixtures. Furnish admixtures in accordance with DMS-4640, “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.” 2.5. Water. Furnish mixing and curing water that is free of oils, acids, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. Water from municipal supplies approved by the Texas Department of Health will not require testing. Provide test reports showing compliance with Table 1 before use when using water from other sources. Water that is a blend of concrete wash water and other acceptable water sources, certified by the concrete producer as complying with the requirements shown in Table 1 and Table 2, may be used as mix water. Test the blended water weekly for 4 weeks for compliance with Table 1 and Table 2 or provide previous test results. Then test every month for compliance. Provide water test results upon request. Do not use mix water that has an adverse effect on the air-entraining agent, on any other chemical admixture, or on strength or time of set of the concrete. Use mixing and curing water free of iron and other impurities that may cause staining or discoloration when using white hydraulic cement. 2024 Specifications 421 527 Table 1 Chemical Limits for Mix Water Contaminant Test Method Max Concentration (ppm or mg\L) Chloride (Cl) ASTM C1141 Prestressed concrete 500 Bridge decks & superstructure 500 All other concrete 1,000 Sulfate (SO4) ASTM C1141 2,000 Alkalis (Na2O + 0.658K2O) ASTM C1141 600 Total solids ASTM C1603 50,000 1. ASTM C114 includes reference and alternative test methods to measure the concentration of chlorides, sulfates, and alkalis in solutions prepared from dissolving cementitious materials. Use the applicable Test Methods in C114 to measure these constituents. The laboratory performing these tests is not required to conform to the method qualification requirements of Test Methods C114. Alternative instrumental and wet chemistry methods not listed in Test Methods C114 that measure the concentration of these chemical species in solution are permitted. When alternative methods are used, the test method used will be included in the report. Table 2 Acceptance Criteria for Questionable Water Supplies Property Test Method Limits Compressive strength, Min % control at 7 days ASTM C31, ASTM C391,2 90 Time of set, deviation from control, h:min. ASTM C403 From 1:00 early to 1:30 later 1. Base comparisons on fixed proportions and the same volume of test water compared to the control mix using 100% potable water or distilled water. 2. Base comparisons on sets consisting of at least two standard specimens made from a composite sample. 2.6. Aggregate. 2.6.1. Coarse Aggregate. Provide coarse aggregate consisting of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete, crushed stone, or combinations that are free of frozen material and injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material, either free or as an adherent coating. Provide coarse aggregate of uniform quality throughout. Provide coarse aggregate with the requirements shown in Table 3 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Table 3 Coarse Aggregate Requirements Description Test Method Limit Weight of clay lumps, % Max Tex-413-A 0.25 Weight of shale, % Max 1.0 Weight of laminate and friable particle, % Max 5.0 L.A. abrasion wear, % Max Tex-410-A 40 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness,1,2, non-air-entrained concrete, % Max Tex-411-A 25 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness,1,3, air-entrained concrete, % Max 18 Loss by decantation, % Max Tex-406-A 1.5 1. Recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness requirements. 2. Allowed when air-entrained concrete is used at the Contractor’s option. 3. Only when air-entrained concrete is required by the plans. Increase the loss by decantation limit to 3.0% for all classes of concrete and 5.0% for Class A, B, and P if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least 85% calcium carbonate in accordance with Tex-406-A, Part III, in the case of coarse aggregates made primarily from crushing stone, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide test results upon request. Provide coarse aggregate or combination of aggregates conforming to the gradation requirements shown in Table 4 when tested in accordance with Tex-401-A unless otherwise specified. 2024 Specifications 421 528 Table 4 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Aggregate Grade No.1 Maximum Nominal Size Percent Passing on Each Sieve 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” 1” 3/4” 1/2” 3/8” #4 #8 1 2” 100 80–100 50–85 – 20–40 – – 0–10 – 2 1-1/2” – 100 95–100 – 35–70 – 10–30 0–10 – 3 1-1/2” – 100 95–100 – 60–90 25–60 – 0–10 – 4 (57) 1” – – 100 95–100 – 25–60 – 0–10 0–5 5 (67) 3/4” – – – 100 90–100 – 20–55 0–10 0–5 6 (7) 1/2” – – – – 100 90–100 40–70 0–15 0–5 7 3/8” – – – – – 100 70–95 0–25 – 8 3/8” – – – – – 100 95–100 20–65 0–10 1. Corresponding ASTM C33 gradation shown in parentheses. 2.6.2. Fine Aggregate. Provide fine aggregate consisting of clean, hard, durable particles of natural, manufactured sand; recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete; slag; lightweight aggregate; or a combination thereof. Provide fine aggregate free of frozen material and injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material. Provide fine aggregates in accordance with Table 5 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Table 5 Fine Aggregate Requirements Description Test Method Limit Weight of clay lumps, % Max Tex-413-A 0.50 Organic impurities1 Tex-408-A Color not darker than standard Sand equivalent, Min Tex-203-F 80 Fineness modulus Tex-402-A 2.3–3.1 1. Only when air-entrained concrete is specified. Provide fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates conforming to the gradation requirements shown in Table 6 when tested in accordance with Tex-401-A unless otherwise specified. Table 6 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart (Grade 1) Sieve Size % Passing 3/8” 100 #4 95–100 #8 80–100 #16 50–85 #30 25–65 #50 10–351 #100 0–10 #200 0–32 1. 6–35 when sand equivalent value is greater than 85. 2. 0–6 for manufactured sand. 2.6.3. Intermediate Aggregate. Provide intermediate aggregate consisting of clean, hard, durable particles of natural, manufactured sand; slag; recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete; lightweight aggregate; or a combination thereof when optimized aggregate gradation (OAG) concrete is specified or when used at the Contractor’s option. Provide intermediate aggregate free of frozen material and injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material. Provide intermediate aggregate in accordance with Table 7. 2024 Specifications 421 529 Table 7 Intermediate Aggregate Requirements Description Test Method Limit Weight of clay lumps, % Max Tex-413-A 0.50 L.A. abrasion wear,1 % Max Tex-410-A 40 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness,1,2,3, non-air-entrained concrete, % Max Tex-411-A 25 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness,1,2,4, air-entrained concrete, % Max 18 Organic impurities5 Tex-408-A Color not darker than standard Loss by decantation,1 % Max Tex-406-A 1.5 1. Applies only to the portion retained on the No. 4 sieve, if more than 30% of the intermediate aggregate is retained on the No. 4 sieve. 2. Recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness requirements. 3. Allowed when air-entrained concrete is used at the Contractor’s option. 4. Only when air-entrained concrete is required by the plans. 5. Applies only to the portion passing the 3/8-in. sieve, if more than 30% of the intermediate aggregate is passing the 3/8-in. sieve. For the portion retained on the No. 4 sieve, if more than 30% of the intermediate aggregate is retained on the No. 4 sieve, and in the case of aggregates made mainly from crushing stone, unless otherwise shown on the plans, the loss by decantation may be increased to 3.0% for all classes of concrete and 5.0% for Class A, B, and P if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least 85% calcium carbonate in accordance with Tex-406-A, Part III. Provide test results upon request. 2.7. Mortar and Grout. Furnish pre-packaged grouts in accordance with DMS-4675, “Cementitious Grouts and Mortars for Miscellaneous Applications,” when specified for applications other than post-tension grouting. When grouting or mortaring stone riprap is shown on the plans, provide mortar and grout consisting of one part hydraulic cement, two parts sand, and sufficient water to provide the desired consistency. Other mix proportions allowed as approved. Provide mortar with a consistency such that the mortar can be easily handled and spread by trowel. Provide grout of a consistency that will flow into and completely fill all voids. Section 421.4.2.6., “Mix Design Options,” does not apply for mortar and grout. 2.8. Storage of Materials. 2.8.1. Cement and Supplementary Cementitious Materials. Store all cement and supplementary cementitious materials in weatherproof enclosures that will protect the materials from dampness or absorption of moisture. When permitted, small quantities of packaged cementitious material may be stored in the open, on a raised platform, and under waterproof covering for up to 48 hr. 2.8.2. Aggregates. Handle and store concrete aggregates in a manner that prevents contamination by foreign materials. Clear and level the sites for the stockpiles of all vegetation if the aggregates are stored on the ground, and do not use the bottom 6-in. layer of aggregate without cleaning the aggregate before use. Maintain separate stockpiles and prevent intermixing when conditions require the use of two or more grades of coarse aggregates. Separate the stockpiles using physical barriers where space is limited. Store aggregates from different sources in different stockpiles unless the Engineer authorizes pre-blending of the aggregates. Minimize segregation in stockpiles. Remix and test stockpiles when segregation is apparent. Sprinkle stockpiles to control moisture and temperature as necessary. Maintain reasonably uniform moisture content in aggregate stockpiles. 2.8.3. Chemical Admixtures. Store admixtures in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations in tanks that are clearly labeled and prevent admixtures from freezing. 2024 Specifications 421 530 3. EQUIPMENT 3.1. Concrete Plants and Mixing Equipment. Except for volumetric stationary plant or truck (auger) mixers, each plant and truck mixer must be certified by NRMCA or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer showing concrete measuring, mixing, and delivery equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. A new certification or signed and sealed report is required every time a plant is moved. Plants with a licensed professional engineer’s inspection require re-inspection every 2 yr. Provide a copy of the certification or the signed and sealed inspection report to the Engineer. Remove equipment or facilities from service until corrected when they fail to meet specification requirements. When allowed as shown on the plans or by the Engineer, for concrete classes not identified as structural concrete in Table 8 or for Class C concrete not used for bridge-class structures, the Engineer may inspect and approve all plants and trucks instead of NRMCA or non-Department engineer-sealed certifications. The criteria and frequency of Engineer approval of plants and trucks are the same used for NRMCA certification. Inspect and furnish inspection reports of the condition of blades and fins and their percent wear from the original manufacturer’s design for all mixing and agitating equipment annually. Repair mixing equipment exhibiting 10% or more wear before use. If an inspection within 12 mo. is not practical, a 2-mo. grace period (for a maximum of 14 mo. between inspections) is permitted. 3.1.1. Scales. Check all scales before beginning of operations, after each move, or whenever their accuracy or adequacy is questioned, and at least once every 6 mo. Immediately correct deficiencies, and recalibrate. Provide a record of calibration showing scales in compliance with ASTM C94 requirements. Check batching accuracy of volumetric water batching devices at least every 90 days. Check batching accuracy of chemical admixture dispensing devices at least every 6 mo. Perform daily checks as necessary to ensure measuring accuracy. Check electronic aggregate moisture probes at least every 90 days in accordance with Tex-409-A, and be accurate to within 1.0% of the actual moisture content. 3.1.2. Volumetric Mixers. Provide volumetric mixers with rating plates defining the capacity and the performance of the mixer in accordance with the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau or equivalent. Provide volumetric mixers that comply with ASTM C685. Provide test data showing mixers meet the uniformity test requirements in accordance with Tex-472-A. Unless allowed on the plans or by the Engineer, volumetric truck (auger) mixers may not supply classes of concrete identified as structural concrete in Table 8. 3.1.3. Agitators and Truck and Stationary Mixers. Provide stationary and truck mixers capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and capable of discharging the concrete so that the requirements of Tex-472-A are met. Perform concrete uniformity tests on mixers or agitators in accordance with Tex-472-A as directed, to resolve issues of mix uniformity and mixer performance. Perform the mixer or agitator uniformity test at the full rated capacity of the equipment. Remove all equipment that fails the uniformity test from service. Inspect and maintain mixers and agitators. Keep them free of concrete buildup, and repair or replace worn or damaged blades or fins. Ensure all mixers have a plate affixed showing manufacturer’s recommended operating speed and rated capacity for mixing and agitating. Truck mixers with automated water and chemical admixture measurement and slump and slump flow monitoring equipment meeting the requirement of ASTM C94 will be allowed. Provide data every 6 mo. substantiating the accuracy of slump, slump flow, temperature, water, and chemical admixture measurements. The slump measured by the automated system must be within 1 in. of the slump measured 2024 Specifications 421 531 in accordance with Tex-415-A. The concrete temperature measured by the automated system must be within 1°F of concrete temperature measured in accordance with Tex-422-A. The Engineer will not use the automated measurements for acceptance. 3.2. Hauling Equipment. Provide hauling equipment capable of maintaining the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Provide equipment with smooth, mortar-tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge of the concrete when using non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete. Maintain hauling equipment clean and free of built-up concrete. 3.3. Testing Equipment. Provide strength-testing equipment when required in accordance with the Contract controlling test unless shown otherwise. Provide calibration records of strength-testing equipment to the Engineer within 1 week after each calibration. Furnish and maintain the following in conformance with the pertinent test procedure unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified.  Test molds  Curing facilities  Maturity meters if used  Wheelbarrow or other container acceptable for the sampling of the concrete 4. CONSTRUCTION 4.1. Classification of Concrete Mix Designs. Provide classes of concrete meeting the requirements shown in Table 8. A higher-strength class of concrete with equal or lower water-to-cementitious material (w/cm) ratio may be substituted for the specified class of concrete when approved. 4.2. Mix Design Proportioning. Furnish mix designs using ACI 211, Tex-470-A, or other approved procedures for the classes of concrete shown in Table 8 unless a design method is shown on the plans. Perform mix design proportioning by absolute volume method unless otherwise approved. Perform cement replacement using equivalent weight method unless otherwise approved. Do not exceed the maximum w/cm ratio shown in Table 8 when designing the mixture. 4.2.1. Cementitious Materials. Do not exceed 700 lb. of cementitious material per cubic yard of concrete unless otherwise specified or approved.  Use cement of the same type and from the same source for monolithic placements, unless otherwise approved.  Do not use SCMs when white hydraulic cement is specified. 4.2.2. Aggregates. Recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete may be used as a coarse or fine aggregate in Class A, B, E, and P concrete. Limit recycled crushed concrete fine aggregate to at most 20% of the fine aggregate. Use light-colored aggregates when white hydraulic cement is specified. 2024 Specifications 421 532 Table 8 Concrete Classes Class of Concrete Design Strength1, Min f′c (psi) Max w/cm Ratio Cement Types Mix Design Options Exceptions to Mix Design Options General Use2 A 3,000 0.60 I, II, I/II, IL, IP, IS, IT, V 1, 2, 4, and 7 When the cementitious material content does not exceed 520 lb./cu. yd.., any coal ash or natural pozzolan listed in the MPL may be used at a cement replacement of 20%–50%. Limit the alkali loading to 4.0 lb./cu. yd. or less when using Option 7. Curb, gutter, curb and gutter, concrete retards, sidewalks, driveways, backup walls, anchors, non-reinforced drilled shafts B 2,000 0.60 Riprap, traffic signal controller foundations, small roadside signs, anchors C3 3,600 0.45 I, II, I/II, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–8 N/A Drilled shafts, bridge substructure, traffic rail, culverts except top slab of direct traffic culverts, headwalls, wing walls, inlets, manholes, traffic barrier E 3,000 0.50 I, II, I/II, IL, IP, IS, IT, V 1–8 When the cementitious material content does not exceed 520 lb./cu. yd., any coal ash or natural pozzolan listed on the MPLs may be used at a cement replacement of 20%–50%. Limit the alkali loading to 4.0 lb./cu. yd. or less when using Option 7. Seal concrete F3 Note4 0.45 I, II, I/II, IP, IL, IS, IT, V N/A Railroad structures; occasionally for bridge piers, columns, bents, post-tension members H3 Note4 0.45 I, II, I/II, III, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–4, 8 Mix design Options 1–8 allowed for cast- in-place concrete and the following precast elements unless otherwise shown on the plans.  Bridge deck panels  Retaining wall systems  Coping  Sound walls  Wall columns  Traffic rail  Traffic barrier  Long/arch-span culverts  Precast concrete products in accordance with Item 462, 464, and 465 Do not use Type III cement in mass placement concrete. Precast concrete, post-tension members S3 4,000 0.45 I, II, I/II, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–8 N/A Bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts, approach slabs P See Item 360, “Concrete Pavement.” 0.50 I, II, I/II, IL, IP, IS, IT, V 1–8 When the cementitious material content does not exceed 520 lb./cu. yd., any coal ash or natural pozzolan on the MPLs may be used at a cement replacement of 20%–50%. Concrete pavement 2024 Specifications 421 533 Class of Concrete Design Strength1, Min f′c (psi) Max w/cm Ratio Cement Types Mix Design Options Exceptions to Mix Design Options General Use2 CO3 4,600 0.40 I, II, I/II, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–8 N/A Bridge deck concrete overlay LMC3 4,000 0.40 Latex-modified concrete overlay SS3 3,600 0.45 1–8 Use a minimum cementitious material content of 658 lb./cu. yd. of concrete. Limit the alkali loading to 4.0 lb. per cubic yard or less when using Option 7. Slurry displacement shafts, underwater drilled shafts K3 Note4 0.40 I, II, I/II, III, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–8 N/A Bridge repair HES Note4 0.45 I, IL, II, I/II, III N/A Mix design options do not apply. Limit of 700 lb. of cementitious material per cubic yard is not pertinent. Concrete pavement, concrete pavement repair “X” (HPC)3,5,6 Note7 0.45 I, II, I/II, III, IP, IL, IS, IT, V 1–4, and 8 N/A N/A “X” (SRC)3,5,6 Note7 0.45 I/II, II, IP, IL (MS or HS), IS, IT (MS or HS), V 1–4, and 7 When using coal ash, use only coal ashes allowed for SRC in accordance with the coal ash MPL. Type III-MS may be used where allowed. Type I, Type IL, and Type III cements may be used when natural pozzolans are used or when coal ashes allowed for SRC in accordance with the coal ash MPL are used, and with a Max w/cm of 0.40. Use Option 7 for precast concrete where allowed. N/A 1. Design strength must be attained within 56 days. 2. For information only. 3. Structural concrete classes. 4. As shown on the plans or specified. 5. “X” denotes class of concrete as shown on the plans or specified. 6. (HPC): High Performance Concrete, (SRC): Sulfate Resistant Concrete. 7. Same as class of concrete as shown on the plans. 4.2.2.1. Coarse Aggregate. Use Grade 2 or 3 coarse aggregate for Class P concrete. Use Grade 8 aggregate in extruded curbs unless otherwise approved. Unless otherwise specified, do not use Grade 1 aggregate in drilled shafts. Use coarse aggregate grades for all other classes of concrete with a maximum nominal size no larger than:  1/5 the narrowest dimension between sides of forms;  1/3 the depth of slabs;  2/3 the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wire, bundles of bars, individual tendons, bundles of tendons, or ducts for cast-in-place concrete; or  3/4 the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, individual tendons, bundled tendons, or ducts for precast concrete. 4.2.2.2. Fine Aggregate. Use fine aggregate with an acid insoluble residue of at least 60% by weight when tested in accordance with Tex-612-J in all concrete subject to direct traffic. Use the following equation to determine whether the aggregate combination meets the acid insoluble residue requirement when blending fine aggregate or using an intermediate aggregate. 2024 Specifications 421 534 ( ) ( ) ( )%601002211≥×+×+× iaiaPAPAPA where: A1 = acid insoluble (%) of fine aggregate 1 A2 = acid insoluble (%) of fine aggregate 2 Aia = acid insoluble (%) of intermediate aggregate passing the 3/8 in. sieve P1 = percent by weight of fine aggregate 1 of the fine aggregate blend P2 = percent by weight of fine aggregate 2 of the fine aggregate blend Pia = percent by weight of intermediate aggregate passing the 3/8-in. sieve Alternatively to the above equation, blend fine aggregate with a Micro-Deval loss of less than 12%, when tested in accordance with Tex-461-A, with at least 40% of a fine aggregate with an acid insoluble residue of at least 60%. Use the following equation to determine whether the aggregate combination meets the sand equivalency requirement when blending fine aggregate or using an intermediate aggregate. ( ) ( ) ( )%801002211≥×+×+× iaiaPSEPSEPSE where: SE1 = sand equivalency (%) of fine aggregate 1 SE2 = sand equivalency (%) of fine aggregate 2 SEia = sand equivalency (%) of intermediate aggregate passing the 3/8 in. sieve P1 = percent by weight of fine aggregate 1 of the fine aggregate blend P2 = percent by weight of fine aggregate 2 of the fine aggregate blend Pia = percent by weight of intermediate aggregate passing the 3/8-in. sieve 4.2.3. Chemical Admixtures. Do not use Type C, E, F, or G admixtures in Class S bridge deck concrete. Do not use chemical admixtures containing calcium chloride in any concrete. Use a 30% calcium nitrite solution when a corrosion-inhibiting admixture is required. Dose the admixture at the rate of gallons of admixture per cubic yard of concrete shown on the plans. Use set retarding admixtures, as needed, to control setting time to ensure concrete containing corrosion inhibiting admixtures remains workable for the entire duration of the concrete placement. Perform setting time testing and slump loss tests during trial batch testing. 4.2.4. Air Entrainment. When air-entrained concrete is shown on the plans, target an entrained air content of 4.0% for Class P concrete and 5.5% for all other classes of concrete. Use an approved air-entraining admixture when air-entrained concrete is specified, or when an air-entraining admixture is used at the Contractor’s option. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, acceptance of concrete loads will be based on a tolerance of ±1.5% from the target air content. If the air content is more than 1.5 but less than 3.0% above the target air, the concrete may be accepted based on strength tests. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi, a reduction of 1% entrained air content is permitted. 4.2.5. Slump. Provide concrete with a slump in accordance with Table 9 unless otherwise specified. When approved, the slump of a given concrete mix may be increased above the values shown in Table 9 using chemical admixtures, provided the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower w/cm ratio and does not exhibit segregation or excessive bleeding. Request approval to exceed the slump limits shown in Table 9 sufficiently in advance for proper evaluation by the Engineer. 2024 Specifications 421 535 Table 9 Placement Slump Requirements General Use Placement Slump Range (in.) Walls (>9 in. thick), caps, columns, piers 3–7 Bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts, approach slabs, concrete overlays 3–6 Latex-modified concrete for bridge deck overlays 3–8 Inlets, manholes, walls (<9 in. thick), bridge railing, culverts, concrete traffic barrier, concrete pavement (formed) 4–6 Precast concrete 4–9 Underwater concrete placements 6–8-1/2 Drilled shafts, slurry displaced, underwater drilled shafts See Item 416, “Drilled Shaft Foundations” Curb, gutter, curb and gutter, concrete retards, sidewalk, driveways, seal concrete, anchors, riprap, small roadside sign foundations, concrete pavement repair, concrete repair As approved 4.2.6. Mix Design Options. 4.2.6.1. Option 1. Replace cement with at least the minimum dosage listed on the MPL for the coal ash or natural pozzolan used in the mixture. Conduct Option 8 testing to determine the minimum replacement dosage as listed on the MPL. Do not replace more than 50% of the cement. Up to 70% of the cement may be replaced when concrete is used for mass concrete placements. 4.2.6.2. Option 2. Replace 35–50% of the cement with slag cement. Up to 70% of the cement may be replaced when concrete is used for mass concrete placements. 4.2.6.3. Option 3. Replace 35–50% of the cement with a combination of coal ash, slag cement, MFA, natural pozzolan, or at least 3% silica fume; however, no more than 10% may be silica fume. Up to 70% of the cement may be replaced when concrete is used for mass concrete placements. 4.2.6.4. Option 4. Use Type IP, IS, or IT cement as allowed in Table 8 for each class of concrete. When replacing blended cements with additional SCMs, the replacement limits in Option 3 will apply to the final cementitious mixture. When using fly ash or natural pozzolans not having a minimum dosage listed on the MPL in the final cementitious mixture, perform Option 8 testing. 4.2.6.5. Option 5. Option 5 is left intentionally blank. 4.2.6.6. Option 6. Use a lithium nitrate admixture at a minimum dosage determined by testing conducted in accordance with Tex-471-A. Before use of the mix, provide an annual certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, from a laboratory on the MPL, certified by the Materials and Tests Division (MTD) as being capable of testing in accordance with Tex-471-A. 4.2.6.7. Option 7. Ensure the total alkali contribution from the cement in the concrete does not exceed 3.5 lb. per cubic yard of concrete when using hydraulic cement not containing SCMs calculated as follows. ()() 100 cementin equivalent Ο2Na %yd. cu.per cement lb.yd.cu.peralkalilb.×= In the above calculation, use the maximum cement alkali content reported on the cement mill certificate. 4.2.6.8. Option 8. Use Table 10 when deviating from Options 1–3 or when required by the coal ash MPL. Perform required testing annually and submit results to the Engineer. Laboratories performing ASTM C1260, C1567, and C1293 testing must be listed on the Department’s MPL. Before use of the mix, provide a certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer demonstrating the proposed mixture conforms to the requirements of Table 10. 2024 Specifications 421 536 Provide a certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, when high-performance concrete (HPC) is required, and less than 20% of the cement is replaced with SCMs, demonstrating ASTM C1202 test results indicate the permeability of the concrete is less than 1,500 coulombs tested immediately after either of the following curing schedules.  Moisture cure specimens 56 days at 73°F.  Moisture cure specimens 7 days at 73°F followed by 21 days at 100°F. Table 10 Option 8 Testing and Mix Design Requirements Scenario ASTM C1260 Result Testing Requirements for Mix Design Materials or Prescriptive Mix Design Options1 Mix Design Fine Aggregate Mix Design Coarse Aggregate A >0.10% >0.10% Determine the dosage of SCMs needed to limit the 14-day expansion of each aggregate1 to <0.10% when tested individually in accordance with ASTM C1567. B ≤0.10% ≤0.10% Use the minimum replacement listed in the coal ash MPL, or When Option 8 is listed on the MPL, use at least 40% coal ash with a maximum CaO2 content of 25%, or Use any ternary combination that replaces 35–50% of cement. ≤0.10% ASTM C1293 1 yr. Expansion ≤0.04% Use a minimum of 20% of any coal ash; or Use any ternary combination that replaces 20–50% of cement. C ≤0.10% >0.10% Determine the dosage of SCMs needed to limit the 14-day expansion of course and intermediate1 aggregate to <0.10% when tested individually in accordance with ASTM C1567. D >0.10% ≤0.10% Use the minimum replacement listed in the coal ash MPL, or When Option 8 is listed in the MPL, use a minimum of 40% coal ash with a maximum CaO2 content of 25%, or Use any ternary combination that replaces 35% to 50% of cement. > 0.10% ASTM C1293 1 yr. Expansion ≤ 0.04% Determine the dosage of SCMs needed to limit the 14-day expansion of each fine aggregate to <0.10% when individually tested in accordance with ASTM C1567. 1. Intermediate size aggregates will fall under the requirements of mix design coarse aggregate. 2. Average the CaO content from the previous ten values as listed on the test certificate. 4.2.7. Optimized Aggregate Gradation (OAG) Concrete. The gradation requirements shown in Table 4 and Table 6 do not apply when OAG concrete is specified or used by the Contractor, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The fineness modulus for fine aggregate shown in Table 5 does not apply when OAG concrete is used. Establish the optimized aggregate gradation in accordance with Tex-470-A. Use at least 420 lb. per cubic yard of cementitious material when OAG concrete is used unless otherwise approved. Make necessary adjustments to individual aggregate stockpile proportions during OAG concrete production when the gradation deviates more than 2% from the optimized gradation requirements. 4.2.8. Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC). Provide SCC meeting the requirements shown in Table 11 when approved for use in precast concrete. Use concrete with a slump flow that can be placed without vibration and will not segregate or excessively bleed. Request approval to exceed the slump flow limits sufficiently in advance for proper evaluation by the Engineer. 2024 Specifications 421 537 Table 11 Mix Design Requirements for SCC Tests Test Method Acceptable Limits Slump flow for precast concrete ASTM C1611 22–271 T50, sec. ASTM C1611 2–7 VSI rating ASTM C1611 0 or 1 Passing ability, in. ASTM C1621 ≤2 Segregation column, % ASTM C1610 ≤10 Bleeding, % ASTM C232 ≤2.5 1. These slump flow limits are generally acceptable for most applications. However, slump flow limits may be adjusted during mix design approval process and when approved. 4.3. Concrete Trial Batches. Perform trial batches when required by the plans, or when previous satisfactory field data is not available. Submit previous satisfactory field data to the Engineer showing the proposed mix design conforms to specification requirements when trial batches are not required and before concrete is placed. Trial batch test results will be reported to the Contractor and the concrete supplier. Trial batches are not required for Class A, B, or E concrete unless establishing target values as described below. Perform trial batches for all self-consolidating concrete mix designs. Make all trial batches using the proposed ingredients in a mixer that is representative of the mixers to be used on the project when required. Make the batch size at least 50% of the mixer’s rated capacity. Alternatively, use an AASHTO-accredited laboratory to perform laboratory trial batches using all the proposed ingredients. Perform fresh concrete tests for air content and slump, and make, cure, and test strength specimens for compliance with specification requirements. Test at least one set of design strength specimens, consisting of two specimens per set, at 7-day, 28-day, and at least one additional age unless otherwise directed. Before placing, provide the Engineer the option of witnessing trial batches, including the testing of the concrete. If not provided this option, the Engineer may require additional trial batches, including testing, before the concrete is placed. Trial batches for precast concrete will be performed in accordance with Tex-703-I to show proposed mix design meets the requirements of the pertinent class of concrete, or Table 11 when SCC is used. Establish a compressive strength target value in accordance with Tex-427-A for each Class A, B, and E concrete. When changes are made to the type, brand, or source of aggregates, cement, SCM, water, or chemical admixtures, submit previous satisfactory field data, data from a new trial batch, or other evidence showing the change will not adversely affect the relevant properties of the concrete. Submit the data for approval before making changes to the mix design. A change in vendor does not necessarily constitute a change in materials or source. The Engineer may waive new trial batches when there is a prior record of satisfactory performance with the ingredients. During concrete production, dosage changes of chemical admixtures used in the trial batches will not require a re-evaluation of the mix design. The Contractor has the option of performing trial batches in conjunction with concrete placements except for SCC mixtures, when new trial batches are required during the course of the project. If the concrete fails to meet any requirement, the Engineer will determine acceptability and payment adjustments. Establishing target strength for Class A, B, and E concrete may be conducted during these placements. Establish the strength–maturity relationship in accordance with Tex-426-A when the maturity method is specified or permitted. When using the maturity method, any changes in any of the ingredients, including changes in proportions, will require the development of a new strength–maturity relationship for the mix. 4.3.1. Mix Design of Record. Once a trial batch or previously satisfactory field data substantiates the mix design, the proportions and mixing methods used become the mix design of record. Do not exceed mix design w/cm ratio. 2024 Specifications 421 538 4.4. Production Testing. 4.4.1. Aggregate Moisture Testing. Determine moisture content in accordance with Tex-409-A or Tex-425-A for coarse, intermediate, and fine aggregates at least twice per week, when there is an apparent change, or for new shipments of aggregate. When aggregate hoppers or storage bins are equipped with properly maintained electronic moisture probes for continuous moisture determination, moisture tests in accordance with Tex-409-A or Tex-425-A are not required. When producing SCC, and when aggregate hoppers or storage bins are not equipped with electronic moisture probes, determine the moisture content of the aggregates before producing the first concrete batch each day. Thereafter, determine the moisture content every 4 hr. or when there is an apparent change while SCC is being produced. 4.4.2. Aggregate Gradation Testing. Perform a sieve analysis in accordance with Tex-401-A on each stockpile used in the blend at least 1 day before producing OAG concrete. Perform sieve analysis on each stockpile after every 10,000 cu. yd. of Class P OAG concrete produced, and every 1,000 cu. yd. for all other structural-class concrete. Provide sieve analysis data to the Engineer. 4.5. Measurement of Materials. 4.5.1. Non-Volumetric Mixers. Measure aggregates by weight. Correct batch weight measurements for aggregate moisture content. Measure mixing water, consisting of water added to the batch, ice added to the batch, water occurring as surface moisture on the aggregates, and water introduced in the form of admixtures, by volume or weight. Measure ice by weight. Measure cement and SCMs in a hopper and on a separate scale from those used for other materials. When measuring by cumulative weight, measure the cement first and ensure the cement meets the cement tolerance shown in Table 12 before measuring the SCMs. Measure concrete chemical admixtures by weight or volume. Measure batch materials within the tolerances shown in Table 12. Table 12 Mix Design Batching Tolerances—Non-Volumetric Mixers Material Tolerance (%) Cement, wt. ˗1 to +3 SCM, wt. ˗1 to +3 Cement + SCM (cumulative weighing), wt. ˗1 to +3 Water, wt. or volume ±31 Fine aggregate, wt. ±2 Coarse aggregate, wt. ±2 Fine + coarse aggregate (cumulative weighing), wt. ±1 Chemical admixtures, wt. or volume ±3 1. Allowable deviation from target weight, not including water withheld or moisture in the aggregate. The Engineer will verify the w/cm ratio is within specified limits. Ensure the quantity measured, when measuring cementitious materials at less than 30% of scale capacity, is accurate to no less than the required amount and no more than 4% in excess. Ensure the cumulative quantity, when measuring aggregates in a cumulative weigh batcher at less than 30% of the scale capacity, is measured accurately to ±0.3% of scale capacity or ±3% of the required cumulative weight, whichever is less. Measure cement in number of bags under special circumstances when approved. Use the weights specified on the packaging. Weighing bags of cement is not required. Ensure fractional bags are not used except for small hand-mixed batches of approximately 5 cu. ft. or less and when an approved method of volumetric or weight measurement is used. 4.5.2. Volumetric Mixers. Provide an accurate method of measuring all ingredients by volume and calibrate equipment to assure correct measurement of materials within the specified tolerances. Base tolerances on volume-weight relationship established by calibration and measure the various ingredients within the tolerances shown in Table 13. Correct batch measurements for aggregate moisture content. 2024 Specifications 421 539 Table 13 Mix Design Batching Tolerances—Volumetric Mixers Material Tolerance Cement, wt. % 0 to +4 SCM, wt. % 0 to +4 Fine aggregate, wt. % ±2 Coarse aggregate, wt. % ±2 Admixtures, wt. or volume % ±3 Water, wt. or volume % ±1 4.6. Mixing and Delivering Concrete. 4.6.1. Mixing Concrete. Operate mixers and agitators within the limits of the rated capacity and speed of rotation for mixing and agitation as designated by the manufacturer of the equipment. Provide concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass with a satisfactory degree of uniformity when tested in accordance with Tex-472-A. Do not top-load new concrete onto returned concrete. Adjust mixing times and batching operations as necessary when the concrete contains silica fume to ensure the material is completely and uniformly dispersed in the mix. The dispersion of the silica fume within the mix will be verified by MTD using cylinders made from trial batches. Make necessary changes to the batching operations, if uniform dispersion is not achieved, until uniform and complete dispersion of the silica fume is achieved. Mix concrete by hand methods or in a small motor-driven mixer when permitted, for small placements of less than 2 cu. yd. For such placements, proportion the mix by volume or weight. 4.6.2. Delivering Concrete. Deliver concrete to the project in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and discharge the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Conduct testing in accordance with Tex-472-A when there is a reason to suspect the uniformity of concrete and as directed. Maintain concrete delivery and placement rates sufficient to prevent cold joints. Adding chemical admixtures or the portion of water withheld is permitted only at the jobsite, under the supervision of the Engineer, to adjust the slump or slump flow of the concrete. Do not add water or chemical admixtures to the batch after more than an amount needed to conduct slump testing has been discharged. Turn the drum or blades at least 30 additional revolutions at mixing speed to ensure thorough and uniform mixing of the concrete. When this water is added, do not exceed the approved mix design w/cm ratio. When truck mixers are equipped with automated water or chemical admixture measurement and slump or slump flow monitoring equipment, the addition of water or chemical admixtures during transit is allowed. Reports generated by this equipment must be submitted to the Engineer daily. Before unloading, furnish the delivery ticket for the batch of concrete containing the information required in accordance with ASTM C94. The Engineer will verify all required information is provided on the delivery tickets. The Engineer may suspend concrete operations until the corrective actions are implemented if delivery tickets do not provide the required information. The Engineer will verify the design w/cm ratio is not exceeded. An electronic ticket delivery system (e-ticketing) may be used instead of printed tickets. The use of e-ticketing will require written approval. At minimum, the system will:  provide electronic, real-time e-tickets meeting the requirements above;  automatically generate e-tickets using software and hardware fully integrated with the batch plant scales used to weigh the material; 2024 Specifications 421 540  be able to record all water and chemical admixture additions performed at the jobsite or in transit when allowed;  provide the ability to associate fresh concrete test results with each e-ticket;  be designed in such a way that data input cannot be altered by the Contractor or the Engineer;  provide the Engineer access to the e-ticketing data in real-time using a web-based or app-based system compatible with iOS; and  provide offline capabilities to prevent data loss if power or connectivity is lost. The Engineer may discontinue use of the e-ticketing and require printed tickets as needed if the e-ticketing system fails to meet the above requirements. Begin the discharge of concrete delivered in truck mixers within the times shown in Table 14. Concrete delivered after these times and concrete that has not begun to discharge within these times will be rejected. The discharge times shown in Table 14 may be extended provided slump loss testing is conducted in accordance with Tex-430-A to show concrete will maintain the minimum required slump for the requested discharge time extension. Extended discharge times will be allowed when the concrete temperature at time of discharge is no more than 10°F higher than the slump loss test concrete temperature. Table 14 Concrete Discharge Times for Truck Mixers Fresh Concrete Temperature, °F Max Time After Batching for Concrete Not Containing Type B or D Admixtures, min. Max Time After Batching for Concrete Containing Type B or D Admixtures,1 min. 90 and above 45 75 75 ≤T <90 60 90 T <75 90 120 1. Concrete must contain at least the minimum manufacturer’s recommended dosage of Type B or D admixture. 4.7. Placing, Finishing, and Curing Concrete. Place, finish, and cure concrete in conformance with the pertinent Items. 4.8. Sampling and Testing of Concrete. Unless otherwise specified, all fresh and hardened concrete is subject to testing as follows. 4.8.1. Certification of Testing Personnel. Contractor personnel performing testing must be either ACI-certified or qualified by a Department-recognized equivalent written and performance testing program for the tests being performed. Personnel performing these tests are subject to Department approval. Use of a commercial laboratory is permitted at the Contractor’s option. 4.8.2. Fresh Concrete. Provide safe access and assistance to the Engineer during sampling. Fresh concrete will be sampled for testing at the point of discharge from the delivery equipment or end of belt conveyors. 4.8.3. Testing Concrete. The Engineer, unless specified in other Items or shown on the plans, will test the fresh and hardened concrete in accordance with the following methods.  Slump. Tex-415-A  Air Content. Tex-414-A or Tex-416-A, only when air-entrained concrete is shown on the plans  Temperature. Tex-422-A  Making and Curing Strength Specimens. Tex-447-A  Compressive Strength. Tex-418-A  Flexural Strength. Tex-448-A  Maturity. Tex-426-A Flexural strength and maturity specimens will not be made unless specified in other Items or shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 421 541 Concrete with slump less than minimum required after all addition of water withheld will be rejected, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Concrete with slump exceeding maximum allowed may be used at the Contractor’s option. If used, Engineer will make, test, and evaluate strength specimens in accordance with Article 421.5., “Acceptance of Concrete.” Acceptance of concrete not meeting air content or temperature requirements will be determined by Engineer. Fresh concrete exhibiting segregation and excessive bleeding will be rejected. 4.8.3.1. Strength Specimen Handling. After strength test specimens are molded, protect and cure in conformance with pertinent test methods. When necessary, deliver Contractor-molded specimens to curing facilities, remove specimens from their molds, and place specimens in curing tanks within 24–48 hr. after molding, in conformance with pertinent test methods. The Engineer will deliver Department-molded specimens to curing facilities, remove specimens from their molds, and place specimens in curing tanks within 24–48 hr. after molding, in conformance with pertinent test methods. 5. ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE The Engineer will sample and test the fresh and hardened concrete for acceptance. The test results will be reported to the Contractor and the concrete supplier. Investigate the quality of the materials, the concrete production operations, and other possible problem areas to determine the cause for any concrete that fails to meet the required strengths as specified below. Take necessary actions to correct the problem, including redesign of the concrete mix. The Engineer may suspend all concrete operations under the pertinent Items if the Contractor is unable to Identify, document, and correct the cause of the low strengths in a timely manner. Resume concrete operations only after obtaining approval for any proposed corrective actions. Concrete failing to meet the required strength as specified below will be evaluated in accordance with Article 421.6., “Measurement and Payment.” 5.1. Structural Class of Concrete. For concrete classes identified as structural concrete shown in Table 8, the Engineer will make and test 7-day and 28-day specimens, and, if necessary, 56-day specimens. The Engineer will base acceptance on attaining the design strength shown in Table 8 or design strength shown on the plans. 5.2. Class P and Class High Early Strength (HES). The Engineer will base acceptance in accordance with Item 360 and Item 361, “Repair of Concrete Pavement.” 5.3. All Other Classes of Concrete. For concrete classes not identified as structural concrete in Table 8, the Engineer will make and test 7-day specimens. The Engineer will base acceptance on attaining design strength or attaining the 7-day target value established in accordance with Tex-427-A. 6. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. The following procedure will be used to evaluate concrete where one or more project acceptance test specimens fail to meet the required design strength specified in this Item or shown on the plans.  The concrete for a given placement will be considered structurally adequate and accepted at full price if the average of 28-day or 56-day set of specimens made at the time of placement meets the required design strength, provided no single specimen test result is less than 85% of the required design strength.  The Engineer will perform a structural review of the concrete to determine its adequacy to remain in service if the average 28-day or 56-day set of specimens made at the time of placement is less than the required design strength or if any single specimen test result is less than 85% of the required design strength. If the concrete is determined to be structurally adequate, the Engineer will determine the limits of the payment adjustment using the formula below. 2024 Specifications 421 542  If the in situ concrete strength is needed for the structural review, take cores at locations designated by the Engineer in accordance with Tex-424-A. The Engineer will test the cores. The coring and testing will be at the Contractor’s expense.  If all the tested cores meet the required design strength, the concrete will be paid for at full price.  If any of the tested cores do not meet the required design strength, but the average strength attained is determined to be structurally adequate, the Engineer will determine the limits of the payment adjustment using the following formula.      −  +  −=32.569.1137.5 2 s a s ap S S S SBA where: A = Amount to be paid per unit of measure for the entire placement in question. Sa = Actual average strength from cylinders or cores. Use values from cores, if taken. Ss = Minimum required strength (specified). Bp = Unit bid price.  If the structural review determines the concrete is not adequate to remain in service, the Engineer will determine the limits of the concrete to be removed.  The decision to reject structurally inadequate concrete or to apply the payment adjustment factor will be made no later than 7 days after 28-day or 56-day design strength specimens, or cores, if taken, are tested. 2024 Specifications 432 605 Item 432 Riprap 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and place concrete, stone, cement-stabilized, or special riprap. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 431, “Pneumatically Placed Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete”  DMS-6200, “Filter Fabric” 2.1. Concrete Riprap. Use Class B concrete unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.2. Pneumatically Placed Concrete Riprap. Use Class II concrete that meets the requirements of Item 431, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.3. Stone Riprap. Use durable natural stone with a bulk specific gravity of at least 2.50 as determined in accordance with Tex-403-A, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide stone that, when tested in accordance with Tex-411-A, has weight loss of no more than 18% after five cycles of magnesium sulfate solution. Perform a size verification test on the first 5,000 sq. yd. of finished riprap stone for all types of stone riprap at a location determined by the Engineer. Test the riprap stone in accordance with ASTM D5519, Test Method D, unless otherwise directed. Additional tests may be required. Do not place additional riprap until the initial 5,000 sq. yd. of riprap has been approved. Provide grout or mortar in accordance with Item 421 when specified. Provide grout with a consistency that will flow into and fill all voids. Provide filter fabric in accordance with DMS-6200. Provide Type 2 filter fabric for protection stone riprap, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide Type 2 filter fabric for Type R, F, or Common stone riprap when shown on the plans. 2.3.1. Type R. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb., with at least 50% of the stones heavier than 100 lb. 2.3.2. Type F. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb., with at least 40% of the stones heavier than 100 lb. Use stones with at least one broad flat surface. 2.3.3. Common. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb. Use stones that are at least 3 in. in their least dimension. Use stones that are at least twice as wide as they are thick. When shown on the plans or approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved sources. Cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces before placement of each piece of broken concrete. 2.3.4. Protection. Use boulders or quarried rock that meets the gradation requirements shown in Table 1. Both the width and the thickness of each piece of riprap must be at least 1/3 of the length. When shown on the plans or as approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved 2024 Specifications 432 606 sources. Cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces before placement of each piece of broken concrete. Determine gradation of the finished, in-place, riprap stone under the direct supervision of the Engineer in accordance with ASTM D5519, Test Method D, unless otherwise directed. Table 1 In-Place Protection Riprap Gradation Requirements Nominal Size Maximum Weight (lb.) 90% Weight1 (lb.) 50% Weight2 (lb.) Minimum 8% Weight3 (lb.) 12 in. 200 80–180 30–75 3 15 in. 320 170–300 60–165 20 18 in. 530 290–475 105–220 22 21 in. 800 460–720 175–300 25 24 in. 1,000 550–850 200–325 30 30 in. 2,600 1,150–2,250 400–900 40 36 in. 4,400 2,200–3,900 800–1,700 140 1. The 90% weight is the stone weight heavier than 90% of the individual riprap stones, and lighter than 10% of individual riprap stones. 2. The 50% weight is the stone weight heavier than 50% of individual riprap stones, and lighter than 50% of individual riprap stones. 3. The 8% weight is the stone weight heavier than 8% of individual riprap stones, and lighter than 92% of individual riprap stones. The Engineer may require in-place verification of the stone gradation. Determine the in-place gradation of the riprap stone by taking linear transects along the riprap and measuring the intermediate axis of the stone at select intervals. Place a tape measure along the riprap and determine the intermediate axis size of the stone at 2-ft. intervals. Measure at least 100 stones, either in a single transect or in multiple transects, then follow ASTM D5519, Test Method D to determine the gradation, unless otherwise directed. Table 2 is a guide for comparing the stone size in inches to the stone weight shown in Table 1. Table 2 Protection Riprap Stone Size1 Nominal Size Dmax (in.) D90 (in.) D50 (in.) D8 (in.) 12 in. 13.76 10.14–13.29 7.31–9.92 3.39 15 in. 16.10 13.04–15.75 9.21–12.91 6.39 18 in. 19.04 15.58–18.36 11.10–14.21 6.59 21 in. 21.85 18.17–21.09 13.16–15.75 6.88 24 in. 23.53 19.28–22.29 13.76–16.18 7.31 30 in. 32.36 24.65–30.84 17.34–22.72 8.05 36 in. 38.56 30.61–37.04 21.85–28.09 12.22 1. Based on a specific gravity of 2.5 and using the following equation for the intermediate axis diameter: D = (12 in./ft.)*{(W)/(Gs*62.4*0.85)}1/3 where: D = intermediate axis diameter (in.) W = weight of stone (lb.) Gs = Specific gravity of stone Note—If the specific gravity of the stone is greater than 2.5, then the above equation can be used to determine the appropriate size using the actual specific gravity. When bedding is required, provide bedding stone that, in place, meets the gradation requirements shown in Table 3 or as otherwise shown on the plans. If the nominal size of the protection riprap is less than or equal to 30 in., verify the gradation of the bedding material in accordance with Tex-401-A unless otherwise directed. If the nominal size of the protection riprap is equal to 36 in., verify the gradation of the bedding material in accordance with ASTM D5519, Test Method D, unless otherwise directed. 2024 Specifications 432 607 Table 3 Protection Riprap Bedding Material Gradation Requirements Nominal Size <36 in. Nominal Size = 36 in. Sieve Size (Sq. Mesh) % by Weight Passing Sieve Size (Sq. Mesh) % by Weight Passing 3” 100 6” 100 1-1/2” 50–80 4” 35–75 3/4” 20–60 3” 45–60 #4 0–15 2” 0–15 #10 0–5 – – 2.4. Cement-Stabilized Riprap. Provide aggregate that meets the requirements of Item 247, “Flexible Base,” for the type and grade shown on the plans. Use cement-stabilized riprap with 7% hydraulic cement by dry weight of the aggregate unless otherwise directed. 2.5. Special Riprap. Furnish materials for special riprap as shown on the plans. 3. CONSTRUCTION Dress slopes and protected areas to the line and grade shown on the plans before the placement of riprap. Place riprap and toe walls as shown on the plans or as directed. 3.1. Concrete Riprap. Reinforce concrete riprap with 6 × 6 – W2.9 × W2.9 welded wire fabric or with No. 3 or No. 4 reinforcing bars spaced at a maximum of 18 in. in each direction unless otherwise shown on the plans. Alternative styles of welded wire fabric that provide at least 0.058 sq. in. of steel per foot in both directions may be used if approved. A combination of welded wire fabric and reinforcing bars may be provided when both are permitted. Provide a minimum 6-in. lap at all splices. Provide horizontal cover of at least 1 in. and no more than 3 in. at the edge of the riprap. Place the first parallel bar no more than 6 in. from the edge of concrete. Use approved supports to hold the reinforcement approximately equidistant from the top and bottom surface of the slab. Adjust reinforcement during concrete placement to maintain correct position. Sprinkle or sprinkle and consolidate the subgrade before the concrete is placed as directed. All surfaces must be moist when concrete is placed. Compact and shape the concrete once it has been placed to conform to the dimensions shown on the plans. Finish the surface with a wood float after it has set sufficiently to avoid slumping to secure a smooth surface or broom finish as approved. Cure the riprap immediately after the finishing operation in accordance with Item 420. 3.2. Stone Riprap. Provide the following types of stone riprap when shown on the plans.  Dry Riprap. Stone riprap with voids filled with only spalls or small stones.  Grouted Riprap. Type R, F, or Common stone riprap with voids grouted after all the stones are in place.  Mortared Riprap. Type F stone riprap laid and mortared as each stone is placed. Use spalls and small stones lighter than 25 lb. to fill open joints and voids in stone riprap, and place to a tight fit. Place mortar or grout only when the air temperature is above 35°F. Protect work from rapid drying for at least 3 days after placement. For slope or wave protection, if filter fabric is required, place filter fabric with its long axis running up and down the slope unless otherwise approved. For stream bank protection, if filter fabric is required, place the filter fabric with its long axis parallel to the centerline of the channel unless otherwise approved. Overlap the uphill or upstream sheet over the downhill or downstream sheet. For above water applications, ensure 2024 Specifications 432 608 adjacent sheets of filter fabric have a minimum overlap of 2 ft. in each direction. Secure filter fabric in place with nails or pins. Use 12-in. long, 3/16-in. diameter nails with 1.5-in. washers, or U-shaped steel pins with each leg at least 9 in. long. Space nails or pins at a maximum of 10 ft. in each direction and 5 ft. along the seams. Along the seams, place nails or pins through both strips of filter fabric at approximately the midpoint of the overlap. Place additional nails or pins as necessary to hold the filter fabric in position. Alternative anchorage and spacing may be used when approved. Keep the fabric material free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles, or creases. Methods for underwater filter placement must be approved before installation. For underwater placement, filter fabric should be unrolled in the direction of flow, overlapped at least 3 ft., and secured with sandbags, rocks, nails, or pins to prevent distortion. To prevent segregation and transport, underwater installation of a granular filter must be by clamshell bucket or tremie, with the granular material released on or very near the bed, unless otherwise approved. Underwater placement of a granular filter is permitted only if the water velocity is less than 5 ft. per second unless otherwise approved. Any defects, tears, holes, flaws, or damage to filter fabric may be cause for rejection. Repair torn or punctured filter fabric by placing an additional layer of filter fabric over the damaged area, ensuring a minimum overlap of 3 ft. beyond the damaged area in all directions, and securing the filter fabric in place with pins or nails. Store filter fabric out of direct sunlight and cover the filter fabric as soon as possible after placement, but within 3 days. 3.2.1. Type R. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 1 on the Stone Riprap Standard and as shown on the plans. Place stones in a single layer with close joints so most of their weight is carried by the earth and not the adjacent stones. Place the upright axis of the stones at an angle of approximately 90° to the embankment slope. Place each course from the bottom of the embankment upward with the larger stones in the lower courses. Fill open joints between stones with spalls. Place stones to create a uniform finished top surface. Do not exceed a 6-in. variation between the tops of adjacent stones. Replace, embed deeper, or chip away stones that project more than the allowable amount above the finished surface. Prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones when the plans require Type R stone riprap to be grouted. Wet the stones thoroughly after they are in place, fill the spaces between the stones with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface of the riprap using a stiff broom after grouting. 3.2.2. Type F. 3.2.2.1. Dry Placement. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2 on the Stone Riprap Standard. Set the flat surface on a prepared horizontal earth bed and overlap the underlying course to secure a lapped surface. Place the large stones first, roughly arranged in close contact. Fill the spaces between the large stones with suitably sized stones placed to leave the surface evenly stepped and conforming to the contour required. Place stone to drain water down the face of the slope. 3.2.2.2. Grouting. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 3 on the Stone Riprap Standard. Size, shape, and lay large flat-surfaced stones to produce an even surface with minimal voids. Place stones with the flat surface facing upward parallel to the slope. Place the largest stones near the base of the slope. Fill spaces between the larger stones with stones of suitable size, leaving the surface smooth, tight, and conforming to the contour required. Place the stones to create a plane surface with a variation no more than 6 in. in 10 ft. from true plane. Provide the same degree of accuracy for warped and curved surfaces. Prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. Wet the stones thoroughly after they are in place, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface using a stiff broom after grouting. 3.2.2.3. Mortaring. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2 on the Stone Riprap Standard. Lap courses as described for dry placement. Wet the stones thoroughly before placing mortar. Bed the larger stones in fresh mortar as they are being placed and shove adjacent stones into contact with one another. Spread excess mortar forced out during placement of the stones uniformly over them to fill all voids completely. Point up all joints roughly either with flush joints or shallow, smooth-raked joints as directed. 2024 Specifications 432 609 3.2.3. Common. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 4 on the Stone Riprap Standard. Place stones on a bed excavated for the base course. Bed the base course of stone well into the ground with the edges in contact. Bed and place each succeeding course in even contact with the preceding course. Use spalls and small stones to fill any open joints and voids in the riprap. Ensure the finished surface presents an even, tight surface, true to the line and grades of the typical sections. Prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones when the plans require grouting common stone riprap. Wet the stones thoroughly after they are in place, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface using a stiff broom after grouting. 3.2.4. Protection. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 5 on the Stone Riprap Standard. Place riprap stone on the slopes within the limits shown on the plans. Place stone for riprap on the filter fabric to produce a reasonably well-graded mass of riprap with the minimum practicable percentage of voids. Place riprap stone on top of the filter fabric, always starting at the bottom and working toward the top of any slope. Construct the riprap to the lines and grades shown on the plans or staked in the field. A tolerance of +6 in. and -0 in. from the slope line and grades shown on the plans is allowed in the finished surface of the riprap. Place riprap to its full thickness in a single operation. Avoid displacing the filter fabric. Ensure the entire mass of stones in its final position is free of objectionable pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones. Do not place riprap in layers, and do not place it by dumping it into chutes, dumping it from the top of the slope, pushing it from the top of the slope, or any method likely to cause segregation of the various sizes. Obtain the desired distribution of the various sizes of stones throughout the mass by selective loading of material at the quarry or other source, or by other approved methods of placement that will produce the specified results. Rearrange individual stones using mechanical equipment or by hand if necessary to obtain a reasonably well-graded distribution of stone sizes. If required, use the bedding thickness shown on the plans and place stone for riprap on the bedding material to produce a reasonably well-graded mass of riprap with the minimum practicable percentage of voids. 3.3. Pneumatically Placed Concrete Riprap, Class II. Meet the requirements of Item 431. Provide reinforcement as shown on the plans and in accordance with Item 440. Support reinforcement with approved supports throughout placement of concrete. Give the surface a wood-float finish or a gun finish as directed. Cure the riprap with membrane-curing compound immediately after the finishing operation in accordance with Item 420. 3.4. Cement-Stabilized Riprap. Follow the requirements of the plans and the provisions for concrete riprap except when reinforcement is not required. The Engineer will approve the design and mixing of the cement-stabilized riprap. 3.5. Special Riprap. Construct special riprap as shown on the plans. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the cubic yard of material complete in place. Volume will be computed based on the measured area in place and the thickness and toe wall width shown on the plans. If required on the plans, the pay quantity of the bedding material for stone riprap for protection to be paid for will be measured by the cubic yard as computed from the measured area in place and the bedding thickness shown on the plans. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Riprap” of the type, nominal size, and void-filling technique (dry, grout, or mortar) specified, as applicable. This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, and placing riprap and for filter fabric, expansion joint material, concrete and reinforcing steel, grout and mortar, scales, test weights, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 432 610 Payment for excavation of toe wall trenches, for all necessary excavation below natural ground or bottom of excavated channel, and for shaping of slopes for riprap will be included in the unit price bid per cubic yard of riprap. When bedding is required for protection stone riprap, payment will be made at the unit price bid for “Bedding Material” of the thickness specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, placing, and maintaining the stone bedding material until placement of the riprap cover is completed and accepted; excavation required for placement of bedding material; and equipment, scales, test weights, labor, tools, and incidentals. No payment will be made for excess thickness of bedding or for material required to replace embankment material lost by rain wash, wind erosion, or otherwise. 2024 Specifications 438 620 Item 438 Cleaning and Sealing Joints 1. DESCRIPTION Clean and seal joints in new or existing rigid concrete pavements and bridge decks. Resize joints in rigid concrete pavements and approach slabs as shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS Use sealants of the class shown on the plans that meet the requirements of DMS-6310, “Joint Sealants and Fillers,” except as modified herein. Use primers recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant if required. When a foam-type joint seal is specified, provide one of the listed systems shown on the plans with material meeting the requirements of Section 454.3.4., “Foam-Type Joint Seal.” Provide backer rods that are circular and are 25% larger than the joint opening. Use backer rods compatible with the sealant that do not react with or bond to the sealant. 3. EQUIPMENT Use equipment that meets sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. Use air compressors equipped with appropriate filters for removing oil and water from the air. Provide concrete saws with sufficient capacity to cut full depth of concrete pavement, approach slabs, and bridge decks. 4. CONSTRUCTION Submit information from the sealant manufacturer showing recommended equipment and installation procedures before starting work. All equipment and procedures will be subject to approval. If the equipment causes damage to dowels, reinforcing steel, concrete, base, sub-base, or subgrade, repair the damage and change the procedure and equipment to prevent further damage. When foam-type joint seal is shown on the plans, provide a technician associated with the joint seal manufacturer for training and installation of the initial joint. Provide written instructions from the manufacturer for joint seal installation. Measure all joint openings and size the width of joint seal in conformance with the manufacturer’s specifications. 4.1. Preparation. Remove all debris, dirt, dust, saw cuttings, and other foreign material from joint by an approved method. Collect and dispose of all the removed material. Remove existing preformed bituminous fiber board material or other spacer material the full depth of the joint along with all other debris in the joint opening. Resize the joint sealant space by sawing to the width and depth shown on the plans to accommodate the type of sealant specified. Clean debris full depth of the joint, including from the diaphragm windows below the joints on concrete slab-and-girder (pan girder) and tee-beam bridges. Abrasive-blast clean the vertical faces of joints armored with steel to remove all visible rust, paint, mill scale, and other forms of contamination, leaving a white metal appearance. Clean concrete and other surfaces by method approved and in conformance with the manufacturer’s specifications before placing sealant. Air blast the joint after cleaning to remove all dust. 2024 Specifications 438 621 Saw-cut concrete pavement and concrete approach slab full depth to provide joint opening as shown on the plans and as directed. Clean all debris out of the joint full depth of concrete pavement. 4.2. Sealing. Place the sealant in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Apply the primer, when required, at the specified rate and time interval before applying the sealant. Apply the sealant to dry joint surfaces unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Tool any sealant material that is not self-leveling to force the sealant against the joint surfaces. Place approved support spacers into joints as shown on the plans for concrete pavement. Place a backer rod in the joint opening to prevent the sealant from flowing through the joint and to hold the sealant at its required elevation, unless directed otherwise. Set the top of the sealant and thickness of sealant as shown on the plans. Do not place sealant in an expansion-type joint if surface temperature is below 55°F or above 90°F. 5. MEASUREMENT When shown on the plans to be a pay item, this Item will be measured by the foot of sealant placed. 6. PAYMENT Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to bid items of the Contract. When shown as a pay item, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cleaning and Sealing Existing Joints”; “Cleaning and Sealing Joints” of the class, if specified; “Cleaning and Sealing Joints (Foam)”; “Cleaning Existing Joints”; and “Resizing and Sealing Joints.” This price is full compensation for furnishing all materials; sawing, routing, and cleaning the joint; installation of joint sealant; disposing of debris; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 440 636 Item 440 Reinforcement for Concrete 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and place reinforcement of the type, size, and details shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS Use deformed steel bar reinforcement unless otherwise specified or allowed. 2.1. Approved Mills. Before furnishing steel, producing mills of reinforcing steel for the Department must be pre-approved in accordance with DMS-7320, “Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Production Mills,” by the Materials and Tests Division. The Department’s MPL includes approved producing mills. Reinforcing steel obtained from unapproved sources will not be accepted. 2.2. Deformed Steel Bar Reinforcement. Provide deformed reinforcing steel conforming to one of the following:  ASTM A615, Grade 60 or 80;  ASTM A996, Type A, Grade 60;  ASTM A996, Type R, Grade 60, permitted in concrete pavement only (Furnish ASTM A996, Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them. Bend tests are not required.); or  ASTM A706, Grade 60 or 80. Provide the grade of reinforcing steel shown on the plans. Provide Grade 60 if no grade is shown. The nominal size, area, and weight of reinforcing steel bars this Item covers are shown in Table 1. Table 1 Size, Area, and Weight of Reinforcing Steel Bars Bar Size Number (in.) Diameter (in.) Area (sq. in.) Weight per Foot (lb.) 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.650 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 2.3. Smooth Steel Bar Reinforcement. Provide steel conforming to ASTM A615 or meet the physical requirements of ASTM A36 for smooth bars that are larger than No. 3. Designate smooth bars by size number up to No. 4 and by diameter in inches above No. 4. 2.4. Spiral Reinforcement. Provide bars or wire for spiral reinforcement of the grade and minimum size or gauge shown on the plans. Provide smooth or deformed wire conforming to ASTM A1064. Provide bars conforming to ASTM A615; ASTM A996, Type A; or ASTM A675, Grade 80, meeting dimensional requirements of ASTM A615. 2024 Specifications 440 637 2.5. Weldable Reinforcing Steel. Provide reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A706 or with a maximum carbon equivalent (C.E.) of 0.55% if welding of reinforcing steel is required or desired. Provide a report showing the percentages of elements necessary to establish C.E. for reinforcing steel that does not meet ASTM A706, to be structurally welded. These requirements do not pertain to miscellaneous welds on reinforcing steel as defined in Section 448.4.2.1.1., “Miscellaneous Welding Applications.” Calculate C.E. using the following formula: Do not weld stainless reinforcing steel without permission from the Engineer. Provide stainless reinforcing steel suitable for welding, if required, and submit welding procedures and electrodes to the Engineer for approval. All welding operations must be performed before any required hot-dip galvanizing. 2.6. Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR). Provide WWR conforming to ASTM A1064. Observe the relations shown in Table 2 among size number, diameter in inches, and area when ordering wire by size numbers, unless otherwise specified. Precede the size number for deformed wire with “D” and for smooth wire with “W.” Designate WWR as shown in the following example: 6 × 12 – W16 × W8 (indicating 6-in. longitudinal wire spacing and 12-in. transverse wire spacing with smooth No. 16 wire longitudinally and smooth No. 8 wire transversely). Table 2 Wire Size Number, Diameter, and Area Size No. (in.) Diameter (in.) Area (sq. in.) 31 0.628 0.310 30 0.618 0.300 28 0.597 0.280 26 0.575 0.260 24 0.553 0.240 22 0.529 0.220 20 0.505 0.200 18 0.479 0.180 16 0.451 0.160 14 0.422 0.140 12 0.391 0.120 10 0.357 0.100 8 0.319 0.080 7 0.299 0.070 6 0.276 0.060 5.5 0.265 0.055 5 0.252 0.050 4.5 0.239 0.045 4 0.226 0.040 3.5 0.211 0.035 2.9 0.192 0.029 2.5 0.178 0.025 2 0.160 0.020 1.4 0.134 0.014 1.2 0.124 0.012 0.5 0.080 0.005 Note—Size numbers (in.) are the nominal cross-sectional area of the wire in hundredths of a square inch. Fractional sizes between the sizes listed above are also available and acceptable for use. 6 %%..MnCEC+= 2024 Specifications 440 638 2.7. Welded Deformed Bar Mat Reinforcement. Provide welded deformed bar mats in accordance with ASTM A184 except as otherwise noted in this Specification. Fabricate welded bar mats from deformed steel bars in accordance with ASTM A706 by securely connecting every intersection with a process of electrical resistance welding that employs the principle of fusion combined with pressure. The bars must be assembled by automatic machines or by other suitable mechanical means that will assure accurate spacing and alignment of all bars of the finished product 2.8. Epoxy Coating. Provide epoxy-coated reinforcing steel as shown on the plans. Before furnishing epoxy-coated reinforcing steel, an epoxy applicator must be pre-approved in accordance with DMS-7330, “Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators.” The Department’s MPL includes approved applicators. Furnish epoxy-coated reinforcing steel meeting the requirements in Table 3. Table 3 Epoxy Coating Requirements for Reinforcing Steel Material Specification Bar ASTM A775 or A934 Wire or WWR ASTM A884 Class A or B Mechanical couplers As shown on the plans Hardware As shown on the plans Use epoxy coating material and coating repair material that complies with DMS-8130, “Epoxy Powder Coating for Reinforcing Steel.” Patch no more than 1/4-in. total length in any foot at the applicator’s plant. Maintain identification of all reinforcing steel throughout the coating and fabrication process and until delivery to the project site. Furnish one copy of a written certification verifying the epoxy-coated reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Item and one copy of the manufacturer’s control tests. 2.9. Mechanical Couplers. Use couplers of the type specified in DMS-4510, “Mechanical Couplers for Reinforcing Steel,” Article 4510.6.1, “General Requirements,” when mechanical splices in reinforcing steel bars are shown on the plans. Furnish only couplers pre-qualified in accordance with DMS-4510. Ensure sleeve-wedge type couplers are not used on coated reinforcing. Sample mechanical couplers in accordance with Tex-743-I for testing before use on individual projects. Test the mechanical couplers for every project in which mechanical couplers are used in accordance with Tex-744-I. Furnish couplers only at locations shown on the plans. Furnish couplers for stainless reinforcing steel with the same alloy designation as the reinforcing steel. Provide hot-dip or mechanically galvanized couplers when splicing galvanized reinforcing steel or CGR. 2.10. Fibers. Supply fibers conforming to DMS-4550, “Fibers for Concrete,” at the minimum dosage listed in the Department’s MPL, when shown on the plans. Use non-metallic fibers when shown on the plans. 2.11. Stainless Reinforcing Steel. Provide deformed steel bars of the types shown in Table 4 and conforming to ASTM A955, Grade 60 or higher when stainless reinforcing steel is required on the plans. Table 4 Acceptable Types of Deformed Stainless Steel Bar Universal Numbering System designation S31653 S31803 S24100 S32304 AISI type 316LN 2205 XM-28 2304 2.12. Low-Carbon and Low-Chromium Reinforcing Steel. Provide deformed steel bars conforming to ASTM A1035, Grade 100, Type CS when low carbon and low chromium reinforcing steel is required on the plans. Type CM will be permitted only if specifically allowed as shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 440 639 2.13. Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polymer (GFRP) Bars. For reinforced concrete bridge decks, provide bars conforming to ASTM D7957/D7957M when GFRP bars are required on the plans. Provide GFRP bars with a minimum modulus of elasticity of 7,500 ksi when GFRP bars are required on the plans. Provide sample certification demonstrating the GFRP bar supplier has produced bar that meets the material specifications 2 mo. before fabrication. Furnish certification upon shipment that the GFRP bar supplied meets these requirements. 2.14. Galvanized Reinforcement. Provide galvanized reinforcing steel conforming to one of the following as shown on the plans:  zinc-coated, hot-dip galvanized Class I or II steel reinforcement conforming to ASTM A767, Grade 60 or 80; or  continuously hot-dip galvanized reinforcement (CGR) conforming to ASTM A1094 steel reinforcement, Grade 60 or 80. 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Bending. Fabricate reinforcing steel bars in accordance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice to the shapes and dimensions shown on the plans. Fabricate in the shop if possible. Field-fabricate, if permitted, using an approved method. Replace improperly fabricated, damaged, or broken bars at no additional expense to the Department. Repair damaged or broken bars embedded in a previous concrete placement using an approved method. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d), must not be less than that shown in Table 5. Table 5 Minimum Inside Diameter of Bar Bends Bend Bar Size No. (in.) Diameter Bends of 90° and greater in stirrups, ties, and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend 3, 4, 5 4d1 6, 7, 8 6d Bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above 3–8 6d 9, 10, 11 8d 14, 18 10d2 1. For Grade 80 bars, minimum finished diameter is 5.0db. 2. Do not bend bars larger than No. 14 with grade designation of Grade 80 or higher Bend-test representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM specification where bending No. 14 or No. 18 Grade 60 bars is required. Make the required 90° bend around a pin with a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Bend stainless reinforcing steel in accordance with ASTM A955. Do not bend hot-dip galvanized reinforcement. Only minor positioning adjustments are permitted. Bending CGR is permitted after galvanizing. 3.2. Tolerances. Fabrication tolerances for bars are shown in Figure 1. 2024 Specifications 440 640 Figure 1 Fabrication Tolerances for Bars 3.3. Storage. Store reinforcement above the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, and protect it from damage and deterioration. Ensure reinforcement is free of dirt, paint, grease, oil, and other foreign materials when it is placed in the work. Use reinforcement free of defects such as cracks and delaminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities, or mill scale will not be cause for rejection if the minimum cross-sectional area of a hand wire-brushed specimen meets the requirements for the size of steel specified. Do not allow stainless reinforcing steel to be in direct contact with uncoated reinforcing steel, or with galvanized reinforcing steel. This does not apply to stainless steel wires and ties. Store stainless reinforcing steel separately, off the ground on wooden supports. 3.4. Splices. Lap-splice, weld-splice, or mechanically splice bars as shown on the plans. Additional splices not shown on the plans will require approval. Splices not shown on the plans will be permitted in slabs no more than 15 in. in thickness, columns, walls, and parapets. Do not splice bars less than 30 ft. in plan length unless otherwise approved. For bars exceeding 30 ft. in plan length, the distance center-to-center of splices must be at least 30 ft. minus one splice length, with no more than one individual bar length less than 10 ft. Make lap splices not shown on the plans, but otherwise permitted, in accordance with Table 6. Maintain the specified concrete cover and spacing at splices, and place the lap-spliced bars in contact, securely tied together. Table 6 Minimum Lap Requirements for Steel Bar Sizes Through No. 11 Bar Size No. (in.) Uncoated Lap Length Coated Lap Length 3 1 ft. 4 in. 1 ft. 7 in. 4 1 ft. 10 in. 2 ft. 8 in. 5 2 ft. 8 in. 4 ft. 0 in. 6 3 ft. 8 in. 5 ft. 6 in. 7 4 ft. 10 in. 7 ft. 2 in. 8 6 ft. 0 in. 9 ft. 0 in. 9 7 ft. 4 in. 11 ft. 0 in. 10 8 ft. 11 in. 13 ft. 4 in. 11 10 ft. 6 in. 15 ft. 9 in. 2024 Specifications 440 641 Do not lap No. 14 or No. 18 bars. Lap spiral steel at least one full turn. Splice WWR using a lap length that includes the overlap of at least two cross wires plus 2 in. on each sheet or roll. Splices using bars that develop equivalent strength and are lapped in accordance with Table 6 are permitted. Lap the existing longitudinal bars with the new bars as shown in Table 6 for box culvert extensions with less than 1 ft. of fill. Lap at least 1 ft. 0 in. for extensions with more than 1 ft. of fill. Ensure welded splices conform to the requirements shown on the plans and Item 448, “Structural Field Welding.” Field-prepare ends of reinforcing bars if they will be butt-welded. Delivered bars must be long enough to permit weld preparation. Install mechanical coupling devices in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations at locations shown on the plans. Protect threaded male or female connections, and ensure the threaded connections are clean when making the connection. Do not repair damaged threads. Mechanical coupler alternate equivalent strength arrangements, to be accomplished by substituting larger bar sizes or more bars, will be considered if approved in writing before fabrication of the systems. 3.5. Placing. Place reinforcement as near as possible to the position shown on the plans. Do not vary bars from plan placement by more than 1/12 of the spacing between bars in the plane of the bar parallel to the nearest surface of concrete. Do not vary bars from plan placement by more than 1/4 in. in the plane of the bar perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete. Provide a minimum 1-in. clear cover of concrete to the nearest surface of bar unless otherwise shown on the plans. For bridge slabs, the clear cover tolerance for the top mat of reinforcement is -0, +1/2 in. Locate the reinforcement accurately in the forms and hold it firmly in place before and during concrete placement by means of bar supports that are adequate in strength and number to prevent displacement and keep the reinforcement at the proper distance from the forms. Provide bar supports in accordance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use Class 1 supports, approved plastic bar supports, precast mortar, or concrete blocks when supports are in contact with removable or stay-in-place forms. Use Class 3 supports in slab overlays on concrete panels or on existing concrete slabs. Bar supports in contact with soil or subgrade must be approved. Use Class 1A supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. Use Class 1 or Class 1A supports with CGR. Provide epoxy- or plastic-coated tie wires and clips for use with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. Use mortar or concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi for precast bar supports. Provide a suitable tie wire in each block for anchoring to the bar. Place individual bar supports in rows at 4-ft. maximum spacing in each direction. Place continuous type bar supports at 4-ft. maximum spacing. Use continuous bar supports with permanent metal deck forms. The exposure of the ends of longitudinals, stirrups, and spacers used to position the reinforcement in concrete pipe and storm drains is not cause for rejection. Tie reinforcement for bridge slabs and top slabs of direct traffic culverts at all intersections, except tie only alternate intersections where spacing is less than 1 ft. in each direction. Tie the bars at enough intersections to provide a rigid cage of reinforcement for reinforcement cages for other structural members. Fasten mats of WWR securely at the ends and edges. 2024 Specifications 440 642 Clean mortar, mud, dirt, debris, oil, and other foreign material from the reinforcement before concrete placement. Do not place concrete until authorized. Stop placement until corrective measures are taken if reinforcement is not adequately supported or tied to resist settlement, reinforcement is floating upward, truss bars are overturning, or movement is detected in any direction during concrete placement. 3.6. Handling, Placing, and Repairing Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel. 3.6.1. Handling. Provide systems for handling coated reinforcing steel with padded contact areas. Pad bundling bands or use suitable banding to prevent damage to the coating. Lift bundles of coated reinforcement using a strongback, a spreader bar, multiple supports, or a platform bridge. Transport the bundled reinforcement carefully and store it on protective cribbing. Do not drop or drag the coated reinforcement. 3.6.2. Placing. Do not flame-cut coated reinforcement. Saw- or shear-cut only when approved. Coat cut ends in accordance with Section 440.3.6.3., “Repairing Coating.” Do not weld or mechanically couple coated reinforcing steel except where specifically shown on the plans. Remove the epoxy coating at least 6 in. beyond the weld limits before welding and 2 in. beyond the limits of the coupler before assembly. Clean the steel of oil, grease, moisture, dirt, welding contamination (slag or acid residue), and rust to a near-white finish after welding or coupling. Check the existing epoxy for damage. Remove any damaged or loose epoxy back to sound epoxy coating. Coat the splice area after cleaning with epoxy repair material to a thickness of 7–17 mils after curing. Apply a second application of repair material to the bar and coupler interface to ensure complete sealing of the joint. 3.6.3. Repairing Coating. Use material that complies with the requirements of this Item and ASTM D3963 for repairing of the coating. Make repairs in conformance with procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the epoxy coating powder. Apply at least the same coating thickness as required for the original coating for areas to be patched. Repair all visible damage to the coating. Repair sawed and sheared ends, cuts, breaks, and other damage promptly before additional oxidation occurs. Clean areas to be repaired to ensure they are free of surface contaminants. Make repairs in the shop or field as required. 3.7. Repair of Galvanized Reinforcing Steel. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with Section 445.3.4.2. “Repair Processes.” 3.8. Handling and Placing Stainless Reinforcing Steel. Handle, cut, and place stainless reinforcing steel bar using tools that are not used on carbon steel. Do not use carbon steel tools, chains, or slings when handling stainless steel. Use only nylon or polypropylene slings. Cut stainless steel reinforcing using shears, saws, abrasive cutoff wheels, or torches. Remove any thermal oxidation using pickling paste. Do not field bend stainless steel reinforcing without approval. Use 16-gauge fully annealed stainless steel tie wire conforming to the material properties listed in Section 440.2.11., “Stainless Reinforcing Steel.” Support all stainless reinforcing steel on solid plastic, stainless steel, or epoxy-coated steel chairs. Do not use uncoated carbon steel chairs in contact with stainless reinforcing steel. 3.9. Bending, Handling, Repairing, and Placing GFRP Bars. Fabricate, handle, repair, and place GFRP bars in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Guide Specifications for GFRP-Reinforced Concrete, Section 6, “Construction Specifications.” 2024 Specifications 440 643 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 441 644 Item 441 Steel Structures 1. DESCRIPTION Fabricate and erect structural steel and other metals used for steel structures or for steel portions of structures. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Base Metal. Use metal that meets Item 442, “Metal for Structures.” 2.2. Approved Electrodes and Flux-Electrode Combinations. Use only electrodes and flux-electrode combinations conforming to AWS A5 specifications and pertinent classifications for the applicable welding processes. When requested, submit a current Certificate of Conformance (COC) containing all test results as required by the applicable AWS A5 specification and welding code. Provide proof of Buy America compliance for welding consumables when requested. For bridge main member fabrication, submit the COC annually. 2.3. High-Strength Bolts. Use fasteners that meet Item 447, “Structural Bolting.” Use galvanized fasteners on field connections of bridge members when ASTM F3125, Grade A325 bolts are specified and steel is painted. 2.4. Paint Systems. Provide the paint system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate, and appearance coats as required) shown on the plans. Provide System IV if no system is specified. 2.4.1. Standard Paint Systems. Standard paint systems for painting new steel include the following. 2.4.1.1. System III-B. Provide paint in accordance with DMS-8101, “Structural Steel Paints—Performance.” Provide inorganic zinc (IOZ) prime coat, epoxy intermediate coat, and urethane appearance coat for all outer surfaces except those to be in contact with concrete. Provide epoxy zinc prime coat for touchup of IOZ. 2.4.1.2. System IV. Provide paint in accordance with DMS-8101. Provide IOZ prime coat and acrylic latex appearance coat for all outer surfaces except those to be in contact with concrete. Provide epoxy zinc prime coat for touchup of IOZ. 2.4.2. Paint Inside Tub Girders and Closed Boxes. Provide IOZ primer meeting the requirements of DMS-8101 to all interior surfaces, including faying surfaces and splice plates. 2.4.3. Special Protection System. Provide the type of paint system shown on the plans or in conformance with special provisions to this Item. Special Protection Systems must have completed AASHTO Product Evaluation & Audit Solutions Structural Steel Coatings (SSC) testing regimen as a complete system, with full data available from AASHTO, and be approved before use. 2.4.4. Galvanizing. Provide galvanizing, as required, in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” 2.4.5. Paint over Galvanizing. Paint over galvanized surfaces, when required, in accordance with Item 445. 2.4.6. Field Painting. Provide field paint, as required, in accordance with Item 446, “Field Cleaning and Painting Steel.” 2024 Specifications 441 645 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. General Requirements. 3.1.1. Applicable Codes. Perform all fabrication of bridge members in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1. Follow all applicable provisions of the appropriate AWS code (D1.5 or D1.1) except as otherwise shown on the plans or in accordance with this Item. Weld sheet steel (thinner than 1/8 in.) in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel. Unless otherwise stated, requirements of this Item are in addition to the requirements of S2.1 for bridge members. Follow the more stringent requirement in case of a conflict between this Item and S2.1. Perform all bolting in accordance with Item 447. Fabricate railroad underpass structures in accordance with the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering and this Item. In the case of a conflict between this Item and the AREMA manual, the more stringent requirements apply. 3.1.2. Notice of Fabrication. Give adequate notice before commencing fabrication as specified in Table 1. Include a schedule for all major fabrication processes and dates when inspections are to occur. Table 1 Notice of Commencing Fabrication Plant Location Notice Required In Texas 7 days In the contiguous United States 21 days Outside the contiguous United States 60 days Perform no Department work in the plant before the Engineer authorizes fabrication. The Contractor must bear all costs associated with the Department’s inspection when changes to their fabrication schedules occur and are not adequately conveyed to the Department in accordance with Table 1. When any structural steel is fabricated outside the contiguous 48 states, the additional cost of inspection will be in accordance with Article 6.4., “Sampling, Testing, and Inspection.” 3.1.3. Bridge Members. Primary bridge members include:  web and flanges of plate, tub, and box girders;  rolled beams and cover plates;  floor beam webs and flanges;  arch ribs and arch tie beams or girders;  truss members;  diaphragm members for curved plate girders or beams;  pier diaphragm members for tub girders;  splice plates for primary members; and  any other member designated as “primary” or “main” on the plans. Secondary bridge members include:  bracing (diaphragms, cross frames, and lateral bracing); and  all other miscellaneous bridge items not considered primary bridge members. 3.1.4. Responsibility. The Contractor is responsible for the correctness and completeness of shop drawings and for the fit of shop and field connections. 2024 Specifications 441 646 3.1.5. Qualification of Plants and Personnel. 3.1.5.1. Plants. Fabrication plants that produce bridge members must be approved in accordance with DMS-7370, “Steel Bridge Member Fabrication Plant Qualification.” The Department’s MPL has a list of approved bridge member fabrication plants. Fabrication plants that produce the following non-bridge steel members must be approved in accordance with DMS-7380, “Steel Non-Bridge Member Fabrication Plant Qualification”:  Item 610, “Roadway Illumination Assemblies,”  Item 613, “High Mast Illumination Poles,”  Item 614, “High Mast Illumination Assemblies,”  Item 650, “Overhead Sign Supports,”  Item 654, “Sign Walkways,”  Item 686, “Traffic Signal Pole Assemblies,” and  Special Specification, “Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Pole with Cabinet.” The Materials and Tests Division (MTD) maintains a list of approved non-bridge fabrication plants on the Department MPL that produce these members. Fabrication plants that produce metal bridge rail must be approved in accordance with DMS-7395, “Metal Railing Fabrication Plant Qualification.” The Department’s MPL has a list of approved metal bridge railing fabrication plants. 3.1.5.2. Personnel. Provide a QC staff qualified in conformance with the applicable AWS code. Provide an adequate number of qualified QC personnel for each specific production operation. QC must be onsite and independent of production personnel, as the Engineer determines. QC personnel must be proficient in using the applicable plans, specifications, and test methods, and in verifying compliance with the plant QC and production procedures. Welding inspectors must be current AWS Certified Welding Inspectors for bridge member plants and for non-bridge member plants requiring Department approval in accordance with DMS-7380 and DMS-7395. The QC staff must provide inspection of all materials and workmanship before the Department’s inspection. Provide the Department inspector with adequate personnel and equipment needed to move material for inspection access. QC is solely the Contractor’s responsibility. 3.1.5.3. Nondestructive Testing (NDT). Personnel performing NDT must be qualified in conformance with the applicable AWS code and the employer’s Written Practice. Level III personnel who qualify Level I and Level II technicians must be certified by ASNT within the areas in which the NDT Level III is qualified. In addition, NDT technicians must pass hands-on tests administered by MTD. This will remain current provided they continue to perform testing on Department materials as evidenced by test reports requiring their signature. A technician who fails any of the hands-on tests must wait 3 mo. or as approved before retesting. Qualification to perform NDT will be revoked when the technician’s employment is terminated or when the technician does not perform a test on a Department project for 6 consecutive mo. The technician must pass a new hands-on test to be re-certified. Testing of similar weld joints for non-Department projects may be considered by the Engineer instead of re-testing, provided sufficient documentation is submitted with the signature of the project’s Engineer. These requirements also apply to testing agencies and individual third-party contractors. 3.1.5.4. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) Qualification Testing. For fabricators qualified in accordance with DMS-7370, DMS-7380, or DMS-7395, laboratories performing procedure qualification testing for WPSs must be accredited by a nationally recognized agency that performs testing in accordance with ISO/International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 17025 in the mechanical field of testing. 3.1.6. Drawings. 3.1.6.1. Erection Drawings. Submit erection drawings prepared by a licensed professional engineer, including calculations, for approval in accordance with Item 5, “Control of the Work,” at least 4 weeks before erecting any portion of field-spliced (welded or bolted) girders, railroad underpasses, trusses, arches, or other 2024 Specifications 441 647 members for which erection drawings are required on the plans. Include drawings and calculations for any temporary structures used to support partially erected members. Erection drawings are not required for rolled I-beam units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Prepare erection drawings following the procedures outlined in Section 2.2 of AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S10.1. At minimum, include:  plan of work area showing structure location relative to supports and all obstructions;  equipment to be used, including allowable load information;  erection sequence for all pieces;  member weights and center of gravity location of pieces to be lifted;  locations of cranes, holding cranes, and temporary supports (falsework), including when to release load from temporary supports and holding cranes;  details of falsework, including specific bracing requirements with maximum allowable design wind speed clearly indicated;  girder lifting points;  diaphragm and bracing requirements; and  minimum connection requirements when more than the standard requirements. Perform erection engineering evaluation of the structural adequacy and stability of constructing the bridge system for each step of the steel erection. Do not proceed if site conditions differing from those depicted on the approved erection drawings could affect temporary support stresses, erected girders, or public safety in any manner. Revise erection drawings and resubmit to the Engineer for approval before proceeding. 3.1.6.2. Shop Drawings. Prepare and electronically submit shop drawings before fabrication for each detail of the general plans requiring the use of structural steel, forgings, wrought iron, or castings in accordance with the Bridge Division Guide to Shop Drawing Submittals available on the Department’s website, and as directed for other items the standard specifications require. Indicate joint details on shop drawings for all welds. Provide a title block on each sheet in the lower right corner that includes:  project identification data, including federal and state project numbers,  sheet numbering for the shop drawings,  name of the structure or stream for bridge structures,  name of owner or developer,  name of the fabricator or supplier, and  name of the Contractor. Provide one complete approved 11 × 17-in. set in hardcopy to the Department Inspector at the fabrication plant. Stamp it “For Materials and Tests Division Inspector.” The Engineer may require additional complete hardcopy sets. 3.1.6.2.1. Bridge Members. Prepare drawings in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration G1.3, “Shop Detail Drawing Presentation,” unless otherwise approved. Print a bill of material on each sheet, including the Charpy V-Notch (CVN) and fracture-critical requirements, if any, for each piece. Indicate fracture-critical areas of members. 3.1.6.2.2. Non-Bridge Members. Furnish shop drawings for non-bridge members when shown on the plans or in conformance with pertinent Items. 3.1.7. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs). Submit WPSs and test reports in conformance with the applicable AWS code to MTD before fabrication begins and notify the Engineer which procedures will be used for each joint or joint type. Do not begin fabrication until the Engineer approves WPSs. 2024 Specifications 441 648 Post the approved WPSs for the welding being performed on each welding machine or use another approved method of ensuring the welder always has access to the procedure information. 3.1.8. Documentation. Provide a completed Material Statement Form 1818 (D-9-USA-1) with supporting documentation [such as mill test reports (MTRs)] that the producing mill issues and qualified personnel verify. Ensure the documentation legibly reflects all information the applicable ASTM specifications require. Supply documents electronically to the Department. Provide a copy of the shipping or storage invoice, as material is shipped or placed in approved storage, that reflects:  member piece mark identification and calculated weight per piece from the Contract drawings,  number of pieces shipped or in storage,  total calculated weight for each invoice per bid item, and  the unique identification number of the shipping or storage invoice. The Inspector’s acceptance of material or finished members will not prohibit subsequent rejection if the material or members are found to be damaged or defective. Replace rejected material promptly. 3.1.9. Material Identification. Assembly-mark individual pieces and issue cutting instructions to the shop using a system that will maintain identity of the original piece. Identify structural steel by standard and grade of steel. Also differentiate between material toughness requirements (CVN or fracture-critical) as well as any other special physical requirements. In addition, identify structural steel for primary members by mill identification numbers (heat numbers). Use an approved identification system. Use either paint or low-stress stencils to make identification markings on the metal. Mark the material as soon as it enters the shop and carry the markings on all pieces through final fabrication. Transfer the markings before cutting steel for primary members of bridge structures into smaller pieces. Loss of identification marking on any piece, with no other positive identification, or loss of heat number identification on any primary member piece will render the piece unacceptable for use. Unidentifiable material may be approved for use after testing to establish acceptability to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Have an approved testing facility perform testing and a licensed professional engineer sign and seal the results. Low-stress stencil marks must have a radius instead of a sharp point. Acceptable stencils include dot, vibration, and rounded-V stencils. Label these stencils so that they are easily distinguishable from other stencils that are not low-stress. 3.2. Welding. 3.2.1. Details. 3.2.1.1. Rolled Edges. Trim plates with rolled edges used for webs by thermal cutting. 3.2.1.2. Weld Tabs. Use weld tabs at least 2 in. long for manual and semi-automatic processes, at least 3 in. long for automatic processes, and in all cases at least as long as the thickness of the material being welded. Use longer weld tabs as required for satisfactory work. Duplicate the configuration of the weld tab to the joint detail being fabricated. 3.2.1.3. Weld Termination. Terminate fillet welds approximately 1/4 in. from the end of the attachment except for galvanized structures and flange-to-web welds, for which the fillet weld must run the full length of the attachment, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3.2.1.4. No-Paint Areas at Field-Welded Connections. Keep surfaces within 4 in. of groove welds or within 2 in. of fillet welds free of shop paint. 3.2.1.5. Galvanized Assemblies. Completely seal all edges of tightly contacting surfaces by welding before galvanizing. 2024 Specifications 441 649 3.2.1.6. Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW). Do not use hand-held semiautomatic SAW for welding bridge members unless altered to provide automatic guidance or otherwise approved. 3.2.1.7. Non-Bridge Member Weathering Steel Welds. Provide weld metal with atmospheric corrosion resistance and coloring characteristics similar to that of the base metal for weathering steel structures fabricated in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.2.2. Shop Splices. 3.2.2.1. Shop Splice Locations. Keep at least 6 in. between shop splices and stiffeners or cross-frames. Obtain approval for shop splices added after shop drawings are approved. 3.2.2.2. Grinding Splice Welds. Grind shop groove welds in flange plates smooth and flush with the base metal on all surfaces, whether the joined parts are of equal or unequal thickness. Grind so the finished grinding marks run in the direction of stress and keep the metal below the blue brittle range (below 350°F). Groove welds in web plates, except at locations of intersecting welds, need not be ground unless shown on the plans except as required to meet AWS welding code requirements. 3.2.3. Joint Restraint. Never restrain a joint on both sides when welding. 3.2.4. Stiffener Installation. 3.2.4.1. Flange Tilt. Members must meet combined tilt and warpage tolerances before the installation of stiffeners. Cut stiffeners to fit acceptable flange tilt and cupping. Minor jacking that does not deform the material will be permitted. 3.2.4.2. Stiffeners Near Field Splices. Tack weld intermediate stiffeners within 12 in. of a welded field splice point in the shop. Weld the stiffeners in the field in accordance with Item 448, “Structural Field Welding,” after the splice is made. 3.2.5. Nondestructive Testing (NDT). Perform magnetic particle testing (MT), radiographic testing (RT), or ultrasonic testing (UT) at the Contractor’s expense in accordance with AWS code D1.5 for bridge structures. The Engineer will periodically witness, examine, verify, and interpret NDT. Additional welds may be designated for NDT on the plans. Retest repaired groove welds in conformance with the applicable AWS code after repairs are made and have cooled to ambient temperature. Complete NDT and repairs before assembly of parts into a member, but after any heat-correction of weld distortion. 3.2.5.1. Radiographic Testing (RT). Radiographs must have a density of at least 2.5 and no more than 3.5, as confirmed by a radiographer. The density in any single radiograph showing a continuous area of constant thickness must not vary in this area by more than 0.5. Use only ASTM System Class I radiographic film in accordance with ASTM E1815. Use low-stress stencils to make radiograph location identification marks on the steel. 3.2.5.2. Ultrasonic Testing (UT). Have UT equipment calibrated yearly by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer or by an approved testing laboratory. 3.2.5.3. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT). Use alternating current (AC) when using the yoke method unless otherwise approved. Welds may be further evaluated using half-wave rectified direct current (DC) for subsurface indications. Centerline cracking may be detected by aluminum prod method when approved. 3.3. Bolt Holes. Detail holes on shop drawings 1/16 in. larger in diameter than the nominal bolt size shown on the plans, unless another hole size is shown on the plans. Thoroughly clean the contact surfaces of connection parts in accordance with Item 447 before assembling them for hole fabrication. Make holes in primary members full-size (by reaming from a subsize hole, drilling full-size, or punching full-size where permissible) only in assembly unless otherwise approved. 2024 Specifications 441 650 Ream and drill with twist drills guided by mechanical means unless otherwise approved. If subpunching holes, punch them at least 3/16 in. smaller than the nominal bolt size. Submit the proposed procedures for approval to accomplish the work from initial drilling or punching through check assembly when numerically controlled (N/C) equipment is used. Use thermal cutting for holes only with permission. Permission for thermal cutting is not required for making slotted holes, when slotted holes are shown on the plans, by drilling or punching two holes and then thermally cutting the straight portion between them. Perform all thermal cutting in accordance with Section 441.3.5.1., “Thermal Cutting.” Slightly conical holes that naturally result from punching operations are acceptable provided they do not exceed the tolerances of AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1. The tolerance for anchor bolt hole diameter for bridge bearing assemblies is +1/8 in., -0. 3.4. Dimensional Tolerances. Meet tolerances in conformance with the applicable AWS specifications except as modified in this Section. 3.4.1. Rolled Sections. Use ASTM A6 mill tolerances for rolled sections, except AWS D1.5 camber tolerances apply to rolled sections with a specified camber. 3.4.2. Flange Straightness. Ensure flanges of completed girders are free of kinks, short bends, and waviness that depart from straightness or the specified camber by more than 1/8 in. in any 10 ft. along the flange. Rolled material must meet this straightness requirement before being laid out or worked. Plates must meet this requirement before assembly into a member. Inspect the surface of the metal for evidence of fracture after straightening a bend or buckle. The Engineer may require NDT. 3.4.3. Alignment of Deep Webs in Welded Field Connections. For girders 48 in. deep or deeper, the webs may be slightly restrained while checking compliance for lateral alignment at field-welded connections. In the unrestrained condition, webs 48 in. deep or deeper must meet the tolerances shown in Table 2. Girders under 48 in. deep must meet the alignment tolerances in accordance with AWS D1.5. Table 2 Web Alignment Tolerances for Deep Girders Web Depth (in.) Maximum Web Misalignment (in.) 48 1/16 60 1/8 72 1/4 84 5/16 96 5/16 108 3/8 120 7/16 132 7/16 144 1/2 3.4.4. Bearings. Correct bearing areas of shoes, beams, and girders using heat, external pressure, or both. Grind or mill only if the actual thickness of the member is not reduced by more than 1/16 in. below the required thickness. 3.4.4.1. I-Beams, Plate Girders, and Tub Girders. The plane of the bearing area of beams and girders must be perpendicular to the vertical axis of the member within 1/16 in. in any 24 in. 3.4.4.2. Closed Box Girders. Meet these tolerances.  The plane of the bearing areas of the box girder is perpendicular to the vertical axis of the girder within 1/16 in. across any horizontal dimension of the bearing.  The planes of the beam supports on the box girder are true to the vertical axis of the supported beams or girders to 1/16 in. in any 24 in. In the shop, verify the plane of all bearing areas with the box placed on its bearings to field grade, using an approved process for verification. 2024 Specifications 441 651 3.4.4.3. Shoes. Meet these tolerances.  The top bolster has the center 75% of the long dimension (transverse to the girder) true to 1/32 in., with the remainder true to 1/16 in., and is true to 1/32 in. across its entire width in the short dimension (longitudinal to the girder).  The bottom bolster is true to 1/16 in. across its diagonals.  For a pin-and-rocker type expansion shoe, the axis of rotation coincides with the central axis of the pin.  When the shoe is completely assembled, as the top bolster travels through its full anticipated range, no point in the top bolster plane changes elevation by more than 1/16 in. and the top bolster does not change inclination by more than 1°, for the full possible travel. 3.4.4.4. Beam Supports. Fabricate beam support planes true to the box girder bearing to 1/16 in. in the short direction and true to the vertical axis of the nesting girders to 1/16 in. 3.4.5. End Connection Angles. For floor beams and girders with end connection angles, the tolerance for the length back-to-back of connection angles is ±1/32 in. Do not reduce the finished thickness of the angles below that shown on the shop drawings if end connections are faced. 3.5. Other Fabrication Processes. 3.5.1. Thermal Cutting. Use a mechanical guide to obtain a true profile. Hand-cut only where approved. Hand-cutting of radii for beam copes, weld access holes, and width transitions is permitted if acceptable profile and finish are produced by grinding. Provide a surface finish on thermal-cut surfaces, including holes, in accordance with AWS D1.5 requirements for base metal preparation. Obtain approval before using other cutting processes. 3.5.2. Oxygen-Gouging. Do not oxygen-gouge quenched and tempered (Q&T), normalized, or thermo-mechanically controlled processed (TMCP) steel. 3.5.3. Annealing and Normalizing. Complete all annealing or normalizing (as defined in ASTM A941) before finished machining, boring, and straightening. Maintain the temperature uniformly throughout the furnace during heating and cooling so the range of temperatures at all points on the member is no more than 100°F. 3.5.4. Machining. Machine the surfaces of expansion bearings so the travel direction of the tool is in the direction of expansion. 3.5.5. Camber. Complete cambering in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1 before any heat-curving. 3.5.6. Heat Curving. Heat-curve in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1. The methods in the AASHTO bridge construction specifications are recommended. Attach cover plates to rolled beams before heat-curving only if the total thickness of one flange and cover plate is less than 2-1/2 in. and the radius of curvature is greater than 1,000 ft. Attach cover plates for other rolled beams only after heat-curving is completed. Locate and attach connection plates, diaphragm stiffeners, and bearing stiffeners after curving, unless girder shrinkage is accounted for. 3.5.7. Bending of Quenched and Tempered (Q&T) Steels. The cold-bending radius limitations for HPS 70W in AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1 apply to all Q&T steels. 3.5.8. Hammering. Do not perform hammering on any portion of the member that causes the material to permanently deform. Avoid damage to the material by measures such as use of brass or aluminum hammers or by padding the area to be hammered. 3.6. Nonconformance Reports (NCRs). Submit an NCR to the Engineer for approval when the requirements of this Item are not met. Submit NCRs in conformance with MTD’s NCR guidelines document. Have readily available access to the services of a licensed professional engineer experienced in steel structures design 2024 Specifications 441 652 and fabrication. This licensed professional engineer may be responsible for reviewing potentially structurally deficient members in conformance with the NCR guidelines document. Receive Department approval before beginning repairs. Perform all repair work in strict compliance with the approved NCR and repair procedure. 3.7. Shop Assembly. 3.7.1. General Shop Assembly. Shop-assemble field connections of primary members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate girders, field connections of floor beams and stringers (including for railroad structures), field-bolted diaphragms for curved plate girders and railroad underpasses, and rigid frames. Field-bolted cross-frames and rolled-section diaphragms do not require shop assembly. Complete fabrication, welding (except for shear studs), and field splice preparation before members are removed from shop assembly. Obtain approval for any deviation from this procedure. The Contractor is responsible for accurate geometry. Use a method and details of preassembly consistent with the erection procedure shown on the erection plans and camber diagrams. The sequence of assembly may start from any location in the structure and proceed in one or both directions. An approved method of sequential geometry control is required unless the full length of the structure is assembled. Verify by shop assembly the fit of all bolted and welded field connections between bent cap girders and plate girders or between plate girders and floor beams. Do not measure horizontal curvature and vertical camber for final acceptance until all welding and heating operations are completed and the steel has cooled to a uniform temperature. Check horizontal curvature and vertical camber in a no-load condition. 3.7.2. Bolted Field Connections. Each shop assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes, and fit of milled joints, must be approved before the assembly is dismantled. Assemble with milled ends of compression members in full bearing. Assemble non-bearing connections to the specified gap. Ream all subsize holes to the specified size while the connections are assembled, or drill full size while the connections are assembled. Notify the Engineer before shipping if fill plates or shims are added. Adding or increasing the thickness of shims or fill plates in bearing connections requires approval. Use drift pins and snug-tight bolts during the drilling process to ensure all planes of the connection (webs and flanges) can be assembled simultaneously. Do not use tack welds to secure plates while drilling. Secure parts not completely bolted in the shop with temporary bolts to prevent damage in shipment and handling. Never use tack welds in place of temporary bolts. Match-mark connecting parts in field connections using low-stress stencils in conformance with the diagram on the erection drawings. 3.7.3. Welded Field Connections. Mill or grind bevels for groove welds. Do not cut into the web when cutting the flange bevel adjacent to the web. End preparation, backing, and tolerances for girder splices must be in accordance with Item 448. Details for all other field welds must conform to the applicable AWS code unless otherwise shown on the plans. In the shop, prepare ends of beams or girders to be field-welded taking into account their relative positions in the finished structure due to grade, camber, and curvature. Completely shop-assemble and check each splice. Match-mark the splice while it is assembled with low-stress stencils in conformance with the diagram on the erection drawings. 3.8. Finish and Painting. 3.8.1. Shop Painting. Perform shop painting of bridge members in accordance with DMS-8104, “Paint, Shop Application for Steel Bridge Members.” Grind corners on new steel items to be painted that are sharp or form 2024 Specifications 441 653 essentially 90° angles to an approximately 1/16-in. flat surface before blast cleaning. (A corner is the intersection of two plane faces.) This requirement does not apply to punched or drilled holes. Do not omit shop paint to preserve original markings. Ensure painted faying surfaces meet the required slip and creep coefficients for bolted connections in accordance with DMS-8104. Use a Class A slip (minimum slip coefficient of 0.33) if no slip coefficient or corresponding surface condition is specified. Perform all required testing at no expense to the Department. Surface preparation and painting the interiors of tub girders and closed boxes must be in accordance with DMS-8104. Measure the anchor profile after blast cleaning at random locations along the thermal cut surfaces. If specified anchor profile is not achieved over the entire flame-cut surface, grind the edges and re-blast to achieve the required anchor pattern. 3.8.2. Weathering Steel. Provide an SSPC-SP 6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning,” blast in the shop to all fascia surfaces of unpainted weathering steel beams. Fascia surfaces include:  exterior sides of outermost webs and undersides of bottom flanges of plate girders and rolled beams,  all outer surfaces of tub girders and box girders,  all surfaces of truss members,  webs and undersides of bottom flanges of plate diaphragms,  bottom surfaces of floor beams, and  any other surfaces designated as “fascia” on the plans. Do not mark fascia surfaces. Use one of the following methods as soon as possible to remove any markings or any other foreign material that adheres to the steel during fabrication and could inhibit the formation of oxide film:  SSPC-SP 1, “Solvent Cleaning,”  SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning,”  SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning,” and  SSPC-SP 7, “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.” Do not use acids to remove stains or scales. Feather out touched-up areas over several feet. 3.8.3. Machined Surfaces. Clean and coat machine-finished surfaces that are in sliding contact, particularly pins and pinholes, using a non-drying, water-repellent, grease-type material containing rust-inhibitive compounds. Ensure the coating material contains no ingredients that might damage the steel. Protect machined surfaces from abrasive blasting. 3.9. Handling and Storage of Materials. Prevent damage when storing or handling girders or other materials. Remove or repair material damaged by handling devices or improper storage by acceptable means in accordance with ASTM A6 and the applicable AWS code. Place stored materials on skids or acceptable dunnage above the ground. Keep materials clean and avoid damaging the applied coating. Shore girders and beams to keep them upright and free of standing water. Place support skids close enough to prevent excessive deflection in long members such as columns. Do not stack completed girders or beams at the jobsite. Protect structural steel from salt water or other corrosive environments during storage and transit. 3.10. Marking and Shipping. Mark all structural members in conformance with the erection drawings. If a surface is painted, make the marks over the paint. Do not use impact-applied stencils to mark painted surfaces. 2024 Specifications 441 654 Mark the weight directly on all members weighing more than 3 tons. Keep material clean and free of damage during loading, transportation, unloading, and storage. Pack bolts of each length and diameter, and loose nuts or washers of each size, separately, and ship them in boxes, crates, kegs, or barrels. Plainly mark a list and description of the contents on the outside of each package. 3.11. Field Erection. Do not lift and place any steel member, including girders and diaphragms, over an open highway or other open travel way unless otherwise approved. Do not allow traffic to travel under erected members until sufficiently stable as shown on approved erection drawings. 3.11.1. Pre-Erection Conference. Schedule and attend a pre-erection conference with the Engineer at least 7 days before commencing steel erection operations. Do not install falsework or perform any erection operations before the meeting. 3.11.2. Methods and Equipment. Do not tack-weld parts instead of using erection bolts. Do not tack-weld parts to hold them in place for bolting. Provide falsework, tools, machinery, and appliances, including drift pins and erection bolts. Provide enough drift pins, 1/32 in. larger than the connection bolts, to fill at least 1/4 of the bolt holes for primary connections. Use erection bolts of the same diameter as the connection bolts. Securely tie, brace, or shore steel beams or girders immediately after erection as shown on the erection drawings. Maintain bracing or shoring until the diaphragms are in place and as specified on the erection drawings. Protect railroad, roadway, and marine traffic underneath previously erected girders or beams from falling objects associated with other construction activities. Only welders certified or working directly under the supervision of a foreman certified in accordance with Item 448 may handle torches when applying heat to permanent structural steel members. 3.11.3. Falsework. Construct falsework in conformance with the erection plan. Construct foundations for shore towers as shown on erection drawings. Do not use timber mats with deteriorated timbers or soil to construct shore tower foundations. Notify the Engineer of completed falsework to obtain approval before opening roadway to traffic or starting girder erection activities. Ensure falsework is protected from potential vehicle impact. Inspect and maintain falsework daily. Use screw jacks or other approved methods to control vertical adjustment of falsework to minimize the use of shims. 3.11.4. Handling and Assembly. Accurately assemble all parts as shown on the plans and the approved shop drawings. Verify match-marks. Handle parts carefully to prevent bending or other damage. Do not hammer if doing so damages or distorts members. Do not weld any member for transportation or erection unless shown on the plans or approved. 3.11.4.1. Welded Connections. Weld flange splices to 50% of their thickness and meet the minimum erection bracing and support requirements before releasing the erection cranes, as shown on the plans and on the approved erection plans. Field-weld in accordance with Item 448. 3.11.4.2. Bolted Connections. Before releasing the erection cranes:  install 50% of the bolts in the top and bottom flanges and the web with all nuts finger-tight,  meet the minimum erection bracing and support requirements shown on the plans and on the approved erection plans, and  install top lateral bracing across the connection for tub girders, and fully tension the bolts connecting the bracing to the top flanges. Install high-strength bolts, including erection bolts, in accordance with Item 447. Clean bearing and faying surfaces for bolted connections in accordance with Item 447. Clean the areas of the outside ply under washers, nuts, and bolt heads before bolt installation. Ensure the required faying surface condition is present at the time of bolting. 2024 Specifications 441 655 3.11.5. Misfits. Correct minor misfits. Ream no more than 10% of the holes in a plate connection (flange or web), and ensure no single hole is more than 1/8 in. larger than the nominal bolt diameter. Submit proposed correction methods for members with defects that exceed these limits or prevent the proper assembly of parts. Straighten structural members in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1. Make all corrections in the presence of the Engineer at no expense to the Department. Do not remove and reweld gusset plates without approval. 3.11.6. Bearing and Anchorage Devices. Place all bearing devices such as elastomeric pads, castings, bearing plates, or shoes on properly finished bearing areas with full and even bearing on the concrete. Place metallic bearing devices on 1/4-in. thick preformed fabric pads manufactured in accordance with DMS-6160, “Water Stops, Nylon-Reinforced Neoprene Sheet, and Elastomeric Pads,” to the dimensions shown on the plans. Provide holes in the pad that are no more than 1/4 in. larger than the bolt diameter. Build the concrete bearing area up to the correct elevation once it has been placed below grade using mortar that meets Item 420, “Concrete Substructures,” and provide adequate curing. Use only mortar for buildups between 1/8 in. and 3/8 in. thick. Use galvanized steel shims or other approved shim materials in conjunction with mortar if the bearing area must be raised more than 3/8 in. Provide at least 75% contact of flange to shoe with no separation greater than 1/32 in. for beams and girders. Make corrections using heat or pressure in accordance with AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration S2.1 or using galvanized shims. Correct small irregularities by grinding. Provide at least 85% contact between the rocker plate and the base plate. Adjust the location of slotted holes in expansion bearings for the prevailing temperature. Adjust the nuts on the anchor bolts at the expansion ends of spans to permit free movement of the span. Provide lock nuts or burr the threads. Remove all foreign matter from sliding or machine-finished surfaces before placing them in the structure. Restore distorted bearing pads or expansion bearings to an equivalent 70°F position after completion of all welded or bolted splices, using an approved method of relieving the load on the bearing devices. 3.11.7. Erecting Forms. Do not erect forms until all welding or bolting is complete and the unit is positioned and properly set on the bearings, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3.11.8. Field Finish. Paint in accordance with Item 446. Restore weathering steel that will remain unpainted to a uniform appearance by solvent cleaning, hand cleaning, power brush, or blast cleaning after all welding and slab concrete placement have been completed. Remove from all unpainted weathering steel fascia surfaces (as listed in Section 441.3.8.2., “Weathering Steel”) any foreign material, including markings, that adheres to the steel and could inhibit formation of oxide film as soon as possible. Feather out touched-up areas over several feet. Do not use acids to remove stains or scales. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 442 656 Item 442 Metal for Structures 1. DESCRIPTION Provide structural steel, high-strength bolts, forgings, steel castings, iron castings, wrought iron, steel pipe and tubing, aluminum castings and tubing, or other metals used in structures, except reinforcing steel and metal culvert pipe. 2. MATERIALS Furnish mill test reports (MTRs), supplemental test documentation, and certifications required by this Item and other pertinent Items. 2.1. Structural Steel. The Engineer may sample and test steel in accordance with ASTM A370. 2.1.1. Bridge Structures. Provide the grade of ASTM A709 steel shown on the plans. Grade 50W, 50S, or HPS 50W may be substituted for Grade 50 at no additional cost to the Department. Use Zone 1 if no AASHTO temperature zone is shown on the plans. 2.1.2. Non-Bridge Structures. 2.1.2.1. Steel Classifications. Provide the types and grades of steel in accordance with this Section unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.1.2.1.1. Carbon Steel. Meet ASTM A36. 2.1.2.1.2. Low-Alloy Steel. Meet the requirements of one of the following:  ASTM A529 Grade 50;  ASTM A572 Grade 50 or Grade 55;  ASTM A588;  ASTM A709 Grade 50, 50S, 50W, or HPS 50W; or  ASTM A992. Specify ASTM A6 supplemental requirement S18, “Maximum Tensile Strength,” for material used for sign, signal, and luminaire supports. 2.1.2.2. Impact Testing. The following components, if greater than 1/2 in. thick, and other members designated on the plans must meet the Charpy V-notch (CVN) requirements of Table 1:  base plates for roadway illumination assemblies, traffic signal pole assemblies, high mast illumination poles, ITS poles, and overhead sign supports;  pole mounting plates, arm mounting plates, and clamp-on plates for traffic signal pole assemblies;  arm stiffeners, pole gussets, and stiffeners for traffic signal pole long mast arm assemblies (50 ft. and greater);  pole shafts, ground sleeves, and handhole frames for high mast illumination poles;  W-columns, tower pipes, multiple-sided shafts, tower pipe and multiple-sided shaft connection plates, chord angles, chord splice plates or angles, and truss bearing angles for truss type overhead sign supports; and 2024 Specifications 442 657  pipe posts, pipe arms, post and arm flange plates, and handhole frames for monotube overhead sign supports. Table 1 CVN Requirements for Non-Bridge Steel Material Thickness Minimum CVN Toughness ASTM A36, A53, A242, A500, A501, A709, Grade 36, any other steel with minimum specified yield point below 40 ksi up to 4" 15 foot-pounds (ft.-lb.) at 70°F ASTM A5721, A5881, A6331, any other steel with minimum specified yield point between 40 and 65 ksi, inclusive up to 2" 15 ft.-lb. at 70°F over 2" to 4", mechanically fastened 15 ft.-lb. at 70°F over 2" to 4", welded 20 ft.-lb. at 70°F Any steel with minimum specified yield point over 65 ksi and under 90 ksi2 up to 2-1/2" 20 ft.-lb. at 50°F over 2-1/2" to 4", mechanically fastened 20 ft.-lb. at 50°F over 2-1/2" to 4", welded 25 ft.-lb. at 50°F 1. Reduce the testing temperature by 15°F for each 10-ksi increment or fraction thereof above 65 ksi if the yield point of the material given on the MTR exceeds 65 ksi. 2. Reduce the testing temperature by 15°F for each 10-ksi increment or fraction thereof above 85 ksi if the yield point of the material given on the MTR exceeds 85 ksi. Use the (H) frequency of testing for material with minimum specified yield point up to 50 ksi. Use the (P) frequency of testing for material with minimum specified yield point greater than 50 ksi. Ensure steel is sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM A673. 2.1.3. Other Components. 2.1.3.1. Miscellaneous Bridge Components. Provide steel that meets ASTM A36, A709 Grade 36, or A500 Grade B for members such as steel bearing components not bid under other Items, steel diaphragms for use with concrete bridges, and armor and finger joints, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.1.3.2. Shear Connectors and Anchors. Provide cold-drawn bars for stud shear connectors, slab anchors, and anchors on armor and finger joints that meet the requirements of ASTM A108, Grade 1010, 1015, 1018, or 1020, either semi-killed or killed, and that have the tensile properties shown in Table 2 after drawing or finishing. Determine tensile properties in accordance with ASTM A370. Table 2 Minimum Tensile Properties for Bar Stock Tensile strength 60 ksi Yield strength 50 ksi Elongation 20% (2") Reduction of area 50% Provide certification from the manufacturer that the studs or anchors as delivered have the required material properties. 2.1.3.3. Fasteners. Provide high-strength bolts that meet ASTM F3125 Grade A325, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The Department may sample high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers for structural connections in accordance with Tex-719-I. Follow the requirements of Item 447, “Structural Bolting,” for tests, test reports, and supplemental requirements for high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.1.3.4. Slip-Resistant Deck Plates. Furnish steel for deck plates that meets ASTM A786 and one of ASTM A242, A588, or A709 Grade 50W. State the type and trade name of material to be used on the shop drawings. 2024 Specifications 442 658 2.1.3.5. Rail Posts. Provide material for rail posts that meets ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36 unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.2. Steel Forgings. Provide steel forgings for pins, rollers, trunnions, or other forged parts that meet ASTM A668, Class C, D, F, or G, as shown on the plans. For pins 4 in. or smaller in diameter for non-railroad structures, material that meets ASTM A108 Grade 1016–Grade 1030, with a minimum yield strength of 36 ksi, may be used instead. 2.3. Steel Castings. Provide steel castings that meet ASTM A27, Grade 70-36. 2.4. Iron Castings. Provide iron castings that are true to pattern in form and dimensions; free of pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in positions affecting their strength and value for the service intended; and meet the standards shown in Table 3. Table 3 Standards for Iron Castings Casting Material ASTM Standard Grade or Class Gray iron A48 35B Malleable iron A47 32510 Ductile iron A536 70-50-05 2.5. Steel Tubing. Provide steel tubing that meets ASTM A500 Grade B, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Tubing that meets API Standard 5L Grade X52 may be used if produced by a mill listed in the standard API specifications as authorized to produce pipe with the API monogram. Hydrostatic tests are not required for API 5L steel, and instead of an MTR, the manufacturer may furnish a certificate for each lot or shipment certifying the tubing meets the requirements of this Section. 2.6. Aluminum. Provide aluminum materials that meet the standards shown in Table 4 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Table 4 Aluminum Standards Material ASTM Standard Alloy-Temper Castings B108 A444.0-T4 Extrusions B221 6061-T6 Sheet or plate B209 6061-T6 When testing is required, cut test specimens from castings from the lower 14 in. of the tension flange, but not at the junction of the rib or base. Flatten the curved surfaces before machining. Provide standard test specimens in accordance with ASTM E8. 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Fabrication, Erection, and Painting. Fabricate, weld, and erect metal structures in accordance with Item 441, “Steel Structures”; Item 447, “Structural Bolting”; and Item 448, “Structural Field Welding”; and in conformance with the applicable AWS welding code. Paint in accordance with Item 446, “Field Cleaning and Painting Steel.” Aluminum or galvanized steel members do not require painting unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3.2. Galvanizing. Galvanize fabricated steel items, steel castings, bolts, nuts, screws, washers, and other miscellaneous hardware, when required, in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the pound of structural metal furnished and placed in a complete structure not including the weight of erection bolts, paint, or weld metal. 2024 Specifications 442 659 This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. The maximum percent variance from the plans quantity will be as shown in Table 5. Table 5 Percent Variance Quantity Variance Over 1,000,000 lb. 1/2% 100,000–1,000,000 lb. 1% Under 100,000 lb. 1-1/2% If the requests for increases in sizes or weights of members are approved, measurement will be made on the sizes or weights shown on the plans. Castings, bearing plates, anchor bolts, drains, deck plates, armor and finger joints, and other metal for which no separate measurement is specified will be included in the total quantity of structural steel. The weights of rolled materials (e.g., structural shapes and plate) will be computed based on nominal weights and dimensions using measurements shown on the plans. Deductions will not be made for material that is removed for copes, clips, planing, or weld preparation. The weight of castings will be computed from the dimensions shown on the plans. Shoes will be measured by the weights shown on the plans. Weight of high-strength fasteners will be based on Table 6. Weight of other metal will be based on Table 7. Table 6 Pay Weight for High-Strength Fasteners, Pounds per Hundred Units Diameter Item Bolt Heads Nuts Washers 3/4" 15 19 4.8 7/8" 23 30 7 1" 32 43 9.4 1-1/8" 45 59 11 1-1/4" 64 79 14 Table 7 Pay Weight for Metals Material Weight (lb./cu. in.) Steel 0.2836 Cast iron 0.2604 Wrought iron 0.2777 Splices will be measured as follows.  No additional weight will be allowed for weld metal in a welded splice.  Where a bolted splice is permitted as an alternate for a welded splice, measurement will be made based on a welded splice.  Where a bolted splice is required, the weight of the splice material, bolt heads, washers, and nuts will be measured with no deduction for holes. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Structural Steel” of the type (“Rolled Beam,” “Plate Girder,” “Tub Girder,” “Box Girder,” “Railroad Through-Girder,” “Railroad Deck-Girder,” “Miscellaneous Bridge,” “Miscellaneous Non-Bridge,” “Pedestal,” “Diaphragm,” and “Stiffener”) specified. This price is full 2024 Specifications 442 660 compensation for materials, fabrication, transportation, erection, paint, painting, galvanizing, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 445 661 Item 445 Galvanizing 1. DESCRIPTION Galvanize or repair galvanizing on metal items. 2. MATERIALS Provide galvanized metal items that meet the standards shown in Table 1. Table 1 Galvanizing Standards Item Standard Fabricated items; rolled, pressed, or forged steel shapes; plates; pipes; tubular items; and bars ASTM A123 Steel or iron castings ASTM A153, Class A Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, and other miscellaneous hardware ASTM F2329 or ASTM B695, Class 50 Miscellaneous fasteners ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 8 Rail elements for metal beam guard fence or bridge railing AASHTO M 180 Permanent metal deck forms, supporting angles, and incidental items ASTM A653, Coating Designation G165 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. General. Provide for proper filling, venting, and draining during cleaning and galvanizing if fabricated members or assemblies are required to be hot-dip galvanized. Provide drain holes or slots as required, except where prohibited by the plans. Provide a surface finish on the thermal-cut drain holes or slots in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements for base metal preparation. Drain to the small end of tapered sections that are assembled using slip-joint splices. Ensure cleaning and galvanizing do not produce hydrogen embrittlement. Remove weld spatter on exposed surfaces, weld flux, weld slag, and any other weld residue or impurities before galvanizing. Before galvanizing material 1/4 in. or greater in thickness:  remove all sharp burrs, and  chamfer to approximately 1/16 in. all edges. 3.2. Painting Galvanized Materials. Provide a paint system if painting is specified on galvanized materials in accordance with DMS-8102, “Paint Systems for Galvanized Steel,” unless otherwise shown on the plans. Follow all manufacturer instructions for surface preparation and application, including the following. 3.2.1. Surface Preparation. Do not water-quench or chromate-quench galvanized surfaces to be painted. Prepare the surface in accordance with ASTM D6386 or ASTM D7803, as applicable. Apply coating within 12 hr. of cleaning. Re-clean the surface if more than 12 hr. elapse before initial painting. 3.2.2. Coating Application. Ensure the coating is smooth, even, continuous, and free of drips, runs, sags, holidays, wrinkles, or other coating defects. Ensure the coating has a uniform appearance within all portions of the painted piece and all related pieces and components of a project. Ensure all repairs are smooth, even, and visually match the remainder of the coated piece by use of feathering and other appropriate techniques to avoid sharp transitions. 2024 Specifications 445 662 3.3. Workmanship. 3.3.1. Coverage. Bare spots no more than 1/8 in. across are acceptable unless numerous. Repair larger bare spots in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” Local runs or drips of zinc coating are acceptable unless they interfere with the intended use of the product. Carefully remove plainly visible excessive zinc accumulations. 3.3.2. Adhesion. Tap the coated area using a small hammer to test coating adhesion. The coating is acceptable if it is not brittle and does not scale or flake. 3.3.3. Appearance. 3.3.3.1. White Rust. A white powdery residue indicates moisture. Remove heavy layers of white rust that have caused the coating to pit. Light coatings may remain unless the Engineer requires chemical removal. Remove white rust from articles that will be in direct contact with soil. 3.3.3.2. Red Rust. Red rust on galvanized items indicates uncoated areas. Refer to Section 445.3.3.1., “Coverage,” for acceptance criteria. 3.3.3.3. Alligator Cracking or Spider Webbing. The composition of the base metal may cause dark lines resembling alligator skin. Refer to Section 445.3.3.2., “Adhesion,” to determine whether the coating is acceptable. 3.3.3.4. Dull Gray Coating. The composition of the base metal can cause a dull gray color. Refer to Section 445.3.3.2., “Adhesion,” to determine whether the coating is acceptable. 3.3.4. Coating Thickness. Galvanize to the thickness specified. Use Tex-728-I to determine coating thickness. 3.4. Repairs. Use zinc-based solders, sprayed zinc, or zinc-rich paints for repairs in accordance with this Section. 3.4.1. Materials. 3.4.1.1. Zinc-Based Solders. Solders used in rod form or as powders:  zinc-tin-lead alloys with liquidus temperatures in the range of 446–500°F, or  zinc-cadmium alloys with liquidus temperatures in the range of 518–527°F. 3.4.1.2. Sprayed Zinc (Metallizing). Zinc coating applied by spraying with droplets of molten metal using wire, ribbon, or powder processes. 3.4.1.3. Organic Zinc-Rich Paints. Zinc-rich paints based on organic binders that meet the requirements of DMS-8103, “Galvanizing Repair Paints.” The Department’s MPL has a list of approved repair paints for galvanized coatings. 3.4.2. Repair Processes. 3.4.2.1. Zinc-Based Solders. Remove moisture, oil, grease, dirt, corrosion products, and welding slag or flux from surfaces to be repaired. Clean surface to white metal by wire-brushing, light grinding, or mild blasting extending into the surrounding undamaged galvanized coating. Preheat cleaned areas to at least 600°F, but not more than 750°F. Wire-brush while heating and evenly distribute a layer of zinc solder. Flush the repaired area with water or wipe with a damp cloth to remove flux residue when repair is completed. 3.4.2.2. Sprayed Zinc (Metallizing). Remove oil, grease, corrosion products, and any welding slag or flux from surfaces to be repaired, and ensure the surfaces are dry. Clean surface to white metal by wire-brushing, light grinding, or mild blasting extending into the surrounding undamaged galvanized coating. Apply coating by metal-spraying pistols fed with either zinc wire, ribbon, or powder. Provide a coating that is uniform and free of lumps, coarse areas, or loose particles. 2024 Specifications 445 663 3.4.2.3. Organic Zinc-Rich Paints. Remove oil, grease, corrosion products, and welding slag or flux from surfaces to be repaired, and ensure the surfaces are clean and dry. Clean surface to near-white metal by wire-brushing, light grinding, or mild blasting extending into the surrounding undamaged coating to provide a smooth repair. Spray or brush-apply the paint to the prepared area in conformance with the paint manufacturer’s instructions to attain the required dry-film thickness. Provide multiple passes when using spray application. 3.5. Repair Coating Thickness. Measure thickness in the repaired area in accordance with Tex-728-I after completing repair and cooling or curing. The minimum thickness required is the same as that required for the specified galvanizing. However, if the repair uses zinc-rich paints, the minimum coating thickness is 50% higher than the specified galvanizing thickness but not greater than 4.0 mils. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 460 710 Item 460 Corrugated Metal Pipe 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install corrugated metal pipes, materials for constructing corrugated metal pipe culverts, or corrugated metal storm drain mains, laterals, stubs, and inlet leads. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Fabrication. Furnish corrugated metal pipe in accordance with Table 1. Table 1 Specifications for Corrugated Metal Pipe Pipe Type AASHTO Specification Galvanized steel and aluminized steel M 36 Aluminized Type 2 M 36 Polymer coated M 245 Asphalt coated M 190 Aluminum M 196 The pipe types and corresponding AASHTO designations are shown in Table 2. Table 2 Corrugated Metal Pipe Types Pipe Type AASHTO Classification Circular Type I Circular, smooth-lined Type IA Circular, spiral rib Type IR Arch Type II Arch, smooth-lined Type IIA Arch, spiral rib Type IIR Provide corrugated metal pipe of all types with annular corrugations, helical corrugations, or spiral ribs (corrugations) projecting outward. Provide pipe with helical end corrugations only when necessary to join new pipe to existing pipe with helical end corrugations. Provide a minimum polymer coating thickness of 10 mils on each side for pre-coated galvanized steel pipe. Galvanized metal sheets and coils used for galvanized corrugated metal pipe may be sampled and tested in accordance with Tex-708-I. Repair damaged galvanized coating in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” Repair damaged aluminized or polymer coating in accordance with AASHTO M 36 and AASHTO M 245, respectively. 2.2. Protective Coating. Furnish bituminous coating, when required, that meets AASHTO M 190, that tightly adheres to the metal, does not chip off in handling, and protects the pipe from deterioration. Coat the pipe uniformly inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 in. measured on the crests of the corrugations. Coat the pipe with additional material applied to the full inner circumference to form a smooth inside lining with a minimum thickness of 1/8 in. above the crest of the corrugations when smooth lining is specified. 2024 Specifications 460 711 2.3. Design. The diameter, permissible corrugations, and required gauges for full-circle pipe must be shown. The design size and permissible corrugations for pipe arch must be shown. The required gauges of the shell and the liner for smooth lined pipe must also be shown. Furnish the shape and minimum gauge for steel pipe arch in accordance with Tables 3, 4, 5, or 6 for the specified design size and corrugation. Use Table 7 or Table 8 for aluminum pipe arch. Refer to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets where reference is made to gauge of metal. Measure dimensions from the inside crests of the corrugations. A tolerance of ±1 in. or 2% of the equivalent circular diameter, whichever is greater, is allowed for span and rise. Table 3 Steel Pipe Arch 2-2/3 × 1/2-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 1 17 13 12 16 0.064 15 2 21 15 12 16 0.064 18 2A 23 19 12 16 0.064 21 3 28 20 12 16 0.064 24 4 35 24 12 16 0.064 30 5 42 29 12 14 0.079 36 6 49 33 12 14 0.079 42 7 57 38 12 12 0.109 48 8 64 43 12 12 0.109 54 9 71 47 12 10 0.138 60 Table 4 Steel Pipe Arch 3 × 1-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 7 53 41 12 14 0.079 48 8 60 46 12 14 0.079 54 9 66 51 12 14 0.079 60 10 73 55 12 14 0.079 66 11 81 59 12 14 0.079 72 12 87 63 12 14 0.079 78 13 95 67 12 12 0.109 84 14 103 71 18 12 0.109 90 15 112 75 18 12 0.109 96 16 117 79 18 12 0.109 102 17 128 83 24 10 0.138 108 18 137 87 24 10 0.138 114 19 142 91 24 10 0.138 120 2024 Specifications 460 712 Table 5 Steel Pipe Arch 5 × 1-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 11 81 59 12 12 0.109 72 12 87 63 12 12 0.109 78 13 95 67 12 12 0.109 84 14 103 71 18 12 0.109 90 15 112 75 18 12 0.109 96 16 117 79 18 12 0.109 102 17 128 83 24 10 0.138 108 18 137 87 24 10 0.138 114 19 142 91 24 10 0.138 120 Table 6 Steel Pipe Arch, Spiral Rib 7-1/2 × 3/4 × 3/4-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 2 20 16 12 16 0.064 18 2A 23 19 12 16 0.064 21 3 27 21 12 16 0.064 24 4 33 26 12 16 0.064 30 5 40 31 12 14 0.064 36 6 46 36 12 12 0.064 42 7 53 41 12 12 0.079 48 8 60 46 12 12 0.079 54 9 66 51 15 12 0.079 60 Table 7 Aluminum Pipe Arch 2-2/3 × 1/2-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 1 17 13 12 16 0.060 15 2 21 15 12 16 0.060 18 2A 23 19 12 16 0.060 21 3 28 20 12 14 0.075 24 4 35 24 12 14 0.075 30 5 42 29 18 12 0.105 36 6 49 33 18 12 0.105 42 7 57 38 18 10 0.135 48 8 64 43 18 10 0.135 54 9 71 47 18 8 0.164 60 2024 Specifications 460 713 Table 8 Aluminum Pipe Arch, Spiral Rib 7-1/2 × 3/4 × 3/4-in. Corrugations Design Size Span (in.) Rise (in.) Min Cover (in.) Min Gauge Required Coated Thickness (in.) Equivalent Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) 2 20 16 12 16 0.064 18 2A 23 19 12 16 0.064 21 3 27 21 15 16 0.064 24 4 33 26 18 16 0.064 30 5 40 31 18 14 0.075 36 6 46 36 18 12 0.105 42 7 53 41 21 12 0.105 48 8 60 46 18 10 0.135 54 9 66 51 21 10 0.135 60 2.4. Coupling Bands. Furnish coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe in accordance with AASHTO M 36 and AASHTO M 196 for aluminum pipe. Use coupling bands that are no more than three nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than the thickness of the pipe to be connected or no lighter than 0.052 in. for steel or 0.048 in. for aluminum. Provide coupling bands made of the same base metal and coating as the pipe. 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Designation of Type. The types of pipes will be shown on the plans by the following descriptions:  Pipe type: Corrugated metal pipe (CMP), corrugated metal pipe arch (CMP ARCH), spiral rib corrugated metal pipe (SRCMP), or spiral rib corrugated metal pipe arch (SRCMP ARCH);  Type of material: Galvanized steel, aluminum-coated (Type 2), or aluminum;  Pipe coating: Bituminous coated or polymer coated;  Special requirements: Paved invert or smooth lining; and  Pipe size: Diameter or design number. Furnish any of the material types specified above when pipe is designated as “Corrugated Metal Pipe” without a type of material or pipe coating designation. 3.2. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Backfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and backfill in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures,” except where jacking, boring, or tunneling methods are shown on the plans or permitted. Jack, bore, or tunnel in accordance with Item 476, “Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box.” Provide uniform backfill material and uniformly compacted density throughout the length of the structure so equal pressure is provided. Allow no heavy earth-moving equipment over the structure until at least 4 ft. of compacted fill (permanent or temporary) has been placed over the top of the structure, unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing. Inspect the inside periphery of the structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods before adding each new layer of loose backfill material. Continue inspections until at least 24 in. of cover is obtained. Evidence of such deformation will be reason for corrective measures as directed. Remove and replace pipe damaged by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department. 3.3. Laying Pipe. Lay pipes on the bedding from the outlet end and join the separate sections firmly together with outside laps of annular joints pointing upstream and longitudinal laps on the sides unless otherwise authorized. Coat any metal in joints not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing with a suitable asphalt paint. Lower sections of pipe into the trench without damaging the pipe or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, pipe that is not in alignment or shows excessive settlement after laying. 2024 Specifications 460 714 Lay multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches with the centerlines of individual barrels parallel. Maintain the clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes shown in Table 9, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Table 9 Required Pipe Clear Distances Diameter Full-Circle Pipe (in.) Pipe Arch Design Size Clear Distance Between Pipes (Full-Circle Pipe and Pipe Arch) 18 2 1 ft. 2 in. 21 2A 1 ft. 3 in 24 3 1 ft. 5 in. 30 4 1 ft. 8 in. 36 5 1 ft. 11 in. 42 6 2 ft. 2 in. 48 7 2 ft. 5 in. 54 8 2 ft. 10 in. 60 to 84 9 3 ft. 2 in. 90 to 120 10 and above 3 ft. 5 in. 3.4. Jointing. Provide field joints that maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of side material during the life of the installation. Provide one of the following jointing systems unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3.4.1. Coupling Bands. Use coupling bands with annular corrugations only with pipe with annular corrugations or with helical pipe or spiral rib pipe on which the ends have been rerolled to form annular corrugations. Provide bands with corrugations that have the same dimensions as the corrugations on the pipe end or are designed to engage the first or second corrugation from the end of each pipe. The band may also include a U-shaped channel to accommodate upturned flanges on the pipe. Field-join pipe with helically corrugated bands or bands with projections (dimples) when helical end corrugations are allowed. Coupling bands with projections may be used with pipe that has annular or helical end corrugations or spiral ribs. Provide bands formed with the projections in annular rows with one projection for each corrugation of helical pipe or spiral rib pipe. Provide two annular rows for bands 10-1/2 in. or 12 in. wide and four annular rows of projections for bands 16-1/2 in. or 22 in. wide. Use a coupling band width that conforms to Table 10. Connect the bands using suitable galvanized devices in accordance with AASHTO M 36. Lap coupling bands equally on each of the pipes to form a tightly closed joint after installation. Provide at least the minimum coupling band width recommended by the manufacturer for corrugations not shown in Table 10. 2024 Specifications 460 715 Table 10 Coupling Band Width Requirements Nominal Corrugation Size1 (in.) Nominal Pipe Inside Diameter2 (in.) Min Coupling Band Width (in.) Annular Corrugated Bands Helically Corrugated Bands Bands with Projections 2-2/3 × 1/2 12–36 7 12 10-1/2 42–72 10-1/2 12 10-1/2 78–843 10-1/2 12 16-1/4 3 × 1 36–72 12 14 10-1/2 78–120 12 14 16-1/4 5 × 1 36–72 20 22 12 78–120 20 22 22 7-1/2 × 3/4 × 3/4 18–60 10-1/2 12 10-1/2 66–102 10-1/2 12 16-1/4 1. For helically corrugated pipe or spiral rib pipe with rerolled ends, the nominal size refers to the dimensions of the end corrugations in the pipe. 2. Equivalent circular diameter for Type II pipe. 3. Diameter through 120 in. for annular corrugated bands used on rerolled ends of helically corrugated pipe or spiral rib pipe. The minimum diameter of bolts for coupling bands is 3/8 in. for pipe diameters 18 in. and less and 1/2 in. for pipe diameters 21 in. and greater. Provide at least two bolts for bands 12 in. wide or less. Provide at least three bolts for bands wider than 12 in. Provide galvanized hardware in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” 3.4.2. Bell and Spigot. Attach the bell to one end of the corrugated metal pipe at the manufacturing plant before shipment. Provide a bell with a minimum 6-in. stab depth. Install the gasket on the spigot end and apply lubricant in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide gaskets that meet ASTM F477 with Type A Shore durometer hardness of 45 ±5. Do not use thermoplastic elastomer as the basic polymer. Push the spigot end of the pipe into the bell end of the previously laid pipe during laying of the pipe. 3.4.3. Pipe Connections and Stub Ends. Make connections of pipe to existing pipe or appurtenances as shown on the plans or as directed. Mortar or concrete the bottom of the existing structure, if necessary, to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the new connection. Insulate portions of aluminum pipe that are to be in contact with metal other than aluminum with a coating of bituminous material meeting the requirements of Section 460.2.2., “Protective Coating.” Extend the coating at least 1 ft. beyond the area of contact. Restore any damage that results from making the connection when connecting pipe into existing structures that will remain in service. Seal stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the pipe. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot. Pipe will be measured between the ends of the barrel along the flow line, not including safety end treatments. Safety end treatments will be measured in accordance with Item 467, “Safety End Treatment.” Pipe that is required to be jacked, bored, or tunneled will be measured in accordance with Item 476. Where spurs, branches, or connections to existing pipe lines are involved, measurement of the spur or new connecting pipe will be made from the intersection of the flow line with the outside surface of the pipe into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of pipe, the length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement but no other portion of the structure length or width will be included. For multiple pipes, the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels. 2024 Specifications 460 716 This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Corrugated Metal Pipe,” “Corrugated Metal Pipe Arch,” “Spiral Rib Corrugated Metal Pipe,” or “Spiral Rib Corrugated Metal Pipe Arch” of the type, size, and coating specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, placing, and joining of pipes; jointing materials; all connections to new or existing structures; breaking back, removing, and disposing of portions of the existing structure; replacing portions of the existing structure; cutting pipe ends on skew or slope; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Protection methods for excavations greater than 5 ft. deep will be measured and paid for as required in accordance with Item 402, “Trench Excavation Protection,” or Item 403, “Temporary Special Shoring.” Excavation, shaping, bedding, and backfill will be paid for in accordance with Item 400. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is used at the Contractor’s option, payment will be made under this Item. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is required, payment will be made under Item 476. 2024 Specifications 462 717 Item 462 Concrete Box Culverts and Drains 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, construct, and install concrete box culverts and drains. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. General. Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete”  Item 464, “Reinforced Concrete Pipe” Provide cast-in-place or precast, formed or machine-made, box culverts and drains. Use Class S concrete for top slabs of cast-in-place concrete culverts for culverts with overlay, and a one- to two-course surface treatment or a top slab that is the final riding surface, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use Class C concrete for the rest of the culvert and for all other cast-in-place boxes. Culverts with fill do not require Class S concrete. Furnish material for precast formed and machine-made box culverts in accordance with DMS-7305, “Fabrication and Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Drainage Structures.” 2.2. Fabrication. 2.2.1. Cast-in-Place. Meet Item 420 and Item 422, “Concrete Superstructures.” 2.2.2. Precast. Multi-project fabrication plants, as defined in DMS-7305, for precast formed and machine-made box culverts must be approved in accordance with DMS-7305. The Materials and Tests Division maintains a list of approved multi-project precast box culvert fabrication plants on the Department’s MPL. Fabricate precast boxes in accordance with DMS-7305. 2.3. Testing. 2.3.1. Cast-in-Place. Provide test specimens that meet Item 421. 2.3.2. Precast. Make, cure, and test compressive test specimens for precast formed and machine-made box culverts in accordance with DMS-7305. 2.3.3. Testing Equipment. The producer must furnish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precast plant. 2.4. Lifting Holes. Provide no more than four lifting holes in each section for precast boxes. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes large enough for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Use lifting holes no larger than 3 in. in diameter. Cut no more than 5 in. in any direction of reinforcement per layer for lifting holes. 2.5. Marking. Clearly mark each precast unit with the following:  name or trademark of fabricator and plant location, 2024 Specifications 462 718  ASTM designation and product designation (when applicable),  date of manufacture,  box size,  minimum and maximum fill heights,  designation “TX” for precast units fabricated in accordance with DMS-7305,  fabricator’s designated approval stamp for each approved unit,  designation “SR” for boxes meeting sulfate-resistant concrete plan requirements (when applicable), and  precast drainage structures used for jacking and boring (when applicable). Mark one end of each box section, for boxes without lifting holes, on the inside and outside walls to indicate the top or bottom as it will be installed. Indent markings into the box section or paint them on each box with waterproof paint. 2.6. Tolerances. Ensure precast sections meet the permissible variations listed in ASTM C1577. Ensure that the sides of a section at each end do not vary from being perpendicular to the top and bottom by more than 1/2 in. when measured diagonally between opposite interior corners. Deviations from this tolerance will be acceptable if the sections can be fitted at the plant and the joint opening at any point does not exceed 1 in. Use match-marks for proper installation on sections that have been accepted in this manner. Ensure wall and slab thicknesses are not less than shown on the plans except for occasional deficiencies not greater than 3/16 in. or 5%, whichever is greater. If proper jointing is not affected, thicknesses in excess of plan requirements are acceptable. 2.6.1. Boxes for Jacking Operations. Use boxes for jacking operations as defined in Item 476, “Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box,” meeting the following additional requirements:  the box ends must be square such that no point deviates more than 3/8 in. from a plane placed on the end of the box that is perpendicular to the box sides,  the slab and wall thicknesses must not be less than specified on the plans and must not exceed the specified thickness by more than 1/2 in., and  variations in laying lengths of two opposite surfaces of the box must not exceed 1/4 in. 2.7. Defects and Repair. Repair precast boxes in accordance with the DMS-7305 Annex. Precast boxes may be rejected for any of the conditions stated in this Annex. 2.8. Storage and Shipment. Store precast sections on a level surface. Do not place any load on the sections until design strength is reached and curing is complete. Store and ship precast boxes in accordance with DMS-7305. 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Backfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and backfill in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures,” except where jacking, boring, or tunneling methods are shown on the plans or permitted. Jack, bore, or tunnel in accordance with Item 476. Immediate backfilling is permitted for all box structures where joints consist of materials other than mortar. Take precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the boxes or damage to the joints. Remove and replace boxes damaged by the Contractor at no expense to the Department. 3.2. Placement of Boxes. Place the box sections as shown on the plans or as directed when precast boxes are used to form multiple barrel structures. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plans or as directed. Start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched, unless otherwise authorized. Fit, match, and lay the boxes to form a smooth, uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. Lower the box sections into the trench, for 2024 Specifications 462 719 trench installations, without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent earthen or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, boxes that are not in alignment or show excessive settlement after laying. Form and place cast-in-place boxes in accordance with Item 420. 3.3. Jointing. Use any of the jointing materials in accordance with the joint requirements specified in Item 464, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Box joints for rubber gasketed material may be substituted for tongue and groove joints, provided they meet the requirements of ASTM C1677 for design of the joints and permissible variations in dimensions. 3.4. Connections and Stub Ends. Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, drains, or drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls, wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap, or other structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the box. Fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure for precast boxes. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.5. Extending. Break back and extend existing culverts in accordance with Section 420.4.8., “Extending Existing Substructures,” and Section 422.4.5., “Extending Existing Slabs,” as applicable. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot. Measurement will be made between the ends of the culvert or drain along the flow line, not including safety end treatments. Safety end treatments will be measured in accordance with Item 467, “Safety End Treatment.” Measurement of spurs, branches, or new connection box section will be made from the intersection of the flow line with the outside surface of the structure into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, wingwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of culverts or drains, the length of box section tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement, but no other portion of the structure length or width will be included. The measured length of multiple barrel structures will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Concrete Box Culvert” of the size specified. This price is full compensation for constructing, furnishing, and transporting sections; preparation and shaping of the bed; backfill material between box sections; jointing of sections; jointing material; cutting of sections on skew or slope; connections to new or existing structures; breaking back, removing, and disposing of portions of the existing structure and replacing portions of the existing structure as required to make connections; concrete and reinforcing steel; and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. Protection methods for excavations greater than 5 ft. deep will be measured and paid for as required under Item 402, “Trench Excavation Protection,” or Item 403, “Temporary Special Shoring.” Excavation, shaping, bedding, and backfill will be paid for in accordance with Item 400. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is used at the Contractor’s option, payment will be made under this Item. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is required, payment will be made under Item 476. 2024 Specifications 464 720 Item 464 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install reinforced concrete pipe, materials for precast concrete pipe culverts, or precast concrete storm drain mains, laterals, stubs, and inlet leads. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Fabrication. Multi-project fabrication plants, as defined in DMS-7305, “Fabrication and Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Drainage Structures,” must be approved by the Materials and Tests Division in accordance with DMS-7305 before furnishing precast reinforced concrete pipe for Department projects. The Department’s MPL includes approved multi-project reinforced concrete pipe fabrication plants. Furnish material and fabricate reinforced concrete pipe in accordance with DMS-7305. 2.2. Design. 2.2.1. General. The class and D-load equivalents are shown in Table 1. Furnish arch pipe in accordance with ASTM C506 and the dimensions shown in Table 2. Furnish horizontal elliptical pipe in accordance with ASTM C507 and the dimensions shown in Table 3. For arch pipe and horizontal elliptical pipe, the minimum height of cover required is 1 ft. Table 1 Circular Pipe ASTM C76 and ASTM C655 Class D-Load I 800 II 1,000 III 1,350 IV 2,000 V 3,000 Table 2 Arch Pipe Design Size Equivalent Diameter (in.) Rise (in.) Span (in.) 1 18 13-1/2 22 2 21 15-1/2 26 3 24 18 28-1/2 4 30 22-1/2 36-1/4 5 36 26-5/8 43-3/4 6 42 31-5/16 51-1/8 7 48 36 58-1/2 8 54 40 65 9 60 45 73 10 72 54 88 2024 Specifications 464 721 Table 3 Horizontal Elliptical Pipe Design Size Equivalent Diameter (in.) Rise (in.) Span (in.) 0 15 12 19 1 18 14 23 2 24 19 30 3 27 22 34 4 30 24 38 5 33 27 42 6 36 29 45 7 39 32 49 8 42 34 53 9 48 38 60 10 54 43 68 2.2.2. Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling. Design pipe for jacking, boring, or tunneling considering the specific installation conditions such as the soil conditions, installation methods, anticipated deflection angles, and jacking stresses. Provide design notes and drawings signed and sealed by a Texas licensed professional engineer when requested. Provide steel reinforcement in bell and spigot. 2.3. Marking. Furnish each section of reinforced concrete pipe marked with the following information in accordance with DMS-7305:  class or D-load of pipe,  ASTM designation,  date of manufacture,  pipe size,  name or trademark of fabricator and plant location,  designation “TX” for precast units fabricated in accordance with DMS-7305,  designated fabricator’s approval stamp for each approved unit,  pipe to be used for jacking and boring (when applicable), and  designation “SR” for pipe meeting sulfate-resistant concrete plan requirements (when applicable). Clearly mark one end of each section during the process of manufacture or immediately thereafter for pipe with elliptical reinforcement. Mark the pipe on the inside and outside of opposite walls to show the location of the top or bottom of the pipe as it should be installed unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious. Mark the pipe section by indenting or painting with waterproof paint. 2.4. Inspection. Provide access for inspection of the finished pipe at the project site before and during installation. 2.5. Causes for Rejection. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected for any of the conditions stated in the DMS-7305 Annex. 2.6. Repairs. Make repairs, if necessary, in accordance with the DMS-7305 Annex. 2.7. Jointing Materials. Use any of the following materials for the making of joints unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for all jointing materials except mortar. 2.7.1. Mortar. Provide mortar for joints that meets the requirements of Section 464.3.3., “Jointing.” 2.7.2. Cold-Applied, Plastic Asphalt Sewer Joint Compound. Provide a material that consists of natural or processed asphalt base, suitable volatile solvents, and inert filler. Ensure the consistency is such that the ends of the pipe can be coated with a layer of the compound up to 1/2 in. thick by trowel. Provide a joint 2024 Specifications 464 722 compound that cures to a firm, stiff plastic condition after application. Provide a material of a uniform mixture. Stir any small separation found in the container into a uniform mix before using. Provide a material that meets the requirements shown in Table 4 when tested in accordance with Tex-526-C. Table 4 Cold-Applied, Plastic Asphalt Sewer Joint Compound Material Requirements Composition Analysis Asphalt base, 100%–% volatiles–% ash, % by weight 28–45 Volatiles, 212°F evaporation, 24 hr., % by weight 10–26 Mineral matter, determined as ash, % by weight 30–55 Consistency, cone penetration, 150 q, 5 sec., 77°F 150–275 2.7.3. Rubber Gaskets. Provide gaskets that conform to ASTM C1619 Class A or Class C. Meet the requirements of ASTM C443 for design of the pipe joints and permissible variations in dimensions. 2.7.4. Pre-Formed Flexible Joint Sealants. Pre-formed flexible joint sealants may be used for sealing joints of tongue-and-groove concrete pipe. Provide flexible joint sealants that meet the requirements of ASTM C990. Use flexible joint sealants that do not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength. Supply in extruded rope form of suitable cross-section. Provide a size of the pre-formed flexible joint sealant in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and large enough to properly seal the joint. Protect flexible joint sealants with a suitable wrapper able to maintain the integrity of the jointing material when the wrapper is removed. 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Backfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and backfill in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures,” except where jacking, boring, or tunneling methods are permitted. Jack, bore, or tunnel the pipe in accordance with Item 476, “Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box.” Immediate backfilling is permitted if joints consist of materials other than mortar. Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the pipe or damage to the joints. Do not use heavy earth-moving equipment to haul over the structure until at least 4 ft. of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed over the structure, unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing. Remove and replace pipe damaged by the Contractor at no expense to the Department. 3.2. Laying Pipe. Start the laying of pipe on the bedding at the outlet end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades unless otherwise authorized. Fit, match, and lay the pipe to form a smooth, uniform conduit. Cut cross trenches in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly on the bedding where bell-and-spigot pipe is used. Cut cross trenches no more than 2 in. larger than the bell ends of the pipe. Lower sections of pipe into the trench without damaging the pipe or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the pipe before the pipe is placed. Prevent earthen or bedding material from entering the pipe as it is laid. Lay the pipe in the trench, when elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, so the markings for the top or bottom are not more than 5° from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, pipe that is not in alignment or shows excessive settlement after laying. Lay multiple lines of reinforced concrete pipe with the centerlines of the individual barrels parallel. Use the clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes shown in Table 5 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use the equivalent diameter from Table 2 or Table 3 for arch pipe or horizontal elliptical pipe to determine the clear distance requirement shown in Table 5. 2024 Specifications 464 723 Table 5 Minimum Clear Distance Between Pipes Equivalent Diameter Min Clear Distance 18 in. 9 in. 24 in. 11 in. 30 in. 1 ft. 1 in. 36 in. 1 ft. 3 in. 42 in. 1 ft. 5 in. 48 in. 1 ft. 7 in. 54 in. 1 ft. 11 in. 60–84 in. 2 ft. 3.3. Jointing. Make available an appropriate rolling device similar to an automobile mechanic’s “creeper” for conveyance through small-size pipe structures. 3.3.1. Joints Sealed with Hydraulic Cement Mortar. Use Type S mortar meeting the requirements of ASTM C270. Clean and wet the pipe ends before making the joint. Plaster the lower half of the bell or groove and the upper half of the tongue or spigot with mortar. Pack mortar into the joint from both inside and outside the pipe after the pipes are tightly jointed. Finish the inside smooth and flush with adjacent joints of pipe. Form a bead of semicircular cross-section over tongue-and-groove joints outside the pipe, extending at least 1 in. on each side of the joint. Form the mortar for bell-and-spigot joints to a 45° fillet between the outer edge of the bell and the spigot. Cure mortar joints by keeping the joints wet for at least 48 hr. or until the backfill has been completed, whichever is first. Place fill or backfill once the mortar jointing material has cured for at least 6 hr. Conduct jointing only when the atmospheric temperature is above 40°F. Protect mortared joints against freezing by backfilling or other approved methods for at least 24 hr. Driveway culverts do not require mortar banding on the outside of the pipe. Furnish pipes, with approval, that are large enough for a person to enter with the groove between 1/2 in. and 3/4 in. longer than the tongue. Such pipe may be laid and backfilled without mortar joints. Clean the space on the interior of the pipe between the end of the tongue and the groove of all foreign material, thoroughly wet and fill with mortar around the entire circumference of the pipe, and finish flush after the backfilling has been completed. 3.3.2. Joints Using Cold-Applied, Plastic Asphalt Sewer Joint Compound. Ensure both ends of the pipes are clean and dry. Trowel or otherwise place a 1/2-in. thick layer of the compound in the groove end of the pipe covering at least 2/3 of the joint face around the entire circumference. Shove home the tongue end of the next pipe with enough pressure to make a tight joint. Remove any excess mastic projecting into the pipe after the joint is made. Backfill after the joint has been inspected and approved. 3.3.3. Joints Using Rubber Gaskets. Make the joint assembly in conformance with the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. Make joints watertight when using rubber gaskets. Backfill after the joint has been inspected and approved. 3.3.4. Joints Using Pre-Formed Flexible Joint Sealants. Install pre-formed flexible joint sealants in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Place the joint sealer so no dirt or other deleterious materials contact the joint sealing material. Pull or push home the pipe with enough force to properly seal the joint. Remove any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow. Store pre-formed flexible joint sealants in an area warmed naturally or artificially to above 70°F in an approved manner when the atmospheric temperature is below 60°F. Apply flexible joint sealants to pipe joints immediately before placing pipe in trench, and connect pipe to previously laid pipe. Backfill after the joint has been inspected and approved. 3.4. Connections and Stub Ends. Make connections of concrete pipe to existing pipes, pipe storm drains, or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 464 724 Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Make connections between concrete pipe and corrugated metal pipe with a suitable concrete collar and a minimum thickness of 4 in. unless otherwise shown on the plans. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the pipe. Fill lift holes with concrete, mortar, or precast concrete plugs after the pipe is in place. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot. Measurement will be made between the ends of the pipe barrel along the flow line, not including safety end treatments. Safety end treatments will be measured in accordance with Item 467, “Safety End Treatment.” Pipe that will be jacked, bored, or tunneled will be measured in accordance with Item 476. Measurement of spurs, branches, or new connecting pipe will be made from the intersection of the flow line with the outside surface of the pipe into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of pipe, the length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement, but no other portion of the structure length or width will be included. For multiple pipes, the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Reinforced Concrete Pipe,” “Reinforced Concrete Pipe (Arch),” or “Reinforced Concrete Pipe (Elliptical)” of the size and D-load specified or of the size and class specified. This price is full compensation for constructing, furnishing, transporting, placing, and joining pipes; shaping the bed; cutting pipes on skew or slope; connecting to new or existing structures; breaking back, removing, and disposing of portions of the existing structure; replacing portions of the existing structure; cutting pipe ends on skew or slope; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Protection methods for excavations greater than 5 ft. deep will be measured and paid for as required under Item 402, “Trench Excavation Protection,” or Item 403, “Temporary Special Shoring.” Excavation, shaping, bedding, and backfill will be paid for in accordance with Item 400. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is used at the Contractor’s option, payment will be made under this Item. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is required, payment will be made under Item 476. 2024 Specifications 467 730 Item 467 Safety End Treatment 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, construct, and install safety end treatments for drainage structures, or install or replace pipe runners or pipe runner assemblies on existing drainage structures. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. General. Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 432, “Riprap”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete”  Item 442, “Metal for Structures”  Item 445, “Galvanizing”  Item 460, “Corrugated Metal Pipe”  Item 464, “Reinforced Concrete Pipe” Use Class C concrete for cast-in-place and precast concrete units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish cast-in-place or precast safety end treatments unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish Class B concrete for concrete riprap unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide galvanized steel for prefabricated metal end sections in accordance with Item 460. Furnish pipe runners in accordance with the following:  ASTM A1085;  ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B;  ASTM A500, Grade B; or  API 5L, Grade X42. Furnish plates and angles in accordance with ASTM A36. Furnish nuts and bolts in accordance with ASTM A307. Galvanize pipes, plates, angles, nuts, and bolts in accordance with Item 445. 2.2. Fabrication. Fabricate cast-in-place concrete units and precast units in accordance with Item 420. Provide either prefabricated metal end sections or mitered corrugated metal pipe (CMP) when specified for the pipe structure unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide one of the following when reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) is specified for the pipe structure, unless otherwise shown on the plans:  mitered RCP, or  precast safety end treatment (SET) units. Provide riprap only if the plans specifically require it for this alternative. 2.2.1. SET Types. 2.2.1.1. Type I. Provide Type I SET consisting of reinforced concrete headwalls or wingwalls and pipe runners as shown on the plans when required. 2024 Specifications 467 731 2.2.1.2. Type II. Provide Type II SET as shown on the plans consisting of the following:  CMP or RCP mitered to the proper slope, concrete riprap, and pipe runners, when required;  prefabricated metal end sections, concrete riprap, and pipe runners, when required; or  precast SET units, concrete riprap, when required, and pipe runners, when required. 2.2.2. Lifting Holes. Provide no more than four lifting holes in each section for precast units. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes large enough for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the section. The maximum hole diameter is 3 in. at the inside surface of the wall and 4 in. at the outside surface. Cut no more than one longitudinal wire or two circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. Repair spalled areas around lifting holes. 2.2.3. Marking. Clearly mark the following on each precast unit, mitered CMP, mitered RCP, or metal end section before shipment from the casting or fabrication yard:  the date of manufacture,  the name or trademark of the manufacturer, and  the type and size designation. 2.2.4. Storage and Shipment. Store precast units on a level surface. Do not place any loads on precast units until the design strength is reached. Do not ship units until design strength requirements have been met. 2.2.5. Causes for Rejection. Precast units may be rejected for not meeting any one of the specification requirements. Individual units may also be rejected for fractures or cracks passing through the wall or surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture surfaces. Remove rejected units from the project and replace with acceptable units meeting the requirements of this Item. 2.2.6. Defects and Repairs. Occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental damage sustained during handling may be repaired in accordance with the Department’s Concrete Repair Manual. The repaired units will be acceptable if they conform to the requirements of this Item and the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured in conformance with pertinent specifications. Repair damaged galvanizing in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. General. Remove portions of existing structures in accordance with Section 420.4.8., “Extending Existing Substructures.” Drill, dowel, and grout in accordance with Item 420. Furnish concrete riprap in accordance with Item 432. Provide riprap on all prefabricated metal end sections. 3.2. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Backfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and backfill in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures.” Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement or damage to the units. Bed precast units on foundations of firm and stable material accurately shaped to conform to the bases of the units. 3.3. Placement of Precast Units. Provide adequate means to lift and place the precast units. Fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.4. Connections. Make connections to new or existing structures as shown on the plans. Furnish jointing material in accordance with Item 464. Also remove a length of the existing pipe from the headwall to the joint when removing existing headwalls as shown on the plans or as approved. Re-lay the removed pipe if approved, or furnish and lay a length of new pipe. 2024 Specifications 467 732 3.5. Install or Replace Pipe Runners or Assemblies. Install or replace individual pipe runners or pipe runner assemblies on existing drainage structures as shown on the plans. 4. MEASUREMENT SETs of all types will be measured by each barrel of each structure end. Pipe runners or pipe runner assemblies installed or replaced on existing structure will be measured by each installed or replaced on each structure end. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for the various designations of “Safety End Treatment” specified as follows:  “SET (Type I) (Barrel Span) (Wall Height) (Slope, Horizontal:Vertical) (Orientation, Cross or Parallel)”;  “SET (Type I) (Pipe Diameter or Design) (Slope, Horizontal:Vertical) (Orientation, Cross or Parallel)”;  “SET (Type II) (Pipe Diameter or Design) (Pipe Material) (Slope, Horizontal:Vertical) (Orientation, Cross or Parallel)”;  “SET (Pipe Runner)”; and  “SET (Pipe Runner Assembly).” For payment purposes, the wingwall heights of Type I SETs for box culverts will be rounded to the nearest foot. This price is full compensation for constructing, furnishing, transporting, and installing the end treatments; pipe runners, or pipe runner assemblies, connecting to existing structure; breaking back, removing and disposing of portions of the existing structure, removing and disposing of existng pipe runner or pipe runner assemblies, and replacing portions of the existing structure as required to make connections; excavation and backfill; furnishing concrete, reinforcing steel, CMP or RCP, and pipe runners; and concrete riprap, nuts, bolts, plates, angles, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. The removal and re-laying of existing pipe or the furnishing of new pipe to replace existing pipe will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. The mitered length of CMP or RCP that is a part of the SET (Type II) will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. The limits for payment for pipe will be as shown on the plans and paid for in accordance with the pertinent bid item. The limits of riprap to be included in the unit price bid for each SET will be shown on the plans. Any riprap placed beyond the limits shown will be paid for in accordance with Item 432. Riprap between multiple precast SET units will be required as shown on the plans and is included in the unit price bid for SET. When precast SETs are provided as an option to mitered RCP, riprap aprons will not be required unless shown on the plans. The plans will show the limits of the riprap to be included with the precast SET for payment. 2024 Specifications 474 743 Item 474 Linear Drains 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install linear drains of the sizes and descriptions shown on the plans as cast-in-place trench drain, precast trench drain, or slotted drain. 2. MATERIALS Provide materials in accordance with the following. 2.1. Cast-in-Place Trench Drain. Provide a trench with a slope as shown on the plans. Furnish forms capable of maintaining proper alignment during the concrete placement. Ensure connections to structures do not restrict the hydraulic flow of the trench drain. Use Class C concrete conforming to Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete.” Provide grates and frames conforming to the requirements of DMS-4370, “Precast Trench Drain.” Minimum plan dimensions for removable grates are 12 in. wide and 36 in. long. Grates with lesser dimensions must not be removable. Provide shop drawings sealed by a licensed professional engineer stating the trench drain system meets loading requirements. Submit documents showing design loadings if using a proprietary system. Furnish documentation in accordance with Section 471.2.3., “Documentation.” 2.2. Precast Trench Drains. Furnish precast trench drains from pre-approved manufacturers in accordance with DMS-4370. The Department’s MPL includes approved manufacturers and their products. Unapproved precast trench drains will not be accepted. Furnish materials conforming to the following where required.  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete” (Use Class C concrete unless otherwise shown on the plans.)  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete” 2.3. Slotted Drains. Fabricate and furnish materials in accordance with Item 460, “Corrugated Metal Pipe.” Furnish galvanized steel or aluminized steel (AASHTO M 36, Type 2) pipe with a minimum thickness of 16 gauge. Slotted drains consist of a drain guide assembly attached to a longitudinal opening in a corrugated metal pipe. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, fabricate slotted drains with bearing bars and crossbar spacers meeting the requirements of ASTM A36 welded to the longitudinal opening in the corrugated metal pipe. Galvanize the drain guide assembly after fabrication in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” Clean and repair welded areas and heat-affected zones in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” 2.4. Slotted Drain Outfalls. Slotted drain outfalls consist of the corrugated metal pipe that connects the slotted drain to the main drainage line. 2.5. Backfill. Provide cement-stabilized backfill in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures,” or high-slump, low-strength concrete with a minimum of 180 lb. of cement per cubic yard. 2024 Specifications 474 744 3. CONSTRUCTION OF CAST-IN-PLACE TRENCH DRAINS Perform excavation in accordance with Item 400. Construct trench with a slope as shown on the plans. Submit shop drawings that provide enough detail to ensure seamless installation of the trench drain adjacent to the proposed or existing pavement structure. If using a proprietary system, provide shop drawings that contain the manufacturer’s installation guidelines and any sequential order of construction. Construct the trench drain with a maximum allowable tolerance of ±1/16 in. for dimensional accuracy and rail co-planarity. Provide a smooth finish on the surface of the trench that will convey runoff. Make connections to new or existing structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Remove and dispose of trench drain forms properly. Install grates with retaining pins on each of the four corners. Remove all construction debris from the trench drain. Do not provide removable trench drain grates at any location where wheeled vehicles may drive over them, including roadway lanes, shoulders, and driveways. Remove all construction debris from the trench drain. 4. CONSTRUCTION OF PRECAST TRENCH DRAINS Place precast trench drains in concrete pavement or encased in a concrete grade beam and subgrade designed to support H-20 wheel loading. Perform excavation in accordance with Item 400. Construct trench with a slope as shown on the plans. Use interconnecting end profiles on adjoining channels to maintain channel alignment within ±1/16 in. Use non-sloping sections as shown on the plans or as directed. Assemble and install precast trench drains in conformance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations at the locations directed on the plans. Provide shop drawings containing the manufacturer’s installation guidelines. Encase precast trench drains, not cast in concrete pavement, in concrete grade beams, as shown on the plans and suitable to support the trench drain and retain the trench grate from pull out. Ensure the grade and alignment of the installed grates match the grade and alignment of the surrounding pavement. Do not provide removable trench drain grates at any location where wheeled vehicles may drive over them, including roadway lanes, shoulders, and driveways. Remove all construction debris from the trench drain. 5. CONSTRUCTION OF SLOTTED DRAINS Install slotted drains and slotted drain outfalls as shown on the plans and in accordance with the requirements of Item 460. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Item 400. Backfill trenches as shown on the plans or as directed. Furnish slotted drains in 20-ft. lengths, minimizing the number of joints required. 6. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot, between the ends of the linear drain along the pavement surface as installed, complete and in place. Where inlets are included in lines of linear drain, that length of drain tying into the structure wall will be included for measurements, but no other portion of the structure length or width will be included. 2024 Specifications 474 745 7. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Cast-in-Place Trench Drain,” “Precast Trench Drain (in Concrete Pavement),” “Precast Trench Drain (Without Concrete Pavement),” or “Slotted Drain” of the size specified. This price is full compensation for structure excavation, installing the trench drain, concrete, reinforcing steel, reinforcement anchors, other connecting devices, furnishing all materials (including forms, rails, anchorages, support bars, and grates), tools, labor, equipment, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 481 752 Item 481 Pipe for Drains 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install pipe for drains. 2. MATERIALS Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, and furnish PVC fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM D2466. PVC pipe and fittings meeting the requirements of ASTM D3034 Type SDR-35 may be used for installations encased in concrete or buried in soil. Furnish a manufacturer’s certification stating the material meets the appropriate ASTM specification. Furnish pipe marked with:  manufacturer’s name or trademark and code;  nominal size;  PVC cell classification (e.g., 12454-B);  schedule or other legend (e.g., SDR-35 PVC Sewer Pipe); and  specification designation (e.g., ASTM D1785). Furnish fittings marked with:  manufacturer’s name or trademark;  nominal size;  material designation (if using ASTM D2466) (e.g., PVC) or PVC cell classification (if using ASTM D3034); and  other legend (if using ASTM D3034) (e.g., SDR-35) and specification designation (e.g., ASTM D3034). Furnish solvent meeting the requirements of ASTM D2564 for solvent-welding of fittings. Provide other types of pipe and fittings as specified. Provide fittings, hangers, clamps, straps, anchors, and guard plates as shown on the plans. 3. CONSTRUCTION Excavate and backfill for pipe installation in accordance with Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures.” Install pipe as shown on the plans or as directed. Solvent-weld all fittings, including splice fittings, to provide a watertight fit. Do not splice straight sections of pipe at intervals shorter than 20 ft. unless at the end of a run or otherwise approved. Degrease all exposed PVC pipe and fittings, and apply an acrylic water-based primer followed by a coating of the same color used for adjacent concrete surface, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Install other types of pipe (material other than PVC) in conformance with manufacturer’s specifications. 2024 Specifications 481 753 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot along the centerline of the installed pipe of the nominal size shown on the plans. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Pipe” of the sizes and types specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing the pipe and for fittings, hangers, clamps, straps, anchors, guard plates, painting, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Excavation and backfill will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 2024 Specifications 496 764 Item 496 Removing Structures 1. DESCRIPTION Remove and either dispose of or salvage structures. 2. CONSTRUCTION 2.1. Demolition Plans. Follow the demolition sequence shown on the plans for bridge structures to be removed or submit a demolition plan if shown on the plans. Include in the required demolition plan the type and location of equipment to be used, the method and sequence of removal of the structural elements, and a narrative indicating the stability of the partially demolished structure is maintained throughout the demolition process. Have these plans signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer when demolished structure intersects active roadways and as otherwise shown on the plans. Submit required demolition plans at least 14 days before starting work unless otherwise directed. Department approval of these plans is not required, but the Department reserves the right to request modifications to the plans when work could affect the safety of the traveling public and when around other transportation facilities to remain in place. Notify the Department 30 days before starting any bridge demolition work to allow for required notifications to other agencies. 2.2. Removal. 2.2.1. Pipes. Avoid damaging appurtenances determined by the Engineer to be salvageable. 2.2.2. Concrete, Brick, or Stone Structures. Portions of structures that will not interfere with the proposed construction may remain in place 2 ft. or more below the permanent ground line. Square off remaining structures and cut reinforcement flush with the surface of the concrete. 2.2.3. Steel Structures. Dismantle steel to be retained by the Department or re-erected by cold-cutting fastener heads and punching or drilling the remaining portion of the fastener, air-arc gouging welded connections, and flame-cutting beams along a straight line. The Engineer may approve other methods of cutting. Cut beams at the locations shown on the plans. Match-mark steel to be re-erected with paint in conformance with the erection drawings. Remove steel piles or cut off 2 ft. or more below the permanent ground line. 2.2.4. Timber Structures. Remove all fasteners from timber determined by the Engineer to be salvageable. Remove timber piles or cut off 2 ft. or more below the permanent ground line. 2.3. Salvage. Avoid damage to materials shown on the plans to be salvaged. Deliver materials to be retained by the Department to the location shown on the plans. Block up salvaged steel materials off the ground. 2.4. Disposal. Material removed that is not deemed to be salvageable is the property of the Contractor. Dispose of removed material off the right of way in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 2.5. Backfill. Backfill excavation and voids to the original ground line if resulting from the removal of structures. Place backfill that will support any portion of the roadbed or embankment to the same requirements for placing embankment. Backfill other areas in 10-in. layers, loose measurement, and compact to the density of adjacent undisturbed material. 3. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each structure or by the foot. 2024 Specifications 496 765 4. PAYMENT The work performed in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Removing Structures” of the type of structure specified. This price is full compensation for demolition plan preparation, loading, hauling, disposal, stockpiling, removal of appurtenances, excavation and backfill, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 500 769 Item 500 Mobilization 1. DESCRIPTION Establish and remove offices, plants, and facilities. Move personnel, equipment, and supplies to and from the project or the vicinity of the project site to begin work or complete work on Contract Items. Bonds and insurance are required for performing mobilization. For Contracts with emergency mobilization, provide a person and method of contact available 24 hr. per day, 7 days per week, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The time of notice will be the transmission time of the written notice or notice provided orally by the Department’s representative. 2. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the lump sum or each as the work progresses. Mobilization is calculated on the base bid only and will not be paid for separately on any additive alternate items added to the Contract. 3. PAYMENT For this Item, the adjusted Contract amount will be calculated as the total Contract amount less the lump sum for mobilization. Material on hand will not be considered as a construction item earned when calculating mobilization payment. Except for Contracts with callout or emergency work, mobilization will be paid in partial payments as follows.  Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment or performance bonds and required insurance.  Payment will be made upon verification of documented expenditures for plant and facility setup. The combined amount for all these facilities will be no more than 10% of the mobilization lump sum or 1% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less.  When 1% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 50% of the mobilization lump sum bid or 5% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less, will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.  When 5% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid or 10% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less, will be paid. Previous payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount.  When 10% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 90% of the mobilization lump sum bid or 10% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less, will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.  Upon final acceptance, 97% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.  Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for “Mobilization” will be made after all submittals are received, after final quantities have been determined, and when any separate vegetative establishment and maintenance, test, and performance periods provided for in the Contract have been successfully completed. For projects with extended maintenance or performance periods, payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for “Mobilization” will be made 6 mo. after final acceptance. 2024 Specifications 500 770 For Contracts with callout or emergency work, “Mobilization” will be paid as follows.  Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment of performance bonds and required insurance.  Mobilization for callout work will be paid for each callout work request.  Mobilization for emergency work will be paid for each emergency work request. 2024 Specifications 502 771 Item 502 Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling 1. DESCRIPTION Provide, install, move, replace, maintain, clean, and remove all traffic control devices shown on the plans and as directed. Temporary work zone (TWZ) traffic control devices manufactured after December 31, 2019, must have been successfully tested to the crashworthiness requirements of the 2016 edition of the AASHTO Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH). An exception to the manufacture date applies when, based on the project’s date of letting, a category of MASH-2016 compliant TWZ traffic control devices was not approved, or was not self-certified. In such case, devices that meet NCHRP-350 or MASH-2009 may be used. Temporary work zone (TWZ) traffic control devices manufactured on or before December 31, 2019, must at a minimum have been successfully tested to the crashworthiness requirements of NCHRP-350 or MASH-2009. These devices may continue to be used throughout their normal service lives. Such TWZ traffic control devices include:  portable sign supports,  barricades,  portable traffic barriers designated exclusively for use in TWZs,  crash cushions designated exclusively for use in TWZs,  longitudinal channelizers, and  truck-mounted attenuators (TMAs) and trailer attenuators (TAs). Category I devices (i.e., lightweight devices), such as cones, tubular markers, and drums without lights or signs attached, may be self-certified by the vendor or provider, with documentation provided to the Department, or as shown on Department’s Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Device List. 2. CONSTRUCTION Comply with the requirements of Article 7.2., “Safety.” Implement the traffic control plan (TCP) shown on the plans. Install traffic control devices straight and plumb. Make changes to the TCP only as approved. Minor adjustments to meet field conditions are allowed. Submit Contractor-proposed TCP changes, signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer, for approval. The Engineer may develop, sign, and seal Contractor-proposed changes. Changes must conform to guidelines established in the TMUTCD using approved products from the Department’s Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Device List. Maintain traffic control devices by taking corrective action when notified. Corrective actions include, but are not limited to, cleaning, replacing, straightening, covering, and removing devices. Maintain the devices such that they are properly positioned and spaced, are legible, and have retroreflective characteristics that meet requirements day or night and in all weather conditions. 2024 Specifications 502 772 The Engineer may authorize or direct in writing the removal or relocation of project limit advance warning signs. When project limit advance warning signs are removed before final acceptance, provide traffic control in accordance with the TMUTCD for minor operations as approved. Remove all traffic control devices upon completion of the work as shown on the plans or as directed. 3. MEASUREMENT “Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling” will be measured by the month. Law enforcement personnel with patrol vehicles will be measured by the hour for each person. 4. PAYMENT 4.1. Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling. Except for Contracts with callout work and work orders, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling.” This price is full compensation for installation, maintenance, adjustments, replacements, removal, materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the plans establish pay items for particular work in the TCP, that work will be measured and paid for under pertinent Items. TMAs and TAs will be paid for under Item 505, “Truck-Mounted Attenuator (TMA) and Trailer Attenuator (TA).” Portable changeable message signs will be paid for under Item 503, “Portable Changeable Message Sign.” Portable traffic signals will be paid for under Item 510, “One-Way Traffic Control,” unless otherwise shown on the plans. In accordance with Section 7.2.3., “Safety Contingency,” funds have been included in the project budget to improve the effectiveness of traffic handling and enhance safety during the course of this project. 4.1.1. Initiation of Payment. Payment for this Item will begin on the first estimate after barricades, signs, and traffic handling devices have been installed in accordance with the TCP. 4.1.2. Paid Months. Monthly payment will be made each succeeding month for this Item provided the barricades, signs, and traffic handling devices have been installed and maintained in accordance with the TCP until the Contract amount has been paid. If, within the timeframe established by the Engineer, the Contractor fails to provide or properly maintain signs and barricades in compliance with the Contract requirements, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be considered in noncompliance with this Item. No payment will be made for the months in question, and the total final payment quantity will be reduced by the number of months the Contractor was in noncompliance. 4.1.3. Maximum Total Payment Before Acceptance. The total payment for this Item will not exceed 10% of the total Contract amount before final acceptance in accordance with Article 5.12., “Final Acceptance.” The remaining balance will be paid in accordance with Section 502.4.1.5., “Balance Due.” 4.1.4. Total Payment Quantity. The quantity paid under this Item will not exceed the total quantity shown on the plans, except as modified by change order and as adjusted in accordance with Section 502.4.1.2., “Paid Months.” An overrun of the plans quantity for this Item will not be allowed for approving designs; testing; material shortages; closed construction seasons; curing periods; establishment, performance, test, and maintenance periods; failure to complete the work in the number of months allotted; or delays caused directly or indirectly by Contract requirements. 2024 Specifications 502 773 4.1.5. Balance Due. The remaining unpaid months of barricades less non-compliance months will be paid on final acceptance of the project, if all work is complete and accepted in accordance with Article 5.12., “Final Acceptance.” 4.1.6. Contracts with Callout Work and Work Orders. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be subsidiary to pertinent Items, except for federally funded Contracts. 4.2. Law Enforcement Personnel. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid by Contractor force account for “Law Enforcement Personnel.” This price is full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, patrol vehicles, fees, and incidentals necessary to complete the work as directed. 2024 Specifications 503 774 Item 503 Portable Changeable Message Sign 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, operate, and maintain trailer-mounted portable changeable message sign (PCMS) units. 2. MATERIALS Furnish new or used material in accordance with this Item and as shown on the plans. Provide a self-contained PCMS unit with the following:  sign controller,  changeable message sign,  trailer, and  power source. Paint the exterior surfaces of the power supply housing, supports, trailer, and sign with Federal Orange No. 22246 or Federal Yellow No. 13538 of Federal Standard 595C, except paint the sign face assembly flat black. 2.1. Sign Controller. Provide the following.  A controller with permanent storage of at least 75 pre-programmed messages  An external input device for random programming and storage of at least 75 additional messages  A controller capable of displaying up to three messages sequentially  A controller with adjustable display rates Enclose sign controller equipment in a lockable enclosure. 2.2. Changeable Message Sign. Provide the following.  A sign capable of being elevated to at least 7 ft. above the roadway surface from the bottom of the sign  A sign capable of being rotated 360° and secured against movement in any position  A sign with three separate lines of text and eight characters per line minimum  A minimum 18-in. character height  A 5 × 7-character pixel matrix  A message legibility distance of 600 ft. for nighttime conditions and 800 ft. for normal daylight conditions  Capability for manual and automatic dimming light sources The following are descriptions for three screen types of PCMS.  Character Modular Matrix. This screen type comprises of character blocks.  Continuous Line Matrix. This screen type uses proportionally spaced fonts for each line of text.  Full Matrix. This screen type uses proportionally spaced fonts, varies the height of characters, and displays simple graphics on the entire sign. 2.3. Trailer. Provide a two-wheel trailer with square top fenders, four leveling jacks, and trailer lights. Do not exceed an overall trailer width of 96 in. Shock mount the electronics and sign assembly. 2.4. Power Source. Provide a diesel generator, solar powered power source, or both. Provide a backup power source as necessary. 2024 Specifications 503 775 2.5. Cellular Modem. When shown on the plans, provide a cellular modem connection to communicate with the PCMS unit remotely. 3. CONSTRUCTION Place or relocate PCMS units as shown on the plans or as directed. The plans will show the number of PCMS units needed, for how many days, and for which construction phases. Maintain the PCMS units in good working condition. Repair damaged or malfunctioning PCMS units as soon as possible. PCMS units will remain the property of the Contractor. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each PCMS or by the day used. All PCMS units must be set up on a work area and operational before a calendar day can be considered measurable. When measurement by the day is specified, a day will be measured for each PCMS set up and operational on the worksite. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Portable Changeable Message Sign.” This price is full compensation for PCMS units; setup; relocating; removing; replacement parts; batteries (when required); fuel, oil, and oil filters (when required); cellular telephone charge (when required); software; and equipment, materials, tools, labor, and incidentals. Reimbursement for the repair of damaged devices will be in accordance with Section 7.17.1., “Reimbursable Repair.” 2024 Specifications 506 780 Item 506 Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation, and Environmental Controls 1. DESCRIPTION Install, maintain, and remove erosion, sedimentation, and environmental control measures to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants and protect environmental resources in accordance with the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) and environmental layout shown on the plans. Comply with Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) Construction General Permit (CGP) TXR150000 requirements. Control measures are defined as Best Management Practices (BMPs) used to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants and measures to protect environmental resources. Control measures include, but are not limited to, rock filter dams, temporary pipe slope drains, temporary paved flumes, construction exits, earthwork for erosion control, pipe, construction perimeter fence, sandbags, temporary sediment control fence, biodegradable erosion control logs, vertical tracking, temporary or permanent seeding, and other measures. Erosion and sediment control devices must be selected from the Erosion Control Approved Products List. Perform work in a manner to prevent degradation of receiving waters, protect environmental resources, facilitate project construction, and comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Ensure the installation and maintenance of control measures are performed in conformance with the manufacturer’s or designer’s specifications. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 161, “Compost”  Item 432, “Riprap”  Item 556, “Pipe Underdrains” 2.1. Rock Filter Dams. 2.1.1. Aggregate. Furnish aggregate with approved hardness, durability, cleanliness, and resistance to crumbling, flaking, and eroding. Provide the following.  Types 1, 2, and 4 Rock Filter Dams. Use 3–6-in. aggregate.  Type 3 Rock Filter Dams. Use 4–8-in. aggregate. 2.1.2. Wire. Provide minimum 20-gauge galvanized wire for the steel wire mesh and tie wires for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams. Type 4 dams require:  a double-twisted, hexagonal weave with a nominal mesh opening of 2-1/2 × 3-1/4 in.,  minimum 0.0866-in. steel wire for netting,  minimum 0.1063-in. steel wire for selvages and corners, and  minimum 0.0866 in. for binding or tie wire. 2.1.3. Sandbag Material. Furnish sandbags meeting Section 506.2.8., “Sandbags,” except that any gradation of aggregate may be used to fill the sandbags. 2.2. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Provide corrugated metal pipe, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, flexible tubing, watertight connection bands, grommet materials, prefabricated fittings, and flared entrance sections as shown on the plans. Recycled and other materials meeting these requirements are allowed if approved. 2024 Specifications 506 781 Furnish concrete in accordance with Item 432. 2.3. Temporary Paved Flumes. Furnish asphalt concrete, hydraulic cement concrete, or other comparable non-erodible material as shown on the plans. Provide rock or rubble with a minimum diameter of 6 in. and a maximum volume of 1/2 cu. ft. for the construction of energy dissipaters. 2.4. Construction Exits. Provide materials as shown on the plans and in accordance with this Section. 2.4.1. Rock Construction Exit. Provide crushed aggregate for long- and short-term construction exits. Furnish aggregates that are clean, hard, durable, and free of adherent coatings such as salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, and organic and injurious matter. Use 4–8-in. aggregate for Type 1. Use 2–4-in. aggregate for Type 3. 2.4.2. Timber Construction Exit. Furnish No. 2 quality or better railroad ties and timbers for long-term construction exits, free of large and loose knots and treated to control rot. Fasten timbers using nuts and bolts or lag bolts, of at least 1/2 in. diameter, unless otherwise shown on the plans or allowed. Provide plywood or pressed wafer board at least 1/2 in. thick for short-term exits. 2.4.3. Foundation Course. Provide a foundation course consisting of flexible base, bituminous concrete, hydraulic cement concrete, or other materials as shown on the plans or directed. 2.5. Embankment for Erosion Control. Provide rock, loam, clay, topsoil, or other earth materials that will form a stable embankment to meet the intended use. 2.6. Pipe. Provide pipe outlet material in accordance with Item 556 and as shown on the plans. 2.7. Construction Perimeter Fence. 2.7.1. Posts. Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts that are at least 60 in. long. Furnish soft wood posts with a minimum diameter of 3 in. or use nominal 2 × 4-in. boards. Furnish hardwood posts with a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 × 1-1/5 in. Furnish T- or L-shaped steel posts with a minimum weight of 1.25 lb. per foot. 2.7.2. Fence. Provide orange construction fencing as approved. 2.7.3. Fence Wire. Provide 14-gauge or larger galvanized smooth or twisted wire. Provide 16-gauge or larger tie wire. 2.7.4. Flagging. Provide brightly colored flagging that is fade-resistant and at least 3/4 in. wide to provide maximum visibility both day and night. 2.7.5. Staples. Provide staples with a crown at least 1/2 in. wide and legs at least 1/2 in. long. 2.7.6. Used Materials. Previously used materials meeting the applicable requirements may be used if approved. 2.8. Sandbags. Provide sandbag material of polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyamide woven fabric with a minimum unit weight of 4 oz. per square yard, a Mullen burst-strength exceeding 300 psi, and an ultraviolet (UV) stability exceeding 70%. Use natural coarse sand or manufactured sand meeting the gradation shown in Table 1 to fill sandbags. Filled sandbags must be 24–30 in. long, 16–18 in. wide, and 6–8 in. thick. 2024 Specifications 506 782 Table 1 Sand Gradation Sieve Size Retained (% by Weight) #4 Maximum 3% #100 Minimum 80% #200 Minimum 95% Aggregate may be used instead of sand for situations where sandbags are not adjacent to traffic. The aggregate size must not exceed 3/8 in. 2.9. Temporary Sediment Control Fence. Provide a net-reinforced fence using woven geotextile fabric. Logos visible to the traveling public will not be allowed. 2.9.1. Fabric. Provide fabric materials in accordance with DMS-6230, “Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric.” 2.9.2. Posts. Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts with a minimum length of 48 in., unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish soft wood posts at least 3 in. in diameter or use nominal 2 × 4-in. boards. Furnish hardwood posts with a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 × 1-1/2 in. Furnish T- or L-shaped steel posts with a minimum weight of 1.25 lb. per foot. 2.9.3. Net Reinforcement. Provide net reinforcement of at least 12.5-gauge (Standard Wire Gauge) galvanized welded wire mesh, with a maximum opening size of 2 × 4 in., at least 24 in. wide, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.9.4. Staples. Provide staples with a crown at least 3/4 in. wide and legs 1/2 in. long. 2.9.5. Used Materials. Use recycled material meeting the applicable requirements if approved. 2.10. Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs. 2.10.1. Core Material. Furnish core material that is biodegradable or recyclable. Use compost, mulch, aspen excelsior wood fibers, chipped site vegetation, agricultural rice or wheat straw, coconut fiber, 100% recyclable fibers, or any other acceptable material unless specifically shown on the plans. Permit no more than 5% of the material to escape from the containment mesh. Furnish compost in accordance with Item 161. 2.10.2. Containment Mesh. Furnish containment mesh that is 100% biodegradable, photodegradable, or recyclable, such as burlap, twine, UV photodegradable plastic, polyester, or any other acceptable material. Furnish biodegradable or photodegradable containment mesh when log will remain in place as part of a vegetative system. Furnish recyclable containment mesh for temporary installations. 2.10.3. Size. Furnish biodegradable erosion control logs with diameters as shown on the plans or as directed. Stuff containment mesh densely so logs do not deform. 3. QUALIFICATIONS, TRAINING, AND EMPLOYEE REQUIREMENTS 3.1. Contractor Responsible Person Environmental (CRPE) Qualifications and Responsibilities. Provide and designate in writing at the preconstruction conference a CRPE and alternate CRPE who have overall responsibility for managing environmental compliance. The CRPE will implement stormwater and erosion control practices, oversee and observe stormwater control measure monitoring and management, oversee environmental compliance requirements, and monitor the project site daily and produce daily monitoring reports as long as there are BMPs in place or soil disturbing activities are evident to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and TPDES CGP TXR150000. Take required training in accordance with Section 7.7.4.4, “Training.” 2024 Specifications 506 783 Maintain daily monitor reports and make them available within 24 hr. upon request. During time suspensions when work is not occurring or on Contract non-work days, daily inspections are not required unless a rain event has occurred. The CRPE will provide recommendations on how to improve the effectiveness of control measures. Attend the Department’s preconstruction conference for the project. Ensure training is completed in accordance with Section 7.7.4.4., “Training,” by all applicable personnel before employees work on the project. Document, maintain, and make available within 24 hr. of a request, a list, signed by the CRPE, of all applicable Contractor and subcontractor employees who have completed the training. Include the employee’s name, the training course name, and the date the employee completed the training. 3.2. Contractor Superintendent Qualifications and Responsibilities. Provide a superintendent who is competent, has experience with and knowledge of stormwater management, and is knowledgeable of the requirements and the conditions of the TPDES CGP TXR150000. The superintendent will manage and oversee the day-to-day operations and activities at the project site, work with the CRPE to provide effective stormwater management at the project site, represent and act on behalf of the Contractor, and attend the Department’s preconstruction conference for the project. Take training as required in Section 7.7.4.4., “Training.” 4. CONSTRUCTION 4.1. Contractor Responsibilities. Implement the SWP3 for the project site in accordance with the plans and specifications, TPDES CGP TXR150000, and as directed. Coordinate stormwater management with all other work on the project. Develop and implement an SWP3 for project-specific material supply plants within and outside the Department’s right of way in conformance with the specific or general stormwater permit requirements. Prevent water pollution from stormwater associated with construction activity from entering any surface water or private property on or adjacent to the project site. 4.2. Implementation. The CRPE, or alternate CRPE, must be accessible by telephone and able to respond to project-related stormwater management or other environmental emergencies 24 hr. per day. 4.2.1. Commencement. Implement the SWP3 as shown on the plans and as directed. Contractor-proposed recommendations for changes will be allowed as approved. Conform to the established guidelines in the TPDES CGP TXR150000 to make changes. Do not implement changes until approval has been received and changes have been incorporated into the plans. Minor adjustments to meet field conditions are allowed and will be recorded in the SWP3. 4.2.2. Phasing. Implement control measures before the commencement of activities that result in soil disturbance. Phase and minimize the soil disturbance to the areas shown on the plans. Coordinate temporary control measures with permanent control measures and all other work activities on the project to assure economical, effective, safe, and continuous water pollution prevention. Provide control measures that are appropriate to the construction means, methods, and sequencing allowed by the Contract. Exercise precaution throughout the life of the project to prevent pollution of ground waters and surface waters. Schedule and perform clearing and grubbing operations so that stabilization measures will follow immediately thereafter if project conditions permit. Bring all grading sections to final grade as soon as possible and implement temporary and permanent control measures at the earliest time possible. Implement temporary control measures when required by TPDES CGP TXR150000 or otherwise necessitated by project conditions. Do not prolong final grading and shaping. Preserve vegetation where possible throughout the project, and minimize clearing, grubbing, and excavation within stream banks, bed, and approach sections. 4.3. General. 4.3.1. Temporary Alterations or Control Measure Removal. Altering or removal of control measures is allowed when control measures are restored within the same working day. 2024 Specifications 506 784 4.3.2. Stabilization. Initiate stabilization for disturbed areas no more than 14 days after the construction activities in that portion of the site have temporarily or permanently ceased. Establish a uniform vegetative cover or use another stabilization practice in accordance with TPDES CGP TXR150000. 4.3.3. Finished Work. Remove and dispose of all temporary control measures upon acceptance of vegetative cover or other stabilization practice unless otherwise directed. Complete soil disturbing activities and establish a uniform perennial vegetative cover. A project will not be considered for acceptance until a vegetative cover of 70% density of existing adjacent undisturbed areas is obtained or equivalent permanent stabilization is obtained in accordance with TPDES CGP TXR150000. The Engineer may accept the work before vegetative cover of 70% density of existing adjacent undisturbed areas. An exception will be allowed in arid areas as defined in TPDES CGP TXR150000. 4.3.4. Restricted Activities and Required Precautions. Do not discharge onto the ground or into surface waters any pollutants such as chemicals, raw sewage, fuels, lubricants, coolants, hydraulic fluids, bitumens, or any other petroleum product. Operate and maintain equipment onsite to prevent actual or potential water pollution. Manage, control, and dispose of litter onsite such that no adverse impacts to water quality occur. Prevent dust from creating a potential or actual unsafe condition, public nuisance, or condition endangering the value, utility, or appearance of any property. Wash out concrete trucks only as described in TPDES CGP TXR150000. Use appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water (i.e., dewatering). Immediately address chemical and hydrocarbon spills caused by the Contractor. Keep a spill kit onsite. Prevent discharges that would contribute to a violation of Edwards Aquifer Rules, water quality standards, the impairment of a listed water body, or other state or federal law. 4.4. Installation, Maintenance, and Removal Work. Perform work in accordance with the SWP3, in conformance with manufacturers’ guidelines, and in accordance with TPDES CGP TXR150000. Install and maintain the integrity of temporary erosion and sedimentation control devices to accumulate silt and debris until soil disturbing activities are completed and permanent erosion control features are in place, or the disturbed area has been adequately stabilized as approved. The Department will inspect and document the condition of the control measures at the frequency shown on the plans and will provide the Construction SWP3 Field Inspection and Maintenance Reports to the Contractor. Make corrections as soon as possible before the next anticipated rain event or within 7 calendar days after being able to enter the worksite for each control measure. The only acceptable reason for not accomplishing the corrections within the timeframe specified is when site conditions are considered “too wet to work.” Take immediate action if a correction is deemed critical as directed. When corrections are not made within the established timeframe, all work will cease on the project and time charges will continue while the control measures are brought into compliance. Commence work once the Engineer reviews and documents the project is in compliance. Commencing work does not release the Contractor of the liability for noncompliance with the SWP3, the plans, or TPDES CGP TXR150000. The Engineer may limit the disturbed area if the Contractor cannot control soil erosion and sedimentation resulting from the Contractor’s operations. Implement additional controls as directed. Remove devices upon approval or as directed. Finish-grade and dress the area upon removal. Stabilize disturbed areas in accordance with TPDES CGP TXR150000, and as shown on the plans or directed. Materials removed are considered consumed by the project. Retain ownership of stockpiled material and remove it from the project when new installations or replacements are no longer required. 4.4.1. Rock Filter Dams for Erosion Control. Remove trees, brush, stumps, and other objectionable material that may interfere with the construction of rock filter dams. Place sandbags as a foundation when required or at the Contractor’s option. Place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes specified, without undue voids for Types 1, 2, 3, and 5. Place the aggregate on the mesh and then fold the mesh at the upstream side over the aggregate and secure it to itself on the downstream side using wire ties, or hog rings for Type 2 and Type 3, or as directed. 2024 Specifications 506 785 Place rock filter dams perpendicular to the flow of the stream or channel unless otherwise directed. Construct filter dams in accordance with the following criteria unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4.4.1.1. Type 1 (Non-Reinforced).  Height. At least 18 in. measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam.  Top Width. At least 2 ft.  Slopes. No steeper than 2:1. 4.4.1.2. Type 2 (Reinforced).  Height. At least 18 in. measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam.  Top Width. At least 2 ft.  Slopes. No steeper than 2:1. 4.4.1.3. Type 3 (Reinforced).  Height. At least 36 in. measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam.  Top Width. At least 2 ft.  Slopes. No steeper than 2:1. 4.4.1.4. Type 4 (Sack Gabions). Unfold sack gabions and smooth out kinks and bends. Connect the sides by lacing in a single-loop-double-loop pattern on 4–5-in. spacing for vertical filling. Pull the end lacing rod at one end until tight, wrap around the end, and twist four times. Fill with stone at the filling end, pull the rod tight, cut the wire with approximately 6 in. remaining, and twist wires four times. Place the sack flat in a filling trough, fill with stone, connect sides, and secure ends as described above for horizontal filling. Lift and place without damaging the gabion. Shape sack gabions to existing contours. 4.4.1.5. Type 5. Provide rock filter dams as shown on the plans. 4.4.2. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Install pipe with a slope as shown on the plans or as directed. Construct embankment for the drainage system in 8-in. lifts to the required elevations. Hand-tamp the soil around and under the entrance section to the top of the embankment as shown on the plans or as directed. Form the top of the embankment or earth dike over the pipe slope drain at least 1 ft. higher than the top of the inlet pipe at all points. Secure the pipe with hold-downs or hold-down grommets spaced at most 10 ft. on center. Construct the energy dissipaters or sediment traps as shown on the plans or as directed. Construct the sediment trap using concrete or rubble riprap in accordance with Item 432, when shown on the plans. 4.4.3. Temporary Paved Flumes. Construct paved flumes as shown on the plans or as directed. Provide excavation and embankment (including compaction of the subgrade) of material to the dimensions shown on the plans unless otherwise indicated. Install a rock or rubble riprap energy dissipater, constructed from the materials specified above, to a minimum depth of 9 in. at the flume outlet to the limits shown on the plans or as directed. 4.4.4. Construction Exits. Prevent traffic from crossing or exiting the construction site or moving directly onto a public roadway, alley, sidewalk, parking area, or other right of way areas other than at the location of construction exits when tracking conditions exist. Construct exits for either long- or short-term use. 4.4.4.1. Long-Term. Place the exit over a foundation course as required. Grade the foundation course or compacted subgrade to direct runoff from the construction exits to a sediment trap as shown on the plans or as directed. Construct exits with a width of at least 14 ft. for one-way and 20 ft. for two-way traffic for the full width of the exit, or as directed. 4.4.4.1.1. Type 1. Construct to a depth of at least 8 in. using crushed aggregate as shown on the plans or as directed. 2024 Specifications 506 786 4.4.4.1.2. Type 2. Construct using railroad ties and timbers as shown on the plans or as directed. 4.4.4.2. Short-Term. 4.4.4.2.1. Type 3. Construct using crushed aggregate, plywood, or wafer board. This type of exit may be used for daily operations where long-term exits are not practical. 4.4.4.2.2. Type 4. Construct as shown on the plans or as directed. 4.4.5. Earthwork for Erosion Control. Perform excavation and embankment operations to minimize erosion and to remove collected sediments from other erosion control devices. 4.4.5.1. Excavation and Embankment for Erosion Control Features. Place earth dikes, swales, or combinations of both along the low crown of daily lift placement, or as directed, to prevent runoff spillover. Place swales and dikes at other locations as shown on the plans or as directed to prevent runoff spillover or to divert runoff. Construct cuts with the low end blocked with undisturbed earth to prevent erosion of hillsides. Construct sediment traps at drainage structures in conjunction with other erosion control measures as shown on the plans or as directed. Create a sediment basin, where required, providing 3,600 cu. ft. of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures for drainage locations that serve an area with 10 or more disturbed acres at one time, not including offsite areas. 4.4.5.2. Excavation of Sediment and Debris. Remove sediment and debris when accumulation affects the performance of the devices, after a rain, and when directed. 4.4.6. Construction Perimeter Fence. Construct, align, and locate fencing as shown on the plans or as directed. 4.4.6.1. Installation of Posts. Embed posts 18 in. deep or adequately anchor in rock, with a spacing of 8–10 ft. 4.4.6.2. Wire Attachment. Attach the top wire to the posts at least 3 ft. from the ground. Attach the lower wire midway between the ground and the top wire. 4.4.6.3. Flag Attachment. Attach flagging to both wire strands midway between each post. Use flagging at least 18 in. long. Tie flagging to the wire using a square knot. 4.4.7. Sandbags for Erosion Control. Construct a berm or dam of sandbags that will intercept sediment-laden stormwater runoff from disturbed areas, create a retention pond, detain sediment, and release water in sheet flow. Fill each bag with sand so that at least the top 6 in. of the bag is unfilled to allow for proper tying of the open end. Place the sandbags with their tied ends in the same direction. Offset subsequent rows of sandbags 1/2 the length of the preceding row. Place a single layer of sandbags downstream as a secondary debris trap. Place additional sandbags as necessary or as directed for supplementary support to berms or dams of sandbags or earth. 4.4.8. Temporary Sediment Control Fence. Provide temporary sediment control fence near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment from sheet flow. Incorporate the fence into erosion control measures used to control sediment in areas of higher flow. Install the fence as shown on the plans, in accordance with this Section, or as directed. 4.4.8.1. Installation of Posts. Embed posts at least 18 in. deep or adequately anchor, if in rock, with a spacing of 6--8 ft., and install on a slight angle toward the runoff source. 4.4.8.2. Fabric Anchoring. Dig trenches along the uphill side of the fence to anchor 6–8 in. of fabric. Provide a minimum trench cross-section of 6 × 6 in. Place the fabric against the side of the trench and align approximately 2 in. of fabric along the bottom in the upstream direction. Backfill the trench, then hand-tamp. 2024 Specifications 506 787 4.4.8.3. Fabric and Net Reinforcement Attachment. Attach the reinforcement to wooden posts using staples, or to steel posts using T-clips, in at least four places equally spaced unless otherwise shown on the plans. Sewn vertical pockets may be used to attach reinforcement to end posts. Fasten the fabric to the top strand of reinforcement using hog rings or cord every 15 in. or less. 4.4.8.4. Fabric and Net Splices. Locate splices at a fence post with a minimum lap of 6 in. attached in at least six places equally spaced unless otherwise shown on the plans. Do not locate splices in concentrated flow areas. Requirements for installation of used temporary sediment control fence include the following:  fabric with minimal or no visible signs of biodegradation (weak fibers),  fabric without excessive patching (more than one patch every 15–20 ft.),  posts without bends, and  backing without holes. 4.4.9. Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs. Install biodegradable erosion control logs near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment from sheet flow. Incorporate the biodegradable erosion control logs into the erosion measures used to control sediment in areas of higher flow. Install, align, and locate the biodegradable erosion control logs as specified below, as shown on the plans, or as directed. Secure biodegradable erosion control logs in a method adequate to prevent displacement resulting from normal rain events, to prevent damage to the logs, and as approved, such that flow is not allowed under the logs. Temporarily removing and replacing biodegradable erosion logs to facilitate daily work is allowed at the Contractor’s expense. 4.4.10. Vertical Tracking. Perform vertical tracking on slopes to temporarily stabilize soil. Provide equipment with a track undercarriage capable of producing a linear soil impression measuring at least 12 in. long × 2–4 in. wide × 1/2–2 in. deep. Do not exceed 12 in. between track impressions. Install continuous linear track impressions where the 12-in. length impressions are perpendicular to the slope. Vertical tracking is required on projects where soil disturbing activities have occurred, unless otherwise approved. 4.5. Monitoring and Documentation. Monitor the control measures daily as long as there are BMPs in place or soil disturbing activities are evident to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and TPDES CGP TXR150000. During time suspensions when work is not occurring or contract non-work days, daily inspections are not required unless a rain event has occurred. Monitoring will consist of, but is not limited to, observing, inspecting, and documenting site locations with control measures and discharge points to provide maintenance and inspection of controls in accordance with the SWP3. Keep written records of daily monitoring. Document in the daily monitoring report the control measure condition, the date of inspection, required corrective actions, the responsible person for making the corrections, and the date corrective actions were completed. Maintain records of all monitoring reports at the project site or at an approved place. Provide copies within 7 days. Together, the CRPE and an Engineer’s representative will complete the Construction Stage Gate Checklist periodically as directed. 5. MEASUREMENT 5.1. Rock Filter Dams. Installation or removal of rock filter dams will be measured by the foot or by the cubic yard. The measured volume will include sandbags, when used. 5.1.1. Linear Measurement. When rock filter dams are measured by the foot, measurement will be along the centerline of the top of the dam. 5.1.2. Volume Measurement. When rock filter dams are measured by the cubic yard, measurement will be based on the volume of rock computed by the method of average end areas. 5.1.2.1. Installation. Measurement will be made in final position. 2024 Specifications 506 788 5.1.2.2. Removal. Measurement will be made at the point of removal. 5.2. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Temporary pipe slope drains will be measured by the foot. 5.3. Temporary Paved Flumes. Temporary paved flumes will be measured by the square yard of surface area. The measured area will include the energy dissipater at the flume outlet. 5.4. Construction Exits. Construction exits will be measured by the square yard of surface area. 5.5. Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control. 5.5.1. Equipment and Labor Measurement. Equipment and labor used will be measured by the actual number of hours the equipment is operated and the labor is engaged in the work. 5.5.2. Volume Measurement. 5.5.2.1. In Place. 5.5.2.1.1. Excavation. Excavation will be measured by the cubic yard in its original position and the volume computed by the method of average end areas. 5.5.2.1.2. Embankment. Embankment will be measured by the cubic yard in its final position by the method of average end areas. The volume of embankment will be determined between:  the original ground surfaces or the surface upon which the embankment is to be constructed for the feature and  the lines, grades, and slopes of the accepted embankment for the feature. 5.5.2.2. In Vehicles. Excavation and embankment quantities will be combined and paid for under “Earthwork (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Vehicle).” Excavation will be measured by the cubic yard in vehicles at the point of removal. Embankment will be measured by the cubic yard in vehicles measured at the point of delivery. Shrinkage or swelling factors will not be considered in determining the calculated quantities. 5.6. Construction Perimeter Fence. Construction perimeter fence will be measured by the foot. 5.7. Sandbags for Erosion Control. Sandbags will be measured as each sandbag or by the foot along the top of sandbag berms or dams. 5.8. Temporary Sediment Control Fence. Installation or removal of temporary sediment control fence will be measured by the foot. 5.9. Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs. Installation or removal of biodegradable erosion control logs will be measured by the foot along the centerline of the top of the control logs. 5.10. Vertical Tracking. Vertical tracking will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 6. PAYMENT The following will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items:  erosion control measures for Contractor project-specific locations (PSLs) inside and outside the right of way (e.g., construction and haul roads, field offices, equipment and supply areas, plants, and material sources);  removal of litter, unless a separate pay item is shown on the plans;  repair to devices and features damaged by Contractor operations; 2024 Specifications 506 789  added measures and maintenance needed due to negligence, carelessness, lack of maintenance, and failure to install permanent controls;  removal and reinstallation of devices and features needed for the convenience of the Contractor;  finish grading and dressing upon removal of the device; and  minor adjustments including but not limited to plumbing posts, reattaching fabric, minor grading to maintain slopes on an erosion embankment feature, or moving small numbers of sandbags. Stabilization of disturbed areas will be paid for under pertinent Items except vertical tacking, which will be subsidiary. Furnishing and installing pipe for outfalls associated with sediment traps and ponds will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to the excavation and embankment under this Item. 6.1. Rock Filter Dams. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid as follows. 6.1.1. Installation. Installation will be paid for as “Rock Filter Dams (Install)” of the type and slope as specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and grading, lacing, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.1.2. Removal. Removal will be paid for as “Rock Filter Dams (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that the rock filter dam installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for “Rock Filter Dams (Remove)” and for “Rock Filter Dams (Install)” of the type specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and grading, lacing, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.2. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Temporary Pipe Slope Drains” of the size specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing materials, removal and disposal, furnishing and operating equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of temporary pipe slope drains will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the pipe slope drain installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for “Temporary Pipe Slope Drains” of the size specified, which is full compensation for the removal and reinstallation of the pipe drain. Earthwork required for the pipe slope drain installation, including construction of the sediment trap, will be measured and paid for under “Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control.” Riprap concrete or stone, when used as an energy dissipater or as a stabilized sediment trap, will be measured and paid for in accordance with Item 432. 6.3. Temporary Paved Flumes. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Temporary Paved Flume (Install)” or “Temporary Paved Flume (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and placing materials, removal and disposal, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that the paved flume installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit prices bid for “Temporary Paved Flume (Remove)” and “Temporary Paved Flume (Install).” These prices are full compensation for the removal and replacement of the paved flume and for equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Earthwork required for the paved flume installation, including construction of a sediment trap, will be measured and paid for under “Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control.” 2024 Specifications 506 790 6.4. Construction Exits. Contractor-required construction exits from off right of way locations or on right of way PSLs will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” for construction exits needed on right of way access to work areas required by the Department will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Construction Exits (Install)” of the type specified or “Construction Exits (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and placing materials, excavating, removal and disposal, cleaning vehicles, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that a construction exit or portion thereof be removed and replaced, payment will be made at the unit prices bid for “Construction Exit (Remove)” and “Construction Exit (Install)” of the type specified. These prices are full compensation for the removal and replacement of the construction exit and for equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Construction of sediment traps used in conjunction with the construction exit will be measured and paid for under “Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control.” 6.5. Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control. 6.5.1. Initial Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Excavation (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Place),” “Embankment (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Place),” “Excavation (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Vehicle),” “Embankment (Erosion and Sediment Control, (In Vehicle),” or “Earthwork (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Vehicle).” This price is full compensation for excavation and embankment, including hauling; disposal of material not used elsewhere on the project; embankments including furnishing material from approved sources and construction of erosion control features; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Sprinkling and rolling required by this Item will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 6.5.2. Maintenance Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control for Cleaning and Restoring Control Measures. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid under a Contractor Force Account Item from invoice provided to the Engineer. This price is full compensation for excavation, embankment, and re-grading, including dewatering for removal of accumulated sediment, and the removal of accumulated sediment in various erosion control installations as directed, hauling, and disposal of material not used elsewhere on the project; excavation for construction of erosion control features; embankments, including furnishing material from approved sources and construction of erosion control features; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Earthwork needed to remove and obliterate erosion control features will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items unless otherwise shown on the plans. Sprinkling and rolling required by this Item will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 6.6. Construction Perimeter Fence. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Construction Perimeter Fence.” This price is full compensation for furnishing and placing the fence; digging, fence posts, wire, and flagging; removal and disposal; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of construction perimeter fence will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the perimeter fence installation or portions thereof be removed and replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for “Construction Perimeter Fence,” which is full compensation for the removal and reinstallation of the construction perimeter fence. 2024 Specifications 506 791 6.7. Sandbags for Erosion Control. Sandbags will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Sandbags for Erosion Control” (of the height specified when measurement is by the foot). This price is full compensation for materials, placing sandbags, removal and disposal, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of sandbags will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the sandbag installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for “Sandbags for Erosion Control,” which is full compensation for the reinstallation of the sandbags. 6.8. Temporary Sediment Control Fence. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid as follows. 6.8.1. Installation. Installation will be paid for as “Temporary Sediment-Control Fence (Install).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and grading, lacing, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.8.2. Removal. Removal will be paid for as “Temporary Sediment-Control Fence (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.9. Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid as follows. 6.9.1. Installation. Installation will be paid for as “Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs (Install)” of the size specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and grading, staking, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.9.2. Removal. Removal will be paid for as “Biodegradable Erosion Control Logs (Remove).” This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 6.10. Vertical Tracking. Vertical tracking will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 2024 Specifications 529 807 Item 529 Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Combined Curb and Gutter 1. DESCRIPTION Construct hydraulic cement concrete curb, gutter, and combined curb and gutter. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 360, “Concrete Pavement”  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete” Use Class A concrete or material specified on the plans. Use Grade 8 coarse aggregate for extruded Class A concrete. Use other grades if approved. When curbs are monolithically placed with the concrete pavements, use the same class of concrete as the concrete pavement. Use of fibers in accordance with DMS-4550, “Fibers for Concrete,” to replace reinforcing steel in Class A concrete is allowed unless otherwise shown on the plans. Dose fibers in accordance with the Department’s MPL of pre-qualified fibers for concrete. 3. CONSTRUCTION Provide finished work with a well-compacted mass and a surface free of voids and honeycomb, in the required shape, line, and grade. Round exposed edges using an edging tool of the radius shown on the plans. Mix, place, and cure concrete in accordance with Item 420. Construct joints at locations shown on the plans. Cure for at least 72 hr. Furnish and place reinforcing steel in accordance with Item 440 unless fiber reinforced concrete is used. Set and maintain a guideline that conforms to alignment data shown on the plans, with an outline that conforms to the details shown on the plans. Ensure that changes in curb grade and alignment do not exceed 1/4 in. between any two contacts on a 10-ft. straightedge. 3.1. Conventionally Formed Concrete. Shape and compact subgrade, foundation, or pavement surface to the line, grade, and cross-section shown on the plans. Lightly sprinkle subgrade or foundation material immediately before concrete placement. Pour concrete into forms, and strike off with a template 1/4–3/8 in. less than the dimensions of the finished curb unless otherwise approved. After initial set, plaster surface with mortar consisting of one part hydraulic cement and two parts fine aggregate. Brush exposed surfaces to a uniform texture. Place curbs, gutters, and combined curb and gutters in 50-ft. maximum sections unless otherwise approved. 3.2. Extruded or Slipformed Concrete. Shape and compact subgrade, foundation, or pavement surface to the line, grade, and cross-section shown on the plans. Lightly sprinkle subgrade or foundation material immediately before concrete placement. Provide clean surfaces for concrete placement. Coat cleaned 2024 Specifications 529 808 surfaces, if required, with approved adhesive or coating at the rate of application shown on the plans or as directed. Place concrete using approved self-propelled equipment. The forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slipform machine must be easily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the established gradeline. Attach a pointer or gauge to the machine so that a continual comparison can be made between the extruded or slipform work and the grade guideline. Other methods may be used when approved. Finish surfaces immediately after extrusion or slipforming. 3.3. Curb Joints for Concrete Pavements. Provide transverse expansion and contraction joints in the curb of the same type and location as the adjacent or underlying pavement. Use expansion joint material of the same thickness and type required for the pavement. Extend expansion joints through the curb. Place reinforcing steel for non-monolithic curb construction joints as shown on the plans, unless otherwise approved. Form or saw the contraction joint through the full depth of the monolithic curb. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Concrete Curb,” “Concrete Curb (Mono),” or “Concrete Curb and Gutter” of the type specified. This price is full compensation for surface preparation of curb foundation, equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 530 809 Item 530 Intersections, Driveways, and Turnouts 1. DESCRIPTION Construct and pave intersections, driveways, and turnouts. Pave existing intersections, driveways, and turnouts. Intersections are considered areas off the travel lanes and shoulders of the Contract highway on the intersecting highway on the state system. The intersecting on-system highway work will be paid for under this Item only when shown on the plans. Driveways are defined as private (residential or commercial) and public (county road and city street) access areas off the travel lanes and shoulders. Turnouts include, but are not limited to, mailbox and litter barrel widenings. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 247, “Flexible Base”  Item 260, “Lime Treatment (Road-Mixed)”  Item 275, “Cement Treatment (Road-Mixed)”  Item 276, “Cement Treatment (Plant-Mixed)”  Item 292, “Asphalt Treatment (Plant-Mixed)”  Item 316, “Seal Coat”  Item 330, “Limestone Rock Asphalt Pavement”  Item 334, “Hot-Mix Cold-Laid Asphalt Concrete Pavement”  Item 360, “Concrete Pavement”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete” 3. CONSTRUCTION Construct and pave intersections, driveways, and turnouts, and pave existing intersections, driveways, and turnouts as shown on the plans or as directed. Place materials in conformance with construction Articles of pertinent Items. Provide uninterrupted access to adjacent property unless otherwise directed. Ensure that abrupt elevation changes in driveway or turnout areas that serve as sidewalks do not exceed 1/4 in. and that the sidewalk area cross slope does not exceed 2%. Ready-mix concrete and hand finishing will be permitted when concrete pavement is specified unless otherwise shown on the plans for intersections. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the square yard of the final pavement surface, as placed in the field, including radii and turnout. 2024 Specifications 530 810 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Intersections,” “Driveways,” “Turnouts,” “Intersections, Driveways, and Turnouts,” or “Driveways and Turnouts” of the surface specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment; excavation and embankment; base and pavement materials; and labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. Drainage structures will be measured and paid for in conformance with the pertinent bid Items. 2024 Specifications 531 811 Item 531 Sidewalks 1. DESCRIPTION Construct hydraulic cement concrete sidewalks, Americans with Disabilities Act ramps, and steps. 2. MATERIALS Furnish materials in accordance with the following.  Item 360, “Concrete Pavement”  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete” Use Class A concrete unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use Grade 8 coarse aggregate for extruded Class A concrete. Use other grades if approved. Use of fibers meeting the requirements of DMS-4550, “Fibers for Concrete,” to replace reinforcing steel in Class A concrete is allowed unless otherwise shown on the plans. Dose fibers in accordance with the Department’s MPL of prequalified fibers for concrete. Furnish detectable warning material in accordance with DMS-4350, “Detectable Warning Material.” 3. CONSTRUCTION Shape and compact subgrade, foundation, or pavement surface to the line, grade, and cross-section shown on the plans. Lightly sprinkle subgrade or foundation material immediately before concrete placement. Hand-tamp and sprinkle foundation when placement is directly on subgrade or foundation materials. Remove and dispose of existing concrete in accordance with Item 104, “Removing Concrete.” Provide a clean surface for concrete placement directly on the surface material or pavement. Furnish and place reinforcing steel in accordance with Item 440 unless fiber reinforced concrete is used. Mix and place concrete in conformance with the pertinent Items. Hand-finishing is allowed for any method of construction. Finish exposed surfaces to a uniform transverse broom finish surface. Curb ramps must include a detectable warning surface and conform to details shown on the plans. Install joints as shown on the plans. Ensure that abrupt changes in sidewalk elevation do not exceed 1/4 in., sidewalk cross slope does not exceed 2%, curb ramp grade does not exceed 8.3%, and flares adjacent to the ramp do not exceed 10% slope measured parallel to the curb line. Ensure that the sidewalk depth and reinforcement are not less than the driveway cross-sectional details shown on the plans where a sidewalk crosses and is part of the concrete driveway. Use construction methods in conformance with manufacturers’ recommendations when installing detectable warning surface. Install detectable warning surface as shown on the plans. Provide finished work with a well-compacted mass, a surface free of voids and honeycomb, and the required true-to-line shape and grade. Cure for at least 72 hr. in accordance with Item 420. 2024 Specifications 531 812 3.1. Conventionally Formed Concrete. Provide pre-molded or board expansion joints of the thickness shown on the plans for sidewalk section lengths greater than 8 ft. but less than 40 ft., unless otherwise directed. Terminate workday production at an expansion joint. 3.2. Extruded or Slipformed Concrete. Provide any additional surface finishing immediately after extrusion or slipforming as shown on the plans. Construct joints at locations as shown on the plans or as directed. 4. MEASUREMENT Sidewalks will be measured by the square yard of surface area. Curb ramps will be measured by the square yard of surface area or by each. A curb ramp consists of the ramp, landing or turning space, adjacent flares or side curb, and detectable warning surface as shown on the plans. Steps will be measured by the square yard of horizontal surface area. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Concrete Sidewalks” of the depth specified, “Concrete Sidewalk (Steps),” and “Curb Ramps” of the type specified. This price is full compensation for surface preparation of sidewalk foundation; materials; removal and disposal of existing concrete; excavation, hauling, and disposal of excavated material; drilling and doweling into existing concrete curb, sidewalk, and pavement; repair of adjacent street or pavement structure damaged by these operations; and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. Sidewalks that cross and are part of the concrete driveways or turnouts will be measured and paid for in accordance with Item 530, “Intersections, Driveways, and Turnouts.” 2024 Specifications 540 818 Item 540 Metal Beam Guard Fence 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, install, replace, or adjust metal beam guard fence consisting of metal beam rail elements, hardware, blocks, and support posts. 2. MATERIALS Provide samples of metal beam rail elements, terminal sections, bolts, and nuts for compliance testing in accordance with Tex-708-I and Tex-713-I to verify physical and chemical properties meet AASHTO M 180 when directed. Obtain materials at the locations shown on the plans when the plans designate that the Department will furnish materials. 2.1. Metal Beam Rail Elements. Furnish new metal beam rail elements, transitions, anchor sections, and terminals that meet the requirements of Table 1 and from a manufacturer on the Department’s MPL of rail element manufacturers. Type I or Type II is required, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Base metal for metal beam rail elements must not contain more than 0.04% phosphorus or more than 0.05% sulfur. Warped or deformed rail elements will be rejected. Table 1 Rail Element Requirements Specification AASHTO M 180 Class A— Base metal nominal thickness 0.105 in. B— Base metal nominal thickness 0.135 in. Type I— Zinc-coated 1.80 oz. per square foot minimum single-spot. II— Zinc-coated 3.60 oz. per square foot minimum single-spot. IV— Weathering steel (required when shown on the plans). Shape W-Beam Thrie Beam W-Beam to Thrie Beam Transition Markings Permanently mark each metal beam rail element (including curved sections) with the information required in AASHTO M 180. 2.2. Posts. Furnish new round timber, rectangular timber, or rolled steel section posts as shown on the plans and in conformance with the following requirements. 2.2.1. Timber Posts. Meet requirements DMS-7200, “Timber Posts and Blocks for Metal Beam Guard Fence.” Purchase from a manufacturer or supplier on the Department’s MPL of timber treating plants and suppliers. 2.2.2. Steel Posts. Provide rolled sections conforming to the material requirements of ASTM A36. Drill or punch posts for standard rail attachment as shown on the plans. Galvanize in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” Low-fill culvert posts may be fabricated as galvanized “blanks” with the rail hole and the final height field fabricated. Treat all exposed post surfaces caused by the field fabrication in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” 2024 Specifications 540 819 2.3. Blocks. Furnish new rectangular timber or composite blocks as shown on the plans and in conformance with the following requirements. 2.3.1. Timber. Meet the requirements of DMS-7200. Purchase from a manufacturer or supplier on the Department’s MPL of timber treating plants and suppliers. 2.3.2. Composite. Meet the requirements of DMS-7210, “Composite Material Posts and Blocks for Metal Beam Guard Fence.” Purchase from a manufacturer on the Department’s MPL of composite material blocks and posts. 2.4. Fittings. Furnish new fittings (e.g., bolts, nuts, and washers) as shown on the plans and galvanized in accordance with Item 445. 2.5. Terminal Connectors. Furnish new terminal connectors, where required, meeting the material and galvanizing requirements specified for metal beam rail elements. 2.6. Concrete. Furnish concrete for terminal anchor posts meeting the requirements for Class A concrete in accordance with Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete.” 2.7. Curb. If indicated in the details, furnish the curb shown with metal beam guard fence transition in accordance with Item 529, “Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Combined Curb and Gutter.” 2.8. Driveway Terminal Anchor Posts. Furnish new terminal anchor posts from steel conforming to the material requirements of ASTM A36. Fabricate posts in accordance with Item 441, “Steel Structures.” Galvanize terminal anchor posts after fabrication in accordance with Item 445. 2.9. Downstream Anchor Posts. Furnish new terminal anchor posts consisting of new rectangular timber and new steel foundation tubes as shown on the plans. 2.10. Downstream Anchor Hardware. Furnish new hardware (e.g., brackets, plates, struts, and cable) as shown on the plans and galvanized in accordance with Item 445. 2.11. Controlled Released Terminal (CRT) Posts. Furnish new CRT posts as shown on the plans and conforming to the requirements of DMS-7200. Purchase from a manufacturer or supplier on the Department’s MPL of timber treating plants and suppliers. 3. CONSTRUCTION Install posts and rail elements as shown on the plans. 3.1. Posts. Install posts by either drilling or driving. 3.1.1. Drilling. Drill holes and set posts plumb and firm to the line and grade shown. Backfill posts by thoroughly compacting material to the density of adjacent undisturbed material. 3.1.2. Driving. Drive posts plumb using approved power hammers (e.g., steam, compressed air, vibratory, or diesel) or gravity hammers to the line and grade shown while preventing damage to the post. Use pilot holes when required and approved. Determine the size and depth of pilot holes based on results of the first few posts driven. Thoroughly tamp loosened soil around the post, fill voids with suitable material, and thoroughly compact to the density of adjacent undisturbed material. 3.2. Rail Elements. Erect metal beam rail elements to produce a smooth, continuous rail paralleling the line and grade of the roadway surface or as shown on the plans. Bolt rail elements end-to-end and lap splices in the direction of traffic. Field-drill or punch holes in rail elements for special details, only when approved. 3.3. Short Radius. Special rail fabrication with a required radius must be as shown on the plans. 2024 Specifications 540 820 3.4. Galvanizing Repair. Repair all parts of galvanized steel posts, washers, bolts, and rail elements after erection where galvanizing has become scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged. Repair in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” 3.5. Guardrail Adjustment. Work includes vertical adjustment, horizontal shift, and overlap of the rail element as shown on the plans. 3.6. Curb. If indicated in the details, construct the curb shown with metal beam guard fence transition in accordance with Item 529. 3.7. Driveway Terminal Anchor Posts. Embed terminal anchor posts in concrete, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4. MEASUREMENT 4.1. Guard Fence. Measurement will be by the foot of fence. Fence will be measured on the face of the rail in place, from center-to-center of end splice locations. 4.2. Transitions. Transitions for rail connection will be measured by each transition. 4.3. Short Radius. Measurement will be by the foot to the nearest whole foot along the face of the rail in place, from beginning of radius (first CRT post) to the end of radius. 4.4. Driveway Terminal Anchor Section. Measurement will be by each section, complete in place, consisting of a driveway terminal anchor post and one 6-ft. section of rail element. 4.5. Downstream Anchor Terminal. Measurement will be by each section, complete in place, consisting of one W-Beam end section, two downstream anchor posts, and one rail section. 4.6. Long Span System. Measurement will be by each long span system, complete in place. Each long span system will be from the first CRT to the last CRT in the system. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and material furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid at the unit price bid for “Metal W-Beam Guard Fence” of the post type specified; “Metal Thrie Beam Guard Fence” of the post type specified, “Metal Beam Guard Fence Transition” of the type specified, “Metal W-Beam Guard Fence Adjustment,” “Metal Thrie Beam Guard Fence Adjustment,” “Transition Adjustment,” “Short Radius,” “Driveway Terminal Anchor Section,” “Downstream Anchor Terminal,” or “Metal Beam Guard Fence (Long Span System).” When weathering steel is required, Type IV will be specified. Samples furnished to the Department for testing purposes, special backfill materials, and concrete curbs will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 5.1. Guard Fence. The unit price bid for “Metal W-Beam Guard Fence” or “Metal Thrie Beam Guard Fence” is full compensation for materials, hauling, erection, setting posts in concrete, blocks, driving posts, excavating, backfilling, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.2. Transition. The unit price bid for “Metal Beam Guard Fence Transition” is full compensation for furnishing nested sections of Thrie Beam; nested sections of W-Beam; Thrie Beam to W-Beam transitional rail piece, posts, concrete, curb, and connections to W-Beam guard fence and bridge rails; Thrie Beam terminal connectors; excavation and backfilling; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.3. Guardrail Adjustment. The unit price bid for “Metal W-Beam Guard Fence Adjustment,” “Metal Thrie Beam Guard Fence Adjustment,” “Terminal Anchor Section Adjustment,” and “Transition Adjustment” is full 2024 Specifications 540 821 compensation for furnishing materials not supplied by the Department, drilling holes in posts, hauling, erection, blocks, excavation, backfill, cleaning, salvaging materials, setting rail element anchor assembly and terminal anchor post, removal of rail element, concrete, curb, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.4. Short Radius. The unit price bid for “Short Radius” is full compensation for furnishing special rail fabricated metal beam guard fence, CRT posts, steel posts, sand barrels, end terminal, cable anchor, materials, hauling, erection, blocks, driving posts, excavating, backfilling, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.5. Driveway Terminal Anchor Section. The unit price bid for “Driveway Terminal Anchor Section” is full compensation for furnishing the rail element, driveway anchor assembly, driveway terminal anchor post, and foundations; installing the rail element anchor assembly and the driveway terminal anchor post and foundations; excavation and backfilling; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.6. Downstream Anchor Terminal. The unit price bid for “Downstream Anchor Terminal” is full compensation for furnishing the rail element, W-Beam end section, guardrail anchor bracket, shelf angle bracket, channel strut, downstream anchor posts, breakaway cable terminal (BCT) cable anchor assembly, and foundations; installing the BCT cable anchor assembly and the downstream anchor post and foundations; excavation and backfilling; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.7. Long Span System. The unit price bid for “Metal Beam Guard Fence (Long Span System)” is full compensation for furnishing the rail element, CRT posts, materials, hauling, erection, blocks, driving posts, excavating, backfilling, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 542 822 Item 542 Removing Metal Beam Guard Fence 1. DESCRIPTION Remove existing metal beam guard fence and store at locations shown on the plans or as directed. 2. CONSTRUCTION Remove rail elements in original lengths. Remove fittings from the posts and the metal rail and then pull the posts. Do not mar or damage salvageable materials during removal. Completely remove posts and any concrete or grout backfill surrounding the posts. Furnish backfill material and backfill the hole with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding soil unless otherwise directed. Cut off or bend down deadman eyebolts to an elevation at least 1 ft. below the new subgrade elevation and leave in place along with the deadman. Neatly stack salvaged materials to be retained by the Department at designated sites shown on the plans. Properly dispose of unsalvageable materials in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. Repair or replace Contractor-damaged salvageable material at the Contractor’s expense. 3. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot for “Remove Metal Beam Guard Fence” in its original position. Measurement will be made along the face of the rail, in place, including metal beam guard fence transitions, from center-to-center of end posts and from terminal points shown on the plans. When “Remove Terminal Anchor Section” is specified as a separate bid item, measurement will be made for each removed section. A terminal anchor section consists of one post, one 25-ft. rail element, and associated hardware. When “Remove Downstream Anchor Terminal” is specified as a separate bid item, measurement will be made for each removed section. Downstream anchor terminal consists of two posts, one section, and associated hardware. 4. PAYMENT The work performed and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Remove Metal Beam Guard Fence,” “Remove Terminal Anchor Section,” and “Remove Downstream Anchor Terminal.” This price is full compensation for removing materials; loading, hauling, unloading, and storing or disposal; furnishing backfill material; backfilling postholes; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of mow strips or riprap will be paid for separately under the pertinent Items. Removal of curb associated with the metal beam guard fence transitions will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. 2024 Specifications 544 825 Item 544 Guardrail End Treatments 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install, move, or remove guardrail end treatments. 2. MATERIALS Furnish new materials from the MPL of rail element manufacturers. Obtain materials at the location shown on the plans when furnished by the Department. 3. CONSTRUCTION Install guardrail end treatments in conformance with manufacturer’s assembly and installation requirements and the details shown on the plans. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer’s installation and repair manuals specific to the guardrail end treatment. Move or remove guardrail end treatments as shown on the plans and as directed. Deliver salvageable materials as shown on the plans or as directed. Dispose of unsalvageable materials in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each guardrail end treatment. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Guardrail End Treatment (Install)” of the post and type specified where applicable, “Guardrail End Treatment (Move and Reset),” or “Guardrail End Treatment (Remove).” This price is full compensation for foundations, materials, stockpiling, disposal of unsalvageable materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Payment for “Guardrail End Treatment (Move and Reset)” will include each guardrail end treatment removed from a stockpile or from an existing location and reset in a new location as shown on the plans or as directed. Payment for “Guardrail End Treatment (Remove)” will include each guardrail end treatment removed from an existing location and stockpiled at the location shown on the plans, or disposed of, or as otherwise directed 2024 Specifications 636 880 Item 636 Signs 1. DESCRIPTION  Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect aluminum signs. Sign supports are provided for under other Items.  Replacement. Replace existing signs on existing or replaced sign supports. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Signs. Furnish completed signs in accordance with DMS-8301, “Highway Sign Fabrication.” 2.2. Hardware. Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or dichromate-sealed aluminum for bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hardware. Use plastic or nylon washers when in direct contact with the reflective sheeting. Furnish steel or aluminum products in accordance with DMS-7120, “Sign Hardware.” When dissimilar metals are used, select or insulate metals to prevent corrosion. 2.3. Sign Identification Decals. Furnish materials that meet the requirements of DMS-8315, “Sign Identification Decals.” 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Decals. The sign fabricator must code the sign identification decals by punching out the appropriate letter or digits for Rows 1–7 as shown in Figure 1 and Table 1. Rows 8–12 (Installation Date) are only for coding by the Engineer at their discretion. Affix the decal to lower left corner of the sign back in an upright position. Figure 1 shows the sign identification decal. The numbers to the far right as shown in Figure 1 are reference row numbers for Table 1 and are not part of the decal. Table 1 describes the information required in each row of the decal. 2024 Specifications 636 881 Texas Department of Transportation C Fabrication Date T 1 J F M A M J J A S O N D 2 202 203 204 205 206 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 Sheeting MFR—Substrate A B C D E F G H J K L M 5 Film MFR A B C D E F G H J K L M 6 Sheeting MFR—Legend A B C D E F G H J K L M 7 Installation Date 0 1 2 3 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 J F M A M J J A S O N D 10 202 203 204 205 206 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 Name of Sign Fabricator Physical Address City, State, Zip Code 13 Figure 1 Decal Design (Row Numbers Explained in Table 1) Table 1 Decal Description Row Explanation 1—Sign fabricator 2—Month fabricated 3—First 3 digits of year fabricated 4—Last digit of year fabricated 5—Manufacturer of the sheeting applied to the substrate 6—Film (colored transparent or non-reflective black) manufacturer 7—Manufacturer of the sheeting for the legend 8—Tens digit of date installed1 9—Ones digit of date installed1 10—Month installed1 11—First 3 digits of year installed1 12—Last digit of year installed1 13—Name of sign fabricator and physical location of sign shop 1. Only for coding by the Engineer at their discretion. 2024 Specifications 636 882 Code the decal by punching out the following:  “C” if fabricated by a commercial sign fabricator or “T” if fabricated by the Department or the Texas Department of Criminal Justice,  month fabricated,  first three digits of the year fabricated,  fourth digit of the year fabricated, and  sheeting and film manufacturers. (Codes for these manufacturers are located on the Department’s MPL.) 3.2. Storage and Handling. Ship, handle, and store completed sign blanks and completed signs so that corners, edges, and faces are not damaged. Damage to the sign face that is not visible when viewed at a distance of 50 ft., night or day, will be acceptable. Replace unacceptable signs. Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store finished sheet aluminum substrate signs in a weatherproof building. Extruded aluminum substrate signs may be stored outside. Stockpile salvageable materials at the location shown on the plans or as directed. Accept ownership and dispose of unsalvageable materials in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 3.3. Cleaning. Wash completed signs in the fabrication shop using a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the manufacturers of the sheeting, colored transparent film, and screen ink to remove grease, oil, dirt, smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign material. Wash again before final inspection after erection. 3.4. Installation. Install signs as shown on the plans or as directed. 3.5. Replacement. Remove the existing signs from the existing or replaced supports and replace with new signs, including mounting hardware, as shown on the plans. At the Engineer’s discretion, existing galvanized mounting hardware can be reused if it was not damaged during removal of existing sign. 3.6. Documentation. Provide a notarized original of the project-specific Signing Material Statement (Form 2273), from the sign fabricator, along with attached copies of pertinent material certifications for verification of compliance. 4. MEASUREMENT Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Aluminum Signs,” or “Replacing Existing Aluminum Signs,” of the type specified. 5.1. Installation. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hardware; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, and stiffeners; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 636 883 5.2. Replacement. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new aluminum signs and hardware; reusing existing hardware (when applicable); removal of existing signs; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, and stiffeners; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; salvaging and disposing of unsalvageable materials; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 644 884 Item 644 Small Roadside Sign Assemblies 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1. Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect small roadside sign assemblies or bridge-mounted clearance sign assemblies consisting of the signs, sign supports, foundations (when required), and associated mounting hardware. 1.2. Relocation. Relocate existing small roadside sign assemblies or bridge-mounted clearance sign assemblies and furnish and fabricate material as required. 1.3. Removal. Remove existing small roadside sign assemblies or bridge-mounted clearance sign assemblies. 2. MATERIALS Furnish all materials unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish only new materials. Furnish and fabricate materials in accordance with the following Items and as shown on the plans.  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete”  Item 441, “Steel Structures”  Item 442, “Metal for Structures”  Item 445, “Galvanizing”  Item 636, “Signs”  Item 656, “Foundations for Traffic Control Devices” Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, dichromate sealed aluminum, or other materials shown on the plans for pipe, bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hardware. When dissimilar metals are used, select or insulate metals to prevent corrosion. 3. CONSTRUCTION Construct foundations in accordance with Item 656. Plumb sign supports. Do not spring or rake posts to secure proper alignment. Use established safety practices when working near underground or overhead utilities. Consult the appropriate utility company before beginning work. 3.1. Fabrication. Fabricate sign supports in accordance with Item 441. Ensure all components fit properly. Verify the length of each post for each sign before fabrication to meet field conditions and sign-mounting heights shown on the plans. Hot-dip galvanize fabricated parts in accordance with Item 445. Punch or drill any holes in steel parts or members before galvanizing. Repair galvanizing for any steel part or member damaged during assembly, transit, or erection, or for any steel part or member welded, when permitted, after galvanizing. Perform all galvanizing repairs in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” 3.2. Installation. Locate and install sign supports as shown on the plans, unless directed to shift the sign supports within design guidelines to secure a more desirable location or avoid conflict with utilities and underground appurtenances. Stake sign support locations for verification by the Engineer. 2024 Specifications 644 885 Install stub posts of the type, spacing, orientation, and projection shown on the plans. Remove and replace posts damaged during installation at the Contractor’s expense. Connect the upper post sections to the stub post sections as shown on the plans. Torque connection bolts as shown on the plans. Attach signs to supports in conformance with the plans and pertinent Items. 3.3. Relocation. Reuse the existing signs as required unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish and install new stub posts in new foundations for relocated sign assemblies. Erect the new supports on the new stub posts and attach the existing signs to the supports in conformance with the plans and pertinent Items. Remove existing foundations to be abandoned in accordance with Section 644.3.4., “Removal.” 3.4. Removal. Remove abandoned concrete foundations to 2 ft. below finished grade unless otherwise shown on the plans. Cut off and remove steel protruding from the remaining concrete. Backfill the remaining hole with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace any surfacing with like material to equivalent condition. 3.5. Handling and Storage. Handle and store existing signs or portions of signs removed so they are not damaged. Store all signs to be reused off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Prevent any damage to the various sign assembly components. Replace any portion of the sign damaged by the Contractor designated for reuse or salvage, including messages removed. Store all new signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store new sheet aluminum substrate signs in a weatherproof building. Extruded aluminum substrate signs may be stored outdoors. Stockpile all removed sign components that will be reused or become the property of the Department at designated locations. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of them in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. 3.6. Cleaning. Wash the entire sign after installation using a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the sign face materials manufacturer to remove dirt, grease, oil smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign materials. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured as each small roadside assembly or bridge-mounted clearance sign assembly installed, removed, or relocated. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Install Small Roadside Sign Assemblies” of the type specified, “Install Bridge-Mounted Clearance Sign Assemblies” of the type specified, “Relocate Small Roadside Sign Assemblies” of the type specified, “Relocate Bridge-Mounted Clearance Sign Assemblies” of the type specified, “Remove Small Roadside Sign Assemblies,” or “Remove Bridge-Mounted Clearance Sign Assemblies.” 5.1. Installation. This price is full compensation for furnishing, fabricating, galvanizing, and erecting the supports; constructing foundations, including concrete (when required); furnishing complete signs, including sign connections and all hardware; attaching the signs to the supports; preparing and cleaning the signs; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.2. Relocation. This price is full compensation for removing existing sign assemblies and related materials; furnishing and installing new stub posts and new sign supports; constructing foundations, including concrete (when required); new hardware; reinstallation of signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; salvaging; disposal 2024 Specifications 644 886 of unsalvageable materials; removing existing foundations, backfilling, and surface placement; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.3. Removal. This price is full compensation for removing existing sign assemblies and related materials; salvaging; disposal of unsalvageable materials; removing existing foundations, backfilling, and surface placement; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 656 896 Item 656 Foundations for Traffic Control Devices 1. DESCRIPTION Construct concrete foundations for small roadside signs, traffic signal controller cabinets, pedestal poles, roadside flashing beacon assemblies, electrical services, and other small traffic control devices. 2. MATERIALS Ensure materials and construction methods conform to the requirements of this Item and the pertinent requirements of the following Items.  Item 400, “Excavation and Backfill for Structures”  Item 416, “Drilled Shaft Foundations”  Item 420, “Concrete Substructures”  Item 421, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete”  Item 432, “Riprap”  Item 440, “Reinforcement for Concrete”  Item 441, “Steel Structures”  Item 442, “Metal for Structures”  Item 445, “Galvanizing”  Item 447, “Structural Bolting”  Item 449, “Anchor Bolts”  Item 618, “Conduit” Use Class A concrete for non-reinforced drilled shafts. Use Class C concrete for reinforced drilled shafts. Use Class B concrete or polymer concrete composed of borosilicate glass fiber, catalyzed polyester resin, and aggregate for traffic signal controller cabinet foundations. Use drilled shaft or galvanized steel screw-in type foundations for roadside flashing beacon assemblies. Use reinforcing steel when required. 3. CONSTRUCTION Stake and install foundations as shown on the plans. The Engineer may shift the foundation locations within design guidelines where necessary to secure a more desirable location or avoid conflict with utilities. Use established industry and utility safety practices when working near underground or overhead utilities. Consult the appropriate utility before beginning work. Hold anchor bolts in place using templates during concrete placement. Hold embedded items such as conduit or other hardware in place during concrete placement using templates or other approved means. Cap conduits before placing concrete. Ream conduit to remove burrs and sharp edges. Install bell ends or bushings on the conduit. Carefully align foundation, posts, and anchor bolts. Do not spring or rake posts or anchor bolts. Remove the top template after concrete has achieved initial set. Keep forms and other bracing intact until the concrete has cured at least 1 curing day. 2024 Specifications 656 897 Allow concrete for pedestal poles and roadside flashing beacon assemblies to cure at least 7 days before placing bases and poles on the foundation, unless otherwise permitted in writing. Allow concrete for traffic signal controller cabinet foundations and small roadside signs to cure at least 4 days before placing cabinets and posts on the foundation, unless otherwise permitted. Provide an ordinary surface finish to the concrete foundation extending above ground in accordance with Section 420.4.13., “Ordinary Surface Finish.” Place concrete riprap around the foundation as shown on the plans. Backfill disturbed surface with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace surfacing material with similar material to an equivalent condition. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 658 898 Item 658 Delineator and Object Marker Assemblies 1. DESCRIPTION  Installation. Install delineator or object marker assembly.  Removal. Remove delineator or object marker assembly.  Replacement. Remove existing delineator or object marker assembly and replace with new delineator or object marker assembly. 2. MATERIALS Furnish only new materials as shown on the plans unless otherwise directed. The Engineer will sample in accordance with Tex-725-I or Tex-737-I. 2.1. Delineator and Object Marker Assemblies. Fabricate in accordance with the following.  DMS-8600, “Delineators, Object Markers, and Barrier Reflectors”  DMS-4400, “Flexible Delineator and Object Marker Posts (Embedded and Surface-Mount Types)” 2.2. Wing Channel Post. Furnish material of the size shown on the plans. Supply a notarized original of Form D-9-USA-1 (Department Form 1818) with supporting mill test report certifying that the base metal is in accordance with the following.  ASTM A1011, SS Grade 50  ASTM A499 Galvanize material in accordance with Item 445, “Galvanizing.” 3. CONSTRUCTION 3.1. Installation. Locate delineators, object markers, and barrier reflectors as shown on the plans or as directed and install in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Install winged channel post and flexible delineator posts to allow the reflector units and reflectorized panels to be installed at the specified height and orientation. Align post as shown or as directed. Drive post plumb using a driving cap to prevent visible cross-section dimension distortion. Drill or drive a pilot hole when post cannot be driven without visibly distorting the cross-section dimension. Backfill pilot holes thoroughly by tamping in 6-in. lifts to grade. Repair damaged galvanizing in accordance with Section 445.3.4., “Repairs.” Install reflector units on wing channel posts after the posts have been erected. 3.2. Removal. Remove post assemblies without damaging materials, and salvage when indicated on the plans. Remove post to a minimum of 6 in. below finished grade. Stockpile salvaged materials at the location shown on the plans or as directed. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of them in conformance with federal, state, and local requirements. 3.3. Replacement. Remove existing delineator or object marker assembly in accordance with Section 658.3.2., “Removal,” and replace with new delineator or object marker assembly in accordance with Section 658.3.1., “Installation.” 2024 Specifications 658 899 4. MEASUREMENT Installation will be measured by each delineator or object marker assembly installed, removed, or replaced. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Install Delineator Assemblies,” “Install Object Marker Assemblies,” “Install High Speed/High Impact Assemblies,” “Replace Delineator Assemblies,” or “Replace Object Marker Assemblies” of the types and colors specified, and for “Remove Delineator or Object Marker Assemblies.” 5.1. Installation. This price is full compensation for furnishing and fabricating when required; installing and mounting the delineator or object marker assemblies, including posts, adhesive or pads for surface mount assemblies, back plates, reflector units, fastening plates, brackets, bolts, nuts, and washers; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.2. Removal. This price is full compensation for removal and disposal of delineator and object marker assemblies and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 5.3. Replacement. This price is full compensation for removal and disposal of existing delineator and object marker assemblies; furnishing, installing, and mounting new delineator or object marker assemblies, including posts, adhesive or pads for surface mount assemblies, back plates, reflector units, fastening plates, brackets, bolts, nuts, and washers; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 2024 Specifications 666 903 Item 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and place retroreflectorized or non-retroreflectorized (shadow) pavement markings. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Type I Marking Materials (Thermoplastic). Furnish in accordance with DMS-8220, “Hot Applied Thermoplastic.” 2.2. Type II Marking Materials (Traffic Paint). Furnish in accordance with DMS-8200, “Traffic Paint.” 2.3. Type III Marking Materials (Multipolymer). Furnish in accordance with DMS-8230, ”Multipolymer Pavement Markings.” 2.4. Glass Traffic Beads. For Type I, Type II, and Type III pavement markings, furnish drop-on glass beads in accordance with DMS-8290, “Glass Traffic Beads,” to meet the specified retroreflective performance requirements for all permanent, longitudinal pavement markings. 2.5. Labeling. To sample material, use clearly marked containers that indicate material type, color, mass, manufacturer, and batch number. 3. EQUIPMENT 3.1. General Requirements. Use pavement marking equipment that:  is maintained in satisfactory condition;  meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Texas Railroad Commission for this application;  applies beads by an automatic bead dispenser attached to the pavement marking equipment such that the beads are dispensed uniformly and almost instantly upon the marking as the marking is being applied to the road surface. The bead dispenser must have an automatic cut-off control, synchronized with the cut-off of the pavement marking equipment;  has an automatic cut-off device with manual operating capabilities to provide clean marking with square ends;  can produce the types and shapes of profiles specified; and  can provide continuous mixing and agitation of the pavement marking material. The use of pans, aprons, or similar appliances that the die overruns will not be permitted for longitudinal striping applications exceeding a project length of 2,000 ft., unless otherwise approved. When placing multipolymer pavement markings (MPM), use equipment designed for pavement preparation and the application of selected type of MPM material. Provide a handheld thermometer capable of measuring the temperature between 300°F and 450°F to measure the temperature of marking material in the field, when applying Type I material. 3.1.1. Measuring Retroreflectivity. Use a mobile retroreflectometer approved by the Materials and Tests Division and certified by the Texas A&M Transportation Institute (TTI) Mobile Retroreflectometer Certification Program. 2024 Specifications 666 904 Use a portable retroreflectometer that:  uses 30-meter geometry and meets the requirements described in ASTM E1710;  has either an internal Global Positioning System (GPS) or the ability to be linked with an external GPS with a minimum location accuracy of 16.5 ft., in accordance with the Circular Error Probability (CEP) method (CEP is the radius of the circle with its origin at a known position that encompasses 50% of the readings returned from the GPS instrument); and  can record and export the GPS location and retroreflectivity reading for each measurement. 3.2. Material Placement Requirements. Use equipment that can place:  a minimum length of 30,000 ft. for 6-in. solid or broken non-profile markings per working day at the specified thickness, unless otherwise approved;  a minimum length of 15,000 ft. of solid or broken profile pavement markings per working day at the specified thickness;  linear non-profile markings up to 8 in. wide in a single pass;  non-profile pavement markings other than solid or broken lines at an approved production rate;  a centerline and no-passing barrier-line configuration (consisting of one broken line and two solid lines simultaneously) to the alignment, spacing, and thickness for non-profile pavement markings shown on the plans;  solid and broken lines simultaneously;  white line from both sides;  lines with clean edges, reasonably square ends, uniform width with a tolerance of ±1/8 in., and uniform thickness;  skip lines between 10 and 10.5 ft., a stripe-to-gap ratio of 10 to 30, and a stripe-gap cycle between 39.5 ft. and 40.5 ft., automatically; and  beads uniformly and almost instantly on the marking as the marking is applied. For Type I markings, equipment must be capable of providing uniform heating of striping materials to temperatures exceeding 390°F (199°C). Ensure that the material is not heated to a temperature above the maximum temperature recommended by the manufacturer. For Type I markings, equipment must be capable of maintaining the thermoplastic striping material in a plastic state in all mixing and conveying parts, including the line dispensing device, until applied. 4. CONSTRUCTION Place markings before opening to traffic unless short-term or work zone markings are allowed. 4.1. General. Obtain approval for the sequence of work and estimated daily production. Minimize interference to roadway operations when placing markings on roadways open to traffic. Use traffic control as shown on the plans or as approved. Protect all markings placed under open-traffic conditions from traffic damage and disfigurement. Replace markings when more than 5% of the markings are damaged or disfigured. Establish guides to mark the lateral location of pavement markings as shown on the plans or as directed and have guide locations verified. Use material for guides that will not leave a permanent mark on the roadway. Apply markings on completely dry pavement that passes the following tests.  Type I Marking Application. Place a sample of Type I marking material on a piece of tarpaper placed on the pavement. Allow the material to cool to ambient temperature, then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with the pavement. Pavement will be considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. 2024 Specifications 666 905  Type II and Type III Marking Application. Place a 1-sq. ft. piece of clear plastic on the pavement and weigh down the edges. The pavement is considered dry if, when inspected after 15 min., no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plastic. Apply markings:  using personnel skilled and experienced in installation of pavement markings;  that meet the requirements of Tex-828-B;  that meet minimum retroreflectivity requirements;  using widths and colors shown on the plans;  at locations shown on the plans;  in proper alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 1 in. per 200 ft. of roadway or more than 2 in. maximum;  without abrupt deviations;  free of blisters and with no more than 5% holes or voids (percent by area);  with uniform cross-section, density, and thickness;  with clean and reasonably square ends; and  that are retroreflectorized with drop-on glass beads. Remove all applied markings that are not in alignment or sequence as shown on the plans or in accordance with the specifications at the Contractor’s expense, in accordance with Item 677, “Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers,” except for measurement and payment. 4.2. Spot Striping. Perform spot striping on a callout basis with a minimum callout quantity as shown on the plans. 4.3. Surface Preparation. Prepare surfaces in accordance with this Section unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4.3.1. Surface Cleaning for Pavement Marking Applications on New Asphalt Surfaces with No Existing Pavement Markings and for Retracing of Existing Pavement Markings on All Surfaces. Use air blast or broom to clean the pavement surface to remove loose material unless otherwise shown on the plans. A sealer for Type I markings is not required unless otherwise shown on the plans. If cleaning is needed beyond what is specified, Engineer can use force account to compensate for the extra effort. This is mainly applied when the pavement is covered with thick layer of dirt or mud or there is grass growing on the pavement. 4.3.2. Surface Cleaning for All Concrete Surfaces and Asphalt Surfaces Only When Specified in the Plans (Excludes New Asphalt Surfaces with No Existing Pavement Markings and Retracing). Clean surfaces in accordance with Item 678, “Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings,” to remove curing membrane, dirt, grease, existing loose and flaking construction markings, and other forms of contamination. 4.3.3. Sealer for Type I Markings. Apply a pavement sealer when shown on the plans. Pavement sealers are recommended for old asphalt surfaces (more than 3 yr. old) and for all concrete surfaces before placing Type I markings on locations that do not have existing markings. The pavement sealer may be either a Type II marking or an acrylic or epoxy sealer as recommended by the Type I marking manufacturer, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for application of acrylic or epoxy sealers. Clean the surface of sealer that becomes dirty after placement by washing or in accordance with Section 666.4.3.1., “Surface Cleaning for Pavement Marking Applications on New Asphalt Surfaces with No Existing Pavement Markings and for Retracing of Existing Pavement Markings on All Surfaces,” as directed. Place the sealer in the same configuration and color (unless clear) as the Type I markings unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4.4. Application. Apply markings during favorable weather unless otherwise directed. If markings are placed at Contractor option when inclement weather is impending and the markings are damaged by subsequent precipitation, the Contractor is responsible for all required replacement costs. 2024 Specifications 666 906 4.4.1. Type I Markings. Place all Type I markings after the sealer cures. Apply within the temperature limits recommended by the material manufacturer. Flush the spray head if spray application operations cease for 5 min. or longer, by spraying marking material into a pan or similar container until the material being applied is at the recommended temperature. Apply on clean, dry pavement passing the moisture test in accordance with Section 666.4.1., “General,” and with a surface temperature above 50°F when measured in accordance with Tex-829-B. The Engineer will measure thickness of markings in accordance with Tex-854-B. 4.4.1.1. Non-Profile Pavement Markings. Apply Type I non-profile markings with a minimum thickness of:  0.100 in. (100 mils) for new markings and retracing water-based markings on surface treatments involving Item 316, “Seal Coat,”  0.060 in. (60 mils) for retracing on thermoplastic pavement markings, or  0.090 in. (90 mils) for all other Type I markings. 4.4.1.2. Profile Pavement Markings. Apply Type I profile markings with a minimum thickness of 0.090 in. (90 mils) for the longitudinal stripe portion. In addition, at a longitudinal spacing shown on the plans, the markings must be profiled in a vertical manner such that the profile is transverse to the longitudinal marking direction. The profile must not be less than 0.30 in. (300 mils) nor greater than 0.41 in. (410 mils) in height when measured from the normal top surface plane of the base marking to the top of the raised profile marking. The transverse width of the profile must not be less than 5.25 in. and the longitudinal width not less than 2 in., when measured at the top surface plane of the profile bar. The profile may be either a one or two transverse bar profile. When the two transverse bar profile is used, the spacing between the bases of the profile bars must not exceed 0.50 in. The above dimensions for transverse bars are for 6-in. wide longitudinal marking. The raised profile markings must be uniform in size, appearance, and spacing. When profile markings are applied in a two-step process, the raised profile markings must be applied first and then the stripe applied over them. The raised profile markings in a two-step process may be circular in shape. The circular profile markings must be uniform in diameter and the diameter must not be less than 5.25 in. The height of the apex must not be less than 0.30 in. (300 mils) nor greater than 0.41 in. (410 mils) when measured from the normal top surface of the base marking to the top of the raised profile marking. 4.4.1.3. Type I All-Weather Pavement Markings. Apply Type I all-weather markings to at least 100-mil film thickness. 4.4.2. Type II Markings. Apply on surfaces with a minimum surface temperature of 50°F when measured in accordance with Tex-829-B. Apply at least 30 gal. per mile on concrete and asphalt surfaces and at least 33 gal. per mile on surface treatments for a solid 6-in. line. Adjust application rates proportionally for other widths. When Type II markings are used as a sealer for Type I markings, apply at least 22-1/2 gal. per mile using Type II drop-on beads. Apply Type II all-weather markings to at least 25-mil wet film thickness. 4.4.3. Type III Markings. Apply in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4.4.4. Bead Coverage and Embedment. Provide a uniform distribution of beads across the surface of the stripe with 40–60% bead embedment. 4.4.5. Durability. Provide markings that do not lose more than 5% of the striping material in any 1-ft. section of stripe during their performance period in accordance with Section 666.4.8., “Performance Period.” Measure the durability in accordance with ASTM D913. 2024 Specifications 666 907 4.5. Retroreflectivity Requirements. Retroreflectivity requirements are not required for Contracts with less than 20,000 total ft. of longitudinal pavement markings, callout work, black shadow markings, or work zone pavement markings. Retroreflectivity requirements are for dry conditions unless otherwise specified. 4.5.1. Type I Markings. All Type I markings, including profile markings, must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings.  White Markings (ASTM E1710). 250 millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx).  Yellow Markings (ASTM E1710). 175 mcd/m2/lx. Collect retroreflectivity measurement for markings applied on pavement surface other than seal coat after 10 days but not later than 30 days from the time of application. For markings applied on seal coat, measure retroreflectivity after 3 days but not later than 10 days from the time of application. 4.5.2. Type I High-Performance Markings. Type I high-performance markings must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings when measured any time after 30 days but not later than 60 days from the time of application.  White Markings (ASTM E1710). 400 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings (ASTM E1710). 250 mcd/m2/lx. 4.5.3. Type I All-Weather Markings. Type I all-weather markings must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings when measured any time after 30 days but not later than 60 days from the time of application.  White Markings Dry (ASTM E1710). 400 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Dry (ASTM E1710). 250 mcd/m2/lx.  White Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM E2832). 150 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM E2832). 125 mcd/m2/lx. 4.5.4. Type II Markings. Type II markings must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line, markings.  White Markings. 175 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings. 125 mcd/m2/lx. Collect retroreflectivity measurement for markings applied on pavement surface other than seal coat after 10 days but not later than 30 days from the time of application. For markings applied on seal coat, measure retroreflectivity after 3 days but not later than 10 days from the time of application. 4.5.5. Type II All-Weather Markings. Meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings.  White Markings Dry (ASTM E1710). 250 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Dry (ASTM E1710). 150 mcd/m2/lx.  White Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM E2832). 100 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM E2832). 75 mcd/m2/lx. Collect retroreflectivity measurement for markings applied on pavement surface other than seal coat after 10 days but not later than 30 days from the time of application. For markings applied on seal coat, measure the retroreflectivity after 3 days but not later than 10 days from the time of application. 4.5.6. Type III Markings. Type III markings must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings when measured any time after 30 days but not later than 60 days from the time of application.  White Markings. 400 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings. 250 mcd/m2/lx. 2024 Specifications 666 908 4.5.7. Type III All-Weather Markings. Type III all-weather markings must meet the following minimum retroreflectivity values for all longitudinal edgeline, centerline, no-passing barrier line, and lane line markings when measured any time after 30 days but not later than 60 days from the time of application.  White Markings Dry (ASTM 1710). 400 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Dry (ASTM 1710). 250 mcd/m2/lx.  White Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM 2832). 150 mcd/m2/lx.  Yellow Markings Wet Continuous (ASTM 2832). 125 mcd/m2/lx. 4.6. Retroreflectivity Measurements. Use a mobile retroreflectometer to measure the retroreflectivity of markings for Contracts with more than 50,000 total ft. of longitudinal pavement markings, unless otherwise shown on the plans. For Contracts between 20,000 and 50,000 total ft. of longitudinal pavement markings, mobile or portable retroreflectometers may be used at the Contractor’s discretion. Coordinate with and obtain authorization from the Engineer before starting any retroreflectivity data collection. Use a portable retroreflectometer for measuring the wet continuous retroreflectivity in accordance with ASTM E2832. Notify the Department when wet retroreflectivity measurements are to be taken. The Department will observe the wet retroreflectivity readings. 4.6.1. Mobile Retroreflectometer Measurements. Provide mobile measurement averages for every 0.1 mi. unless otherwise specified or approved. Take measurements on each section of roadway for each series of markings (e.g., edgeline, center skip line, and each line of a double line) and for each direction of traffic flow. Measure each line in both directions for centerlines on two-way roadways (i.e., measure both double solid lines in both directions and measure all center skip lines in both directions). Furnish measurements in accordance with Item 667, “Mobile Retroreflectivity Data Collection for Pavement Markings,” unless otherwise approved. The Engineer may require a field comparison check using a calibrated portable retroreflectometer for verification and to ensure accuracy. Use all equipment in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and directions. Inform the Engineer and TTI at least 24 hr. before taking any measurements. A marking meets the retroreflectivity requirements if:  the combined average retroreflectivity measurement for a 1-mi. segment meets the minimum retroreflectivity values specified and no more than 30% of the retroreflectivity measurement values are below the minimum retroreflectivity requirements value within that 1-mi. segment; or  the combined average retroreflectivity measurement for a 1-mi. segment does not meet the minimum retroreflectivity values specified, but no more than 20% of the retroreflectivity measurements within that 1-mi. segment are below the minimum retroreflectivity requirement. The 1-mi. segment will start from the beginning of the data collection and end after a mile’s worth of measurements have been taken. Each subsequent mile of measurements will be a new segment. Centerlines with two stripes (either solid or broken) will result in 2 mi. of data for each mile segment. Each centerline stripe must be tested for compliance as a stand-alone stripe. Restripe at the Contractor’s expense if the markings fail retroreflectivity requirements. Take retroreflectivity measurements of all restriped markings following the time interval allowed based on the type of marking and the pavement surface for the latest application. For all Type I markings, if the restripe application does not meet minimum retroreflectivity requirements or the initial stripe combined with the restripe exceeds 0.180 in. (180 mils), the Engineer may require:  removal of all existing markings,  a new application as initially specified, and  a repeat of the application process until minimum retroreflectivity requirements are met. 2024 Specifications 666 909 For all Type III markings, if the first application does not meet minimum retroreflectivity requirements, the Engineer may require removal of all existing markings, a new application as initially specified, and a repeat of the application process until minimum retroreflectivity requirements are met. 4.6.2. Portable Retroreflectometer Measurements. For non-all-weather markings, provide portable measurement averages for every 1.0 mi. unless otherwise specified or approved. Using a portable reflectometer, take at least 20 measurements for each 1-mi. section of roadway for each series of markings (e.g., edgeline, center skip line, and each line of a double line) and direction of traffic flow. Measure each line in both directions for centerlines on two-way roadways (i.e., measure both double solid lines in both directions and measure all center skip lines in both directions). The spacing between each measurement must be at least 100 ft. The Engineer may decrease the mileage frequency for measurements if the previous measurements provide satisfactory results. The Engineer may resume the original number of measurements if concerns arise. For all-weather markings, take at least three measurements for each series of markings (e.g., edgeline, center skip line, and each line of a double line) and direction of traffic flow and average the three measurements for each marking. The spacing between each measurement must be at least 100 ft. If the average of the three measurements taken on an individual marking falls below the minimum acceptable retroreflectivity value, take at least six additional measurements on that individual marking and average them. These six additional measurements must also be spaced at least 100 ft. apart. If the average of these six measurements falls below the minimum acceptable retroreflectivity value, the marking does not meet the performance requirements. Restripe at the Contractor’s expense if the averages of these measurements fail. Retake portable retroreflectometer measurements of all restriped markings following the time interval allowed based on the type of marking and the pavement surface for the latest application. 4.7. Traffic Control. Provide traffic control, as required, when taking portable retroreflectivity measurements after marking application. For the minimum traffic control requirements on low-volume roadways (as shown on the plans), refer to “Temporary Road Closure” in Part 6 of the TMUTCD. For all other roadways, the minimum traffic control requirements will be as shown on the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) standard sheets TCP (3-1) and TCP (3-2). The lead vehicle will not be required on divided highways. The TCP and traffic control devices must meet the requirements listed in Item 502, “Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling.” Time restrictions that apply during striping application will also apply during the retroreflectivity inspections, except when using the mobile retroreflectometer, unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved. 4.8. Performance Period. All longitudinal markings must meet the minimum retroreflectivity requirements within the timeframe specified. All markings must meet all other performance requirements in accordance with this Item for at least 30 calendar days after installation. Unless otherwise directed, remove pavement markings that fail to meet requirements and replace them at the Contractor’s expense. Replace failing markings within 30 days of notification. All replacement markings must also meet all requirements in accordance with this Item for at least 30 calendar days after installation. 5. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot; by each word, symbol, or shape; or by any other unit shown on the plans. Each stripe will be measured separately. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. Acrylic or epoxy sealer, or Type II markings when used as a sealer for Type I markings, will be measured by the foot; by each word, symbol, or shape; or by any other unit shown on the plans. Profile pavement markings will be measured as a marking consisting of both the pavement marking stripe and the raised profile, regardless of the installation method used. 2024 Specifications 666 910 6. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Pavement Sealer” of the size specified; “Pavement Sealer (Call Out)” of the size specified; “Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings” of the type, color, shape, width, size, and thickness specified; “Non-Retroreflectorized Shadow Pavement Markings” of the type, width, size, and thickness specified; “Type I High Performance Pavement Markings” of the color, width, size, and thickness specified; “All-Weather Pavement Markings” of the type, color, shape, width, and thickness specified; “Pavement Marking (Call Out)” of the type, color, width, size, and thickness specified; or “Retroreflectorized Profile Pavement Markings” of the color, shape, size, and width specified. This price is full compensation for application of pavement markings, materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Surface cleaning for all concrete surfaces and asphalt surfaces only when shown on the plans (excludes new asphalt surfaces with no existing pavement markings and retracing) will be paid for under Item 678. Surface cleaning for pavement marking applications on new asphalt surfaces with no existing pavement markings and for retracing of existing pavement markings on all surfaces will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. If cleaning is needed beyond regular brooming and blowing compressed air, the Engineer may use force account to compensate for the extra effort. This is mainly applied when the pavement is covered with a thick layer of dirt or mud or grass is growing on the pavement. Surface preparation of any surface where pavement markings are being retraced, except for sealing, will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. If the Engineer requires that markings be placed in inclement weather, repair or replacement of markings damaged by the inclement weather will be paid for in addition to the original plans quantity. 2024 Specifications 672 917 Item 672 Raised Pavement Markers 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install raised pavement markers (RPMs). 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Markers. Furnish RPMs in accordance with the following.  Reflectorized Pavement Markers. DMS-4200, “Pavement Markers (Reflectorized),” Types I-A, I-C, I-R, II-A-A, II-C-C, and II-C- R  Traffic Buttons. DMS-4300, “Traffic Buttons,” W, Y, and B. Round or oval unless otherwise shown on the plans  Plowable Reflectorized Pavement Markers. DMS-4210, “Snowplowable Pavement Markers,” Types I-A, I-C, I-R, II-A-A, II-C-C, and II-C- R The following are descriptions for each type of RPM.  Type I-A. The approach face must retroreflect amber light. The body, other than the retroreflective face, must be yellow.  Type I-C. The approach face must retroreflect white light. The body, other than the retroreflective face, must be white or silver-white.  Type I-R. The trailing face must retroreflect red light. The body, other than the retroreflective face, must be white or silver-white, except for I-R plowable markers, which may be black.  Type II-A-A. The two retroreflective faces (approach and trailing) must retroreflect amber light. The body, other than the retroreflective faces, must be yellow.  Type II-C-R. Contains two retroreflective faces with an approach face that must retroreflect white light and a trailing face that must retroreflect red light. The body, other than the retroreflective faces, must be white or silver-white.  Type II-C-C. Contain two retroreflective faces (approach and trailing) that retroreflect white light. The body, other than the retroreflective face, must be white or silver-white.  Type W. Must have a white body and no reflective faces.  Type Y. Must have a yellow body and no reflective faces.  Type B. Must have a black body and no reflective faces. 2.2. Adhesives. Furnish adhesives in accordance with the following.  DMS-6100, “Epoxies and Adhesives,” Type II—Traffic Marker Adhesives  DMS-6130, “Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers” The Contractor may propose alternate adhesive materials for consideration and approval. 2.3. Sampling. The Engineer will sample in accordance with Tex-729-I. 3. CONSTRUCTION Remove existing RPMs in accordance with Item 677, “Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers,” except for measurement and payment. Furnish RPMs for each class from the same manufacturer. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with Item 678, “Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings,” when shown on the 2024 Specifications 672 918 plans. Ensure the bond surfaces are free of dirt, curing compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose or unsound pavement markings, and any other material that would adversely affect the adhesive bond. Establish pavement marking guides to mark the lateral location of RPMs as shown on the plans and as directed. Do not make permanent marks on the roadway for the guides. Place RPMs in proper alignment with the guides. Acceptable placement deviations are shown on the plans. If necessary, remove and replace RPMs placed out of alignment or sequence, as shown on the plans or in accordance with this Item, at the Contractor’s expense in accordance with Item 677 (except for measurement and payment). Use the following adhesive materials for placement of reflectorized pavement markers and traffic buttons, unless otherwise shown on the plans:  standard or flexible bituminous adhesive for applications on bituminous pavements, and  epoxy adhesive or flexible bituminous adhesive for applications on hydraulic cement concrete pavements. Use epoxy adhesive for plowable reflectorized pavement markers. Apply enough adhesives to:  ensure that 100% of the bonding area of RPMs is in contact with the adhesive, and  ensure that RPMs, except for plowable markers, are seated on a continuous layer of adhesive and not in contact with the pavement surface. Apply adhesives in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations unless otherwise required by this Article. Apply bituminous adhesive only when pavement temperature and RPM temperature are 40°F or higher. Do not heat bituminous adhesive above 400°F. Machine agitate bituminous adhesive continuously before application to ensure even heat distribution. Machine-mix epoxy adhesive. Apply epoxy adhesive only when pavement temperature is 50°F or higher. Furnish RPMs free of rust, scale, dirt, oil, grease, moisture, and contaminants that might adversely affect the adhesive bond. Place RPMs immediately after the adhesive is applied and ensure proper bonding. Do not use adhesives or any other material that impairs the functional retroreflectivity of the RPMs. All RPMs must meet performance requirements for at least 30 calendar days after installation. Replace all missing, broken, or non-reflective RPMs. Visual evaluations will be used for these determinations. Upon request, the Engineer will allow a Contractor representative to accompany the Engineer on these evaluations. The Engineer may exclude RPMs from the replacement provisions of the performance, provided the Engineer determines the failure is a result of causes other than defective material or inadequate installation procedures. Examples of outside causes are extreme wear at intersections, damage by snow or ice removal, and pavement failure. Replace all missing or non-reflective RPMs identified during the performance period within 30 days after notification. The end of the performance period does not relieve the Contractor from the performance deficiencies requiring corrective action identified during the performance period. 2024 Specifications 672 919 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each RPM. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Reflectorized Pavement Marker,” “Traffic Button,” or “Plowable Reflectorized Pavement Marker” of the types specified. This price is full compensation for removing existing markers; furnishing and installing RPMs; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. No additional payment will be made for replacement of RPMs failing to meet the performance requirements. 2024 Specifications 677 920 Item 677 Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers 1. DESCRIPTION Eliminate existing pavement markings and raised pavement markers (RPMs). 2. MATERIALS Furnish surface treatment materials in accordance with the following Items.  Item 300, “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions”  Item 302, “Aggregates for Surface Treatments”  Item 315, “Fog Seal”  Item 316, “Seal Coat” Use approved patching materials for repairing damaged surfaces. Use a commercial abrasive blasting medium capable of producing the specified surface cleanliness. Use potable water when water is required. 3. EQUIPMENT Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. Use moisture and oil traps in air compression equipment to remove all contaminants from the blasting air and prevent the deposition of moisture, oil, or other contaminants on the roadway surface. 4. CONSTRUCTION Eliminate existing pavement markings and markers on both concrete and asphaltic surfaces such that color and texture contrast of the removed area and surrounding pavement surface will be held to a minimum. Remove all markings and markers with minimal damage to the roadway to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Repair damage to asphaltic surfaces such as spalling and shelling greater than 1/8 in. deep resulting from the removal of pavement markings and markers. Dispose of markers in conformance with federal, state, and local regulations. Use any of the following methods unless otherwise shown on the plans. Refer to the Pavement Marking Handbook for additional information on removal types and best practices. 4.1. Surface Treatment Method. Apply surface treatment material at the rates shown on the plans, or as directed. Place a surface treatment at least 2 ft. wide to cover the existing marking. Place a surface treatment, thin overlay, or microsurfacing at least one lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic are involved or other areas as directed. 4.2. Burn Method. Use an approved burning method. For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement markings, heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the marking material before blast cleaning. When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surfaces. Ensure the burning heads are not left in one place too long to prevent pavement damage. Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. 4.3. Blasting Method. Use a blasting method such as high-pressure water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. Use high-pressure water blasting for removal of pavement markings for lane shifts on concrete surfaces. 2024 Specifications 677 921 4.4. Mechanical Method. Use any mechanical method except grinding. Do not use flail milling on grooved concrete or porous asphalt. 4.5. Corrective Actions. Whenever removed markings on asphalt surfaces continue to simulate pavement markings to an extent determined by the Engineer to cause driver confusion, apply a fog seal or slurry at least 2 ft. wide over the area where pavement markings were removed as approved. 5. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each word, symbol, or shape eliminated; by the foot of marking eliminated; or by any other unit shown on the plans. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 6. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers” of the type and width as applicable. This price is full compensation for the elimination method used and materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals. Removal of RPMs will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 2024 Specifications 678 922 Item 678 Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings 1. DESCRIPTION Prepare pavement surface areas before placement of pavement markings and raised pavement markers (RPMs). Item 677, “Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers,” governs removal of existing markings. 2. MATERIALS When abrasive blasting is used, use a commercial abrasive blasting medium capable of producing the specified surface cleanliness. Use potable water when water is required. 3. EQUIPMENT Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. Use moisture and oil traps in air compression equipment to remove all contaminants from the blasting air and prevent the deposition of moisture, oil, or other contaminants on the roadway surface. 4. CONSTRUCTION Prepare enough pavement surface for the pavement markings or RPMs shown on the plans. Remove all contamination and loose material. Avoid damaging the pavement surface. Remove loose and flaking material when existing pavement markings are present. Approved pavement surface preparation methods are sweeping, air blasting, flail milling, and blasting methods in accordance with Section 677.4.3., “Blasting Method,” unless otherwise shown on the plans. Air blast concrete pavement surfaces, in addition to the above, after the removal of contamination or existing material and just before placing the stripe. Perform air blasting using a compressor capable of generating compressed air at a minimum of 150 cu. ft. per minute and 100 psi using 5/16-in. or larger hosing. Contaminants up to 0.5 sq. in. may remain if they are not removed by the following test, performed just before application of markings.  Step 1. Air blast the surface to be tested, to simulate blasting during application of markings.  Step 2. Firmly press a 10-in. long, 2-in. wide strip of monofilament tape onto the surface, leaving approximately 2 in. free.  Step 3. Grasp the free end and remove the tape with a sharp pull. 5. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot for each width specified; by each word, shape, or symbol; or by any other unit except lump sum. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 2024 Specifications 678 923 6. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings” of the type and width as applicable. This price is full compensation for the cleaning method used, materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 1 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 SECTION 31 25 14 2 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 1.1 SUMMARY 5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Installation and maintenance of temporary control measures necessary to prevent 7 and control soil erosion, sedimentation, and water pollution. 8 2. Preparation and implementation of Contractor produced Erosion Control Plan. 9 B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification: 10 1. None. 11 C. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to: 12 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the 13 Contract. 14 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 15 3. Section 32 05 26 Aggregates for Exterior Improvements. 16 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 17 A. Measurement and Payment 18 1. Silt Fence 19 a. Measurement 20 1) Measured per linear foot of Silt Fence installed. 21 b. Payment 22 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 23 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 24 price bid per linear foot for Silt Fence installed. 25 c. The price bid shall include: 26 1) Furnishing and installing Silt Fence as specified by the Drawings 27 2) Posts 28 3) Filter fabric 29 4) Net reinforcement 30 5) Fasteners 31 6) Stone overflows 32 7) Safety caps 33 8) Cleaning 34 9) Disposal of silt 35 10) Repair of damaged Silt Fence 36 2. Check Dam 37 a. Measurement 38 1) Measured per linear foot of Check Dam installed. 39 b. Payment 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 2 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 2 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 3 price bid per linear foot for Check Dam installed. 4 c. The price bid shall include: 5 1) Furnishing and installing Check Dam as specified by the Drawings 6 2) Aggregate, wire reinforcement, and filter fabric 7 3) Excavation 8 4) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 9 5) Cleaning 10 6) Disposal of silt 11 7) Repair of damaged Check Dam 12 3. Organic Filter Tube 13 a. Measurement 14 1) Measured per linear foot of Organic Filter Tube installed. 15 b. Payment 16 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 17 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 18 price bid per linear foot for Organic Filter Tube installed. 19 c. The price bid shall include: 20 1) Furnishing and installing Organic Filter Tube as specified by the Drawings 21 2) Containment mesh 22 3) Core material 23 4) Posts 24 5) Rock bags 25 6) Cleaning 26 7) Disposal of silt 27 8) Repair of damaged Organic Filter Tube 28 4. Inlet Protection 29 a. Measurement 30 1) Measured per each of Inlet Protection installed. 31 b. Payment 32 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 33 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 34 price bid per each for Inlet Protection installed. 35 c. The price bid shall include: 36 1) Furnishing and installing Inlet Protection as specified by the Drawings 37 2) All items pertaining to hog wire for erosion control as needed 38 3) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 39 4) Cleaning 40 5) Disposal of silt 41 6) Repair of damaged Inlet Protection items 42 5. Erosion Control Blanket 43 a. Measurement 44 1) Measured per square yard of Erosion Control Blanket installed. 45 b. Payment 46 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 47 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 48 price bid per square yard for Erosion Control Blanket installed. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 3 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 c. The price bid shall include: 2 1) Furnishing and installing Erosion Control Blanket as specified by the 3 Drawings 4 2) Blanket and staples 5 3) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 6 4) Cleaning 7 5) Disposal of silt 8 6) Repair of damaged Erosion Control Blanket 9 6. Stabilized Construction Exit 10 a. Measurement 11 1) This item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid. 12 b. Payment 13 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 14 item are subsidiary to the various items bid and no other compensation will 15 be allowed. 16 7. Mulching 17 a. Measurement 18 1) Measured square yard of Mulching installed. 19 b. Payment 20 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 21 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 22 price bid per square yard for Mulching installed. 23 c. The price bid shall include: 24 1) Furnishing and installing Mulching as specified by the Drawings 25 2) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 26 8. Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap 27 a. Measurement 28 1) Measured per each Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap installed. 29 b. Payment 30 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 31 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 32 price bid per each for Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap installed. 33 c. The price bid shall include: 34 1) Furnishing and installing Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap as specified by the 35 Drawings 36 2) Filter stone 37 3) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 38 4) Cleaning 39 5) Disposal of silt 40 6) Repair of damaged Pipe Inlet Sediment Traps 41 9. Stone Outlet Sediment Trap 42 a. Measurement 43 1) Measured per each Stone Outlet Sediment Trap installed. 44 b. Payment 45 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 46 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 47 price bid per each for Stone Outlet Sediment Trap installed. 48 c. The price bid shall include: 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 4 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1) Furnishing and installing Stone Outlet Sediment Trap as specified by the 2 Drawings 3 2) Filter stone 4 3) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 5 4) Cleaning 6 5) Disposal of silt 7 6) Repair of damaged Stone Outlet Sediment Traps 8 10. Turf Reinforcement Mat 9 a. Measurement 10 1) Measured square yard of Turf Reinforcement Mat installed. 11 b. Payment 12 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 13 and measured as provided under Measurement will be paid for at the unit 14 price bid per square yard for Turf Reinforcement Mat installed. 15 c. The price bid shall include: 16 1) Furnishing and installing Turf Reinforcement Mat as specified by the 17 Drawings 18 2) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 19 3) Cleaning 20 4) Disposal of silt 21 5) Repair of damaged Pipe Inlet Sediment Traps items 22 11. Dewatering Controls 23 a. Measurement 24 1) This item is considered subsidiary to the various items bid. 25 b. Payment 26 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this 27 item are subsidiary to the various items bid and no other compensation will 28 be allowed. 29 12. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Device Installation 30 a. Measurement 31 1) Measurement for this item shall be by lump sum. 32 b. Payment 33 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 34 shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for all Stormwater Pollution 35 Prevention Device Installation. 36 c. The price bid shall include: 37 1) Furnishing and installing all items under Stormwater Pollution Prevention 38 Device Installation as specified by the Drawings 39 2) Excavation 40 3) Loading, unloading, hauling, and storing 41 4) Cleaning 42 5) Disposal of silt 43 6) Repair of damaged Storm Water Pollution Prevention Devices 44 13. Remove Stormwater Pollution Prevention Devices 45 a. Measurement 46 1) Measurement for this item shall be by lump sum. 47 b. Payment 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 5 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item 2 shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for all Remove Stormwater 3 Pollution Prevention Devices. 4 c. The price bid shall include: 5 1) Removing all items previously installed as part of the Stormwater Pollution 6 Prevention Plan as specified by the Drawings 7 2) Loading, unloading, and hauling 8 3) Cleaning 9 4) Disposal of silt 10 1.3 REFERENCES 11 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 12 1. Environmentally Sensitive Area: ESA 13 B. Reference Standards 14 1. Reference standards cited in this Section refer to the current reference standard 15 published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Section 16 unless a date is specifically cited. 17 2. City of Denton, Stormwater Design Criteria Manual 18 3. North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) Integrated Stormwater 19 Management (iSWM) Technical Manual. 20 4. Texas Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Construction and 21 Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges (TxDOT): 22 a. Item 169, Soil Retention Blankets. 23 5. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT), Departmental Material 24 Specifications (DMS): 25 a. DMS-6200, Filter Fabric. 26 b. DMS-6230, Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric. 27 c. DMS-6370, Erosion Control Blankets. 28 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 29 A. Sequencing 30 1. Ensure erosion control measures are fully installed prior to the commencement of 31 any earth disturbing activities. 32 2. If required, ensure ESA protection measures are fully installed prior to the 33 commencement of any earth disturbing activities. 34 3. Contact Watershed Protection division for initial inspection of installed erosion 35 control or ESA protection measures prior to the commencement of any earth 36 disturbing activities. Watershed@cityofdenton.com 37 4. On phased projects, final stabilization shall be completed and Erosion and Sediment 38 Control devices removed from each phase as construction is completed. 39 1.5 SUBMITTALS 40 A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 41 B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 42 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 6 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) submittals in accordance with Section 2 01 57 13 where land disturbance exceeds 1 acre. 3 B. Erosion Control Plan submittal when Contractor is responsible for creating site specific 4 erosion control plan. 5 1. Plan content and requirements as specified in the Drawings 6 2. Plan to adhere to the general standards of the City of Dentons Development Code 7 Section 7.3.5 8 C.Product Data 9 1. Provide product data from each manufacturer supplying Erosion and Sediment 10 Control devices and accessories. 11 2. Product data sheets for all products to include: 12 a. Manufacturer name 13 b. Date 14 c. Material description 15 d. Point of delivery 16 e. Data and test results as specified in this Section 17 f. Manufacturer Recommended Storing Data, if applicable 18 g. Application Recommendations, if applicable 19 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 20 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 21 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 22 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 23 A. Storage and Handling Requirements 24 1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 25 66 00. 26 2. Store all storm water pollution prevention materials in accordance with 27 manufacturers recommendations. 28 1.11 SITE CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 29 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 31 2.1 CITY-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 32 2.2 MATERIALS 33 A. Silt Fence 34 1. Fabric 35 a. Provide fabric in accordance with the following criteria: 36 Property Test Method Specification Limit Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 90-lbs 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 7 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 Puncture Rating ASTM D4833 60-lbs Mullen Burst Rating ASTM D3796 280-psi Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 Sieve No. 30 to No. 100 Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 70 percent min 1 2 2. Posts 3 a. Provide steel T-section or L-section posts, 1.3 pounds per linear foot, and 4 feet 4 in length minimum. 5 b. Provide plastic caps on all steel posts in areas exposed to pedestrian traffic. 6 c. Wood posts may be approved by City if project duration is expected to be less 7 than 90 days. 8 3. Net Reinforcement 9 a. Provide net reinforcement of at least 12 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh, 10 with a maximum opening size of 2x2 inches. 11 4. Stone Overflows 12 a. Provide 1 1/2 inch washed stone aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 13 26. 14 B. Check Dam 15 1. Aggregate 16 a. Provide 3 to 6 inch aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 26 for check 17 dam heights of 24 inches or less. 18 b. Provide 4 to 8 inch aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 26 for check 19 dam greater than 24 inches in height. 20 2. Wire 21 a. If required, provide mesh consisting of minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire. 22 3. Fabric 23 a. For check dams greater than 18 inches in height, provide filter fabric in 24 accordance with the following criteria: 25 Property Test Method Specification Limit Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 250-lbs Puncture Rating ASTM D4833 135-lbs Mullen Burst Rating ASTM D3796 420-psi Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 Sieve No. 20 max Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 20 percent min 26 27 C. Organic Filter Tube 28 1. Containment Mesh 29 a. Provide biodegradable, photodegradable, or recyclable containment mesh with 30 a minimum rated life of one year under normal site conditions, such as burlap, 31 twine, UV photodegradable plastic, or polyester. 32 1) Obtain approval from the City for use of any other material. 33 b. Provide recyclable containment mesh for temporary organic filter tube 34 installation. 35 c. Provide biodegradable or photodegradable containment mesh when organic 36 filter tube will remain in place as part of vegetative system. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 8 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. Core Material 2 a. Provide biodegradable or recyclable core material such as compost, mulch, or 3 coir. 4 1) Obtain approval from the City for use of any other material. 5 3. Posts 6 a. Provide steel T-section or L-section posts, 1.3 pounds per linear foot or 2 7 inches by 2 inches wooden posts. 8 b. Provide posts at least 6 inches longer than the outside diameter of the Organic 9 Filter Tube. 10 D. Inlet Protection 11 1. Provide Inlet Protection comprised of Organic Filter Tubes or rock bags for erosion 12 control in accordance with this Section. 13 E. Erosion Control Blanket 14 1. Blanket 15 a. In accordance with DMS 6370. 16 2. Staples 17 a. In accordance with the Erosion Control Blanket manufacturer 18 recommendations. 19 F. Stabilized Construction Exit 20 1. Aggregate 21 a. Provide 3 to 6 inch aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 26. 22 G. Mulching 23 1. Provide type of organic mulching as specified in the Drawings. 24 H. Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap 25 1. Riprap 26 a. Provide 6 to 12 inch Dry Stone Riprap in accordance with Section 31 37 00. 27 2. Filter Stone 28 a. Provide 1 1/2 inch washed stone aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 29 26. 30 3. Wire 31 a. Provide mesh consisting of minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire with 1/2 inch 32 by 1/2 inch openings. 33 4. Fabric 34 a. Provide Filter Fabric meeting the following criteria: 35 Property Test Method Specification Limit Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 250-lbs Puncture Rating ASTM D4833 135-lbs Mullen Burst Rating ASTM D3796 420-psi Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 Sieve No. 20 max Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 20 percent min 36 37 5. Concrete Block 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 9 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 a. Provide standard 8-inch x 8-inch x 16-inch concrete masonry units in 2 accordance with ASTM C139. 3 I. Stone Outlet Sediment Trap 4 1. Riprap 5 a. Provide 6 to 12 inch Dry Stone Riprap in accordance with Section 31 37 00. 6 2. Filter Stone 7 a. Provide 1 1/2 inch washed stone aggregate in accordance with Section 32 05 8 26. 9 3. Fabric 10 a. Provide Filter Fabric in accordance with the following criteria: 11 Property Test Method Specification Limit Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 250-lbs Puncture Rating ASTM D4833 135-lbs Mullen Burst Rating ASTM D3796 420-psi Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 Sieve No. 20 max Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 20 percent min 12 13 J. Turf Reinforcement Mat 14 1. Provide Turf Reinforcement Mats in accordance with TxDOT Item 169 Approved 15 Products List, Erosion Control Approved Products and in accordance with the 16 following criteria: 17 Property Test Method Specification Limit Minimum Thickness ASTM D6525 0.25 in Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 80 percent Tensile Strength ASTM D6818 175 lbs/ft 18 19 K. Dewatering Controls 20 1. Sediment Filter Bag 21 a. Provide sediment filter bags made of non-woven, needle-punched, geotextile 22 that meets the following criteria: 23 Property Test Method Specification Limit Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 250-lbs Puncture Rating ASTM D4833 135-lbs Mullen Burst Rating ASTM D3796 420-psi Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D4355 20 percent min Water Flow Rate ASTM D4491 85 to 110 gpm/ft2 24 25 2. Temporary Sediment Tank 26 a. Provide compartmented container with a storage volume equal to 1 cubic foot 27 for each gallon per minute of pump discharge capacity. 28 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 10 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 4 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 5 3.3 PREPARATION 6 A. General 7 1. Remove trees, brush, stumps, and other objectionable material that will interfere 8 with the construction of the erosion control measure. 9 B. Erosion Control Blanket 10 1. Remove rocks, dirt clods, stumps, and other objectionable material that will prevent 11 the mat from lying in direct contact with the soil. 12 C. Mulching 13 1. Fertilize and treat soil prior to mulching installation when used with final 14 vegetation. 15 a. Fertilization and soil treatment are not required when using mulching with 16 hydroseeding or when seed is spread during winter months. 17 D. Turf Reinforcement Mat 18 1. Remove rocks, dirt clods, stumps, and other objectionable material that will prevent 19 the mat from lying in direct contact with the soil. 20 3.4 INSTALLATION 21 A. Silt Fence 22 1. Provide silt fence near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept 23 sediment from sheet flow. 24 2. Install posts 18 inches deep, maximum 6 feet on center. 25 3. Dig 6-inch x 6-inch trench on uphill side of fence and embed fabric and wire mesh. 26 Backfill the trench. 27 4. Attach net reinforcement to posts with clips for steel posts or staples for wood posts 28 in at least four equally spaced locations per post. 29 5. Fasten fabric to top of net reinforcement at a maximum spacing of 15 inches. 30 6. Locate splices in fabric at a post and provide a 3-foot overlap ensuring no leakage 31 or bypass. 32 7. Install stone overflow structures at low points or spaced at approximately 300 feet if 33 there is no apparent low point. 34 8. Turn last 10 feet of Silt Fence slightly uphill to prevent bypass. 35 9. Repair or replace any posts, net reinforcement, or fabric that are bent, torn, or 36 otherwise unable to function as intended in accordance with this Section. 37 B. Check Dam 38 1. Place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes specified in the Drawings. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 11 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 2. Place Check Dams perpendicular to the direction of flow. 2 C. Organic Filter Tube 3 1. Install Organic Filter Tubes near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to 4 intercept sediment from sheet flow. 5 2. When placed on soil, excavate a 1-inch to 2-inch deep bedding trench along the 6 length of the Organic Filter Tubes. 7 3. Secure Organic Filter Tubes using posts to prevent displacement as a result of 8 normal rain events, damage to the logs, and flow from penetrating under the logs. 9 a. Rock bags may be used in place of posts on paved surfaces. 10 4. Overlap ends of Organic Filter Tubes by at least 18 inches and secure ends together 11 preventing gaps from forming. 12 5. Turn last 10 feet of Organic Filter Tubes slightly uphill to prevent bypass. 13 D. Inlet Protection 14 1. Install prefabricated inlet protection systems in accordance with manufacturers 15 instructions. 16 2. Install filter fabric as specified in the Drawings and in accordance with this Section. 17 3. Install inlet protection systems to provide 2-inch overflow capability to allow storm 18 water overflow during extreme storm events or when filter media on protection 19 device clogs. 20 E. Erosion Control Blanket 21 1. Use an Erosion Control Blanket anywhere seeding is to be used and the slope is 22 steeper than a 6:1 slope. 23 2. Use Turf Reinforcement Mat when stabilizing slopes of 2:1 or steeper. 24 3. Provide blanket on sod locations only when specified in the Drawings. 25 4. Dig 6 inch trench along the entire perimeter of the installation area. 26 5. Lay Erosion Control Blanket into trench and backfill with compacted soil. 27 6. Fasten Erosion Control Blanket in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 28 7. Ensure staples are installed parallel to the direction of flow. 29 8. Overlap ends of Erosion Control Blanket by a minimum of 3 feet, and longitudinal 30 edges by 6 inches. 31 9. Staple Erosion Control Blanket at all critical channel points and all overlaps. 32 10. ECBs shall be installed vertically down slope (across contours) on cut/fill slopes 33 and embankments and along contours (parallel to flow) in swales and drainage 34 ditches. 35 11. Unless the ECB is seeded to establish vegetation, perimeter applications shall be 36 limited to thirty feet wide drainage areas (I.e. linear construction projects) for an 8 37 feet width of ECB. 38 F. Stabilized Construction Exit 39 1. Install stabilized construction exit as specified in the Drawings. 40 2. Install stabilized construction exits at any point where traffic will be leaving a 41 construction site to or from a street, alley, sidewalk, or parking area. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 12 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 3. Slope stabilized construction exit away from offsite paved surfaces or incorporate a 2 drainage swale to prevent runoff from leaving the construction site. 3 4. Do not place stabilized construction exits at the lowest point on the construction site 4 or on top of utility lines. 5 5. Minimum width of 15 feet for one-way and 20 feet for two-way. 6 G. Mulching 7 1. Spread organic mulch by hand or mechanical means providing complete, uniform 8 coverage of the specified area. 9 2. Install mulching to a thickness between 1 to 2 inches. 10 3. Anchor mulching by application of fiber mulch binder, synthetic mulch binder, 11 using a tractor-drawn crimper to punch into the soil, or by placing netting above the 12 mulch and stapled into the ground when placed on slopes of 3:1 or steeper. 13 4. Do not use mulching on slopes of 1.5:1 or steeper. 14 H. Pipe Inlet Sediment Trap 15 1. Install pipe inlet sediment trap as specified in the Drawings. 16 2. Provide a stormwater and sediment storage area upslope of the pipe inlet sediment 17 trap to a minimum volume equal to the runoff calculated from the temporary 18 control design storm. 19 3. Provide side slopes surrounding the storage area at 2:1 or flatter. 20 4. Install the pipe inlet sediment trap to a maximum height of half the inlet pipe 21 diameter. 22 5. Install pipe inlet sediment trap to provide 2-inch overflow capability to allow storm 23 water overflow during extreme storm events or when filter media on protection 24 device clogs. 25 I. Stone Outlet Sediment Trap 26 1. Install stone outlet sediment trap as specified in the Drawings. 27 2. Provide a stormwater and sediment storage area upslope of the pipe inlet sediment 28 trap to a minimum volume equal to the runoff calculated from the temporary 29 control design storm. 30 3. Install the pipe inlet sediment trap to a maximum height of half the inlet pipe 31 diameter. 32 4. Grade side slopes surrounding the storage area at 2:1 or flatter. 33 5. Install pipe inlet sediment trap to provide 2-inch overflow capability to allow storm 34 water overflow during extreme storm events or when filter media on protection 35 device clogs. 36 J. Turf Reinforcement Mat 37 1. Install turf reinforcement mats as specified in the Drawings and manufacturers 38 recommendations. 39 2. Install turf reinforcement mats immediately after completing grading of the slope or 40 channel, and at most within 14 days after completing the grading. 41 3. Install turf reinforcement mats vertically down slope on steep cut/fill slopes, 42 embankments, and steep channel slopes above the water surface level. 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 13 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 4. Install turf reinforcement mats horizontally (parallel to flow) for channel slopes 2 below the water surface level. 3 5. Dig 6 inch trench along the entire perimeter of the installation area. 4 6. Lay turf reinforcement mat into trench and backfill with compacted soil. 5 7. Fasten turf reinforcement mat in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 6 8. Ensure staples are installed parallel to the direction of flow. 7 9. Overlap ends of turf reinforcement mat by a minimum of 3 feet, and longitudinal 8 edges by 6 inches. 9 10. Staple turf reinforcement mat at all critical channel points and all overlaps. 10 3.5 REPAIR 11 1. Repair any controls determined to no longer be functioning as intended in 12 accordance with this Section. 13 2. Repair devices as soon as exposed ground has dried sufficiently to prevent further 14 damage from equipment operations needed for repairs. 15 3.6 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 16 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 17 A. Field Inspections 18 1. Inspect all storm water pollution prevention controls at least once every 7 calendar 19 days. 20 2. Inspect dewatering pumps and sediment controls hourly while pumps are in 21 operation. 22 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 23 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 24 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 25 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 26 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 27 3.13 MAINTENANCE 28 A. General 29 1. If a storm water pollution prevention control ceases to function as intended, repair 30 and replace the device or any portions necessary. Repeated failure indicates a 31 device is insufficient and additional or different Erosion and Sediment Control 32 devices must be selected. 33 2. Remove sediment, debris, and litter from all devices as necessary to maintain 34 intended operation. 35 3. Continue maintenance of all erosion and sediment control devices until vegetative 36 cover reaches 70 percent density, as determined by the City. 37 B. Check Dam 31 25 14 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 14 of 14 CITY OF DENTON IFB 8916 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 250009-1 Revised June 14, 2024 Effective July 1, 2024 1 1. Remove silt when it reaches a depth equal to one-third the height of the dam or one 2 foot, whichever is less. 3 C. Dewatering Controls 4 1. Repair areas eroded due to dewatering pumping and install erosion control devices 5 to prevent further erosion. 6 2. Clean sediment tanks when they become half full of sediment. 7 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 8 9 10 END OF SECTION 11 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 6/14/24 Added ESA protection measures to Section 1.4; Removed Watershed Protection individual contact information from Section 1.4 6/14/24 Removed organic filter tubes and rock bags from inlet protection under 3.4.D 6/14/24 Removed presence of Watershed Protection from inspection requirement under 3.7 12 Appendix GC-5.01 Availability of Lands As of 2/16/26, there are two outstanding Right-of-Entry Agreements pending with property owners to allow the work designated in the Project Manual and Construction Plans to be performed. The first Right-of-Entry is with Robson Denton Dev LP for Parcels 537526 and 675524 and covers the property necessary to conduct the work between Sta 92+85 and 109+25. The second Right-of-Entry is with DF Denton Fund 28 LTD P/S for Parcels 75362 and 114264 and covers the property necessary to conduct the work between Sta 13+85 and 47+00.